2021 / Owner’s Manual
��������
N09200102518
Thank you for buying a MITSUBISHI OUTLANDER SPORT/RVR.
We are confident you will enjoy your vehicle. It has been engineered
for optimum performance, durability and comfort. By thoroughly
reading this Owner’s Manual, you will gain an understanding of the
many features that are included in the OUTLANDER SPORT/RVR.
The Owner’s Manual contains descriptions and illustrations that will
assist in the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
Your Authorized Mitsubishi Motors Dealer will be happy to assist you
with any further questions you may have regarding the operation of
your vehicle.
Please note that this manual applies to all OUTLANDER SPORT/RVR
models and explains all features including options. Some features
explained in this manual may not be installed on your vehicle.
Please leave this Owner’s Manual in the vehicle at the time of resale.
The next owner will appreciate having access to the information con-
tained here.
This manual includes instructions for standard and optional equipment
available at the time of printing. Mitsubishi Motors Corporation
reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and to
make additions or improvements in its product without assuming any
obligation to install these on previously manufactured products.
Introduction
Throughout this manual the words WARNING and CAUTION
appear. These are reminders to be especially careful. Failure to fol-
low the instructions could result in personal injury or damage to your
vehicle.
Indicates a strong possibility of severe personal injury or death if
instructions are not followed.
Points out hazards or unsafe practices that could cause minor
personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
You will see another important symbol:
Gives helpful information.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle cor-
rectly may result in loss of control or an accident. Be sure to read
“on-pavement” and “off-road” driving guidelines in the “Driving
safety” and “Features and controls” sections.
©2020 Mitsubishi Motors Corporation Printed in Japan
N09349100057
2021 / Owner’s Manual
��������
N09200102518
Thank you for buying a MITSUBISHI OUTLANDER SPORT/RVR.
We are confident you will enjoy your vehicle. It has been engineered
for optimum performance, durability and comfort. By thoroughly
reading this Owner’s Manual, you will gain an understanding of the
many features that are included in the OUTLANDER SPORT/RVR.
The Owner’s Manual contains descriptions and illustrations that will
assist in the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
Your Authorized Mitsubishi Motors Dealer will be happy to assist you
with any further questions you may have regarding the operation of
your vehicle.
Please note that this manual applies to all OUTLANDER SPORT/RVR
models and explains all features including options. Some features
explained in this manual may not be installed on your vehicle.
Please leave this Owner’s Manual in the vehicle at the time of resale.
The next owner will appreciate having access to the information con-
tained here.
This manual includes instructions for standard and optional equipment
available at the time of printing. Mitsubishi Motors Corporation
reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and to
make additions or improvements in its product without assuming any
obligation to install these on previously manufactured products.
Introduction
Throughout this manual the words WARNING and CAUTION
appear. These are reminders to be especially careful. Failure to fol-
low the instructions could result in personal injury or damage to your
vehicle.
Indicates a strong possibility of severe personal injury or death if
instructions are not followed.
Points out hazards or unsafe practices that could cause minor
personal injury or damage to your vehicle.
You will see another important symbol:
Gives helpful information.
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle cor-
rectly may result in loss of control or an accident. Be sure to read
“on-pavement” and “off-road” driving guidelines in the “Driving
safety” and “Features and controls” sections.
©2020 Mitsubishi Motors Corporation Printed in Japan
N09349100057
Table of contents
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Overview
Quick index
General information
Seat and restraint systems
Features and controls
Driving safety
Comfort controls
For emergencies
Vehicle care and maintenance
Customer assistance/
Reporting Safety Defects
Specifications
Alphabetical index
Instruments and controls
1-1
1
Overview
N00100202922
Instruments and controls
Headlight leveling switch (if so equipped) P.5-155
Combination headlights and dimmer switch P.5-146
Turn signal lever P.5-156
Front fog light switch (if so equipped) P.5-157
Automatic High Beam (AHB) switch (if so equipped) P.5-150
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) switch
(if so equipped) P.5-96
Tilt & Telescopic steering lever P.5-45
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag (for driver’s seat) P.4-29, 4-35
Horn switch P.5-164
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - front knee
airbag (for driver’s seat) P.4-35
Ignition switch (if so equipped)
P.5-50
Cruise control switches P.5-74
Engine switch (if so equipped)
P.5-18
Wiper and washer switch P.5-157
Rear window wiper and washer switch
P.5-161
Sportronic steering wheel paddle shifter
(if so equipped) P.5-58
Instrument cluster P.5-105
Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM)
ON/OFF switch (if so equipped) P.5-82
Steering wheel audio remote control
switches
Refer to the separate owner’s manual.
Hands free switch
Refer to the separate owner’s manual.
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) ON/OFF
switch (if so equipped) P.5-87
Heated steering wheel switch
(if so equipped) P.5-163
Instruments and controls
Overview 1-2
1
Air conditioning P.7-4, 7-9
Center vents P.7-2
Key slot (if so equipped) P.5-24
Side vents P.7-2
Glove compartment P.5-177
Hazard warning flasher switch P.5-156
Rear window defogger switch P.5-162
Drive mode-selector (if so equipped) P.5-60
Parking brake lever P.5-44
Cup holder P.5-178
Selector lever P.5-53
Fuel tank filler door release lever
P.3-3
Fuses P.9-25
Engine hood release lever P.9-3
Heated seat switch (if so equipped) P.4-6
12V power outlet P.5-166
Multi-information meter
switch P.5-108
Smartphone-link Display Audio (SDA) (if so equipped)
DISPLAY AUDIO (if so equipped)
Refer to the separate owner’s manual.
USB input terminal (if so equipped) P.5-164
Active stability control (ASC)
OFF switch P.5-72
Interior
1-3 Overview
1
N00100302617
Interior
Dome light (rear) (if so equipped) P.5-174
Sun visors P.5-165
Vanity mirror P.5-165
Ticket holder P.5-165
Dome light (front)/Reading lights
P.5-173
Sunshade switch (if so equipped)
P.5-43
Microphone (if so equipped)
Refer to the separate owner’s manual.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
- airbag (for front passenger’s seat)
P.4-29, 4-35
Bottle holder P.5-179
Arm rest
Floor console box P.5-178
12V power outlet P.5-166
Rear seat P.4-7
Arm rest P.4-7
Cup holder P.5-178
Cargo area cover (if so equipped) P.5-179
Assist grips P.5-180
Coat hook P.5-180
Interior
Overview 1-4
1
Electric remote-controlled outside mirror switch P.5-48
Lock switch P.5-42
Power door lock switch
P.5-34
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - curtain airbags
P.4-39
Power window switch P.5-40
Sunshade illumination dimming control
switch (if so equipped) P.5-175
Seat belts P.4-11
Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor P.4-16
Inside rearview mirror P.5-45
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System (if so
equipped) P.5-167
Tether anchors for child restraint
system P.4-21
Front seat P.4-2
Heated seat (if so equipped) P.4-6
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - side airbag
(for front seats) P.4-39
Cargo room light P.5-174
Head restraints P.4-7
Luggage compartment
1-5 Overview
1
N00100501595
Luggage compartment
Spare tire P.8-6
Luggage hooks P.5-181
Luggage hooks P.5-181
Hook
Luggage hooks P.5-181
Jack P. 8-5
Tools P.8-5
Outside
Overview 1-6
1
N00100602926
Outside
Power window P.5-40
Windshield wipers P.5-157
Engine hood P.9-3
Fuel tank filler P.3-3
Outside rearview mirrors P.5-47
Side turn signal lights (if so equipped)
P.5-156, 9-30, 9-33
Front turn signal lights
P.5-156, 9-30, 9-32
Side turn signal lights (if so equipped)
P.5-156, 9-30, 9-32
Headlights, high beam
P.5-150, 9-30, 9-31
Front fog lights (if so equipped)
P.5-157, 9-30, 9-33
Headlights, low beam P.5-146, 9-30, 9-31
Front side-marker lights P.5-146, 9-30, 9-32
Sensor (if so equipped) [for Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM),
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) and Automatic High Beam (AHB)]
P.5-78, 5-96, 5-150
Rain sensor (if so equipped) P.5-157
Daytime running lights/Parking lights
P.5-146, 9-30, 9-32
Outside
1-7 Overview
1
Liftgate P.5-36
Antenna
High-mounted stop light
P.9-30, 9-35
F.A.S.T.-key (Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter)
(if so equipped) P.5-13
Keyless entry system P.5-7, 5-27
Locking and unlocking P.5-32
Rear spoiler
Rear window wiper
P.5-161
Rear-view camera
P.5-103
Tire pressure monitoring system P.5-99
Changing tires P.8-6
Size of tires and wheels P.9-13, 11-5
Tire inflation pressure P.9-17
Tire rotation P.9-19
Tire chains P.9-21
License plate lights
P.5-146, 9-30, 9-34
Back-up lights P.9-30, 9-34
Turn signal lights P.5-156, 9-30, 9-33
Tail and stop lights
P.5-146, 9-30, 9-33
Tail lights P.5-146, 9-30, 9-34
Stop lights
P.9-30, 9-33
Rear side-marker lights P.5-146, 9-30, 9-33
2-1
2
If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...
Quick index
N00200702175
If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...
NOTE
For information regarding warning displays in the multi-information display, refer to “Multi-information display” on page 5-107.
These warning lights will come on for a few seconds for a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to “ON” or the operation mode is put in ON.
Warning lights Do this Ref. Page
Charging system warning light
Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.
Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assis-
tance.
P. 5-145
or
Brake warning light
If this light comes on while driving, check to see that the parking brake is fully
released.
If this light stays on after releasing the parking brake, immediately stop and check
the brake fluid level.
If the brake fluid level is correct, there may be a system malfunction. Avoid hard
braking and high speed, and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice for assistance.
P. 5-144
or
Engine malfunction indicator
(“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or
“Check engine light”)
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, have the
engine system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
of your choice as soon as possible. If the vehicle is not drivable, contact emergency
roadside assistance at 1-888-648-7820 (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.) or 1-888-576-
4878 (for vehicles sold in Canada), an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, or local
towing company for assistance.
P. 5-144
If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...
2-2 Quick index
2
Anti-lock braking system warning
light
When this light comes on, the anti-lock braking system is not functioning and only
the ordinary braking system is functioning.
Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.
Test the system as described on page 5-69.
If the light does not go out after the test, or if it comes on again, we recommend that
you have the system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
facility of your choice as soon as possible.
P. 5-69
SRS warning light
Immediately have the airbag and the pre-tensioner seat belt system checked at an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
P. 4-34
Tire pressure monitoring system warn-
ing light
If the warning light comes on, you should stop and adjust the tires to the proper
inflation pressure as soon as possible.
(See “Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-17.)
Once adjustments have been made, the warning light will go off after a few minutes
of driving.
If the warning light blinks for approximately 1 minute and then remains continu-
ously illuminated, the system is not operating properly. If the system returns to nor-
mal, the warning light will go off. If the warning light does not go off, have the
vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
P. 5-99
Warning lights Do this Ref. Page
If this problem occurs...
Quick index 2-3
2
N00200902151
If this problem occurs...
Problem Do this Ref. Page
Cannot turn the key.
(except for vehicles equipped
with the F.A.S.T.-key)
Will not turn from “ACC” to “OFF”.
Check the position of the selector lever.
The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is set to the “P” (PARK) position.
P. 5-51
The engine does not start when
the engine switch is pressed.
(for vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key)
Make sure the F.A.S.T.-key is in the vehicle.
Make sure the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK) position, and then press the engine switch
while depressing the brake pedal.
P. 5-22
If this problem occurs...
2-4 Quick index
2
The engine does not start and the
operation mode cannot be
changed to OFF.
(for vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key)
1. Move the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position, and then change the operation mode
to OFF.
2. One of the other causes could be low battery voltage. If this occurs, the keyless entry sys-
tem and the F.A.S.T.-key operation will also not operate. Contact an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer.
P. 5-19
The F.A.S.T.-key does not oper-
ate.
(for vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key)
Use the emergency key to lock and unlock the door.
Insert the F.A.S.T.-key into the key slot inside the glove compartment, and then start the
engine or change the operation mode.
P. 5-25
Cannot shift the selector lever
from the “P” (PARK) position.
Shift the selector lever while pressing the brake pedal.
Check that the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON.
P. 5-53
The windows are fogged up.
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” or “ ” position.
2. Turn on the blower.
P. 7-8, 7-14
The engine does not start.
The lights do not come on.
The lights are dim.
The horn does not honk.
The horn sound is weak.
Have the battery checked. Recharge or replace as needed.
P. 8-2,
9-10
Problem Do this Ref. Page
If this problem occurs...
Quick index 2-5
2
Problem Do this Ref. Page
The engine coolant temperature
display “ ” in the multi-infor-
mation display is flashing.
Steam comes out of the engine
compartment.
The engine is overheated.
Carefully stop the vehicle in a safe place.
P. 8-4
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
sand, mud or snow
1. Slowly press down on the accelerator pedal to get your vehicle moving again. For an all-
wheel drive vehicle, set the drive mode-selector to the “4WD AUTO” or “4WD LOCK”
position and then slowly press down on the accelerator pedal to get your vehicle moving.
2. If there is nothing to stop your tires from slipping, rock your vehicle back and forth to free
it.
P. 8-13
WARNING
When trying to rock your vehicle out of a stuck position, make sure that there are no people nearby. The rocking motion may cause the vehicle to
suddenly lurch forward or backward, possibly injuring bystanders.
Avoid revving the engine or spinning the wheels. Prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle may result in overheating and transaxle failure.
If your vehicle is still stuck after several rocking attempts, call for help.
Problem Do this Ref. Page
The brakes are not functioning
properly after crossing a puddle
or stream.
Dry out the brakes by driving slowly while lightly pressing the brake pedal.
P. 5-64,
6-5
If this problem occurs...
2-6 Quick index
2
The continuously variable trans-
mission (CVT) makes no shift
change when accelerating. The
initial movement of the vehicle
is slow when the vehicle starts
moving.
There may be a problem in the CVT.
If the or warning display on the multi-information display will not turn off, or if they
come on frequently, immediately have the vehicle checked at your nearest Mitsubishi Motors
dealer.
P. 5-56
A tire is punctured.
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place where the surface is flat and level.
2. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire.
P. 8-6
Problem Do this Ref. Page
3
General information
Fuel selection ...................................................................................3-2
Filling the fuel tank ..........................................................................3-3
Modifications to and racing of your vehicle ....................................3-5
Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts ....................................................3-6
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements ...............................3-6
Event Data Recording ......................................................................3-7
Fuel selection
3-2 General information
3
N00301001919
Your vehicle is designed to use unleaded gas-
oline only. It is equipped with a fuel tank
filler pipe especially designed to accept only
a small diameter unleaded gasoline dispens-
ing nozzle.
In the United States, fuel suppliers are
required by law to add detergents to their gas-
oline to minimize fuel-injector fouling and
minimize intake-valve deposits. Detergent
gasoline helps keep your engine in tune and
your emission-control system working prop-
erly.
Your vehicle is designed to operate on
unleaded gasoline having a minimum octane
number of 87 [(MON+RON)/2] or 91 RON.
Gasoline sold at some service stations con-
tains oxygenates such as ethanol, although
the oxygenates may not be identified by those
names. Oxygenates are required in some
areas of the country. Such fuel can be used in
your vehicle.
A mixture of up to 10% ethanol (grain alco-
hol) and 90% unleaded gasoline may be used
in your vehicle, provided the octane number
is at least as high as that recommended for
unleaded gasoline.
Do not operate your vehicle on gasoline con-
taining methanol (wood alcohol). Using this
type of alcohol could adversely affect the
vehicle’s performance and damage critical
parts of the vehicle’s fuel system.
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner burning fuel referred to as “Reformu-
lated Gasoline”.
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates
and is specially blended to reduce vehicle
emissions and improve air quality.
Mitsubishi Motors Corporation strongly sup-
ports the use of reformulated gasoline. Prop-
erly blended reformulated gasoline has no
adverse effect on vehicle performance or the
durability of engine and fuel system.
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic
additive that is blended into some gasolines
to increase the octane number. Mitsubishi
Motors Corporation recommends using gaso-
lines without MMT.
Fuel selection
WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explo-
sive. You could be burned, seriously
injured or killed when handling it. When-
ever you refuel your vehicle, stop the
engine and keep flames, sparks, and
smoking materials away from the vehicle.
Always handle fuel in well-ventilated out-
door areas.
CAUTION
Using leaded gasoline in your vehicle will
damage the engine, catalytic converter, and
the oxygen sensors. Also, using leaded gaso-
line is illegal, and will void your warranty
coverage of the engine, catalytic converter,
and oxygen sensors.
Gasoline detergent additives
Octane requirement
Oxygenated gasoline
Ethanol (Gasohol)
Methanol
Reformulated gasoline
MMT (methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl)
Filling the fuel tank
General information 3-3
3
Use of gasolines blended with MMT may
adversely affect performance, and cause the
malfunction indicator on your instrument
panel to come on. If this happens, contact an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice for assistance.
Your vehicle may have been designed to sat-
isfy California’s low-emission regulations
based on clean-burning low-sulfur gasoline.
Gasoline sold in parts of the country other
than California is allowed to have a higher
sulfur content. Using such gasoline could
adversely affect the vehicle’s catalytic con-
verter and cause the engine malfunction indi-
cator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or
“Check engine light”) to come on. Illumina-
tion of this indicator while you are using
high-sulfur gasoline does not necessarily
mean the vehicle’s emission-control system is
malfunctioning. Your authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer may suggest you try using a
different, lower-sulfur brand of unleaded gas-
oline to determine whether the problem is
fuel-related.
N00301101978
Sulfur in gasoline
NOTE
Poor-quality gasoline can cause problems
such as poor starting, stalling during idling,
abnormal engine noise, and poor accelera-
tion. If you experience any of these prob-
lems, try using a different brand of gasoline.
If the engine malfunction indicator (“SER-
VICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine
light”) flashes, have the vehicle inspected as
soon as possible by the nearest authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
of your choice.
Repeatedly driving short distances at low
speeds can cause deposits to form in the fuel
system and engine, resulting in poor starting
and poor acceleration. If these problems
occur, you are advised to add a detergent
additive to the gasoline when you refuel the
vehicle. The additive will remove the depos-
its, thereby returning the engine to a normal
condition. Be sure to use a Mitsubishi
Motors Genuine cleaning additive. Using an
unsuitable additive could make the engine
malfunction. For details, please contact the
nearest authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
Filling the fuel tank
WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explo-
sive. You could be burned, seriously
injured or killed when handling it. When
refueling your vehicle, always turn the
engine off and keep away from flames,
sparks, and smoking materials. Always
handle fuel in well-ventilated outdoor
areas.
Before removing the fuel tank filler cap,
be sure to get rid of your body’s static
electricity by touching a metal part of the
car or fuel pump. Any static electricity on
your body could create a spark that
ignites fuel vapor.
Perform the whole refueling process
(opening the fuel tank filler door, remov-
ing the fuel cap, etc.) by yourself; do not
let any other person near the fuel tank
filler. If you allowed a person to help you
and that person was carrying static elec-
tricity, fuel vapor could be ignited.
Do not move away from the fuel tank filler
until refueling is finished. If you moved
away and did something else (for example,
sitting on a seat) part-way through the
refueling process, you could pick up a
fresh charge of static electricity.
Be careful not to inhale fuel vapor. Fuel
contains toxic substances.
Filling the fuel tank
3-4 General information
3
All-wheel drive vehicles: 15.8 gal (60 L)
Front-wheel drive vehicles: 16.6 gal (63 L)
1. Before filling with fuel, stop the engine.
2. The fuel tank filler is located on the rear
driver side of your vehicle.
The fuel tank filler door can be opened
from inside the vehicle with the fuel tank
filler door release lever located at the left
side of the driver’s seat.
3. Open the fuel tank filler pipe by slowly
turning the fuel tank filler cap counter-
clockwise.
4. While filling with fuel, hang the fuel cap
cord on the hook located on the inside of
the fuel tank filler door.
5. To fill with fuel correctly depends mainly
on correct handling of the fuel filler noz-
zle. Do not tilt the nozzle. Insert the noz-
zle in the fuel tank filler port as far as it
goes.
6. When the nozzle stops automatically, do
not try to add more fuel.
Keep the doors and windows closed while
refueling the vehicle. If they were open,
fuel vapor could get into the cabin.
Fuel tank capacity
Refueling
WARNING
1- Remove
2- Close
WARNING
Since the fuel system may be under pres-
sure, remove the fuel tank filler cap
slowly. This relieves any pressure or vac-
uum that might have built up in the fuel
tank. If the cap is venting vapor or if you
hear a hissing sound, wait until the sound
stops before removing the cap. Otherwise,
fuel may spray out, injuring you or others.
CAUTION
Your vehicle can only be operated using
unleaded gasoline. Serious engine and cata-
lytic converter damage will result if leaded
gasoline is filled into these vehicles, and
consequently, this must never be attempted.
CAUTION
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top-off” the fuel tank. Spilled fuel could
discolor, stain, or crack the vehicle’s paint-
work. If fuel spills on the paintwork, wipe it
off with a soft cloth.
Modifications to and racing of your vehicle
General information 3-5
3
7. To close, turn the fuel tank filler pipe cap
slowly clockwise until you hear clicking
sounds, then gently push the fuel tank
filler door closed.
N00301600149
This vehicle should not be modified with
non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts.
Mitsubishi Motors designs and manufactures
high quality vehicles with an emphasis on
safety and durability. Modifications using
non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts may
affect the performance, safety and/or durabil-
ity of your vehicle, and may violate applica-
ble state and/or federal regulations.
DAMAGE OR PERFORMANCE PROB-
LEMS RESULTING FROM MODIFICA-
TIONS TO OR RACING OF YOUR
VEHICLE ARE NOT COVERED
UNDER WARRANTY.
Examples of modifications to your vehicle
that can cause damage or performance prob-
lems include the following:
Failure to use Mitsubishi Motors genuine
parts
Failure to use required fuel and fluids
Failure to use proper size tires and wheels
Modification of the fuel, intake, exhaust,
emission, suspension, engine, drive train
or electrical wiring systems
Modification of any onboard com-
puter/control module, including repro-
gramming, or replacing/adding chips to
any onboard computer/control module
Review the Warranty and Maintenance Man-
ual for further details regarding warranty cov-
erage.
N00301701307
The installation of accessories, optional
parts, etc., should only be carried out
within the limits prescribed by law, and in
accordance with the guidelines and warn-
ings contained within the documents
accompanying this vehicle.
WARNING
Make sure the fuel tank filler cap is
securely closed. If the fuel cap were loose,
fuel could leak, resulting in a fire.
CAUTION
If you need to replace the fuel tank filler cap,
use only the cap specified for your model
vehicle.
NOTE
If the fuel tank filler cap is not tight while
driving, the engine malfunction indicator
(“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check
engine light”) may come on when the
onboard diagnostic (OBD) system performs
a self check.
Always tighten the fuel tank filler cap until
you hear at least 3 clicks.
The indicator will go off after driving several
times. If the indicator does not go off, con-
tact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice as
soon as possible.
Modifications to and racing
of your vehicle
Installation of accessories
CAUTION
Before any electrical or electronic accesso-
ries are installed, consult an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnosis
connector (data link connector) for checking
and servicing the electronic control system.
Mitsubishi Motors does not recommend con-
necting a device other than the Scan Tool for
inspections and service to this connector
because an unexpected problem could result.
In addition, malfunctions caused by connect-
ing a device other than the Scan Tool may
not be covered under warranty.
Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts
3-6 General information
3
Only Mitsubishi Motors approved acces-
sories should be fitted to your vehicle.
Improper installation of electrical parts
could cause fire. Refer to the “Modifica-
tion/alterations to the electrical or fuel
systems” section within this owner’s man-
ual.
Using a cellular phone or radio set inside
the vehicle without an external antenna
may cause electrical system interference,
which could lead to unsafe vehicle opera-
tion.
Tires and wheels which do not meet spec-
ifications must not be used.
Refer to the “Specifications” section for
information regarding wheel and tire
sizes.
Due to the large number of accessory and
replacement parts provided by different man-
ufacturers in the market, it is not always pos-
sible for an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer to check whether the attachment or
installation of non-Mitsubishi Motors genu-
ine parts affects the driving safety of your
vehicle.
N00301800138
Mitsubishi Motors manufactures high quality
vehicles with an emphasis on safety. It is
important to consult an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer before installation of any
accessory which may involve modification of
the electrical or fuel systems.
N00301400219
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Parts are
designed and manufactured to meet high stan-
dards of performance, and are recommended
for all of your maintenance needs. Also avail-
able from your Mitsubishi Motors dealer are
a wide variety of accessories to personalize
your new vehicle. Each Mitsubishi Motors
vehicle has a selection of Mitsubishi Motors
authorized accessories to choose from to tai-
lor your new vehicle to your own personal
preference. Your Mitsubishi Motors dealer’s
Parts Manager has information on various
audio systems, protection items, as well as
interior and exterior accessories available for
your specific model.
N00300100017
Certain components of this vehicle, such as
airbag modules, seat belt pretensioners, and
button cell batteries, may contain perchlorate
materials.
Special handling may apply. For additional
information, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
WARNING
While driving, do not use a cellular phone
in a way that hinders safe driving. Any-
thing, including cellular phone usage, that
distracts you from the safe operation of
your vehicle increases your risk of an acci-
dent.
Refer to and follow all state and local laws
in your area regarding cellular phone
usage while driving.
Important point!
Modification/alterations to the
electrical or fuel systems
CAUTION
Please consult an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer concerning any such acces-
sory fitment or modification.
If the wires interfere with the vehicle body or
improper installation methods are used (pro-
tective fuses not included, etc.), electronic
devices may be adversely affected, resulting
in a fire, vehicle damage, or other accident.
Genuine Mitsubishi Motors
parts
California Perchlorate
Materials Requirements
Event Data Recording
General information 3-7
3
N00302700046
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR).
The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an airbag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in under-
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a
short period of time, typically 30 seconds or
less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depress-
ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal;
and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better under-
standing of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the vehi-
cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Event Data Recording
NOTE
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data
are recorded by the EDR under normal driv-
ing conditions and no personal data (e.g.,
name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine the EDR
data with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash inves-
tigation.
4
Seat and restraint systems
Seats .................................................................................................4-2
Seats and restraint systems ..............................................................4-2
Front seats ........................................................................................4-3
Rear seats .........................................................................................4-7
Head restraints .................................................................................4-7
Extending a luggage compartment ..................................................4-9
Seat belts ........................................................................................4-11
Seat belt use during pregnancy ......................................................4-17
Seat belt pre-tensioner and force limiter systems ..........................4-17
Child restraint systems ...................................................................4-18
Maintenance and inspection of seat belts ......................................4-28
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag .............................4-29
Seats
4-2 Seat and restraint systems
4
N00408401649
To adjust the seat forward or backward
Page 4-3
To adjust the seatbacks Page 4-4
To adjust the seat height (Driver’s seat
only) Page 4-5
Heated seat (if so equipped) Page 4-6
Arm rest Page 4-7
N00401601264
Your vehicle has seat belts and other features
that help protect you and your passengers in
an accident.
Seat belts are the most important safety
device. When worn properly, seat belts can
reduce the chance of serious injury or death
in various types of crashes. For added protec-
tion during a severe frontal collision, your
vehicle has a Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) with airbags for the driver and passen-
gers. The seats, head restraints, and door
locks also are safety equipment, which must
be used correctly.
Always check the following before you drive:
That everyone in your vehicle is properly
wearing their seat belt.
That infants and small children are prop-
erly secured in appropriate child restraint
systems in the rear seat.
That all doors are fully closed and locked.
That seatbacks are upright, with head
restraints properly adjusted.
Seats
1 - Front seat
2 - Rear seats
Seats and restraint systems
Front seats
Seat and restraint systems 4-3
4
Safety equipment cannot prevent injury or
death in all motor vehicle accidents. You can
help reduce the risk of injury or death, how-
ever, by following the instructions in this
manual.
N00401801468
Position the driver’s seat as far back as possi-
ble while maintaining a position that still
enables you to fully apply the pedals, easily
control the steering wheel and safely operate
the vehicle.
N00401901371
Pull the seat adjusting lever up and slide the
seat forward or backward to the desired posi-
tion. Release the adjusting lever to lock the
seat in place.
WARNING
Do not place objects under the seats. This
could prevent the seat from locking
securely, and it could lead to an accident.
It may also cause damage to the seat or
other parts.
Front seats
Manual seat
adjustment
Power seat
adjustment
WARNING
Do not attempt to adjust the seat while
driving. This can cause loss of vehicle con-
trol and result in an accident.
After adjusting the seat, make sure that it
is securely locked into position.
To reduce the risk to the driver of serious
injury or death during deployment of the
driver’s airbag, always properly wear the
seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat as far
back as possible while maintaining a posi-
tion that still enables you to fully apply the
pedals, easily control the steering wheel,
and safely operate the vehicle.
To reduce the risk to the front passenger
of serious injury or death during deploy-
ment of the passenger’s airbag, always
properly wear the seat belt and adjust the
front passenger’s seat as far back as possi-
ble.
Always place children 12 years old and
under in the rear seat and use appropriate
child restraint systems.
CAUTION
Make sure that the seat is adjusted by an
adult. If it is adjusted by a child, an unex-
pected accident might occur.
Do not place a cushion or the like between
your back and the seatback while driving.
The effectiveness of the head restraints will
be reduced in the event of an accident.
When sliding the seats, be careful not to
catch your hand or leg.
When sliding or reclining the seat rearward,
pay careful attention to the rear seat passen-
gers.
To adjust the seat forward or
backward
Manual seat adjustment
CAUTION
Front seats
4-4 Seat and restraint systems
4
Operate the switch forward or backward to
move the seat to the desired position. Release
the switch to lock the seat in place.
N00402001425
To adjust the seatback, lean forward slightly,
gently pull the seatback lock lever up, then
lean backward to a comfortable position and
release the lever. The seatback will lock in
place.
Operate the switch in the direction of the
arrows to adjust the seatback.
WARNING
To make sure that the seat is securely
locked, try to move it forward or back-
ward without using the adjusting lever.
Power seat adjustment
1- Forward (toward the front of the vehicle)
2- Backward (toward the rear of the vehi-
cle)
NOTE
To prevent the battery from going dead,
operate the power seat with the engine run-
ning.
To adjust the seatbacks
Manual seat adjustment
CAUTION
The reclining mechanism used in the seat-
back is spring loaded, and will cause the
seatback to return quickly to the vertical
position when the lock lever is operated.
When pulling the lever, sit close to the seat-
back or hold the seatback with your hand to
control its return motion.
Power seat adjustment
1- Move forward
2- Move backward
NOTE
To prevent the battery from going dead,
operate the power seat with the engine run-
ning.
Front seats
Seat and restraint systems 4-5
4
N00402101282
Operate the lever repeatedly to raise or lower
the seat.
Operate the switch in the direction of the
arrows to raise or lower the seat.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious injury or
death in the event of an accident or sud-
den stop, all seatbacks should be kept in
the upright position while the vehicle is in
motion.
Seat belt performance during an accident
can be adversely affected if the seatbacks
are reclined. The more a seatback is
reclined, the more likely seat belt perfor-
mance will be adversely affected. If the
seat belt is not properly positioned against
the body during an accident, there is
increased risk you will slide under the belt
and receive serious injury or death.
To adjust the seat height
(Driver’s seat only)
Manual seat adjustment
1- Raise
2- Lower
Power seat adjustment
NOTE
To prevent the battery from going dead,
operate the power seat with the engine run-
ning.
1- Raise or lower the front end of the seat
2- Raise or lower the back end of the seat
Front seats
4-6 Seat and restraint systems
4
N00435601489
The heated seats can be operated by pushing
the switch when the ignition switch or the
operation mode is in ON. The indicator light
(A) will illuminate while the heater is on.
3- Raise or lower the entire seat
Heated seat (if so equipped)
1 (HI) - Heater high (for quick heating)
2 - Heater off
3 (LO) - Heater low (to keep the seat warm)
WARNING
Persons who are unable to feel tempera-
ture change or skin pain due to age, ill-
ness, injury, medication, alcohol use,
fatigue or other physical conditions or
who have sensitive skin may suffer burns
when using the heated seat even at low
temperatures. To reduce the risk of burns,
people with such conditions must use care
when using the heated seat.
CAUTION
Switch off the heated seats when not in use.
Operate the heaters at the “HI” position for
quick heating. After the seat has become
warm, set the heater switch to the “LO” posi-
tion to keep it warm. Slight variations in the
seat temperature may be felt while using the
heated seats. This is caused by the operation
of the heater’s internal thermostat and does
not indicate a malfunction.
Do not place heavy objects on the seat or
stick pins, needles, or other pointed objects
into the seat.
Do not place a blanket, cushion, or other
insulating material on the seat while using
the heater; doing so can cause the heater ele-
ment to overheat.
When cleaning the seat, do not use benzine,
kerosene, gasoline, alcohol, or other organic
solvents; doing so can cause damage not
only to the surface of the seat, but also to the
heater.
Rear seats
Seat and restraint systems 4-7
4
N00402500191
N00403001363
Tilt the arm rest down for use as shown.
The arm rest includes a cup holder. (Refer to
“Cup holders: For the rear seat” on page
5-178.)
N00404300542
Padded head restraints for the seats can
reduce the risk of a whiplash injury if your
vehicle is hit from the rear.
The head restraints are equipped in the illus-
trated position.
To maximize the effectiveness of your head
restraint, adjust the front seatback to the
upright position, the rear seatback to the nor-
mal seating position, and the head restraint to
the proper position. Sit back against the seat-
back with your head close to the head
restraint.
To reduce the risk of injury in an accident,
adjust the head restraint height so that the
center of the restraint is at your eye level
when seated. Any person too tall for the
restraint to reach their eye level when seated
should raise the restraint to the highest locked
position.
If water or any other liquid is spilled on the
seat, allow it to dry thoroughly before
attempting to use the heater. Turn the heater
off immediately if it appears to be malfunc-
tioning during use.
Rear seats
Arm rest
NOTE
Never sit on the arm rest.
Doing so could damage the arm rest.
CAUTION
Head restraints
WARNING
Driving without the head restraints in
place can cause you and your passengers
serious injury or death in an accident. To
reduce the risk of injury in an accident,
always make sure the head restraints are
installed and properly positioned when
the seat is occupied.
In order to minimize the risk of a neck
injury due to a rear impact, the front seat-
back must be adjusted to the upright posi-
tion, the rear seatback to the normal
seating position, and the head restraint to
the proper position before vehicle opera-
tion. The driver should never adjust the
seat while the vehicle is in motion.
Never place a cushion or similar device on
the seatback. This can adversely affect
head restraint performance by increasing
the distance between your head and the
restraint.
Adjustment of the head
restraint height
Head restraints
4-8 Seat and restraint systems
4
To raise the restraint, pull it straight up.
To lower the restraint, push down on it
while pressing the lock knob (A) in the
direction shown by the arrow.
After adjusting the height, push down on
the restraint to make sure it is locked in
position.
Press the lock knob (A) in the direction
shown by the arrows. Then pull the head
restraint up and out of the seatback.
First check that the head restraint is facing in
the right direction as shown in the previous
illustration, and then insert it into the seat-
back. Push the head restraint down while
pressing the lock knob (A) until the restraint
locks into place.
To remove
WARNING
To help minimize the risk of neck injury in
the event of an accident, the head
restraints must be properly installed and
positioned to proper height before vehicle
operation.
To install
CAUTION
Check that the lock knob (A) is extended out
as shown in the illustration. Then pull the
head restraint up to make sure that it is
locked in place and will not come out of the
seatback.
CAUTION
The shape and size of the head restraint dif-
fers according to the seat. Always use the
correct head restraint provided for the seat
and do not install the head restraint in the
wrong direction.
Extending a luggage compartment
Seat and restraint systems 4-9
4
N00405500105
N00417801069
The passenger and luggage compartments can
be joined by folding the seatback forward.
This is useful for carrying long objects.
The seatbacks can be folded with the rear seat
release button.
Extending a luggage com-
partment
WARNING
Never adjust the seats to extend a luggage
compartment while the vehicle is in
motion or on a slope.
The seats could move suddenly and cause
serious injury or an accident.
After returning a seatback to its normal
position, make sure that the seatback is
firmly secured. If the seatback is not
secured, it could move and cause a serious
accident.
Do not allow anyone to ride in the luggage
compartment while the vehicle is in
motion. People who are not properly
seated and restrained can be seriously
injured or killed in an accident.
The luggage compartment in the rear of
the vehicle should never be used as a play
area by children. All children should be
properly restrained in a restraint device
that offers the maximum protection for
their size and age. Refer to “Child
restraint systems” on page 4-18.
The front passenger seat is equipped with
weight sensors. Depending on the weight
detected, the front passenger airbag is dis-
abled or enabled. When folding the rear
seats forward for increased cargo capac-
ity, the front passenger seat and seatback
must be adjusted to assure they are not
contacting the rear seat. In the event the
front seat or seatback is allowed to contact
the folded rear seat, proper operation of
the front passenger airbag system may be
affected.
CAUTION
In the luggage compartment, do not load the
luggage higher than the top of the seats and
make sure that the luggage is firmly secured.
Restricted rear vision or unsecured objects
entering the passenger compartment from the
luggage compartment during sudden brak-
ing can cause serious injury or an accident.
Seatbacks should always be folded and put
back into normal position by an adult. Seat
adjustments by a child could lead to an unex-
pected accident.
WARNING
When adjusting the seats, be careful not to
catch your hand or leg. Personal injury could
result.
NOTE
When the seatback of a front seat is reclined,
return it to the upright position before driv-
ing.
Folding the rear seatbacks for-
ward
NOTE
You can separately fold the right and left side
of the seatback.
CAUTION
Extending a luggage compartment
4-10 Seat and restraint systems
4
Push the rear seat release button (A) to fold
the seatback forward.
The rear outboard seat belt can be separated
from the seat belt guide (B) to help prevent
damage to the seat belt while the seatback is
folded.
1. If the outboard seat belt has been sepa-
rated from the seat belt guide (B), insert it
back into the seat belt guide.
2. Tilt the seatback up until it is locked prop-
erly in position.
3. Make sure the seatback is locked securely
in place and the seat belt is passed through
the seat belt guide (B).
4. If the center seat belt is stored in the rear
trim, pull the seat belt out and pass it
through the seat belt guide (D) near the
center of the rear seat backs.
To fold the seatbacks
CAUTION
Before folding the driver’s side rear seat-
back, detach the center seat belt from the
detachable anchor and retract the center seat
belt all the way to the rear trim to prevent
damage to the seat belt caused by an object
in the luggage compartment. For details,
refer to page 4-14.
To return the seatbacks
WARNING
After returning the seatbacks to their
upright positions, make sure that the rear
seat belts are in front of the seatbacks, and
not caught behind the seatbacks.
NOTE
If the seat belt locks up and cannot be pulled
out, pull it once with force and let it retract
all the way. Then, pull the belt out slowly
once again.
WARNING
If the red part (C) on the back of the rear
seat release button can be seen, the seat-
back is not locked firmly in place. Push
and pull lightly on the seatback to lock it
firmly in place.
Seat belts
Seat and restraint systems 4-11
4
5. After making sure that the seat belt is not
twisted, insert the small latch plate (E)
into the detachable anchor (F) aligning the
marks (G) on the plate and buckle until a
“click” is heard. Make sure the detachable
anchor is securely latched and seat belt is
not twisted. For details, refer to page
4-14.
N00406001595
Seat belts are installed in your vehicle to help
reduce the risk of injury to the driver and pas-
senger in the event of an accident. Always
use the provided seat belts.
Carefully review the following information
for proper seat belt usage.
WARNING
Using the rear center seat belt with the
detachable anchor unlatched increases the
risk of serious injury or death in an acci-
dent. Make sure the detachable anchor is
properly latched.
Seat belts
WARNING
To help reduce the risk of injury or death
in an accident, seat belts and child
restraint systems must always be used.
Refer to “Child restraint systems” on page
4-18 for additional information.
Never use one seat belt for more than one
person.
Never carry more people in your vehicle
than there are seat belts.
Always adjust the seat belt for a snug fit.
Always place the shoulder belt over your
shoulder and across your chest. Never put
it behind you or under your arm.
Always wear the lap belt as low as possible
across your hips, not around your waist.
Never insert any foreign object, such as a
piece of plastic, paper clip, button or coin,
into the seat belt buckle.
Never modify or alter the seat belts in
your vehicle.
To reduce the risk to the driver of serious
injury or death during deployment of the
driver’s airbag, always properly wear the
seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat as far
back as possible while maintaining a posi-
tion that still enables you to fully apply the
pedals, easily control the steering wheel,
and safely operate the vehicle.
To reduce the risk to a front seat passen-
ger of serious injury or death from a
deploying airbag, make sure the passenger
always wears the seat belt properly,
remains seated all the way back and
upright in their seat, and moves the seat as
far back as possible. Refer to “Supplemen-
tal Restraint System (SRS) - airbag” on
page 4-29 for additional information.
WARNING
Seat belts
4-12 Seat and restraint systems
4
N00406201500
All seats are equipped with a seat belt which
uses one combined lap-and-shoulder belt with
an emergency locking retractor.
This system is designed to provide both com-
fort and safety. It permits full extension and
automatic retraction of the belts during nor-
mal vehicle operation. A sensing device
inside the belt retractor is designed to lock the
retractor in the event of a sudden change in
the vehicle’s motion.
1. Occupants should always sit back in their
seats with their backs against the upright
seatback. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death during deployment of the
airbag, adjust the driver’s seat as far back
as possible while maintaining a position
that still enables you to fully apply the
pedals, easily control the steering wheel,
and safely operate the vehicle. The front
passenger seat should also be moved as
far back as possible. Refer to “Supple-
mental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag”
on page 4-29. Also refer to “To adjust the
seat forward or backward” on page 4-3.
Never hold an infant or child in your arms
or on your lap when riding in this vehicle
even when you are wearing your seat belt.
Never place any part of the seat belt you
are wearing around an infant or child.
Failure to follow these simple instructions
creates a risk of serious injury or death to
your child in the event of an accident or
sudden stop.
Children 12 years old and under should
always ride in the rear seat and be prop-
erly restrained. This reduces their risk of
serious injury or death in an accident,
especially due to a deploying front passen-
ger airbag. Refer to “Child restraint sys-
tems” on page 4-18 for additional
information.
Any child who is too small to properly
wear a seat belt must be properly
restrained in an appropriate child
restraint system.
Infants MUST be placed in a rear-facing
child safety seat and positioned in the rear
seat.
In the event of an accident, all seat belt
assemblies, including retractors and
attachment hardware, should be inspected
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer to determine whether replacement
is necessary.
WARNING
Do not let children play with the seat belts.
If children play with the seat belts by
wrapping them around their bodies, the
seat belt may retract and become tight.
This can result in a serious injury or
death, such as suffocation.
This can occur even if the vehicle is
parked. If the child cannot be released
from the seat belt, use an appropriate tool
such as a knife or scissors to cut the seat
belt.
Seat belt instructions
NOTE
For instructions on installing a child restraint
system using a seat belt, refer to “Installing a
child restraint system using the seat belt” on
page 4-25.
WARNING
Seat belts
Seat and restraint systems 4-13
4
2. Before using the rear center seat belt,
make sure that the detachable anchor is
securely latched and the seat belt is not
twisted. For details, refer to page 4-14.
3. Grasp the latch plate and slide it up the
webbing so that it easily pulls across your
body.
4. Pull the seat belt out slowly while holding
the latch plate. Push the latch plate into
the buckle until you hear a “click”. Pull
up on the belt to be sure the latch plate is
locked securely in the buckle.
5. The lap part of the belt must always be
worn low and snug across the hips. Pull
up on the shoulder portion of the belt to
take up any slack in the lap belt.
WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious injury or
death in the event of an accident or sud-
den stop, all seatbacks should be kept in
the upright position while the vehicle is in
motion.
Seat belt performance during an accident
can be adversely affected if the seatbacks
are reclined. The more a seatback is
reclined, the more likely seat belt perfor-
mance will be adversely affected. If the
seat belt is not properly positioned against
the body during an accident, there is
increased risk you will slide under the belt
and receive serious injury or death.
NOTE
If the seat belt locks up and cannot be pulled
out, pull it once with force and let it retract
all the way.
Then, pull the belt out slowly once again.
NOTE
With the exception of the seat belt for the
driver, the seat belts in all other seating posi-
tions are equipped with an Automatic Lock-
ing Retractor (ALR) function. If you pull the
seat belt fully out of the retractor, the retrac-
tor will switch to its ALR child restraint
installation function (see page 4-25).
When the ALR function has been activated,
the seat belt will only retract. If this happens,
let the belt fully retract, then pull the seat
belt back out, repeating steps 1 through 5.
WARNING
Be sure the lap belt portion fits snugly and
is worn as low as possible across the hips,
not around the waist. Failure to follow this
instruction will increase the risk of serious
injury or death in the event of an accident.
Seat belts
4-14 Seat and restraint systems
4
6. To release the belt, press the button on the
buckle and allow the belt to retract.
If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull it
out and check for kinks or twists in the
webbing. Then make sure it remains
untwisted as it retracts.
N00409700017
The rear center seat belt can be detached to
help avoid damage caused by an object in the
luggage compartment while the driver’s side
rear seat back is folded down.
1. Pull the seat belt out slowly and pass it
through the seat belt guide (A).
2. After making sure that the seat belt is not
twisted, insert the small latch plate (B)
into the detachable anchor (C) aligning
the marks (D) on the plate and buckle
until a “click” is heard.
Be sure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted when worn. Twisted webbing may
adversely affect seat belt performance.
NOTE
If the seat belt (A) or ring (B) becomes dirty,
the belt may not retract smoothly. If the seat
belt and ring are dirty, clean them with a
mild soap or detergent solution.
Detachable rear center seat belt
WARNING
WARNING
Never detach the rear center seat belt
except when the driver’s side rear seat
back is folded down. Using the rear center
seat belt with the detachable anchor
unlatched increases the risk of serious
injury or death in an accident. Make sure
the detachable anchor is properly latched
before the center seat belt is used.
To attach
NOTE
If the seat belt locks up and cannot be pulled
out, pull it once with force and let it retract
all the way.
Then, pull the belt out slowly once again.
Seat belts
Seat and restraint systems 4-15
4
1. Insert the latch plate (E) of the center seat
belt into the slit (G) on the detachable
anchor (C) and release the center seat belt
from the detachable anchor.
2. Pass the seat belt through the seat belt
guide (A) and retract it completely toward
the rear trim.
3. After the seat belt is retracted completely,
insert the latch plate (E) into the upper slit
(H) and the small latch plate (B) into the
lower slit (I).
N00418401437
Warning light
Warning display
A tone and warning light are used to remind
the driver to fasten the seat belt.
If the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position or the operation mode is put in ON
without the driver’s seat belt being fastened, a
warning light will come on and a tone will
sound for approximately 6 seconds to remind
you to fasten your seat belt.
If you then drive with the seat belt unfastened
for longer than a minute from when the igni-
tion switch or the engine switch is operated,
the warning light will come on and blink
repeatedly and the tone will sound intermit-
tently.
The warning light and the tone will stop after
approximately 90 seconds.
To detach
Driver’s seat belt
reminder/warning light and
display
Seat belts
4-16 Seat and restraint systems
4
If you then repeatedly stop and start your
vehicle with the seat belt unfastened, the
warning light/display and tone will remind
you to fasten your seat belt every time the
vehicle starts moving. You will also be
reminded to fasten your seat belt in this way
when you remove your seat belt while driv-
ing. The warning light and the tone go off
when the seat belt is fastened.
N00418301289
The front passenger seat belt warning light is
located in the instrument panel.
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position or the operation mode is put in
ON, this indicator normally comes on and
goes off a few seconds later.
The light comes on when a person sits on the
front passenger seat but does not fasten the
seat belt. It goes off when the seat belt is sub-
sequently fastened.
N00406300344
To move the anchor (A), press the lock knob
(B) and slide the anchor to the desired posi-
tion.
WARNING
In order to reduce the risk of serious
injury or death in an accident, always fas-
ten your own seat belt. Do not allow any-
one to ride in your vehicle unless he or she
is also seated and fastening a seat belt.
Children should additionally be restrained
in a secure child restraint system.
NOTE
At the same time, “FASTEN SEAT BELT”
will be displayed on the information screen
in the multi-information display.
Front passenger seat belt warn-
ing light
WARNING
Do not install any accessory or sticker that
makes the light difficult to see.
Adjustable seat belt shoulder
anchor (front seats)
WARNING
Always adjust the shoulder belt anchor so
that the shoulder belt is positioned across
the center of your shoulder without touch-
ing your neck. The shoulder belt should
not be able to fall off your shoulder. Fail-
ure to follow this instruction can adversely
affect seat belt performance and increase
the risk of serious injury or death in the
event of an accident.
Adjust the shoulder belt anchor only when
the vehicle is not in motion.
Make sure the anchor is securely locked in
position after adjusting it.
Anchor down Anchor up
Seat belt use during pregnancy
Seat and restraint systems 4-17
4
N00406701228
When your seat belt, even fully extended, is
not long enough, a seat belt extender must be
obtained. The extender may be used for either
of the front seats.
N00406800134
Seat belts work for everyone, including preg-
nant women. Like all occupants, pregnant
women are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed in an accident if they do not wear
seat belts.
N00417700641
The driver’s and front passenger’s seats each
have a seat belt equipped with a pre-tensioner
system.
The driver and front passenger seat belts are
equipped with a seat belt pre-tensioner sys-
tem. In a moderate-to-severe frontal or side
collision or when a rollover or overturning of
the vehicle is detected, the pre-tensioner sys-
tem operates simultaneously with the deploy-
ment of the front airbags, side airbags or
curtain airbags.
The seat belt pre-tensioners are located within
the seat belt retractors (A). When activated,
the pre-tensioners quickly draw back seat belt
webbing and increase seat belt performance.
The seat belt pre-tensioner system includes
the following components:
Seat belt extender
WARNING
The extender should only be used if the
existing belt is not long enough. Anyone
who can use the standard seat belt should
not use an extender. Unnecessary use of an
extender can adversely affect seat belt
performance in an accident.
When not required, the extender must be
removed and stowed.
Seat belt use during preg-
nancy
WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious injury or
death to pregnant women and unborn
children in an accident, pregnant women
should always wear a seat belt. The lap
portion of the seat belt should be worn
snug and low across the hips and below
the rounding. Consult your doctor if you
have any additional questions or concerns.
Seat belt pre-tensioner and
force limiter systems
Pre-tensioner system
Child restraint systems
4-18 Seat and restraint systems
4
The airbag control unit monitors the readiness
of the electronic parts of the system whenever
the ignition switch or the operation mode is
under the following conditions. These include
all of the items listed above and all related
wiring.
[Except for vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key]
The ignition switch is in the “ON” or
“START” position.
[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]
The operation mode is in ON.
The seat belt pre-tensioners will operate
under the same conditions as the airbag con-
trol unit.
When the seat belt pre-tensioners activate,
some smoke is released and a loud noise will
be heard. The smoke is not harmful, but care
should be taken not to intentionally inhale it,
as it may cause some temporary irritation to
people with respiratory problems.
Even in the event of a severe impact, the pre-
tensioners will not operate if the seat belts are
not fastened. The seat belt pre-tensioners may
not activate in certain collisions, even though
the vehicle may appear to be severely dam-
aged. Such non-activation does not mean that
something is wrong with the seat belt pre-ten-
sioner system, but rather that the collision
forces were not severe enough to activate the
system.
N00408700081
This warning light tells you if there is a prob-
lem involving the SRS airbags and the seat
belt pre-tensioner system. Refer to “SRS
warning light/display” on page 4-34.
N00408901149
In the event of an accident, the seat belt force
limiter system will help reduce the force
applied to the driver and front seat passenger.
N00407101942
When transporting infants or small children
in your vehicle, an appropriate child restraint
system must always be used. This is required
by law in the U.S. and Canada.
Child restraint systems specifically designed
for infants and small children are offered by
several manufacturers. Choose only a child
restraint system with a label certifying that it
complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213 (FMVSS 213) or Motor Vehicle
Restraint Systems and Booster Seats Safety
Regulations (RSSR). Look for the manufac-
turer’s statement of compliance on the box
and child restraint system itself.
1- SRS warning light
2- Front impact sensors
3- Seat belt pre-tensioner
4- Airbag control unit
5- Side impact sensors
6- Seat belt buckle switches
WARNING
The seat belt pre-tensioner system is
designed to work only once. After the seat
belt pre-tensioners have been activated,
they will not work again. They must
promptly be replaced and the entire seat
belt pre-tensioner system inspected by an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
SRS warning
Force limiter system
Child restraint systems
Child restraint systems
Seat and restraint systems 4-19
4
The child restraint system should be appropri-
ate for your child’s weight and height, and
should properly fit your vehicle’s seat.
For detailed information, refer to the instruc-
tion manual accompanying the child restraint
system.
All children should be properly restrained in
a restraint device that offers the maximum
protection for their size and age as specified
by local, state, or provincial laws.
Be sure to check local, state, or provincial
requirements for child size and age that may
vary from the recommendations listed below.
Children less than 2 years old and who
weigh 40 pounds (18 kg) or less MUST
ride in a rear-facing child safety seat that
MUST ONLY be used in the rear seat.
Children older than 2 years of age and
who weigh less than 60 pounds (27 kg) or
who are less than 57 inches (145 cm) tall
MUST be in an appropriate child restraint
system used only in the rear seat.
Children who weigh more than 60 pounds
(27 kg) or who are more than 57 inches
(145 cm) tall, regardless of age, should
use a suitable child seat or a booster seat
in the rear seat until the vehicle’s lap-and-
shoulder belt fits them properly.
Recommendations for child
restraint system selection
WARNING
All children must be seated in the rear
seat, and properly restrained.
Accident statistics show that children of
all sizes and ages are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seat, rather than in
the front seat.
Any child who is too large to use a child
restraint system should ride in the rear
seat and wear the lap-and-shoulder belt
properly. The shoulder belt must be posi-
tioned over the shoulder and across the
chest, not across their neck, and with the
lap belt positioned low on the child’s hips,
not across their stomach. If necessary, a
booster seat should be used to help achieve
a proper seat belt fit. Follow the booster
seat manufacturer’s instructions. Only use
a booster seat that is certified as comply-
ing with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards or Motor Vehicle Restraint Sys-
tems and Booster Seats Safety Regula-
tions.
WARNING
Never hold an infant or child in your arms
or on your lap when riding in this vehicle,
even when you are wearing your seat belt.
Never place any part of the seat belt you
are wearing around an infant or child.
Failure to follow these simple instructions
creates a risk of serious injury or death to
your child in the event of an accident or
sudden stop.
Child restraint systems
4-20 Seat and restraint systems
4
WARNING
Your vehicle is also equipped with a front
passenger airbag.
Never put REAR-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS or INFANT
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS in the front pas-
senger seat. This places the infant too
close to the passenger airbag. During
deployment of that airbag, the infant can
be seriously injured or killed. Rear-facing
child restraint systems or infant restraint
systems must only be used in the rear seat.
Airbag
WARNING
FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS should be used in the rear seat
whenever possible. If one must be used in
the front passenger seat, move the seat to
the most rearward position and make sure
the child stays in the child restraint sys-
tem, properly restrained. Failure to follow
these instructions could result in serious
injury or death to the child.
WARNING
It is important to use an approved rear-
facing infant restraint until the infant is
one year old (unless the infant outgrows
the seat sooner). This allows the infant’s
neck and spine to develop enough to sup-
port the weight of their head in the event
of an accident.
When installing a child restraint system,
follow the instructions provided by the
manufacturer and follow the directions in
this manual. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death to your child in an
accident or sudden stop.
After installation, push and pull the child
restraint system back and forth, and side
to side, to see that it is firmly secured. If
the child restraint system is not installed
securely, it may cause injury to the child
or other occupants in the event of an acci-
dent or sudden stop.
When not in use, keep your child restraint
system secured with the seat belt, or
remove it from the vehicle, in order to pre-
vent it from being thrown around inside
the vehicle during an accident.
WARNING
Child restraint systems
Seat and restraint systems 4-21
4
N00418800128
The outboard seating positions in the rear seat
of your vehicle are equipped with lower
anchors for attaching child restraint systems
compatible with the LATCH system.
N00418901214
Your vehicle has 3 attachment points on the
backside of the rear seats. These are for
securing a child restraint system tether strap
to each of the 3 rear seating positions in your
vehicle.
NOTE
Before purchasing a child restraint system,
try installing it in the rear seat to make sure
there is a good fit. Because of the location of
the seat belt buckles and the shape of the seat
cushion, it may be difficult to securely install
some manufacturer’s child restraint systems.
If the child restraint system can be pulled
forward or to either side easily on the seat
cushion after the seat belt has been tightened,
choose another manufacturer’s child restraint
system.
Depending on the seating position in the
vehicle and the child restraint system that
you have, the child restraint system can be
attached using one of the following 2 meth-
ods:
• Attach to the lower anchorage in the rear
seat ONLY if the child restraint system is
compatible with the LATCH system (See
page 4-21).
• Attach to the seat belt (See page 4-25).
Installing a child restraint sys-
tem using the LATCH (Lower
Anchors and Tethers for chil-
dren) system
Lower anchor locations
NOTE
The symbols on the seatback show the loca-
tion of the lower anchor points.
Tether anchor locations
Child restraint systems
4-22 Seat and restraint systems
4
N00419001209
N00419101385
1. In order to securely fasten the tether strap,
remove the head restraint from the loca-
tion where you wish to install the child
restraint system.
Refer to “Head restraints” on page 4-7.
2. Open a small gap between the seat cush-
ion (A) and the seatback (B) with your
hand to locate the lower anchors (C).
3. Push the anchor connectors (D) on the
child restraint system into the lower
anchors (C) in accordance with the
instructions provided by the child restraint
system’s manufacturer.
Remember, the lower anchors provided
with your vehicle are designed to secure
suitable child restraint systems compati-
ble with the LATCH system in the out-
board positions of the rear seats only. The
anchor connectors are NOT designed to
secure a suitable child restraint system in
the center position of the rear seat.
4. Remove the cargo area cover from the
vehicle. (Refer to “Cargo area cover” on
page 5-179.)
Examples of child restraint sys-
tems compatible with the LATCH
system
A- Rear-facing child restraint system
B- Front-facing child restraint system
C- Child restraint system lower anchor
connectors
D- Tether strap
(These are only examples.)
Using the LATCH system
Except for booster seat
A- Vehicle seat cushion
B- Vehicle seatback
C- Lower anchor
D- Connector
NOTE
In order to secure a child restraint system
compatible with the LATCH system, use the
lower anchor points in the outboard positions
of the rear seat. It is not necessary to use the
vehicle’s seat belt. The vehicle’s seat belt,
however, MUST be used to secure a child
restraint system in the center position of the
rear seat.
WARNING
If there is any foreign material in or
around the lower anchors, remove it
before installing the child restraint sys-
tem. Also, make sure the seat belt is away
from, not looped through or otherwise
interfering with, the child restraint sys-
tem. If foreign matter is not removed
and/or the seat belt interferes with the
child restraint system, the child restraint
system will not be secured properly, could
detach and move forward in the event of
sudden braking or an accident, and could
result in injury to the child or other vehi-
cle occupants.
When the vehicle is moving, do not adjust
the seat where the child restraint system is
installed.
Child restraint systems
Seat and restraint systems 4-23
4
5. Latch the tether strap hook (E) of the child
restraint system to the tether anchor bar
(F) and tighten the tether strap so it is
securely fastened.
6. Before putting your child in the restraint,
push and pull the restraint in all directions
to be sure it is firmly secure. Do this
before each use. If the child restraint sys-
tem is not firmly secure, repeat steps 3
through 5.
1. In order to securely fasten the tether strap,
remove the head restraint from the loca-
tion where you wish to install the high
back booster seat.
Refer to “Head restraints” on page 4-7.
2. Open a small gap between the seat cush-
ion (A) and the seatback (B) with your
hand to locate the lower anchors (C).
3. Push the anchor connectors (D) on the
high back booster seat into the lower
anchors (C) in accordance with the
instructions provided by the child restraint
system’s manufacturer.
WARNING
Child restraint system tether anchors are
designed only to withstand loads from cor-
rectly fitted child restraint systems. Under
no circumstances are they to be used for
adult seat belts, or harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the
vehicle.
CAUTION
After removing the child restraint system,
install the head restraint.
Booster seat
A- High back booster seat
B- Booster cushion
WARNING
To avoid injury to child, do not use the
lap/shoulder belt Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) child restraint installa-
tion function when using a booster seat
with the seat belts.
High back booster seat
A- Vehicle seat cushion
B- Vehicle seatback
C- Lower anchor
D- Connector
Child restraint systems
4-24 Seat and restraint systems
4
Remember, the lower anchors provided
with your vehicle are designed to secure
suitable high back booster seats compati-
ble with the LATCH system in the out-
board positions of the rear seats only. The
anchor connectors are NOT designed to
secure a suitable high back booster seat in
the center position of the rear seat.
4. Remove the cargo area cover from the
vehicle. (Refer to “Cargo area cover” on
page 5-179.)
5. Latch the tether strap hook (E) of the high
back booster seat to the tether anchor bar
(F) and tighten the tether strap so it is
securely fastened.
6. Before putting your child in the restraint,
push and pull the high back booster seat in
all directions to be sure it is firmly secure.
Do this before each use. If the high back
booster seat is not firmly secure, repeat
steps 3 through 5.
7. Sit the child in the high back booster seat.
Fit the seat belt to the high back booster
seat according to the child restraint sys-
tem’s manufacturer.
1. Open a small gap between the seat cush-
ion (A) and the seatback (B) with your
hand to locate the lower anchors (C).
WARNING
If there is any foreign material in or
around the lower anchors, remove it
before installing the high back booster
seat. Also, make sure the seat belt is away
from, not looped through or otherwise
interfering with, the high back booster
seat. If foreign matter is not removed
and/or the seat belt interferes with the
high back booster seat, the high back
booster seat will not be secured properly,
could detach and move forward in the
event of sudden braking or an accident,
and could result in injury to the child or
other vehicle occupants.
When the vehicle is moving, do not adjust
the seat where the high back booster seat
is installed.
WARNING
Child restraint system tether anchors are
designed only to withstand loads from cor-
rectly fitted child restraint systems. Under
no circumstances are they to be used for
adult seat belts, or harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the
vehicle.
CAUTION
After removing the high back booster seat,
install the head restraint.
Booster cushion
CAUTION
Do not remove the head restraint when
installing a booster cushion.
A- Vehicle seat cushion
B- Vehicle seatback
C- Lower anchor
Child restraint systems
Seat and restraint systems 4-25
4
2. Push the anchor connectors (D) on the
booster cushion into the lower anchors
(C) in accordance with the instructions
provided by the child restraint system’s
manufacturer.
Remember, the lower anchors provided
with your vehicle are designed to secure
suitable booster cushions compatible with
the LATCH system in the outboard posi-
tions of the rear seats only. The anchor
connectors are NOT designed to secure a
suitable booster cushion in the center
position of the rear seat.
3. Sit the child in the booster cushion.
Fit the seat belt to the booster cushion
according to the child restraint system’s
manufacturer.
N00407301641
With the exception of the driver’s seat, the
seat belt in all other seating positions can be
converted from normal Emergency Locking
Retractor (ELR) mode to Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) mode. This means that when
you pull the seat belt fully out of the retractor,
the retractor will switch to its ALR child
restraint installation function. Always use the
ALR child restraint installation function
when you install a child restraint system
using the seat belt.
Children 12 years old and under should
always be restrained in the rear seat whenever
possible, although the front passenger seat
belt can also be converted to ALR mode.
1. Place the child restraint system on the seat
where you wish to install it.
To help assure proper fitting of the child
restraint system, always remove the head
restraint.
Refer to “Head restraints” on page 4-7.
D- Connector
WARNING
If there is any foreign material in or
around the lower anchors, remove it
before installing the booster cushion. Also,
make sure the seat belt is away from, not
looped through or otherwise interfering
with, the booster cushion. If foreign mat-
ter is not removed and/or the seat belt
interferes with the booster cushion, the
booster cushion will not be secured prop-
erly, could detach and move forward in
the event of sudden braking or an acci-
dent, and could result in injury to the
child or other vehicle occupants.
When the vehicle is moving, do not adjust
the seat where the booster cushion is
installed.
Installing a child restraint sys-
tem using the seat belt (with
emergency/automatic locking
mechanism)
WARNING
When you install a child restraint system
using the seat belt, always make sure the
retractor has been switched to the ALR
child restraint installation function. The
ALR function will keep the child restraint
system tightly secured to the seat.
Failure to convert the retractor to the
ALR function may allow the child
restraint system to move forward during
sudden braking or an accident, resulting
in serious injury or death to the child or
other occupants.
When you install a child restraint system
using the 3-point type seat belt with 2
buckles in the rear center seating position,
always make sure both latch plates are
secured. Do not use the seat belt with only
one of the latch plates attached. This could
result in a serious injury or death in the
event of an accident or sudden stop.
Installation
Except for booster seat
Child restraint systems
4-26 Seat and restraint systems
4
2. Route the seat belt through the child
restraint system’s according to the instruc-
tions provided by the child restraint sys-
tem’s manufacturer. Then insert the seat
belt latch plate into the buckle. Make sure
you hear a “click” when you insert the
latch plate into the buckle.
3. To activate the ALR child restraint instal-
lation function, slowly pull the shoulder
part of the belt all the way out of the
retractor until it stops. Then let the belt
feed back into the retractor.
4. After the belt has retracted, tug on it.
If the belt is in the ALR function, you will
not be able to pull it out. If the webbing
can be pulled out from retractor, the ALR
function has not been activated and you
will need to repeat steps 3 and 4.
5. After confirming that the belt is locked,
grab the shoulder part of the belt near the
buckle and pull up to remove any slack
from the lap part of the belt, allowing the
slack to feed into the retractor. Remember,
if the lap belt portion is not tight, the child
restraint system will not be secure. It may
help to put your weight on the child
restraint system and/or push on its seat-
back while pulling up on the belt (See
illustration).
If your child restraint system requires the
use of a tether strap, fasten the tether strap
in accordance with procedures 6 and 7.
6. Remove the cargo area cover from the
vehicle. (Refer to “Cargo area cover” on
page 5-179.)
7. Latch the tether strap hook (A) of the
child restraint system to the tether anchor
bar (B) and tighten the tether strap so it is
securely fastened.
Child restraint systems
Seat and restraint systems 4-27
4
8. Before putting your child in the restraint,
push and pull the restraint in all directions
to be sure it is firmly secure. Do this
before each use. If the child restraint sys-
tem is not firmly secure, repeat steps 1
through 7.
1. Place the high back booster seat on the
seat where you wish to install it.
To help assure proper fitting of the high
back booster seat, always remove the head
restraint.
Refer to “Head restraints” on page 4-7.
If your high back booster seat requires the
use of a tether strap, fasten the tether strap
in accordance with procedures 2 and 3.
2. Remove the cargo area cover from the
vehicle. (Refer to “Cargo area cover” on
page 5-179.)
3. Latch the tether strap hook (A) of the high
back booster seat to the tether anchor bar
(B) and tighten the tether strap so it is
securely fastened.
4. Sit the child in the high back booster seat.
WARNING
Child restraint system tether anchors are
designed only to withstand loads from cor-
rectly fitted child restraint systems. Under
no circumstances are they to be used for
adult seat belts, or harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the
vehicle.
CAUTION
After removing the child restraint system, be
sure to perform the following actions.
• Wind up the seat belt completely to deacti-
vate the ALR mode.
• Install the head restraint.
Booster seat
A- High back booster seat
B- Booster cushion
WARNING
To avoid injury to child, do not use the
lap/shoulder belt Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) child restraint installa-
tion function when using a booster seat
with the seat belts.
High back booster seat
WARNING
Child restraint system tether anchors are
designed only to withstand loads from cor-
rectly fitted child restraint systems. Under
no circumstances are they to be used for
adult seat belts, or harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the
vehicle.
Maintenance and inspection of seat belts
4-28 Seat and restraint systems
4
Fit the seat belt to the high back booster
seat according to the child restraint sys-
tem’s manufacturer.
1. Place the booster cushion on the seat.
2. Sit the child in the booster cushion.
Fit the seat belt to the booster cushion
according to the child restraint system’s
manufacturer.
N00407601673
Children who have outgrown a child restraint
system should be seated in the rear seat and
wear the seat belt. If the shoulder belt crosses
their face or neck, and/or the lap belt crosses
their stomach, a commercially available
booster seat must be used to raise the child so
that the shoulder belt crosses their shoulder
and the lap belt remains positioned low
across their hips. The booster seat should fit
the vehicle seat and have a label certifying
compliance with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards or Motor Vehicle Restraint
Systems and Booster Seats Safety Regula-
tions.
N00407001374
Regularly check your seat belt buckles and
their release mechanisms for positive engage-
ment and release of the latch plate. Check the
retractors for automatic locking when in the
Automatic Locking Retractor function.
The entire seat belt assembly should be
replaced if the webbing shows any obvious
cuts, tears, increase in thickness in any sec-
tion of the webbing from broken fibers, or
severe fading from sunlight. All of these con-
ditions indicate a weakening of the belt,
which may adversely affect seat belt perfor-
mance in an accident.
CAUTION
After removing the high back booster seat,
install the head restraint.
Booster cushion
CAUTION
Do not remove the head restraint when
installing a booster cushion.
Children who have outgrown
child restraint systems
WARNING
Any child who is too small to properly
wear a seat belt must be properly
restrained in an appropriate child
restraint system, to reduce their risk of
serious injury or death in an accident.
A child should never be left unattended in,
or unsupervised around, your vehicle.
When you leave the vehicle, always take
the child out as well.
Children can die from heat stroke if left or
trapped inside the vehicle, especially on
hot days.
Keep your vehicle locked when not in use.
Keep your vehicle keys away from chil-
dren.
Maintenance and inspection
of seat belts
WARNING
Do not attempt to repair or replace any
part of the seat belt assemblies. This work
should be done by an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Failure to have
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
perform the work could reduce the effec-
tiveness of the belts and could result in a
serious injury or death in an accident.
Never use an organic solvent to clean the
seat belt webbing. Do not attempt to
bleach or re-dye the seat belt webbing.
These may weaken the seat belt webbing,
increasing risk of injury or death in an
accident.
Clean seat belt webbing only with mild
soap or detergent solution and rinse it
with lukewarm water, and dry the seat
belt webbing completely before retracting
it.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag
Seat and restraint systems 4-29
4
N00407701906
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS), which includes air-
bags for the driver and passengers.
The SRS front airbags are designed to supple-
ment the primary protection of the driver and
front passenger seat belt systems by provid-
ing those occupants with protection against
head and chest injuries in certain moderate to
severe frontal collisions. The SRS front air-
bags, together with sensors at the front of the
vehicle and sensors attached to the front
seats, form an advanced airbag system.
The SRS driver’s knee airbag is designed to
supplement the primary protection of the
driver’s seat belt system. It can reduce the
forward movement of the driver’s lower legs
and provide increased overall body protection
in certain moderate to severe frontal colli-
sions.
The SRS side airbags and the curtain airbags
are also designed to supplement the seat belts.
The SRS side airbags provide the driver and
front passenger with protection against chest
injuries by deploying the bag on the side
impacted in moderate to severe side impact
collisions. The SRS curtain airbags provide
the driver and the passengers on the front seat
and the rear outboard seats with protection
against head injuries by deploying the curtain
airbag on the side impacted in moderate to
severe side impact collisions and by deploy-
ing both curtain airbags when a rollover is
detected. The curtain airbags are also
designed to help reduce the risk of complete
and partial ejection from the vehicle through
side windows in both side impact and roll-
over type accidents.
The SRS airbags are NOT a substitute for use
of the seat belts. For maximum protection in
all types of accidents, seat belts must
ALWAYS be worn by everyone who drives or
rides in this vehicle (with infants and small
children in an appropriate child restraint sys-
tem in the rear seat, and older children buck-
led in the rear seat). Refer to “Child restraint
systems” on page 4-18.
Supplemental Restraint Sys-
tem (SRS) - airbag
WARNING
IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO ALWAYS
WEAR YOUR SEAT BELT PROPERLY
EVEN WITH AN AIRBAG.
• Seat belts help keep the driver and pas-
sengers properly positioned. This
reduces the risk of injury in all collisions,
and reduces the risk of serious injuries or
death when the airbags inflate.
During sudden braking just before a col-
lision, an unrestrained or improperly
restrained driver or passengers can move
forward into direct contact with, or
within close proximity to, the airbag
when it begins to inflate.
The beginning stage of airbag inflation is
the most forceful and can cause serious
injuries or death if the occupant comes in
contact with the airbag at this time.
• Seat belts reduce the risk of injury in
rear impact collisions, and in lower-
speed frontal collisions because the air-
bags are not designed to inflate in those
situations.
• Seat belts reduce the risk of being
thrown from your vehicle in a collision or
rollover.
IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO BE PROP-
ERLY SEATED.
• A driver or front passenger sitting too
close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during airbag deployment can be
seriously injured or killed.
WARNING
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag
4-30 Seat and restraint systems
4
• Airbags inflate very quickly and with
great force. If the driver and front pas-
senger are not properly seated and
restrained, the airbag may not provide
the proper protection, and can cause
serious injuries or death when it inflates.
• To reduce the risk to the driver of serious
injury or death due to a deploying
driver’s airbag, always properly wear
your seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat
as far back as possible, maintaining a
position that still allows the driver to
have good control of the steering wheel,
brake, accelerator, and other vehicle con-
trols.
• To reduce the risk to the front passenger
of serious injury or death from a deploy-
ing passenger’s airbag, make sure the
passenger always wears the seat belt
properly, remains seated upright and all
the way back in the seat, and positions
the seat as far back as possible.
• Seat all infants and children in the rear
seat, properly restrained in an appropri-
ate child restraint system.
Airbags inflate very quickly and with
great force. Do not sit on the edge of the
seat or sit with your lower legs too close to
the instrument panel, or lean your head or
chest close to the steering wheel or the
instrument panel.
Do not put your feet or legs on or against
the instrument panel.
WARNING
WARNING
Infants and small children should never
ride unrestrained, or lean against the
instrument panel. They should never ride
held in your arms or on your lap. They
can be seriously injured or killed in an
accident, especially when the airbags
inflate. Seat all infants and children in the
rear seat, properly restrained in an appro-
priate child restraint system. Refer to
“Child restraint systems” on page 4-18.
WARNING
NEVER put REAR-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS or INFANT
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS in the front pas-
senger seat. This places the infant too
close to the passenger airbag. During
deployment of that airbag, the infant can
be seriously injured or killed.
Rear-facing child restraint systems or
infant restraint systems must only be used
in the rear seat.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag
Seat and restraint systems 4-31
4
N00407801662
The SRS includes the following components:
WARNING
FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS should be used in the rear seat
whenever possible. If they must be used in
the front passenger seat, move the seat to
the most rearward position and make sure
the child stays in the child restraint sys-
tem, properly restrained. Failure to follow
these instructions could result in serious
injury or death to the child.
Airbag
WARNING
Older children should be seated in the
rear seat with their seat belt properly
worn, and with an appropriate booster
seat if needed.
Refer to “Children who have outgrown
child restraint systems” on page 4-28.
How the Supplemental
Restraint System works
1- Airbag module (Driver)
2- SRS warning light
3- Passenger’s airbag off indicator
4- Airbag module (Passenger)
5- Front impact sensors
6- Airbag module (Driver’s knee)
7- Driver’s seat position sensor
8- Passenger’s seat occupant classifica-
tion sensor system
9- Airbag control unit
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag
4-32 Seat and restraint systems
4
The airbag control unit monitors the readiness
of the electronic parts of the system whenever
the ignition switch or the operation mode is
under the following conditions. These include
all of the items listed above and all related
wiring.
[Except for vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key]
The ignition switch is in the “ON” or
“START” position.
[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]
The operation mode is in ON.
The airbags will operate under the same con-
ditions as the airbag control unit.
When the impact sensors detect a sufficient
front or side impact to deploy the airbag(s),
the appropriate airbag(s) will be deployed.
When the airbag control unit detects rollover
of the vehicle, curtain airbags will be
deployed.
When airbags deploy, some smoke is released
accompanied by a loud noise. The smoke is
not harmful, but do not intentionally inhale
the smoke as it may cause temporary irrita-
tion to people with respiratory problems.
An inflated airbag will deflate quickly, so you
may not even notice that the airbag was
inflated.
Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver
from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle,
and does not prevent people from leaving the
vehicle.
N00417900177
The driver’s seat position sensor is attached
to the seat rail and provides the airbag control
unit with information on the seat’s fore-aft
position. The airbag control unit controls
deployment of the driver’s front airbag in
accordance with the information it receives
from this sensor.
If there is a problem involving the driver’s
seat position sensor, the SRS warning light in
the instrument panel will come on. Refer to
“SRS warning light/display” on page 4-34.
10- Side airbag modules
11- Curtain airbag modules
12- Side impact sensors
CAUTION
Airbags inflate very quickly and with great
force. In certain situations, contact with an
inflating airbag may cause small cuts, abra-
sions, and bruises.
Driver’s seat position sensor
WARNING
If the SRS warning light or warning dis-
play comes on, have the vehicle inspected
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer as soon as possible.
Please observe the following instructions
to ensure that the driver’s seat position
sensor can operate correctly.
• Adjust the seat to the correct position,
and sit well back against the seatback.
Refer to “Front seats” on page 4-3.
• Do not recline the seatback more than
necessary when driving.
• Do not place metallic objects or luggage
under the front seat.
If the vehicle is involved in a severe
impact, have the SRS sensors inspected by
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as
soon as possible.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag
Seat and restraint systems 4-33
4
N00418001417
The passenger’s seat occupant classification
sensor system is attached to the front passen-
ger seat cushion and provides the airbag con-
trol unit with information regarding the
occupant on the front passenger seat. The air-
bag control unit controls deployment of the
passenger’s front airbag in accordance with
the information it receives from this system.
The passenger’s front airbag will not deploy
in an impact when the system senses no occu-
pant on the front passenger’s seat or a child in
a child restraint system. In this case, the pas-
senger airbag off indicator will come on.
Refer to “Passenger’s airbag off indicator” on
page 4-33.
If there is a problem involving the passen-
ger’s seat occupant classification sensor sys-
tem, the SRS warning light in the instrument
panel will come on. Refer to “SRS warning
light/display” on page 4-34.
N00418101388
The passenger airbag off indicator is located
in the instrument panel.
Passenger’s seat occupant clas-
sification sensor system
WARNING
If any of the following conditions occur,
you should immediately have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer as soon as possible:
• The SRS warning light does not initially
come on when the ignition switch or the
operation mode is under the following
conditions.
[Except for vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key]
The ignition switch is in the “ON” or
“START” position.
[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]
The operation mode is in ON.
• The SRS warning light does not go out
after several seconds.
• The SRS warning light comes on while
you are driving.
To ensure that the passenger’s seat occu-
pant classification sensor system can sense
correctly, observe the following instruc-
tions. Failure to follow these instructions
can adversely affect the performance of
the passenger’s airbag system.
• Adjust the seat to the correct position,
and sit well back against the seatback.
Refer to “Front seats” on page 4-3.
• Do not recline the seatback more than
necessary.
• Never have more than one person (adult
or child) sitting on the seat.
• Do not place anything between the seat
and the floor console.
• When attaching a child restraint system,
secure it firmly.
• Do not place luggage or other objects on
the seat.
WARNING
• Do not use a seat cover or a cushion.
• Do not modify or replace the seat and
seat belt.
• Do not place luggage or other objects
under the seat.
• Do not place and use an electronic device
such as a computer on the seat.
• Do not place heavy objects on the seat or
stick pins, needles, or other objects into
it.
• Do not remove the seat cushion skin.
• If any liquid is spilled on the seat, wipe it
and dry the seat immediately.
If the vehicle is involved in a severe
impact, have the SRS sensors inspected by
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as
soon as possible.
Passenger’s airbag off indicator
WARNING
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag
4-34 Seat and restraint systems
4
The indicator normally comes on when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position
or the operation mode is put in ON, and goes
out a few seconds later. In the following situ-
ations, the indicator will stay on to show that
the passenger front airbag is not operational.
The passenger’s seat weight sensors sense
a weight of less than approximately 66
pounds (30 kg) on the front passenger
seat.
The front passenger’s seat is not occupied.
When the weight applied to the front passen-
ger seat is sensed to be approximately 66
pounds (30 kg) or greater, the indicator goes
out to show that the passenger’s front airbag
is operational.
N00408301677
Warning light
Warning display
The system checks itself every time the igni-
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position or
the operation mode is put in ON. The SRS
warning light will come on for several sec-
onds and then go out. This is normal and
means the system is working properly.
If there is a problem involving one or more of
the SRS components, the warning light will
come on and stay on. At the same time, the
warning display will appear on the informa-
tion screen in the multi information display.
The SRS warning light/display is shared by
the SRS airbag and the seat belt pre-tensioner
system.
WARNING
If any of the following conditions occur,
you should have the airbag system in your
vehicle inspected by an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as possi-
ble:
• The passenger’s airbag off indicator
comes on when an adult is sitting on the
front passenger seat.
• The passenger’s airbag off indicator does
not come on when the front passenger
seat is not occupied.
• The passenger’s airbag off indicator does
not come on when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position or the oper-
ation mode is put in ON.
• The passenger’s airbag off indicator
comes on and goes out repeatedly.
Do not attach any accessory to your vehi-
cle that makes the passenger’s airbag off
indicator difficult or impossible to see.
You must be able to see the passenger’s
airbag off indicator and verify the status
of the passenger’s airbag system.
SRS warning light/display
WARNING
If any of the following conditions occur,
there may be a problem with the SRS air-
bags and/or seat belt pre-tensioners, and
they may not function properly in a colli-
sion or may suddenly activate without a
collision:
• Even when the ignition switch or the
operation mode is in ON, the SRS warn-
ing light does not come on or it remains
on.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag
Seat and restraint systems 4-35
4
N00407900291
The driver’s airbag is located under the pad-
ded cover in the middle of the steering wheel.
The front passenger’s airbag is contained in
the instrument panel above the glove com-
partment. The driver’s airbag and the front
passenger’s airbag are designed to deploy at
the same time. However, the front passen-
ger’s airbag does not deploy when the front
passenger seat is not occupied or when the
weight sensor in the front passenger seat
senses a weight on the seat of less than
approximately 66 pounds (30 kg).
N00404500010
The driver’s knee airbag is located under the
steering wheel. The driver’s knee airbag is
designed to deploy at the same time as the
driver’s front airbag.
• The SRS warning light and/or the warn-
ing display comes on while driving.
The SRS airbags and seat belt pre-ten-
sioners are designed to help reduce the
risk of serious injury or death in certain
collisions. If either of the above conditions
occurs, immediately have your vehicle
checked by an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer.
Driver’s and passenger’s front
airbag system
WARNING
Driver’s knee airbag system
Driver
Front passenger
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag
4-36 Seat and restraint systems
4
N00408001674
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are
designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a
moderate to severe frontal impact. Typical
situations are shown in the illustration above.
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are
designed to deploy only in certain moderate
to severe frontal collisions within the shaded
area between the arrows in the illustration to
the right.
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag
will deploy if the impact to the vehicle’s main
structure is above a specific threshold level.
The threshold level is approximately 15 mph
(25 km/h) for a frontal collision straight into a
solid flat wall that does not bend or deform. If
the impact to the vehicle’s main structure is
below this threshold level, the front airbags
and driver’s knee airbag may not deploy. This
threshold level may also be higher if the vehi-
cle hits something that absorbs the impact,
either by bending or moving (for example,
another stationary vehicle, a pole or a guard
rail).
The beginning stage of airbag inflation is the
most forceful and can cause serious injury or
death if you are close to the deploying airbag.
Accordingly, it is important that you always
wear the available seat belt.
Deployment of front airbags
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when …
Head-on collision with a solid wall at speeds of approx.
15 mph (25 km/h) or higher
Moderate to severe frontal impact within the shaded
area between the arrows
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag
Seat and restraint systems 4-37
4
In certain types of front collisions, the front
airbags and driver’s knee airbag may not
deploy, even if the deformation of the body
seems to be large, because the vehicle’s body
structure is designed to absorb the impact and
deform in order to help protect the occupants.
Some typical situations where the front air-
bags and driver’s knee airbag may not deploy
are shown in the illustrations.
Because the front airbags and driver’s knee
airbag do not protect the occupant in all types
of frontal collisions, be sure to always wear
your seat belts properly.
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are
not designed to deploy in situations where
they cannot provide protection to the occu-
pants.
Typical situations are shown in the illustra-
tion.
Because the front airbags and driver’s knee
airbag do not protect the occupants in all
types of collisions, be sure to always wear the
seat belts properly.
The front airbags and driver’s
knee airbag MAY NOT DEPLOY
when …
The front airbags and driver’s
knee airbag ARE NOT
DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when
…
Collision with a utility pole, tree or other nar-
row object
Collision where the vehicle slides under the
rear body of a truck
Oblique frontal impact
Rear end collision to your vehicle
Side collision to your vehicle
Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag
4-38 Seat and restraint systems
4
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag
may deploy if the underside of the vehicle
suffers a moderate to severe impact (under-
carriage impact). Typical situations are
shown in the illustration.
Because the front airbags and driver’s knee
airbag may deploy in certain types of unex-
pected impacts, as shown in the illustrations,
and these unexpected impacts can move you
out of position, it is important to always wear
the seat belts properly. When worn properly,
seat belts can help maintain your distance
from the airbags when they begin to inflate.
The beginning stage of airbag inflation is the
most forceful and can cause serious injury or
death if you are close to the deploying airbag.
The front airbags and driver’s
knee airbag MAY DEPLOY when
…
WARNING
Do not attach anything to the steering
wheel’s padded cover, such as trim mate-
rial, badges, etc. These could strike and
injure an occupant if the airbag inflates.
Do not set anything on, or attach anything
to, the instrument panel above the glove
compartment. Such items could strike and
injure an occupant if the airbag inflates.
Collision with an elevated median/island or curb
Vehicle travels over a deep hole/pothole
Vehicle drives down a steep slope and hits the
ground
WARNING
Do not attach accessories to, or put them
in front of, the windshield. They could
restrict the airbag inflation, or strike and
injure an occupant, when the airbag
inflates.
Do not attach additional keys or accesso-
ries (hard, pointed or heavy objects) to the
ignition key. Such objects could prevent
the driver’s knee airbag from inflating
normally or could be propelled to cause
serious injury if the airbag inflates.
Do not attach accessories to the lower por-
tion of the driver’s side instrument panel.
Such objects could prevent the driver’s
knee airbag from inflating normally or
could be propelled to cause serious injury
if the airbag inflates.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag
Seat and restraint systems 4-39
4
N00408100391
The side airbags (A) are contained in the
driver and front passenger seatbacks.
The side airbag is designed to inflate only on
the side of the vehicle that is impacted, even
with no passenger in the front seat.
A label is attached to the seatbacks in vehi-
cles equipped with side airbags.
N00419201328
Your vehicle is equipped with a curtain airbag
in the front pillar, the rear pillar and the side
sections of the roof.
The curtain airbag is designed to inflate only
on the side of the vehicle that is impacted,
even with no passenger in the seat.
Also, when the airbag control unit detects
rollover of the vehicle, the curtain airbags
will deploy.
WARNING
Do not attempt to remove, install, disas-
semble or repair the SRS airbags.
Do not place objects, such as packages or
pets, between the airbags and the driver
or the front passenger. Such objects can
adversely affect airbag performance, or
cause serious injury or death when the
airbag deploys.
Immediately after airbag inflation, some
parts of the airbag system will be hot. Do
not touch them. You could otherwise be
burned.
The airbag system is designed to work
only once. After the airbags deploy, they
will not work again. They must promptly
be replaced and the entire airbag system
must be inspected by an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
Side airbag system Curtain airbag system
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag
4-40 Seat and restraint systems
4
WARNING
Side airbags and curtain airbags can
cause serious injury or death to anyone
too close to the airbag when it deploys. To
reduce the risk of injury from a deploying
side airbag or curtain airbag, driver and
front passenger must be properly
restrained and seated well back, upright,
and in the middle of the seat. Do not lean
against the door.
WARNING
In order to reduce the risk of injury from
a deploying side airbag, do not allow any
rear seat passengers to hold onto the back
of either front seat. Special care should be
taken with children.
Do not place any objects around the area
where the side airbags deploy. Such
objects can interfere with proper side air-
bag deployment, and cause injury during
deployment of the side airbag.
Do not place stickers, labels or additional
trim on the back of either front seat. They
can interfere with proper side airbag
deployment.
Do not attach a microphone (A) or any
other object around the part where the
curtain airbag (B) deploys, such as on the
windshield, side door glass or front and
rear pillars and roof side rail. When the
curtain airbag inflates, the microphone or
other object may be hurled with great
force or the curtain airbag may not inflate
correctly, resulting in death or serious
injury.
WARNING
WARNING
Do not put a hanger or any heavy or
pointed object on the coat hook. If the cur-
tain airbag was activated, any such item
could be propelled away with great force
and could prevent the curtain airbag from
inflating correctly. Hang clothes directly
on the coat hook (without using a hanger).
Make sure there are no heavy or sharp
objects in the pockets of clothes that you
hang on the coat hook.
Do not install seat covers or re-cover seats
that have side airbags. Covers can inter-
fere with proper side airbag deployment
and adversely affect side airbag perfor-
mance.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint
system in the front passenger seat. Rear-
facing child restraint systems MUST
ONLY be used in the rear seat.
Front-facing child restraint systems
should also be used ONLY in the rear seat.
If a front-facing child restraint system
must be used in the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible, and
make sure that the child stays in the child
restraint system, properly restrained and
away from the door.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag
Seat and restraint systems 4-41
4
N00408201621
The side airbag and curtain airbag are
designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a
moderate to severe side impact to the middle
of the passenger compartment.
The typical situation is shown in the illustra-
tion.
The seat belts in your vehicle are your pri-
mary means of protection in an accident. The
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) side
airbags and curtain airbags are designed to
provide additional protection. Therefore, for
your safety and the safety of all occupants, be
sure to always wear your seat belts properly.
In certain types of side collisions, the side air-
bag and curtain airbag may not deploy, even
if the deformation of the body seems to be
large, because the vehicle’s body structure is
designed to absorb the impact and to deform
in order to help protect the occupants. There
are also cases where the side airbag and cur-
tain airbag may not deploy at the same time,
depending on the location of the impact.
Some typical situations where the side air-
bags and curtain airbags may not deploy are
shown in the illustrations.
Because the side airbags and curtain airbags
do not protect the occupant in all types of side
collisions, be sure to always wear the seat
belts properly.
Do not allow a child to lean against or sit
close to the passenger door, even if the
child is seated in a child restraint system.
The child’s head should also not lean
against or be close to the section of the
seatback where the side airbag and cur-
tain airbag are located. It is dangerous if
the side airbag or curtain airbag deploys.
Failure to follow all of these instructions
could lead to serious injury or death to the
child.
Work done on or in the vicinity of the side
airbag or curtain airbag components
should be done only by an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. There is a risk
of a serious injury or death. Improper
work methods can cause accidental side
airbag or curtain airbag deployment, or
render a side airbag or curtain airbag
inoperable. Either of these situations
could result in serious injury or death.
WARNING
Deployment of side airbag and
curtain airbag
The side airbag and curtain airbag
ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY
when...
Moderate to severe impact to the middle of the
vehicle body’s side structure
When the vehicle detects rollover of the vehicle
(Curtain airbag only)
The side airbag and curtain airbag
MAY NOT DEPLOY when...
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag
4-42 Seat and restraint systems
4
The side airbag and curtain airbag are not
designed to deploy in situations where they
cannot provide protection to the occupants.
Typical situations are shown in the illustra-
tion.
Because the side airbags and curtain airbags
do not protect the occupant in all types of col-
lisions, be sure to always wear your seat belts
properly.
Side impact in an area away from the passenger
compartment
Motorcycle or other similar small vehicle
collision with the side of vehicle
Collision with a utility pole, tree or other
narrow object
The side airbag and curtain airbag
ARE NOT DESIGNED TO
DEPLOY when...
Oblique side impact
Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof (Side airbag
only)
Head-on collision
Rear end collision to your vehicle
Pitch end over end
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag
Seat and restraint systems 4-43
4
N00408501839
SRS servicing
WARNING
Any maintenance performed on or near
the components of the SRS should be per-
formed only by an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer. Do not permit anyone else
to do any service, inspection, maintenance
or repair on any SRS components or wir-
ing. Similarly, no part of the SRS should
ever be handled, removed or disposed by
anyone except an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer.
Improper work methods on the SRS com-
ponents or wiring could result in an acci-
dental airbag deployment or could make
the SRS inoperable. Either of these situa-
tions could result in serious injury or
death.
Do not modify your steering wheel or any
other SRS component or related vehicle
part. For example, replacement of the
steering wheel, or modifications to the
front bumper or body structure can
adversely affect SRS performance and
may lead to injury.
If your vehicle has received any damage,
you should have the SRS inspected by an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to
make sure it is in proper working order.
Do not modify your front seats, center pil-
lar or center console. Such modifications
can adversely affect SRS performance and
may lead to injury.
Also, if you discover any tear or open
seam in the seat fabric near the side air-
bag, have the seat inspected by an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
If you have found any scratch, crack or
damage to the portion of the front and
rear pillars and roof side rail, you should
have the SRS inspected by an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
NOTE
When you transfer ownership of the vehicle
to another person, we urge you to alert the
new owner that it is equipped with the SRS
and refer that owner to the applicable sec-
tions in this owner’s manual.
If you decide to junk or scrap your vehicle,
we urge you to first take it to an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer so that the SRS can
be made safe for disposal.
If any of the following parts needs to be
modified for use by a handicapped person,
the advanced airbag system will be greatly
affected. Please consult an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
• Driver’s seat
• Front passenger seat
• Front seat belt
WARNING
• Steering wheel
• Instrument panel
[For vehicles sold in U.S.A.]
To contact Mitsubishi Motors North
America, Inc.
call 1-888-648-7820 or write to:
Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc.
Customer Relations Department
P.O. Box 689040
Franklin, TN 37068
[For vehicles sold in Canada]
To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of
Canada, Inc.
call 1-888-576-4878 or write to:
Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Canada, Inc.
Customer Relations Department
P.O. Box 41009
4141 Dixie Road
Mississauga, ON L4W 5C9
[For vehicles sold in Puerto Rico]
To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of
Caribbean, Inc.
call 1-787-251-8715 or write to:
Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Caribbean,
Inc.
Customer Service Department
P.O. Box 192216
SAN JUAN PR 00919-2216
NOTE
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag
4-44 Seat and restraint systems
4
N00408601410
Occupant restraint warning labels for the SRS
are located in the vehicle as shown in the
illustration.
[For vehicles sold in Guam]
To contact Triple J Enterprises Inc.
call (671) 649-3673 or write to:
Triple J Enterprises, Inc.
P.O. Box 6066
TAMUNING
GUAM 96931
[For vehicles sold in Saipan]
To contact Triple J Motors
call (670) 234-7133 or write to:
Triple J Motors
P.O. Box 500487
SAIPAN, MP96950-0487
[For vehicles sold in American Samoa]
To contact Pacific Marketing Inc.
call 684 (699) 9140 or write to:
Pacific Marketing, Inc.
P.O. Box 698
PAGO PAGO,
AMERICAN SAMOA AS, 96799
Warning label
* - Located in the passenger’s side as well.
5
Features and controls
Break-in recommendations ..............................................................5-3
Keys .................................................................................................5-3
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system) ........................5-4
Keyless entry system (if so equipped)..............................................5-7
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key)
(if so equipped) .........................................................................5-13
Door locks ......................................................................................5-32
Power door locks ...........................................................................5-34
Child safety locks for rear door .....................................................5-35
Liftgate ...........................................................................................5-36
Inside liftgate release .....................................................................5-37
Theft-alarm system ........................................................................5-38
Power window control ...................................................................5-40
Sunshade (if so equipped)..............................................................5-43
Parking brake .................................................................................5-44
Steering wheel height and reach adjustment ..................................5-45
Inside rearview mirror ...................................................................5-45
Outside rearview mirrors ...............................................................5-47
Ignition switch ...............................................................................5-50
Starting the engine .........................................................................5-51
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) ..................................5-53
Electronically controlled 4WD system (if so equipped)................5-60
4-wheel drive operation .................................................................5-62
Inspection and maintenance following rough road operation ........5-64
Cautions on the handling of 4-wheel drive vehicles ......................5-65
Service brake .................................................................................5-65
Hill start assist ................................................................................5-66
Brake assist system ........................................................................5-68
Anti-lock braking system ..............................................................5-68
Electric power steering system (EPS) ...........................................5-70
Active stability control (ASC) .......................................................5-71
Cruise control ................................................................................5-74
Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM) (if so equipped) ......5-78
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (with Lane Change Assist)
(if so equipped) ..........................................................................5-86
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if so equipped) .........................5-92
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) (if so equipped) .........................5-96
Tire pressure monitoring system ...................................................5-99
Rear-view camera ........................................................................5-103
Instrument cluster ........................................................................5-105
Multi-information display ...........................................................5-107
Indicator light, warning light, and
information screen display list .................................................5-126
Indicators .....................................................................................5-143
Warning lights ..............................................................................5-144
Information screen display ..........................................................5-145
Combination headlights and dimmer switch ...............................5-146
Headlight leveling switch (if so equipped)..................................5-155
Turn signal lever .............................................
.............................5-156
Hazard warning flasher switch ....................................................5-156
Front fog light switch (if so equipped)........................................5-157
Wiper and washer switch .............................................................5-157
Electric rear window defogger switch .........................................5-162
Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped).............................5-163
Horn switch .................................................................................5-164
Link System .................................................................................5-164
5
Features and controls
USB input terminal ...................................................................... 5-164
Sun visors .................................................................................... 5-165
12 V power outlets ...................................................................... 5-166
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System (if so equipped)............... 5-167
Interior lights ............................................................................... 5-172
Storage spaces ............................................................................. 5-176
Cup holders ................................................................................. 5-178
Bottle holder ................................................................................ 5-179
Cargo area cover (if so equipped) ................................................ 5-179
Assist grips .................................................................................. 5-180
Coat hook .................................................................................... 5-180
Luggage hooks ............................................................................ 5-181
Break-in recommendations
Features and controls 5-3
5
N00508700330
Advanced automobile manufacturing tech-
niques permit you to operate your new vehi-
cle without requiring a long break-in period
of low-speed driving.
However, you can add to the future perfor-
mance and economy of your vehicle by
observing the following precautions during
the first 300 miles (500 km).
Drive your vehicle at moderate speeds during
the break-in period.
Avoid revving the engine.
Avoid rough driving such as sudden starts,
sudden acceleration, prolonged high-
speed driving and sudden braking. These
would have a detrimental effect on the
engine and also cause increased fuel and
oil consumption, which could result in
malfunction of the engine components. Be
particularly careful to avoid full accelera-
tion while in low shift position (low
gears).
Do not overload the vehicle. Stay within
the seating capacity. (Refer to “Cargo load
precautions” on page 6-10.)
Do not use this vehicle for trailer towing.
N00508801761
Two keys are provided. The keys fit all locks.
Keep one in a safe place as a spare key.
Two F.A.S.T.-keys and two emergency keys
are provided.
Keep one F.A.S.T.-key and one emergency
key in a safe place together as a set of spare
keys.
Break-in recommendations Keys
Type 1
1- Key for the electronic immobilizer and
keyless entry system
2- Key number plate
Type 2
1- F.A.S.T.-key
(with electronic immobilizer and keyless
entry system function)
2- Emergency key
3- Key number plate
NOTE
The key (except for the emergency key) is a
precision electronic device with a built-in
signal transmitter. Please observe the follow-
ing in order to prevent damage.
• Do not leave where it may be exposed to
heat caused by direct sunlight, such as on
top of the dashboard.
• Do not take the remote control transmitter
apart.
• Do not excessively bend the key or subject
it to strong impacts.
• Keep the remote control transmitter dry.
• Keep away from magnetic objects such as
key rings.
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)
5-4 Features and controls
5
N00509101918
[For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand
Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-
key)]
For information on operations for vehicles
equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Secu-
rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to
“Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter
(F.A.S.T.-key): Electronic immobilizer (Anti-
theft starting system)” on page 5-25.
[Except for vehicles equipped with the Free-
hand Advanced Security Transmitter
(F.A.S.T.-key)]
The electronic immobilizer is designed to sig-
nificantly reduce the possibility of vehicle
theft. The purpose of the system is to immo-
bilize the vehicle if an invalid start is
attempted. A valid start attempt can only be
achieved (subject to certain conditions) using
a key “registered” to the immobilizer system.
All of the keys provided with your new vehi-
cle have been programmed to the vehicle’s
electronics.
• Keep away from devices that produce mag-
netism, such as audio systems, computers
and televisions.
• Keep away from devices that emit strong
electromagnetic waves, such as cellular
phones, wireless devices and high fre-
quency equipment (including medical
devices).
• Do not clean with ultrasonic cleaners.
• Do not leave the key where it may be
exposed to high temperature or high humid-
ity.
If you lose your key, to prevent the theft of
the vehicle immediately contact an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
If you notify an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer of the key number, they can
make a new key. The key number is stamped
on the key number plate. Keep the key num-
ber plate in a safe place separate from the
key itself.
No keys other than those registered in
advance can be used to start the engine.
Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft
starting system)” on page 5-4.
Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security
Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key): “Electronic
immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)” on
page 5-25.
NOTE
When the theft-alarm is in the system opera-
tional status, the alarm operates if a door or
liftgate is opened after using the key, the
door lock knob or the power door lock
switch to unlock the vehicle.
The system does not enter the preparation
status if the keyless entry system or the
F.A.S.T.-key was not used to lock the vehi-
cle.
Electronic immobilizer
(Anti-theft starting system)
CAUTION
Do not make any alterations or additions to
the immobilizer system. Alterations or addi-
tions could cause failure of the immobilizer.
NOTE
NOTE
In the following cases, the vehicle may not
be able to recognize the registered ID code
from the key. This means the engine will not
start even when the key is turned to the
“START” position.
• When the key contacts a key ring or other
metallic or magnetic object
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)
Features and controls 5-5
5
Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle’s electronics can be used to start the
vehicle.
If you lose the key, you can order a key from
your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer by
referring to the key number.
To prevent vehicle theft, the ID code for the
vehicle keys must be changed.
Take your vehicle and all remaining keys to
your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to
have your ID code changed.
To add a key, you must already have 2 regis-
tered keys. You need to register the ID code
to the vehicle.
Registering the ID code can be done by your-
self (except for vehicles sold in Canada), or
by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
For you to register the ID code yourself, fol-
low the “Customer key programming” proce-
dure below.
If you choose to have your authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer register the ID
code, take your vehicle and all remaining
keys to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer.
N00562201181
You can program new keys to the system if
you have two valid (already registered) keys
and blank immobilizer key (specially cut for
• When the key grip contacts metal of
another key
• When the key contacts or is close to other
immobilizer keys (including keys of other
vehicles)
In cases like the above, move the offending
object(s) away from the key and turn the
key back to the “ACC” or “OFF” position.
Then try to start the engine again. If the
engine does not start, contact an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
The key may not operate properly when it is
near an object or facility that emits strong
electromagnetic waves.
NOTE
Electronic immobilizer is not compatible
with commercially available remote starting
systems. Use of commercially available
remote starting systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and a loss of security pro-
tection.
A system failure is suspected when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the “START” posi-
tion, and the engine does not start. In such a
case, contact an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer.
Replacement keys
NOTE
Additional keys
NOTE
You are provided with 2 keys, but you may
register up to 8 keys.
Customer key programming
(Except for vehicles sold in
Canada)
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)
5-6 Features and controls
5
your vehicle at your Mitsubishi Motors
dealer) by doing the following:
1. Insert the first valid key into the ignition
switch and turn the key to the “ON” posi-
tion for 5 seconds.
2. Turn the key to the “OFF” position and
remove the first key.
3. Within 30 seconds of removing the first
key, insert the second valid key into the
ignition and turn it to the “ON” position.
About 10 seconds later, the immobilizer
display will start to blink.
4. When the immobilizer display starts
blinking, turn the second valid key to the
“OFF” position and remove it. Within 30
seconds after doing so, insert a blank
immobilizer key into the ignition switch
and turn it to the “ON” position. Perform
this operation no more than 30 seconds
after the immobilizer display starts blink-
ing. When registration of the ID code is
complete, the immobilizer display will
come on for 30 seconds then go off. If an
error occurs, the blinking immobilizer dis-
play will go off during the procedure.
5. If you wish to register another key, per-
form the process again from step 1.
N00562301124
Your electronic immobilizer operates on a
radio frequency subject to Federal Communi-
cations Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehi-
cles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada
Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This
device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules
and Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS
standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions.
This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference.
This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE
Perform the operation when the interrupt dis-
play screen is not showing. The interrupt dis-
play screen may prevent you from seeing the
immobilizer display.
It is not possible to register a key if:
• the immobilizer display goes off during the
procedure
• the immobilizer display does not come on
within 30 seconds after step 4.
The procedure will be terminated automati-
cally if:
• a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses
from the moment when the first key is
turned to the “OFF” position to the moment
when the second key is turned to the “ON”
position
• a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses
from the moment when the second key is
turned to the “OFF” position to the moment
when the blank immobilizer key is turned
to the “ON” position
To use the new remote control transmitters, it
is necessary to register the key with both the
electronic immobilizer and keyless entry sys-
tem.
Also refer to “Keyless entry system: Cus-
tomer remote control transmitter program-
ming” on page 5-9.
General information
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the manufacturer for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
Keyless entry system (if so equipped)
Features and controls 5-7
5
N00509002158
Press the remote control transmitter buttons
to lock or unlock the doors and the liftgate.
It can also help you signal for attention by
setting off the panic alarm.
Press the LOCK button (1) to lock all the
doors and the liftgate.
The turn signal lights will also blink once.
Press the UNLOCK button (2) to unlock the
driver’s door only.
Within approximately 2 seconds, press the
UNLOCK button one more time to unlock all
the doors and liftgate.
The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds.
The turn signal lights will also blink twice.
The front side-marker and parking lights will
also turn on for approximately 30 seconds.
Refer to “Welcome light” on page 5-154.
N00543501114
The horn and turn signal lights of the keyless
entry system answerback function can be
changed as required. This is done with the
key removed from the ignition switch.
N00597000027
The answerback function can be set in the
following three ways.
Each time the answerback function is set, a
chime will sound to tell you the condition of
the answerback function.
To change the setting, refer to “Customizing
the keyless entry system” on page 5-11.
Keyless entry system (if so
equipped)
1-
LOCK ( ) button
2-
UNLOCK ( ) button
3- PANIC button
4- Indicator light
To lock
NOTE
If you press the LOCK button (1) twice the
horn will sound once.
To unlock
NOTE
The door and liftgate unlock function can be
set so that all doors and liftgate unlock when
the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed once.
Refer to “Setting the door and liftgate unlock
function” on page 5-8.
Answerback function
NOTE
The answerback function will not operate if
any of the doors are open.
Horn deactivation/reactivation
Number
of chimes
Condition
One chime The horn will not sound.
Two
chimes
The horn will sound.
Four
chimes
The horn will sound if the
LOCK button (1) is pressed
twice within 1 second.
Keyless entry system (if so equipped)
5-8 Features and controls
5
N00597100028
The answerback function can be turned ON
or OFF separately.
To change the setting, refer to “Customizing
the keyless entry system” on page 5-11.
N00543601245
The door and liftgate unlock function can be
set to the following two conditions.
Each time the door and liftgate unlock func-
tion is set, a chime will sound to tell you the
condition of the door and liftgate unlock
function.
To change the setting, refer to “Customizing
the keyless entry system” on page 5-11.
N00543701073
If you are near your vehicle and feel threat-
ened, you may activate the alarm to call atten-
tion as follows:
1. Press the PANIC button (3) for more than
1 second.
2. The headlights will blink on and off and
the horn will sound intermittently for
about 3 minutes.
3. To turn off the alarm, press any button on
the remote control transmitter.
N00543800051
Only remote control transmitters pro-
grammed with the vehicle’s electronics can
lock or unlock all doors and the liftgate.
If you lose the remote control transmitter, you
can order a remote control transmitter from
your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer by
referring to the key number.
To prevent vehicle theft, the ID code for the
remote control transmitter must be changed.
Take your vehicle and all remote control
transmitters to your authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer to have your ID code changed.
N00543900049
To add a remote control transmitter, you must
already have 1 registered remote control
transmitter.
Registering the ID code can be done by your-
self or by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer. For you to register the ID code your-
self, follow the “Customer remote control
transmitter programming” procedure below.
If you choose to have your authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer register the ID
code, take your vehicle and any remaining
Turn signal lights deactiva-
tion/reactivation
Number of
chimes
To lock To unlock
One chime One flash Two flashes
Two chimes One flash No flash
Three chimes No flash Two flashes
Four chimes Two flashes One flash
Five chimes No flash One flash
Six chimes Two flashes No flash
Seven
chimes
No flash No flash
Setting the door and liftgate
unlock function
Number
of chimes
Condition
One chime
When the UNLOCK button (2)
is pressed one time, all doors
and the liftgate unlock.
Two
chimes
When the UNLOCK button (2)
is pressed one time, only the
driver’s door unlocks. Within
approximately 2 seconds, press
the UNLOCK button one more
time to unlock all the doors and
the liftgate. [Factory setting]
Using the panic alarm
Replacement remote control
transmitters
Additional remote control
transmitters
Keyless entry system (if so equipped)
Features and controls 5-9
5
keys to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer.
N00544001262
You can program new remote control trans-
mitters to the system if you have one valid
(already registered) remote control transmit-
ter by doing the following:
1. Have available all (current and new)
remote control transmitters you wish to
register.
2. Using a valid (already registered) remote
control transmitter, activate the registra-
tion mode according to the following
steps. Steps ii to iv should be completed
within 8 seconds.
3. Within 60 seconds after step 2, complete
the following ID code registration opera-
tion using the next remote control trans-
mitter you wish to register within
4 seconds.
4. To register the ID codes of additional
remote control transmitters, repeat step 3
within 60 seconds after step 3.
5. If no ID code of a remote control trans-
mitter is registered within 60 seconds
after step 3, the registration mode is can-
celed and the normal mode returns.
NOTE
You are provided with 2 remote control
transmitters, but you may register up to 8
remote control transmitters.
Customer remote control trans-
mitter programming (Except
for vehicles sold in Canada)
i) Press and hold the
UNLOCK button (2)
for 4 to 8 seconds.
ii) While holding the
UNLOCK button (2),
press the LOCK but-
ton (1).
iii) While holding the
UNLOCK button (2),
release the LOCK but-
ton (1).
iv)
Release the UNLOCK
button (2).
NOTE
ID codes for all remote control transmitters
except for the transmitter used in step 2 are
erased and the answerback function (door is
locked and unlocked) informs you that the
registration mode has been activated.
i) Press both the LOCK
and UNLOCK but-
tons for 2 seconds.
ii) Release both the
LOCK and UNLOCK
buttons for 1 second.
iii) Press the UNLOCK
button. The answer-
back function informs
you that the ID code
registration of the
transmitter is com-
pleted.
NOTE
Be sure to press the buttons correctly when
performing the procedures. If you perform
the procedures incorrectly, the registered ID
code information could be deleted or the set-
tings could be changed unintentionally. If the
registered ID code information is deleted,
register the remote control transmitters
again.
For verification purposes, try to lock and
unlock the doors with the re-coded remote
control transmitters after the registration is
completed.
The indicator light (4) comes on each time a
button is pressed.
The keyless entry system does not work if
the key is in the ignition switch.
Keyless entry system (if so equipped)
5-10 Features and controls
5
The remote control transmitter can be used
from approximately 40 feet (12 m) away.
However, this distance may change if your
vehicle is near a TV transmitting tower, a
power station, or a radio station.
If the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed and no
doors or the liftgate are opened within
approximately 30 seconds, the doors and the
liftgate will automatically re-lock.
If the following conditions are observed after
pressing the LOCK (1) or UNLOCK (2) but-
ton on the remote control transmitter, the
battery in the remote control transmitter may
need to be replaced.
• The doors and the liftgate cannot be locked
or unlocked.
• The panic alarm cannot be operated.
• The indicator light (4) is dim or does not
come on.
If you lose your remote control transmitter,
please contact an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer for a replacement.
If you wish to obtain an additional remote
control transmitter, please contact an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. A maximum
of 8 remote control transmitters can be pro-
grammed for your vehicle.
NOTE
To use the new remote control transmitters, it
is necessary to register the key with both the
electronic immobilizer and keyless entry sys-
tem.
Also refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-
theft starting system): Customer key pro-
gramming” on page 5-5.
NOTE
Keyless entry system (if so equipped)
Features and controls 5-11
5
N00596500038
You can change the settings for the following functions according to your preferences. When changing a setting, perform the following steps.
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
2. Open the driver’s door and turn the combination headlights and dimmer switch to the “OFF” position.
3. Complete steps i to iv of the procedure. Steps ii to iv should be completed within 8 seconds.
Customizing the keyless entry system
Item Step i Step ii Step iii Step iv Notification
Horn deactiva-
tion/reactivation
Press and hold the
LOCK button (1) for 4 to
8 seconds.
While holding the
LOCK button (1), press
the UNLOCK button (2).
While holding the
LOCK button (1),
release the UNLOCK
button (2).
Release the LOCK but-
ton (1).
Chimes
Page 5-7
Turn signal lights
deactivation/reac-
tivation
Press and hold the
UNLOCK button (2) for
4 to 8 seconds.
While holding the
UNLOCK button (2),
press the LOCK button
(1).
While holding the
LOCK button (1),
release the UNLOCK
button (2).
Release the LOCK but-
ton (1).
Chimes
Page 5-8
Setting the door
and liftgate unlock
function
Press and hold the
LOCK button (1) for 4 to
8 seconds.
While holding the
LOCK button (1), press
the UNLOCK button (2).
While holding the
UNLOCK button (2),
release the LOCK button
(1).
Release the UNLOCK
button (2).
Chimes
Page 5-8
Keyless entry system (if so equipped)
5-12 Features and controls
5
N00546101140
Your keyless entry system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communica-
tions Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles
sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules
(For vehicles sold in Canada). This device
complies with part 15 of FCC Rules and
Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS stan-
dard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions.
This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference.
This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
N00544101306
1. Before replacing the battery, remove static
electricity from your body by touching a
metal grounded object.
2. Remove the screw (A) from the remote
control transmitter.
NOTE
Be sure to press the buttons correctly when performing the procedures. If you perform the procedures incorrectly, the registered ID code information could
be deleted or the settings could be changed unintentionally. If the registered ID code information is deleted, register the remote control transmitters again.
Refer to “Customer remote control transmitter programming (Except for vehicles sold in Canada)” on page 5-9.
General information
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the manufacturer for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
Procedure for replacing the
remote control transmitter bat-
tery
WARNING
Do not swallow a coin type battery.
• This product contains coin type battery.
If a coin type battery is swallowed, it can
cause severe internal burns and can lead
to death.
There have been cases where a swallowed
battery has caused severe internal burns
in just 2 hours.
• Keep new and used batteries away from
children.
• If the remote control transmitter case
does not close securely, stop using the
product and keep it away from children.
• If you think batteries might have been
swallowed or placed inside any part of a
person’s body, seek immediate medical
attention.
To prevent an explosion or leakage of
flammable liquid or gas:
• Do not replace the battery with an incor-
rect type. Replace only with the same or
equivalent type.
• Do not dispose of a battery into a fire or
incinerator, or by mechanically crushing
or cutting the battery.
• Do not use, store, or take a battery any
place where it may be exposed to
extremely high temperature or extremely
low air pressure.
CAUTION
When the remote control transmitter case is
opened, be careful to keep water, dust, etc.
out. Also, do not touch the internal compo-
nents.
Dispose of used battery according to regula-
tions for the disposal of battery.
WARNING
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)
Features and controls 5-13
5
3. With the Mitsubishi mark facing you,
insert the cloth-covered tip of a flat-blade
screwdriver into the notch in the remote
control transmitter case and use it to open
the case.
4. Remove the used battery.
5. Install a new battery with the + side (B)
up.
6. Close the remote control transmitter case
firmly.
7. Attach the screw (A) removed in step 2.
8. Check the keyless entry system to see that
it works.
N00503101235
The Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit-
ter (F.A.S.T.-key) enables the doors and the
NOTE
Be sure to perform the procedure with the
Mitsubishi mark facing you. If the
Mitsubishi mark is not facing you when you
open the remote control transmitter case, the
buttons may come out.
The Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) ID number, the Industry Canada (IC)
number and the model number (radio certifi-
cation) are indicated in the illustrated posi-
tion.
NOTE
You may purchase a replacement battery at
an electric appliance store.
An authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer can
replace the battery for you if you prefer.
Free-hand Advanced Secu-
rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-
key)
(if so equipped)
+ side
- side
Coin type
battery
CR1620
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)
5-14 Features and controls
5
liftgate to be locked and unlocked, the engine
to be started and the operation mode to be
changed simply by carrying it.
The F.A.S.T.-key can also be used as the
remote control transmitter of the keyless
entry system.
Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security
Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key): Keyless entry
system” on page 5-27.
The operations possible with the F.A.S.T.-
key can be modified as stated below.
(Keyless entry operations are possible.)
For details, contact an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
• Enabling only the locking and unlocking
of the doors and the liftgate
• Enabling only the starting of the engine
• Deactivating the F.A.S.T.-key
The F.A.S.T.-key must be carried by the
driver. The F.A.S.T.-key is required for
vehicle operations such as locking and
unlocking the doors and the liftgate,
starting the engine, and changing the
operation mode. When leaving the vehi-
cle, make sure you are carrying the
F.A.S.T.-key and then lock the vehicle.
WARNING
Individuals who use implantable pace-
makers or implantable cardiovascular-
defibrillators should keep away from the
external and internal transmitters. The
electromagnetic waves used in the
F.A.S.T.-key may affect the operation of
implantable pacemakers and implantable
cardiovascular-defibrillators.
A- External transmitter
B- Internal transmitter
WARNING
Individuals using other electro-medical
apparatus besides implantable pacemak-
ers and implantable cardiovascular-defi-
brillators should check with the
manufacturer of the apparatus to confirm
the effect of the electromagnetic waves
used by the F.A.S.T.-key. The electromag-
netic waves may affect the operations of
the electro-medical apparatus.
NOTE
The F.A.S.T.-key uses weak electromagnetic
waves.
In cases such as the following, operation
may be improper or unstable.
• The vehicle is near a facility that emits
strong electromagnetic waves, such as a TV
transmitting tower, a power station, a radio
station or an airport
• The key is carried together with other com-
munication devices such as cellular phones
or radios, or electrical appliances such as
computers
• The F.A.S.T.-key touches or is covered by a
metal object
• A keyless entry system is being used
nearby
• The battery of the F.A.S.T.-key is run down
• The vehicle is in a location with strong
electromagnetic waves or noise
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)
Features and controls 5-15
5
N00503201281
When a person enters the operating range of
the F.A.S.T.-key while carrying the F.A.S.T.-
key and presses the driver’s or front passen-
ger’s door lock/unlock switch, the liftgate
LOCK switch or the liftgate OPEN switch,
verification of the ID code is performed.
The doors and the liftgate can only be locked
and unlocked, the engine can only be started
and the operation mode can only be changed
when the ID codes of the vehicle and
F.A.S.T.-key match.
The operating range is within approximately
2.3 feet (70 cm) of the driver’s and front pas-
senger’s door lock/unlock switches, the lift-
gate LOCK switch and the liftgate OPEN
switch.
Use the emergency key in such circum-
stances.
Refer to “To operate without using the
F.A.S.T.-key” on page 5-25.
The F.A.S.T.-key is constantly performing
reception operations in its communication
with the vehicle. This means that the battery
is always running down, regardless of how
often the F.A.S.T.-key is used. The battery
life is approximately 1 to 3 years, depending
on the usage conditions.
Since the F.A.S.T.-key is constantly perform-
ing reception operations, the reception of
strong electromagnetic waves can accelerate
the running down of the battery. Do not place
near to electrical appliances such as televi-
sions or computers.
Operating range of the
F.A.S.T.-key
NOTE
NOTE
When the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key has run
down or there are strong electromagnetic
waves or noise in the area, the operating
range could decrease or operations could
become unstable.
Operating range for locking and
unlocking the doors and the lift-
gate
*: Front of the vehicle
:
Operating range
NOTE
Only the doors and the liftgate that detect the
F.A.S.T.-key can be locked and unlocked.
The system may not operate if the F.A.S.T.-
key is too close to the windshield, door win-
dows or liftgate.
Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is within approxi-
mately 2.3 feet (70 cm) of the driver’s or
front passenger’s door lock/unlock switch,
the liftgate LOCK switch or the liftgate
OPEN switch, the system may not operate if
the key is close to the ground or in a high
position.
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)
5-16 Features and controls
5
N00503300067
The operating range is the interior of the
vehicle.
N00503401498
While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key, press the
driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/unlock
switch (A), or the liftgate LOCK switch (B)
within the operating range to lock all the
doors and the liftgate.
The turn signal lights will blink once and the
buzzer will sound once.
Also refer to “Doors locks”, “Power door
locks” and “Liftgate” on pages 5-32, 5-34 and
5-36 respectively.
If the F.A.S.T.-key is within the operating
range, even a person not carrying the
F.A.S.T.-key can lock and unlock the doors
or the liftgate by pressing the driver’s or
front passenger’s door lock/unlock switch,
the liftgate LOCK switch or the liftgate
OPEN switch.
Operating range for starting the
engine and changing the opera-
tion mode
*: Front of the vehicle
:
Operating range
NOTE NOTE
Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is within the operat-
ing range, it may not be possible to start the
engine and change the operation mode if the
key is in a storage space such as the glove
compartment, on top of the instrument panel,
or in the door pocket or luggage compart-
ment.
Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is inside the vehicle,
it may not be possible to start the engine and
change the operation mode if the key is too
close to a door or door window.
To operate using the F.A.S.T.-
key
To lock
NOTE
On vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac-
tor switch, the outside rearview mirrors will
automatically retract when all doors and lift-
gate are locked using the driver’s or front
passenger’s door lock/unlock switch (A) or
the liftgate LOCK switch (B).
In cases such as the following, the F.A.S.T.-
key does not operate.
Driver’s and front passenger’s door lock/unlock
switches
Liftgate switches
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)
Features and controls 5-17
5
While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key within the
operating range, you can unlock the doors
and the liftgate by using the F.A.S.T.-key.
The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds.
The turn signal lights will blink twice and the
buzzer will sound twice.
Also refer to “Door locks”, “Power door
locks” and “Liftgate” on pages 5-32, 5-34 and
5-36 respectively.
Press the driver’s door lock/unlock switch
(A) to unlock only the driver’s door.
Within approximately 2 seconds, press the
driver’s door lock/unlock switch one more
time to unlock all the doors and the liftgate.
Press the front passenger’s door lock/unlock
switch (B) or the liftgate OPEN switch (C) to
unlock all the doors and the liftgate.
• There is a F.A.S.T.-key in the passenger
compartment
• A door or the liftgate is open or ajar
• The operation mode is not in OFF.
The liftgate OPEN switch (C) can be used to
confirm that the vehicle is locked properly.
Press the liftgate OPEN switch within
approximately 3 seconds of locking.
If the liftgate OPEN switch is pressed 3 sec-
onds or more after the vehicle is locked, the
doors and the liftgate are unlocked.
The time within which locking confirmation
is possible can be adjusted. See an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details.
To unlock
NOTE
NOTE
On vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac-
tor switch, the outside rearview mirrors will
automatically extend when the driver’s door
is unlocked using the driver’s lock/unlock
switch (A), front passenger’s door
lock/unlock switch (B) or the liftgate OPEN
switch (C).
Settings can be changed so that all doors and
the liftgate are unlocked automatically by
pressing the driver’s door lock/unlock switch
once.
Refer to “Setting the door and liftgate unlock
function” on page 5-29.
Driver’s door lock/unlock switch Front passenger’s door lock/unlock switch
Liftgate OPEN switch
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)
5-18 Features and controls
5
N00585700128
Locking the doors and liftgate using the
LOCK switch, the outside rearview mirrors
are retracted automatically.
Unlocking the doors and liftgate using the
UNLOCK switch, the outside rearview mir-
rors are extended automatically.
N00513501160
To prevent vehicle theft, no F.A.S.T.-keys
other than those registered in advance can be
used to start the engine. (Electronic immobi-
lizer function)
NOTE
If the doors and the liftgate are unlocked
using the driver’s or front passenger’s door
lock/unlock switch and no doors or the lift-
gate are opened within approximately
30 seconds, the doors and the liftgate will
automatically re-lock.
The amount of time after unlocking until the
vehicle relocks automatically can be
adjusted. See an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer for details.
The doors and the liftgate cannot be
unlocked by using the liftgate OPEN switch
for approximately 3 seconds after locking.
The time within which locking confirmation
is possible can be adjusted. See an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details.
The F.A.S.T.-key does not operate when the
vehicle operation mode is not in OFF.
Functions settings can be modified as stated
below.
See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
for details.
• Activating the operation confirmation func-
tion (blinking of the turn signal lights) only
during locking, or only during unlocking.
• Deactivating the operation confirmation
function (blinking of the turn signal lights)
and buzzer.
• Modifying the number of blinks in the
operation confirmation function (blinking
of the turn signal lights).
• Making the buzzer sound when the
F.A.S.T.-key is removed from the passenger
compartment when all the doors and the
liftgate are closed.
Operation of the outside rear-
view mirrors (Vehicles
equipped with the mirror
retractor switch)
To retract
To extend
NOTE
Functions can be modified as stated below.
Please consult an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer.
NOTE
• Automatically extend when the driver’s
door is closed and the operation mode is put
in ON.
In addition, automatically retract when the
operation mode is put in OFF or ACC, and
the driver’s door is then opened.
• Automatically extend when the vehicle
speed reaches approximately 19 mph
(30 km/h).
• Deactivate the automatic extension func-
tion.
The outside rearview mirrors can be
retracted or extended by the following opera-
tions, even if changing to the any of above.
After pressing the LOCK button to lock the
doors and liftgate, if the LOCK button is
pressed again twice in a row within approxi-
mately 30 seconds, the outside rearview mir-
rors will retract.
After pressing the UNLOCK button to
unlock the doors and liftgate, if the
UNLOCK button is pressed again twice in a
row within approximately 30 seconds, the
outside rearview mirrors will extend again.
Engine switch
NOTE
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)
Features and controls 5-19
5
While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key, the engine
switch can be used to start the engine.
The indicator light on the engine switch turns
off.
The operation mode cannot be put in OFF
when the selector lever is in any position
other than the “P” (PARK) position.
Allows operation of electrical accessories.
The indicator light on the engine switch illu-
minates orange.
All electrical accessories can be used.
The indicator light on the engine switch illu-
minates green.
The indicator light turns off when the engine
is running.
N00568001165
If you press the engine switch without press-
ing the brake pedal while the vehicle is sta-
tionary, you can change the operation mode
in the order of OFF, ACC, ON, OFF.
CAUTION
The indicator light (A) will flash orange
when there is a problem or malfunction in
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter.
Never drive if the indicator light on the
engine switch is flashing orange. Immedi-
ately contact your authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer.
If the engine switch operation is not smooth
and feels like it is sticking, do not operate the
switch.
Immediately contact an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
NOTE
When operating the engine switch, press the
switch all the way in. If the switch is not
fully pressed, the engine may not start or the
operation mode may not change. If the
engine switch is pressed correctly, there is no
need to hold the engine switch down.
When the battery in the F.A.S.T.-key has
worn out, or the F.A.S.T.-key is out of the
vehicle, a warning display will appear.
Operation mode of the engine
switch and its function
OFF
ACC
ON
NOTE
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code
which the F.A.S.T.-key sends must match the
one registered to the immobilizer computer.
(Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft
starting system)” on page 5-25)
Changing the operation mode
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)
5-20 Features and controls
5
N00568101111
After approximately 30 minutes has elapsed
with the operation mode in ACC, the function
automatically cuts out the power for the audio
system and other electric devices that can be
operated with that mode.
When the engine switch is pressed while the
operation mode is in ACC, the power is sup-
plied again to those devices.
N00503500173
With the F.A.S.T.-key, warnings are given
through buzzers and displays on the informa-
tion screen in the multi-information display
in order to prevent mistaken operations or
vehicle theft.
When a warning operates, be sure to check
the vehicle and the F.A.S.T.-key. A warning is
also displayed if there is a problem in the
F.A.S.T.-key.
If the following warning displays, contact an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
CAUTION
When the engine is not running, put the oper-
ation mode in OFF. Leaving the operation
mode in ON or ACC for a long time when
the engine is not running may cause the bat-
tery to be discharged, making it impossible
to start the engine.
When the battery is disconnected, the current
operation mode is memorized. After recon-
necting the battery, the memorized mode is
selected automatically. Before disconnect-
ing the battery for repair or replacement,
make sure to put the operation mode in OFF.
Be careful if you are not sure which opera-
tion mode the vehicle is in when the battery
is run down.
The operation mode cannot be changed from
OFF to ACC or ON if the F.A.S.T.-key is not
detected to be in the vehicle. Refer to “Oper-
ating range for starting the engine and
changing the operation mode” on page 5-16.
When the F.A.S.T.-key is in the vehicle and
the operation mode does not change from
OFF to ACC or ON, then the battery in the
F.A.S.T.-key may need to be replaced.
Refer to “Warning activation” on page 5-20.
NOTE
If the operation mode cannot be changed to
OFF, perform the following procedure.
1. Move the selector lever to the “P”
(PARK) position, and then change the
operation mode to OFF.
2. One of the other causes could be low bat-
tery voltage. If this occurs, the keyless
entry system and the F.A.S.T.-key opera-
tion will also not operate. Contact an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
ACC power auto-cutout function
CAUTION
NOTE
It is possible to modify functions as follows:
• The time until the power cuts out can be
changed to approximately 60 minutes.
• The ACC power auto-cutout function can
be deactivated.
For details, we recommend you to consult an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
When the ACC power is automatically cut
out, you cannot lock and unlock the doors
using the keyless entry system or the
F.A.S.T.-key operation.
Warning activation
There is a problem in the
F.A.S.T.-key
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)
Features and controls 5-21
5
If the following warnings display, the display
goes off if the correct action is taken.
The ID codes of the F.A.S.T.-key and the
vehicle cannot be verified
A door or the liftgate cannot be locked
even when the driver’s or front passen-
ger’s door lock/unlock switch, or the lift-
gate LOCK switch is pressed.
N00559801183
When the operation mode in any mode other
than OFF, if the door(s) are opened, the
F.A.S.T.-key is removed from the passenger
compartment, and then the door(s) are closed,
the warning display is displayed and the
buzzer sounds 4 times as a warning since it’s
impossible to verify the ID codes of the
F.A.S.T.-key and vehicle.
N00559900116
When the operation mode is in OFF, the
F.A.S.T.-key is left in the passenger compart-
ment, all the doors and the liftgate are closed,
and someone tries to lock the vehicle by
pressing the driver’s or front passenger’s door
lock/unlock switch, or the liftgate LOCK
switch, the warning display is displayed and
the buzzer sounds for about 3 seconds as a
Put the operation mode in OFF
and then start the engine again.
If the warning is not cancelled,
there is a fault in the electronic
immobilizer (Anti-theft start-
ing system).
Please contact an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
Someone may be carrying a
F.A.S.T.-key with a different
ID code, or the F.A.S.T.-key
may not be within the operat-
ing range
Refer to “F.A.S.T.-key take-out
monitoring system” on page
5-21.
The battery of the F.A.S.T.-key
is run down
Refer to “Key lock-in preven-
tion system” on page 5-21.
Refer to “Door ajar prevention
system” on page 5-22.
Refer to “Operation mode OFF
reminder system” on page
5-22.
F.A.S.T.-key take-out monitoring
system
NOTE
The F.A.S.T.-key take-out monitoring system
does not function if the F.A.S.T.-key is
removed through a window without opening
a door.
This setting can be changed.
See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
for details.
The warning may display even if the
F.A.S.T.-key is in the operating range for
starting the engine and changing the opera-
tion mode. The surrounding environment or
electromagnetic waves may make it impossi-
ble to verify the ID codes of the F.A.S.T.-key
and vehicle.
Key lock-in prevention system
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)
5-22 Features and controls
5
warning, and the doors and the liftgate cannot
be locked.
N00560000117
When the operation mode is in OFF, and
someone tries to lock the vehicle by pressing
the driver’s or front passenger’s door
lock/unlock switch, or the liftgate LOCK
switch while one of the doors or the liftgate is
not fully closed, the warning display is dis-
played and the buzzer sounds for about 3 sec-
onds as a warning, and the doors and the
liftgate cannot be locked.
N00560101173
When the operation mode is in any mode
other than OFF, and someone tries to lock the
vehicle by pressing the driver’s or front pas-
senger’s door lock/unlock switch, or the lift-
gate LOCK switch, the warning display is
displayed and the buzzer sounds for about 3
seconds as a warning, and the doors and the
liftgate cannot be locked.
N00514601429
The operation mode can be in any mode
to start the engine.
The starter motor will be turning for up to
approximately 15 seconds if the engine
switch is released at once. Pressing the
engine switch again while the starter
motor is still turning will stop the starter
motor. The starter motor will be turning
for up to approximately 30 seconds while
the engine switch is pressed.
If the engine does not start, wait for a
while and then attempt to start the engine
again. Trying repeatedly with the starter
motor still turning will damage the starter
mechanism.
If the engine will not start because the bat-
tery is weak or discharged, refer to
“Jump-starting the engine” on page 8-2
for instructions.
A longer warm up period will only con-
sume extra fuel.
The engine is warmed up enough for driv-
ing when the bar graph of engine coolant
temperature display starts to move. Refer
to “Interrupt display screen (With ignition
switch or operation mode in ON)” on
page 5-115.
Your vehicle is equipped with an electroni-
cally controlled fuel injection system. This is
a system that automatically controls fuel
injection. There is usually no need to depress
Door ajar prevention system
Operation mode OFF reminder
system
Starting and stopping the
engine
Tips for starting
WARNING
Never run the engine in a closed or poorly
ventilated area any longer than is needed
to move your vehicle out of the area. Car-
bon monoxide gas, which is odorless and
extremely poisonous, could build up and
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION
Do not push-start the vehicle.
Do not run the engine at high rpms or drive
at high speeds until the engine has had a
chance to warm up.
Starting the engine
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)
Features and controls 5-23
5
the accelerator pedal when starting the
engine.
To prevent battery drain, wait a few seconds
between attempts to restart the engine.
1. Make sure all occupants are properly
seated with seat belts fastened.
2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal down
firmly with your right foot.
4. Make sure the selector lever is in the “P”
(PARK) position.
5. Press the engine switch.
6. Confirm that all warning lights and warn-
ing displays are functioning properly.
After several attempts, you may experience
that the engine still does not start.
1. Make sure that all electric devices, such
as lights, air conditioning blower and rear
window defogger, are turned off.
2. While depressing the brake pedal, press
the accelerator pedal halfway and hold it
there, then crank the engine. Release the
accelerator pedal, immediately after the
engine starts.
3. If the engine still will not start, the engine
could be flooded with too much gasoline.
While depressing the brake pedal, push
the accelerator pedal all the way down
and hold it there, then press the engine
switch to crank the engine. If the engine
does not start after 5 to 6 seconds, push
the engine switch to stop cranking the
engine, and release the accelerator pedal.
Put the operation mode in OFF. Wait a
few seconds, and then press the engine
switch to crank the engine again while
depressing the brake pedal, but do not
push the accelerator pedal. If the engine
fails to start, repeat these procedures. If
the engine still will not start, contact your
local Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
facility of your choice for assistance.
Startability of the engine with an ambient
temperature of -22 °F (-30 °C) or lower
When the ambient temperature is -22 °F (-30
°C) or lower, it may not be possible to start
from a standstill even with the selector lever
in the “D” (DRIVE) or “R” (REVERSE)
position.
This phenomenon occurs because the trans-
axle has not warmed up sufficiently; it does
not indicate a problem. If this occurs, place
the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position
and let the engine idle for at least 10 minutes.
NOTE
After the engine has not started for a while,
the brake pedal effort needed to start the
engine may become greater. If this occurs,
depress the brake pedal more firmly than
usual.
NOTE
The engine can only be started when the
selector lever is in the “P” (PARK) or “N”
(NEUTRAL) position.
For safety reasons, the engine should be
started when the selector lever is in the “P”
(PARK) position in which the driving wheels
lock.
NOTE
Minor noises may be heard on engine start-
up. These will disappear as the engine warms
up.
When the engine is hard to start
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)
5-24 Features and controls
5
The transaxle will warm up, and you will be
able to start normally.
Do not leave the vehicle during warm-up
operation.
N00568201066
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Fully engage the parking brake while
depressing the brake pedal.
3. Move the selector lever to the “P”
(PARK) position, and then press the
engine switch to stop the engine.
N00568301155
Insert the F.A.S.T.-key into the key slot in the
glove box. Starting the engine and changing
the operation mode should be now possible.
Remove the F.A.S.T.-key from the key slot
after starting the engine or changing the oper-
ation mode.
Stopping the engine
WARNING
Do not operate the engine switch while
driving except in an emergency. If the
engine is stopped while driving, the brake
servomechanism will cease to function and
braking efficiency will deteriorate. Also,
the power steering system will not func-
tion and it will require greater manual
effort to operate the steering. This could
result in a serious accident.
NOTE
If you have to bring the engine to an emer-
gency stop while driving, press and hold the
engine switch for 3 seconds or more, or press
it quickly 3 times or more. The engine will
stop and the operation mode will go to ACC.
Do not stop the engine with the selector lever
in any position other than the “P” (PARK)
position. If the engine is stopped with the
selector lever in any position other than the
“P” (PARK) position, the operation mode
will go to ACC rather than OFF.
Put the operation mode in OFF after placing
the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) posi-
tion.
If the F.A.S.T.-key is not operat-
ing properly
NOTE
NOTE
Do not insert into the key slot anything other
than the F.A.S.T.-key. This could cause dam-
age or a malfunction.
Remove the object or additional key from the
F.A.S.T.-key before inserting the key into the
key slot. The vehicle may not be able to
receive the registered ID code from the regis-
tered key. Therefore, the engine may not start
and the operation mode may not change.
The F.A.S.T.-key is fixed in the key slot
when inserted in the illustrated direction.
Simply pull out the key to remove it from the
key slot.
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)
Features and controls 5-25
5
If the operation mode is in OFF and the
driver’s door is opened with the F.A.S.T.-key
in the key slot, the outer buzzer sounds for
approximately 3 seconds and the inner buzzer
sounds for approximately 1 minute. A warn-
ing display also appears for approximately
1 minute to remind you to remove the key.
N00514800017
N00515200106
The emergency key is built into the F.A.S.T.-
key.
When the F.A.S.T.-key cannot be used, such
as when the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key or the
vehicle has run down, the emergency key can
be used to lock and unlock the driver’s door.
To use the emergency key (A), unlock the
lock knob (B) and remove it from the
F.A.S.T.-key (C).
Turn the emergency key toward the front of
the vehicle to lock the door. After checking
that the door is locked, turn the emergency
key back to the center and remove it.
N00529601153
The electronic immobilizer is designed to sig-
nificantly reduce the possibility of vehicle
theft. The purpose of the system is to immo-
bilize the vehicle if an invalid start is
attempted. A valid start attempt can only be
achieved (subject to certain conditions) using
a F.A.S.T.-Key “registered” to the immobi-
lizer system.
All of the keys provided with your new vehi-
cle have been programmed to the vehicle’s
electronics.
F.A.S.T.-key reminder
To operate without using the
F.A.S.T.-key
Emergency key
NOTE
Only use the emergency key in an emer-
gency. When the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key
has run down, replace the battery as soon as
possible and use it as a F.A.S.T.-key again.
After using the emergency key, be sure to
reinsert it into the F.A.S.T.-key.
Locking and unlocking the driver’s door
1- Insert or remove the emergency key
2- Lock
3- Unlock
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-
theft starting system)
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)
5-26 Features and controls
5
N00561000042
Only the F.A.S.T.-keys that have been pro-
grammed to the vehicle’s electronics can be
used to start the vehicle.
If you lose the F.A.S.T.-key, you can order a
F.A.S.T.-key from your authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer by referring to the key number.
To prevent vehicle theft, take your vehicle
and the remaining F.A.S.T.-keys to an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to have the ID
codes reprogrammed.
N00561100014
To add a F.A.S.T.-key, you must already have
2 registered F.A.S.T.-keys. You need to regis-
ter the ID code to the vehicle.
Registering the ID code can be done by your
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Or it
can be done by yourself (except for vehicles
sold in Canada).
For you to register the ID code yourself, fol-
low the “Customer F.A.S.T.-key program-
ming” procedure below.
If you choose to have your authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer register the ID
code, take your vehicle and all remaining
F.A.S.T.-keys to your authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer.
N00561201328
You can program new F.A.S.T.-keys to the
system if you have two valid (already regis-
tered) F.A.S.T.-keys and blank (not regis-
tered) F.A.S.T.-key.
For F.A.S.T.-key programming, follow the
procedures below.
1. Open the driver’s door.
2. While carrying the first valid F.A.S.T.-
key, put the operation mode in ON. (Per-
form the following procedure within
30 seconds.)
3. Insert the new F.A.S.T.-key into the key
slot.
4. With the first valid F.A.S.T.-key, press
and hold the UNLOCK button for 4 to 8
seconds and then press and hold the
LOCK button during this time.
5. Within 8 seconds of pressing the LOCK
button in step 4, release the LOCK button
first, and then release the UNLOCK but-
ton. (Perform the following procedure
within 30 seconds.)
6. With the second valid F.A.S.T.-key, press
and hold the UNLOCK button for 4 to 8
seconds and then press and hold the
LOCK button during this time.
NOTE
If the engine does not start, contact an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
Replacement F.A.S.T.-keys
Additional F.A.S.T.-keys
NOTE
You are provided with 2 F.A.S.T.-keys, but
you may register up to 4 F.A.S.T.-keys.
You can obtain blank F.A.S.T.-keys specially
cut for your vehicle from your Mitsubishi
Motors dealer.
Customer F.A.S.T.-key program-
ming (Except for vehicles sold in
Canada)
NOTE
Keep the driver’s door open until F.A.S.T.-
key programming is finished. Do not open or
close other doors.
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)
Features and controls 5-27
5
7. Within 8 seconds of pressing the LOCK
button in step 6, release the LOCK button
first, and then release the UNLOCK but-
ton. The immobilizer display on the infor-
mation screen in the multi-information
display will blink. (Perform the following
procedure within 20 seconds.)
When registration of ID code is complete,
the buzzer will sound 3 times and the
immobilizer display will come on for 30
seconds.
If an error occurs, F.A.S.T.-key program-
ming will be terminated and the buzzer
will sound for 3 seconds.
8. If you wish to register another F.A.S.T.-
key, repeat the process from step 1 after
the operation mode is put in OFF.
9. When all F.A.S.T.-keys are registered,
remove the F.A.S.T.-key from the key
slot.
N00515501395
Press the remote control transmitter buttons
to lock or unlock the doors and the liftgate.
It can also help you signal for attention by
setting off the panic alarm.
Press the LOCK button (1) to lock all the
doors and the liftgate.
The turn signal lights will also blink once.
NOTE
F.A.S.T.-key programming will be termi-
nated if the operation mode is put in OFF
before the immobilizer display starts blink-
ing.
NOTE
The immobilizer display will go off immedi-
ately if the operation mode is put in OFF.
Perform the operation when the interrupt dis-
play screen is not showing. The interrupt dis-
play screen may prevent you from seeing the
immobilizer display.
It is not possible to register a F.A.S.T.-key if
the immobilizer display goes off during the
procedure.
Keyless entry system
1-
LOCK ( ) button
2-
UNLOCK ( ) button
3- PANIC button
4- Operation indicator light
NOTE
On vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac-
tor switch, the outside rearview mirrors will
automatically retract or extend when the
doors and the liftgate are locked or unlocked
using the remote control transmitter buttons.
Refer to “Features and controls: Outside
rearview mirrors” on page 5-47.
To lock
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)
5-28 Features and controls
5
Press the UNLOCK button (2) to unlock the
driver’s door only.
To unlock all doors and the liftgate, press the
UNLOCK button two times within a 2 second
time period.
The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds.
The turn signal lights will also blink twice.
The front side-marker and parking lights will
also turn on for approximately 30 seconds.
Refer to “Welcome light” on page 5-154.
N00544501111
The horn and turn signal lights of the keyless
entry system answerback function can be
changed as required. This is done with the
operation mode in OFF.
N00597200029
The answerback function can be set in the
following three ways.
Each time the answerback function is set, a
chime will sound to tell you the condition of
the answerback function.
To change the setting, refer to “Customizing
the Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter
(F.A.S.T.-key)” on page 5-30.
N00597300020
The answerback function from the turn signal
lights can be turned ON or OFF separately.
To change the setting, refer to “Customizing
the Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter
(F.A.S.T.-key)” on page 5-30.
NOTE
On vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac-
tor switch, the outside rearview mirrors will
automatically retract when the LOCK button
(1) is pressed.
If you press the LOCK button (1) twice, the
horn will sound once.
To unlock
NOTE
On vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac-
tor switch, the outside rearview mirrors will
automatically extend when the UNLOCK
button (2) is pressed.
The door and liftgate unlock function can be
set so that all doors and the liftgate unlock
when the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed
once.
Refer to “Setting the door and liftgate unlock
function” on page 5-29.
If the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed and no
doors or the liftgate are opened within
approximately 30 seconds, the doors and the
liftgate will automatically re-lock.
Answerback function
Horn deactivation/reactivation
Number
of chimes
Condition
One chime The horn will not sound.
NOTE
Two
chimes
The horn will sound.
Four
chimes
The horn will sound if the
LOCK button (1) is pressed
twice within 1 second.
Turn signal lights deactivation/reac-
tivation
Number of
chimes
To lock To unlock
One chime One flash Two flashes
Two chimes One flash No flash
Three chimes No flash Two flashes
Four chimes Two flashes One flash
Five chimes No flash One flash
Six chimes Two flashes No flash
Number
of chimes
Condition
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)
Features and controls 5-29
5
N00597400021
The buzzer answerback function can be
turned ON or OFF as required.
N00544601255
The door and liftgate unlock function can be
set to the following two conditions.
Each time the door and liftgate unlock func-
tion is set, a chime will sound to tell you the
condition of the door and liftgate unlock
function.
To change the setting, refer to “Customizing
the Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter
(F.A.S.T.-key)” on page 5-30.
N00544701184
If you are near your vehicle and feel threat-
ened, you can activate the alarm to call atten-
tion as follows:
1. Press the PANIC button (3) for more than
1 second.
2. The headlights will blink on and off and
the horn will sound intermittently for
about 3 minutes.
3. To turn off the alarm, press any button on
the remote control transmitter.
Seven
chimes
No flash No flash
Buzzer deactivation/reactivation
Setting the door and liftgate
unlock function
Number
of chimes
Condition
One chime
When the UNLOCK button
(2), driver’s or front passen-
ger’s door lock/unlock switch,
or liftgate open switch is
pressed one time, all doors and
the liftgate unlock.
Number of
chimes
To lock To unlock
Two
chimes
When the UNLOCK button (2)
or the driver’s door
lock/unlock switch is pressed
one time, only the driver’s door
unlocks. Within approximately
2 seconds, press the UNLOCK
button or the driver’s door
lock/unlock switch one more
time to unlock all the doors and
the liftgate. [Factory setting]
Using the panic alarm
Number
of chimes
Condition
NOTE
The indicator light (4) comes on each time a
button is pressed.
The F.A.S.T.-key can be used from about 40
feet (12 m) away. However, this distance
may change if your vehicle is near a TV
transmitting tower, a power station, or a
radio station.
If the following conditions are observed after
pressing the LOCK (1) or UNLOCK (2) but-
ton on the remote control transmitter, the
buttery in the F.A.S.T.-key may need to be
replaced.
• The doors and the liftgate cannot be locked
or unlocked.
• The panic alarm cannot be operated.
• The indicator light (4) is dim or does not
come on.
If you lose your F.A.S.T.-key, please contact
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for a
replacement.
If you wish to obtain an additional F.A.S.T.-
key, please contact an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer. A maximum of four F.A.S.T.-
key can be programmed for your vehicle.
To use the new remote control transmitters, it
is necessary to register the key with the elec-
tronic immobilizer and keyless entry system.
Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft
starting system): Customer F.A.S.T.-key pro-
gramming” on page 5-26.
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)
5-30 Features and controls
5
N00596600039
You can change the settings for the following functions according to your preferences. When changing a setting, perform the following steps.
1. Put the operation mode in OFF.
2. Open the driver’s door and turn the combination headlights and dimmer switch to the “OFF” position.
3. Complete steps i to iv of the procedure. Steps ii to iv should be completed within 8 seconds.
Customizing the Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key)
Item Step i Step ii Step iii Step iv Notification
Horn deactiva-
tion/reactivation
Press and hold the
LOCK button (1) for 4 to
8 seconds.
While holding the
LOCK button (1), press
the UNLOCK button (2).
While holding the
LOCK button (1),
release the UNLOCK
button (2).
Release the LOCK but-
ton (1).
Chimes
Page 5-7
Turn signal lights
deactivation/reac-
tivation
Press and hold the
UNLOCK button (2) for
4 to 8 seconds.
While holding the
UNLOCK button (2),
press the LOCK button
(1).
While holding the
LOCK button (1),
release the UNLOCK
button (2).
Release the LOCK but-
ton (1).
Chimes
Page 5-8
Setting the door
and liftgate unlock
function
Press and hold the
LOCK button (1) for 4 to
8 seconds.
While holding the
LOCK button (1), press
the UNLOCK button (2).
While holding the
UNLOCK button (2),
release the LOCK button
(1).
Release the UNLOCK
button (2).
Chimes
Page 5-29
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)
Features and controls 5-31
5
N00562001105
N00562101223
1. Before replacing the battery, remove static
electricity from your body by touching a
metal grounded object.
2. Remove the emergency key from the key.
Refer to “Emergency key” on page 5-25.
3. With the Mitsubishi mark facing you,
insert the cloth-covered tip of a flat-blade
screwdriver into the notch in the case and
use it to open the case.
NOTE
Be sure to press the buttons correctly when performing the procedures. If you perform the procedures incorrectly, the settings could be changed uninten-
tionally.
General information
Your F.A.S.T.-key operates on a radio fre-
quency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles sold
in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules (For
vehicles sold in Canada). This device com-
plies with part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry
Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions.
•This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference.
•This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the manufacturer for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
Procedure for replacing the
remote control transmitter bat-
tery
WARNING
Do not swallow a coin type battery.
• This product contains coin type battery.
If a coin type battery is swallowed, it can
cause severe internal burns and can lead
to death.
There have been cases where a swallowed
battery has caused severe internal burns
in just 2 hours.
• Keep new and used batteries away from
children.
• If the remote control transmitter case
does not close securely, stop using the
product and keep it away from children.
• If you think batteries might have been
swallowed or placed inside any part of a
person’s body, seek immediate medical
attention.
To prevent an explosion or leakage of
flammable liquid or gas:
• Do not replace the battery with an incor-
rect type. Replace only with the same or
equivalent type.
• Do not dispose of a battery into a fire or
incinerator, or by mechanically crushing
or cutting the battery.
• Do not use, store, or take a battery any
place where it may be exposed to
extremely high temperature or extremely
low air pressure.
CAUTION
When the remote control transmitter case is
opened, be careful to keep water, dust, etc.
out. Also, do not touch the internal compo-
nents.
Dispose of used battery according to regula-
tions for the disposal of battery.
WARNING
Door locks
5-32 Features and controls
5
4. Remove the used battery.
5. Install a new battery with the + side (A)
up.
6. Close the case firmly.
7. Install the emergency key removed in step
2.
8. Check the keyless entry system to see that
it works.
N00509200488
Turn the key toward the front of the vehicle to
lock the door. After checking that the door is
locked, turn the key back to the center and
remove it.
NOTE
Be sure to perform the procedure with the
Mitsubishi mark facing you. If the
Mitsubishi mark is not facing you when you
open the case, the transmitter may come out.
+ side
- side
Coin type
battery
CR2032
NOTE
You may purchase a replacement battery at
an electric appliance store.
An authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer can
replace the battery for you if you prefer.
Door locks
WARNING
Make sure all doors are tightly closed and
locked while driving.
• Locked doors, in combination with the
use of seat belts, can help reduce the risk
of ejection in an accident.
• Locked doors can help keep passengers,
especially small children, from opening
doors and falling out of moving vehicles.
• Locked doors can help prevent outsiders
from gaining access to your vehicle when
you slow or come to a stop.
Lock your vehicle whenever you leave it.
Children who get into unlocked vehicles
may not be able to get out. Children
trapped inside vehicles can quickly be
overcome by heat and suffer serious
injury or death due to heat stroke.
Never leave a child alone in the vehicle. In
addition to the risk of heat stroke, chil-
dren can activate switches and controls,
resulting in an injury or fatal accident.
When closing a door, make sure that the
door is fully closed and the door-ajar
warning display goes out on the informa-
tion screen on the multi-information dis-
play. If the door is ajar it could open while
driving and cause an accident.
To lock and unlock with the key
(driver’s door)
WARNING
Door locks
Features and controls 5-33
5
Move the lock knob to the lock position to
lock the door.
All doors should be kept locked while driv-
ing.
The driver’s door can be unlocked without
using the lock knob by pulling on the inside
door handle.
1. Move the inside lock knob to the locked
position.
2. Be sure the keys are not inside the vehi-
cle. Close the door.
N00549601276
If the ignition switch is turned off and the
driver’s door is opened with the key in the
ignition switch, the key reminder buzzer will
sound intermittently to remind you to remove
the key.
1- Insert or remove the key
2- Lock
3- Unlock
NOTE
When locking or unlocking with the key,
only the driver’s door will be locked or
unlocked.
To lock or unlock all doors and the liftgate,
use the power door lock switches, the key-
less entry system or the F.A.S.T-key opera-
tion.
Refer to “Power door locks” on page 5-34,
“Keyless entry system” on pages 5-7 and
5-27, and “To operate using the F.A.S.T.-
key” on page 5-16.
In vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key,
the driver’s door can be locked and unlocked
using the emergency key.
Refer to “Emergency key” on page 5-25.
To lock or unlock the door from
the inside
1- Lock
2- Unlock
To lock the door without using
the key
Key reminder system (except
for vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key)
Power door locks
5-34 Features and controls
5
The warning display will be displayed on the
information screen in the multi-information
display.
N00517300042
If the key is in the ignition switch or the oper-
ation mode is in any mode other than OFF
when you push the lock knob forward with
the driver’s door or passenger’s door open,
the lock knob will automatically return to the
unlocked position.
N00503800105
If the driver’s door is opened while the engine
is stopped and the operation mode is in any
position other than OFF, the operation mode
ON buzzer will sound intermittently to
remind you to put the operation mode in OFF.
The warning display will be displayed on the
information screen in the multi-information
display.
N00509300551
All of the doors and the liftgate can be locked
or unlocked by pressing the power door lock
switch on the driver’s or the front passenger
door.
Lock out protection
Operation mode ON reminder
system (vehicles equipped with
the F.A.S.T.-key)
Power door locks
NOTE
When locking or unlocking with the key on
the driver’s door, only the driver’s door will
lock or unlock.
Repeated continuous operation between lock
and unlock could activate the power door
locking system’s built-in protection circuit,
and prevent the system from operating. If
this occurs, wait about 1 minute before oper-
ating the power door lock switch.
To lock and unlock the doors
and liftgate
Using the power door lock switch
1- Lock
2- Unlock
Child safety locks for rear door
Features and controls 5-35
5
N00563401249
All doors and the liftgate will unlock when
the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”
position or the operation mode is put in OFF.
All doors and the liftgate will unlock when
the selector lever is moved to the “P” (PARK)
position with the ignition switch or the opera-
tion mode in ON.
N00509400262
Child safety locks help prevent rear passen-
gers, especially children, from opening the
rear door using the inside door handle.
A lock lever for the child safety lock is pro-
vided on each rear door.
When the lever is in the lock position (1), the
rear door cannot be opened using the inside
door handle.
To open the rear door when the child safety
lock lever is in the lock position, pull the out-
side door handle.
When the lever is in the release position (2),
the child safety lock is released and the rear
door can be opened using the inside door han-
dle.
To unlock the doors and liftgate
You can select the functions to unlock the
doors and liftgate either using the ignition
switch or the engine switch, or using the
selector lever position.
These functions are not activated when the
vehicle is shipped from the factory. To acti-
vate or deactivate these functions, please
contact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer.
Using the ignition switch or the
engine switch
Using the selector lever position
Child safety locks for rear
door
1- To lock
2- To release
WARNING
Always keep the doors tightly closed and
locked when driving. An unlocked door
may be accidentally opened by a passen-
ger, especially by a child who could fall
out. Also, if the doors are not locked, there
is a greater risk of someone being thrown
from the vehicle in an accident.
Liftgate
5-36 Features and controls
5
N00510101370
After unlocking, press the liftgate OPEN
switch (A) and raise the liftgate.
Liftgate
WARNING
The luggage compartment was not
designed for people to ride in it. Do not let
passengers ride in or let children play in
the luggage compartment. Riding or play-
ing in the luggage compartment could
result in a serious accident or injury.
Before driving, be sure that the liftgate is
securely closed. It is dangerous to drive
with the liftgate open since carbon monox-
ide (CO) gas contained in engine exhaust
gases can enter the passenger compart-
ment.
CO is an invisible, odorless gas that can
cause unconsciousness and even death.
In addition, if the liftgate opens while
driving, luggage could fall onto the road
and cause an accident.
When opening and closing the liftgate,
make sure that there are no people nearby
and that there is sufficient space behind
and above the vehicle. In addition, be
careful not to hit your head or pinch your
hands, neck, etc.
If snow or ice has accumulated on the lift-
gate, remove it before opening the liftgate.
Otherwise the liftgate may abruptly close
due to the weight of the snow or ice.
When opening the liftgate, always fully
open it. A partially opened liftgate can
unexpectedly close due to its own weight.
When the vehicle is parked on a slope, the
effort required to open or close the liftgate
may be greater or less than expected. The
liftgate may also open or close more
quickly.
CAUTION
Do not stand behind the exhaust pipe when
loading and unloading luggage. Heat from
the exhaust could lead to burns.
To avoid damage to the liftgate, make sure
the area above and behind the liftgate is clear
before opening it.
NOTE
Locking and unlocking the doors by using
power door locks (driver and front passenger
side), keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T.-
key operation (vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key) also locks and unlocks the lift-
gate.
To open
WARNING
NOTE
The liftgate cannot be opened if it is not
raised immediately after pressing the liftgate
OPEN switch.
If this happens, press the liftgate OPEN
switch again and raise the liftgate.
The liftgate cannot be opened when the bat-
tery is discharged or disconnected.
The liftgate must then be opened using the
inside liftgate release.
When the battery is reconnected, all doors
and the liftgate will be locked. Unlock them
before trying to open the liftgate.
On vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac-
tor switch, the outside rearview mirrors will
automatically extend when the liftgate and
all doors are unlocked using the liftgate
OPEN switch (A).
Inside liftgate release
Features and controls 5-37
5
Pull the liftgate grip (A) downward as illus-
trated and release it before the liftgate closes
completely. Gently slam the liftgate from the
outside so that it is completely closed.
N00523101143
The inside liftgate release is designed to pro-
vide a way to open the liftgate if the battery is
dead or disconnected.
The liftgate release lever (see illustration) is
mounted on the liftgate.
You and your family should familiarize your-
selves with the location and operation of the
liftgate release lever.
1. Open the lid (A) inside of the liftgate.
2. Move the lever (B) to unlock the liftgate.
To close
CAUTION
To avoid injuring your hand or arm, do not
attempt to close the liftgate without releasing
the liftgate grip (A).
NOTE
Gas struts (B) are installed in the locations
illustrated in order to support the liftgate.
Please observe the following in order to pre-
vent damage or faulty operation:
• Do not touch, push or pull the gas struts
when closing the liftgate.
• Do not attach any plastic material, tape,
etc., to the gas struts.
• Do not tie string, etc., around the gas struts.
• Do not hang objects on the gas struts.
Inside liftgate release
To open
Theft-alarm system
5-38 Features and controls
5
3. Push out on the liftgate to open it.
N00510201326
The theft-alarm system is designed to provide
protection from unauthorized entry into the
vehicle. This system is operated in three
stages: the first is the “armed” stage, the sec-
ond is the “alarm” stage, and third is the “dis-
armed” stage. If triggered, the system
provides both audible and visual alarm sig-
nals.
Park the vehicle and stop the engine. Arm the
system as described below.
1. Except for vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key, remove the key from the
ignition switch.
For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
key, put the operation mode in OFF.
2. Make sure that the engine hood is closed.
3. Lock all doors and the liftgate by using
the keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T.-
key operation.
At this time, the theft-alarm indicator (A)
on the audio panel flashes for confirma-
tion.
4. The system has entered the armed stage
after about 20 seconds, when the theft-
alarm indicator (A) flashing becomes
slower.
The theft-alarm indicator (A) continues to
flash while the system is in the armed
stage.
WARNING
Always keep the release lever lid on the
liftgate closed when driving so that your
luggage cannot accidentally bump the
lever and open the liftgate.
Theft-alarm system
CAUTION
Do not modify or add parts to the theft-alarm
system. Doing so could cause the theft-alarm
to malfunction.
Armed stage
Arm the system and leave
NOTE
If the engine hood is open, the theft-alarm
indicator (A) illuminates and the system can-
not enter the armed stage.
The system enters the armed stage about
20 seconds after the engine hood is closed.
The system will be disarmed if, while the
theft-alarm indicator (A) is illuminated, all
doors and the liftgate are unlocked by using
the keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T.-key
operation.
Theft-alarm system
Features and controls 5-39
5
The alarm will be activated if any of the fol-
lowing occur while the vehicle is parked and
the system is armed.
One of the doors and the liftgate is opened
without using the keyless entry system or
the F.A.S.T.-key operation.
The engine hood is opened.
When the alarm is activated:
1. The headlights blink on and off for 3 min-
utes.
After 3 minutes the headlights automati-
cally shut off.
2. The horn will sound intermittently for
3 minutes.
The alarm can be deactivated in the following
ways.
By using the keyless entry system or the
F.A.S.T.-key operation to lock or unlock
the doors and the liftgate.
Except for vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key, by turning the ignition
switch to the “ON” position.
For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
key, by putting the operation mode in ON.
The system will be disarmed if the following
operation is performed.
The system will be disarmed if, while the
theft-alarm indicator is illuminated, the fol-
lowing operation is performed.
• Except for vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key, if the ignition switch is turned
to the “ON” position.
• For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
key, if the operation mode is put in ON.
The system will not be armed if a door, the
liftgate or the engine hood is not completely
closed. If this happens, rearm the system as
described above.
The theft-alarm system can be activated
when people are riding inside the vehicle or
when the windows are open. To prevent acci-
dental activation of the alarm, do not set the
system to the system armed mode while peo-
ple are riding in the vehicle.
Alarm stage
NOTE
Type of alarm
NOTE
The alarm will continue to operate for 3 min-
utes. At the end of that period, the alarm will
automatically shut off to save battery power.
The system will then be rearmed until the
proper disarming step is taken.
The alarm will resume if unauthorized
actions are taken again, even if the alarm has
stopped.
Horn sounds!
Headlights blink on and off!
While the alarm is operating, a warning is
displayed on the information screen in the
multi-information display.
Alarm deactivation
Disarmed stage
NOTE
Power window control
5-40 Features and controls
5
Except for vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key, if the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position.
For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
key, if the operation mode is put in ON.
All doors and the liftgate are unlocked by
using the keyless entry system or the
F.A.S.T.-key operation.
Use the following procedure to test the sys-
tem:
1. Lower the driver’s window.
2. Arm the system as explained in “Armed
stage”.
3. Make sure that the theft-alarm indicator
comes on and flashes for approximately
20 seconds.
4. Wait a few seconds and then unlock the
driver’s side door by using the inside door
lock knob and open the door.
5. Make sure that the horn sounds intermit-
tently and the headlights blink when a
door is opened.
6. Disarm the system by unlocking all doors
and the liftgate by using the keyless entry
system or the F.A.S.T.-key operation.
N00510800370
NOTE
If the UNLOCK button on the remote control
transmitter, or the driver’s or front passen-
ger’s door lock/unlock switch is pressed
when all doors and the liftgate are closed and
no door is opened within approximately
30 seconds, re-arming will automatically
occur.
The amount of time after unlocking until the
vehicle relocks automatically can be
adjusted. See an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer for details.
Disarm...by the keyless entry system or the
F.A.S.T.-key operation
Once the system has been disarmed, it can-
not be rearmed except by repeating the arm-
ing procedure.
Testing the theft-alarm system
NOTE
Power window control
1- Open (down)
2- Close (up)
NOTE
Never try to operate the main switch and
sub-switch in different directions at the same
time. This will freeze the window in posi-
tion.
Operating the power windows repeatedly
with the engine stopped will run down the
battery. Use the window switches only while
the engine is running.
WARNING
Before operating the power windows,
make sure that nothing can be trapped
(head, hands, fingers, etc.) in the window.
Power window control
Features and controls 5-41
5
N00548700097
The main switch located on the driver’s door
can be used to operate all the windows.
A window can be opened or closed by operat-
ing the corresponding switch.
Press the switch down to open the window,
and pull up the switch to close it.
If the driver’s door window switch is fully
pressed down/pulled up, the driver’s door
window automatically opens/closes com-
pletely.
If you want to stop the window movement,
operate the switch lightly in the reverse direc-
tion.
N00548800098
Each sub-switch can be used for it’s own pas-
senger door window, unless the driver’s win-
dow lock switch is activated.
N00548900132
The power windows can be run up or down
when the ignition switch or the operation
mode is in ON.
The door windows can be opened or closed
for a 30-second period after the engine is
Never leave the vehicle without carrying
the key.
Never leave children or unreliable adults
unattended inside the vehicle.
Main switch
WARNING
1- Driver’s door window switch
2- Front passenger door window switch
3- Left rear door window switch
4- Right rear door window switch
5- Lock switch
Sub switch
1- Close
2- Open
NOTE
The rear door windows open only half-way.
Power window timer function
Power window control
5-42 Features and controls
5
stopped. However, once the driver’s door or
the front passenger’s door is opened, the
power windows cannot be operated.
N00549000130
When this switch is in the lock mode, the pas-
senger door switches cannot be used to open
or close the door windows, and the main
switch will open or close only the driver’s
door window. To unlock the switch, press it
again.
N00528801132
If a hand or head is trapped, for safety the
door window is automatically lowered a little.
After the door window is lowered, pull up the
switch again to close the door window.
Lock switch
1- Lock
2- Unlock
WARNING
Before driving with a child in the vehicle,
be sure to lock the window switch to make
it inoperative. Children tampering with
the switch could easily trap their hands or
heads in the window.
Safety mechanism (Driver’s
door window only)
WARNING
If the battery terminals are disconnected
or the fuse for power window is replaced,
the safety mechanism will be cancelled.
If a hand or head got trapped, a serious
injury could result.
CAUTION
The safety mechanism is deactivated just
before the door window closes. This allows
the door window to close completely. There-
fore be especially careful that fingers are not
trapped in the door window opening.
The safety mechanism is deactivated while
the switch is pulled up. Therefore be espe-
cially careful that fingers are not trapped in
the door window opening.
Do not deliberately trap your hands or head
in order to activate the safety mechanism.
Your hand or head could be trapped and per-
sonal injury could result.
NOTE
The safety mechanism can be activated if the
driving conditions or other circumstances
cause the door window to be subjected to a
physical shock similar to that caused by
trapped hand or head.
If the battery terminals are disconnected or
the fuse for the power window is replaced,
the safety mechanism will be cancelled and
the door window will not automatically
open/close completely.
If the window is open, repeatedly raise the
driver’s door window switch until the win-
dow has been fully closed.
Following this, release the switch, raise the
switch once again and hold it in this condi-
tion for at least 1 second, then release it. You
should now be able to operate the driver’s
door window in the normal fashion.
CAUTION
Sunshade (if so equipped)
Features and controls 5-43
5
N00551400043
Wind buffeting can be described as the per-
ception of pressure on the ears or a booming
or rumbling sound. Your vehicle may exhibit
wind buffeting when driving with one or both
rear door windows down or partially opened.
This is a normal occurrence that can be mini-
mized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
door windows open, open the front door win-
dows as well as the rear door windows to
minimize the condition.
N00511001712
The sunshade can be opened and closed with
the ignition switch or the operation mode in
ON.
Press the switch (1), the sunshade opens.
Press and hold the switch (1), the sunshade
automatically opens. Release the switch once
the sunshade starts moving automatically.
What to do if you hear wind
buffeting when driving
Sunshade (if so equipped)
WARNING
Before operating the sunshade, make sure
that nothing can be trapped (head, hands,
fingers, etc.).
Never leave the vehicle without carrying
the key.
Never leave a child (or other person who is
incapable of safely operating the sunshade
switch) alone in the vehicle.
Do not bring your head, hand, finger, etc.
near the opening edge of the sunshade
receptacle while the vehicle is in motion.
It may cause injury to your head, hand,
finger, etc. in the event of a sudden brak-
ing.
CAUTION
Do not place heavy luggage on the pan-
oramic glass roof. Doing so could damage
the glass roof.
Do not hang heavy luggage from, allow a
person to hang onto, or apply any other
strong force to the opening of the sunshade
receptacle or the parts between the ceiling
and the sunshade opening on either side.
Doing so could damage the sunshade.
NOTE
Release the switch when the sunshade has
reached a completely open or completely
closed position.
If the sunshade does not operate when the
sunshade switch is operated, release the
switch and check whether something is
trapped by the sunshade. If nothing is
trapped, have the sunshade checked at an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
WARNING
Operating the sunshade repeatedly with the
engine turned off will run down the battery.
Operate the sunshade only while the engine
is running.
Close the sunshade when parking the vehicle
for a long time. Parking in the hot sun with
the sunshade open will make the vehicle
inside extremely hot.
To open
NOTE
Parking brake
5-44 Features and controls
5
To stop the moving sunshade, press the
switch (1), (2) or (3).
Press the switch (2), the sunshade closes.
Press and hold the switch (2), the sunshade
automatically closes. Release the switch once
the sunshade starts moving automatically.
To stop the moving sunshade, press the
switch (1), (2) or (3).
If a hand or head is trapped in the closing
sunshade opening, the safety mechanism will
cause the sunshade to re-open automatically.
The opened sunshade will become opera-
tional again after a few seconds.
N00511401530
To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com-
plete stop, fully engage the parking brake,
and then set the selector lever to “P” (PARK)
position.
To close
Safety mechanism
NOTE
The safety mechanism can be activated if the
driving conditions or other circumstances
cause the sunshade to be subjected to a phys-
ical shock similar to that caused by a trapped
hand or head.
CAUTION
Do not deliberately trap your hands or head
in order to activate the safety mechanism.
Personal injury and malfunction of the sun-
shade could result.
Parking brake
To apply
1- Pull the lever up without pushing the but-
ton at the end of hand grip.
When the parking brake is set, and the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position or
the operation mode is in ON, the brake
warning light in the instrument cluster
will come on.
Before driving, be sure to release the
parking brake.
Steering wheel height and reach adjustment
Features and controls 5-45
5
When parking on a hill, set the parking brake,
and turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill, or away from the curb on an uphill.
N00511500228
To adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position, move the lever upward or down-
ward while moving the steering wheel to the
desired level.
N00511601369
Adjust the inside rearview mirror only after
making any seat adjustments so as to have a
clear view to the rear of the vehicle.
To deactivate
1- Pull the lever up slightly.
2- Press and hold the button at the end of
the hand grip.
3- Push the lever downward.
CAUTION
Before driving, be sure that the parking
brake is fully released and brake warning
light is off.
If you drive without the parking brake fully
released, the warning display will appear on
the information screen in the multi-informa-
tion display.
If a vehicle is driven without releasing the
parking brake, the brakes will be overheated,
resulting in ineffective braking and possible
brake failure.
Warning light
Warning display
Steering wheel height and
reach adjustment
A- Wheel lock
B- Release
WARNING
After adjusting, make sure the lever is
secured in the locked (A) position.
Do not attempt to adjust the steering
wheel while driving. This can be danger-
ous.
When releasing the lever (moving it to the
position (B)), be sure to hold the steering
wheel firmly. Otherwise, the steering
wheel may slip down too suddenly.
Inside rearview mirror
Inside rearview mirror
5-46 Features and controls
5
Adjust the inside mirror to maximize the
view through the rear window.
It is possible to move the mirror up and down
to adjust its position.
It is possible to move the mirror up/down and
left/right to adjust its position.
The day/night knob (A) at the bottom of the
mirror can be used to adjust the mirror to
reduce the glare from the headlights of vehi-
cles behind you during night driving.
WARNING
Do not attempt to adjust the inside rear-
view mirror while driving. This can be
dangerous.
Be sure to adjust the mirror before driv-
ing.
Type 1
Type 2
Type 3
To adjust the vertical mirror
position
To adjust the mirror position
To reduce the glare
Type 1
Outside rearview mirrors
Features and controls 5-47
5
When the headlights of the vehicles behind
you are very bright, the reflection factor of
the rearview mirror is automatically changed
to reduce the glare.
Normally, use the automatic mode. When the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position
or the operation mode is put in ON, the
reflection factor of the mirror is automatically
changed.
When the headlights of the vehicles behind
you are very bright, the reflection factor of
the rearview mirror is automatically changed
to reduce the glare.
Normally, use the automatic mode. When the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position
or the operation mode is put in ON, the green
indicator (1) illuminates and the reflection
factor of the mirror is automatically changed.
N00512200206
Adjust the outside rearview mirrors only after
making any seat adjustments so as to have a
clear view to the rear of the vehicle.
1- Daytime position
2- Night position
Type 2
NOTE
Do not hang items on, or spray glass cleaner
on the sensor (1), as reduced sensitivity
could result.
Type 3
NOTE
Do not hang items on, or spray glass cleaner
on the sensors (2), as reduced sensitivity
could result.
If you want to stop automatic mode, press
the switch (3) and the indicator will go off.
To return to automatic mode, press the
switch again or perform the following opera-
tion.
[Except for vehicles equipped with the Free-
hand Advanced Security Transmitter
(F.A.S.T.-key)]
Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position
after turning to “OFF” or “ACC” position.
[For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand
Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-
key)]
Put the operation mode in ON after putting
the operation mode in OFF.
Outside rearview mirrors
Outside rearview mirrors
5-48 Features and controls
5
N00549101170
The outside rearview mirrors can be adjusted
when the ignition switch or the operation
mode is in ON or ACC.
Move the lever (A) to the same side as the
mirror you wish to adjust.
Press the switch (B) to adjust the mirror posi-
tion.
N00549201272
The outside mirror can be retracted towards
the side window to prevent damage when
parking in tight locations.
Push the mirror towards the back of the vehi-
cle with your hand to retract it in.
When extending the mirror, pull it out
towards the front of the vehicle until it clicks
to lock in place.
WARNING
Do not attempt to adjust the outside rear-
view mirrors while driving. This can be
dangerous.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before driv-
ing.
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex.
The objects you see in the mirror will look
smaller and farther away than they
appear in a regular flat mirror.
Do not use this mirror to estimate the dis-
tance of vehicles following you when
changing lanes.
To adjust the mirror position
L- Left outside mirror adjustment
R- Right outside mirror adjustment
1-Up
2-Down
3-Right
4-Left
Except for vehicles equipped with the mirror retractor
switch
Vehicles equipped with the mirror retractor switch
NOTE
After adjusting, return the lever to the “•”
(OFF) position (C).
Retracting and extending the
mirrors
Except for vehicles equipped with the
mirror retractor switch
Outside rearview mirrors
Features and controls 5-49
5
With the operation mode in ON or ACC, push
the mirror retractor switch to retract the mir-
rors. Push it again to extend the mirrors to
their original positions.
After placing the operation mode in OFF, it is
possible to retract and extend the mirrors
using the mirror retractor switch for approxi-
mately 30 seconds.
On vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key,
the mirrors automatically retract or extend
when the doors are locked or unlocked using
the remote control transmitter buttons or the
F.A.S.T-key operation.
Refer to “Keyless entry system” on page 5-27
or “To operate using the F.A.S.T.-key” on
page 5-16.
For vehicles equipped with the mirror
retractor switch
Retracting and extending the mir-
rors using the mirror retractor
switch
CAUTION
It is possible to retract and extend the mirrors
by hand. After retracting a mirror using the
mirror retractor switch, however, you should
extend it by using the switch again, not by
hand. If you extended the mirror by hand
after retracting it using the switch, it would
not properly lock in position. As a result, the
mirror could move because of the wind or
vibration while you are driving, and this may
impair the driver’s rearward visibility.
NOTE
Be careful not to get your hands trapped
while a mirror is moving.
If you move a mirror by hand or it moves
after hitting a person or object, you may not
be able to return it to its original position
using the mirror retractor switch. If this hap-
pens, push the mirror retractor switch to
place the mirror in its retracted position and
then push the switch again to return the mir-
ror to its original position.
When freezing has occurred and mirrors fail
to operate as intended, please refrain from
repeated pushing of the retractor switch as
this action can result in burn-out of the mir-
ror motor circuits.
Retracting and extending the mir-
rors without using the mirror
retractor switch (automatic exten-
sion function)
NOTE
Functions can be modified as stated below.
Please consult an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer.
• Automatically extend when the operation
mode is put in ON with the driver’s door
closed, and automatically retract when the
operation mode is put in OFF or ACC with
the driver’s door opened.
• Automatically extend when the vehicle
speed reaches approximately 19 mph
(30 km/h).
• Deactivate the automatic extension func-
tion.
Ignition switch
5-50 Features and controls
5
N00549301345
When the rear window defogger switch is
pressed with the engine running, the outside
rearview mirrors are defogged or defrosted.
Current will flow through the heater element
inside the mirrors, thus clearing away frost or
condensation.
The indicator light (A) will illuminate while
the defogger is on.
The heater will be turned off automatically in
approximately 20 minutes.
N00512401771
[For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand
Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-
key)]
For information on operations for vehicles
equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Secu-
rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to
“Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter
(F.A.S.T.-key): Engine switch” on page 5-18.
[Except for vehicles equipped with the
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit-
ter (F.A.S.T.-key)]
The engine is off. The key can be inserted and
removed only when the switch is in this posi-
tion.
Allows operation of electrical accessories
with the engine off.
The engine runs and all accessories can be
used.
The outside rearview mirrors can be
retracted or extended by the following opera-
tions, even if changing to the any of above.
After pressing the LOCK button on the key
to lock the doors and liftgate, if the LOCK
button is pressed again twice in a row within
approximately 30 seconds, the outside rear-
view mirrors will retract.
After pressing the UNLOCK button on the
key to unlock the doors and liftgate, if the
UNLOCK button is pressed again twice in a
row within approximately 30 seconds, the
outside rearview mirrors will extend again.
Door mirror heater
NOTE
Ignition switch
OFF
ACC
ON
Starting the engine
Features and controls 5-51
5
Engages the starter. Release the key when the
engine starts. It will automatically back to the
“ON” position.
N00539601114
After about 30 minutes has elapsed with the
ignition switch in the “ACC” position, the
function automatically cuts out the power for
the audio system and other electric devices
that can be operated with that position.
When the ignition switch is turned from the
“ACC” position, the power is supplied again
to those devices.
N00550901266
1. Set the selector lever to the “P” (PARK)
position.
2. Turn the key to the “OFF” position and
remove it.
N00512601904
[For vehicles equipped with the Free-hand
Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-
key)]
For information on operation for vehicles
equipped with the Free-hand Advanced Secu-
rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key), refer to
“Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter
(F.A.S.T.-key): Starting and stopping the
engine” on page 5-22.
[Except for vehicles equipped with the
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit-
ter (F.A.S.T.-key)]
START
NOTE
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code
which the transponder inside the key sends
must match the one registered to the immobi-
lizer computer. (Refer to “Electronic immo-
bilizer” on page 5-4.)
ACC power auto-cutout func-
tion
NOTE
It is possible to modify functions as follows:
• The time until the power cuts out can be
changed to about 60 minutes.
• The ACC power auto-cutout function can
be deactivated.
For details, we recommend you to consult an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
To remove the key
NOTE
CAUTION
If the engine is stopped while driving, the
brake servomechanism will cease to function
and braking efficiency will deteriorate. Also,
the power steering system will not function
and it will require greater manual effort to
operate the steering.
Do not leave the key in the “ON” position for
a long time when the engine is not running,
doing so will cause the battery to be dis-
charged.
Do not turn the key to the “START” position
when the engine is running, doing so could
damage the starter motor.
Starting the engine
Starting the engine
5-52 Features and controls
5
Do not operate the starter motor continu-
ously for longer than 15 seconds as this
could run the battery down or damage the
starter motor. If the engine does not start,
turn the ignition switch back to the “OFF”
position, wait a few seconds, and then try
again. Trying repeatedly with the engine
or starter motor still turning will damage
the starter mechanism.
If the engine will not start because the bat-
tery is weak or discharged, refer to
“Jump-starting the engine” (on page 8-2)
for instructions.
A longer warm up period will only con-
sume extra fuel. The engine is warmed up
enough for driving when the bar graph of
engine coolant temperature display starts
to move. Refer to “Interrupt display
screen (With ignition switch or operation
mode in ON)” on page 5-115.
This model is equipped with an electronically
controlled fuel injection system. This is a sys-
tem that automatically controls fuel injection.
There is usually no need to depress the accel-
erator pedal when starting the engine.
The starter should not be run for more than
15 seconds at a time.
To prevent battery drain, wait a few seconds
between attempts to restart the engine.
1. Make sure all occupants are properly
seated with seat belts fastened.
2. Insert the ignition key.
3. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal down
firmly with your right foot.
5. Make sure the selector lever is in the “P”
(PARK) position.
6. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
tion and make certain that all warning
lights are functioning properly before
starting the engine.
7. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”
position without pressing the accelerator
pedal. Release the key when the engine
starts.
After several attempts, you may experience
that the engine still does not start.
1. Make sure that all electric devices, such
as lights, air conditioning blower and rear
window defogger, are turned off.
Tips for starting
WARNING
Never run the engine in a closed or poorly
ventilated area any longer than is needed
to move your vehicle out of the area. Car-
bon monoxide gas, which is odorless and
extremely poisonous, could build up and
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION
Do not push-start the vehicle.
Do not run the engine at high rpms or drive
at high speeds until the engine has had a
chance to warm up.
Release the ignition switch as soon as the
engine starts. Otherwise, the starter motor
will be damaged.
Starting the engine
NOTE
The starter will not operate unless the selec-
tor lever is in the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEU-
TRAL) position.
For safety reasons, start the engine in the “P”
(PARK) position so that the wheels are
locked.
NOTE
Minor noises may be heard on engine start-
up. These will disappear as the engine warms
up.
When the engine is hard to start
Continuously variable transmission (CVT)
Features and controls 5-53
5
2. While depressing the brake pedal, press
the accelerator pedal halfway and hold it
there, then crank the engine. Release the
accelerator pedal, immediately after the
engine starts.
3. If the engine still will not start, the engine
could be flooded with too much gasoline.
While depressing the brake pedal, push
the accelerator pedal all the way down
and hold it there, then crank the engine for
5 to 6 seconds. Return the ignition switch
to the “OFF” position and release the
accelerator pedal. Wait a few seconds, and
then crank the engine again for 5 to 6 sec-
onds while depressing the brake pedal,
but do not push the accelerator pedal.
Release the ignition switch if the engine
starts. If the engine fails to start, repeat
these procedures. If the engine still will
not start, contact your local Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
choice for assistance.
When the ambient temperature is -22 °F
(-30 °C) or lower, it may not be possible to
start from a standstill even with the selector
lever in the “D” (DRIVE) or “R”
(REVERSE) position.
This occurs because the transaxle has not
warmed up sufficiently; it does not indicate a
problem. If this occurs, place the selector
lever in the “P” (PARK) position and let the
engine idle for at least 10 minutes.
The transaxle will warm up, and you will be
able to start normally.
Do not leave the vehicle during warm-up
operation.
N00560201116
The CVT will automatically and continuously
change its gear ratio depending on road and
driving conditions. This helps achieve
smooth driving and excellent fuel efficiency.
If your vehicle is equipped with the spor-
tronic steering wheel paddle shifter, you can
manually shift the transmission up and down.
Refer to “Sports mode” on page 5-58.
The transmission prevents unnecessary
upshifts even when the accelerator pedal is
released and ensures smooth driving.
According to the conditions, the transmission
will automatically shift to a lower gear ratio
to achieve stronger engine braking. This may
help reduce your need to use the service
brake.
N00560301117
As an additional safety precaution, models
equipped with a continuously variable trans-
mission have a shift-lock device that holds
the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position.
To move the selector lever from the “P”
(PARK) position to another position, follow
the steps below.
1. Press and hold the brake pedal down.
2. Move the selector lever to the desired
position.
Startability of CVT vehicle with
ambient temperature of -22 °F
(-30 °C) or lower
Continuously variable
transmission (CVT)
DRIVING UPHILL
DRIVING DOWNHILL
Selector lever operation
NOTE
The selector lever cannot be moved from “P”
(PARK) to another position if the ignition
switch is set to the “OFF” or “ACC” posi-
tion, or if the key has been removed, or the
operation mode is put in OFF or ACC, or if
the brake pedal is not pressed and held down.
Continuously variable transmission (CVT)
5-54 Features and controls
5
The CVT selects an optimum ratio automati-
cally when the selector lever is in the “D”
(DRIVE) position, depending on the speed of
the vehicle and the position of the accelerator
pedal.
Set the selector lever in the gate to
operate while the brake pedal is
depressed.
Set the selector lever in the gate to
operate.
Except for vehicles equipped with sportronic
steering wheel paddle shifter
For vehicles equipped with sportronic steering
wheel paddle shifter
WARNING
Always press the brake pedal when shift-
ing the selector lever into a selector posi-
tion from the “N” (NEUTRAL) position.
When beginning to drive, do not shift the
selector lever from the “N” (NEUTRAL)
position while pressing the accelerator
pedal. This will cause the vehicle to
“jump” forward or backward.
NOTE
To prevent mistakes in operating the lever,
make sure you stop briefly at each position.
After operating, check the position in the
multi-information display.
If the brake pedal is not depressed and held,
the shift-lock device activates to prevent the
selector lever from being moved from the
“P” (PARK) position.
For a shift indicated by in the illustra-
tion, depress the brake pedal before moving
the selector lever. If you attempt to move the
selector lever before depressing the brake
pedal, the selector lever may be immovable.
Continuously variable transmission (CVT)
Features and controls 5-55
5
N00563301091
When the selector lever cannot be shifted
from the “P” (PARK) position to another
position while the brake pedal is pressed and
held down with the ignition switch or the
operation mode in ON, the battery may be flat
or the shift-lock mechanism may be malfunc-
tioning.
Immediately have your vehicle checked by an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice.
If you need to move the vehicle, shift the
selector lever as follows.
1. Make sure the parking brake is fully
applied.
2. Stop the engine if it is running.
3. Insert a screwdriver with a cloth over its
tip into the notch (A) of the cover. Pry
gently as shown to remove the cover.
4. Depress the brake pedal with the right
foot.
5. Insert a screwdriver in the shift-lock
release hole (B). Shift the selector lever to
the “N” (NEUTRAL) position while
pressing the screwdriver down.
N00560401118
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position or the operation mode is put in
ON, the position of the selector lever is indi-
cated in the multi-information display.
N00582900057
When the selector lever cannot be
shifted from the “P” (PARK) posi-
tion
Selector lever position display
When the selector lever position
display blinks
WARNING
To avoid unintended vehicle movement,
keep brake pedal applied with your right
foot and do not depress the accelerator
pedal, while the selector lever position dis-
play is blinking.
Continuously variable transmission (CVT)
5-56 Features and controls
5
If the ambient temperature is low, the selector
lever position display on the multi-informa-
tion display may blink when the selector
lever is placed in the “D” (DRIVE), “Ds”
(DOWNSHIFT & SPORTY DRIVING), “L”
(LOW) or “R” (REVERSE) position immedi-
ately after the engine has been started. This
indicates that the transmission requires warm-
ing up. While the display is blinking, the
vehicle will not move, because the transmis-
sion keeps disengaging until the warm up is
completed even if the selector lever is placed
in the “D”, “Ds”, “L” or “R” position.
When the selector lever position display is
blinking, perform the following procedure:
1. Depress the brake pedal with your right
foot and place the selector lever in the
“N” (NEUTRAL) position for several
seconds.
2. Keep depressing the brake pedal and then
place the selector lever in the “D”
(DRIVE), “Ds” (DOWNSHIFT &
SPORTY DRIVING), “L” (LOW) or “R”
(REVERSE) position. If the selector lever
position display stops blinking, the warm
up is completed and the transmission will
function normally.
3. If the display is still blinking, repeat steps
1 and 2 above.
N00560501177
or
When the warning display or the warn-
ing display appears on the information screen
in the multi-information display while you
are driving, there could be a malfunction in
the CVT.
N00560601136
This position locks the transmission to pre-
vent the vehicle from moving. The engine can
be started from the “P” (PARK) position.
NOTE
While the selector lever position display is
blinking, a buzzer will sound intermittently.
Warning display
CAUTION
If a malfunction occurs in the CVT while
driving, the warning display or the
warning display will appear on the informa-
tion screen in the multi-information display.
In this case, follow these procedures:
[When warning display is showing]
The CVT fluid is overheating. The engine
control may activate to lower the CVT fluid
temperature, causing the engine revolutions
and vehicle speed to decrease, In this case,
take one of the following procedures.
• Slow down your vehicle.
• Stop your vehicle in a safe place, put the
selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position,
and open the engine hood with the engine
running to allow the engine to cool down.
After a while, confirm that the warning
display is no longer showing. It is safe to
continue driving if the display is no longer
showing. If the warning display remains or
flashes frequently, immediately have your
vehicle inspected by an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
of your choice.
[When warning display is showing]
It may be that there is something unusual
happening in the CVT, causing a safety
device to activate. Immediately have your
vehicle inspected by an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
of your choice.
Selector lever positions
“P” PARK
CAUTION
Continuously variable transmission (CVT)
Features and controls 5-57
5
Move the lever to this position only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop.
At this position, the transmission is disen-
gaged. It is the same as the neutral position on
a manual transaxle and should be used when
the vehicle is not moving for an extended
length of time during driving, such as in a
traffic jam.
This position is used for most city and high-
way driving. The transmission will automati-
cally and continuously change its gear ratio
depending on road and driving conditions.
Use when engine braking is needed, or for
high-power sport drive.
This position is for driving up very steep hills
and for engine braking at low speeds when
driving down steep hills.
“R” REVERSE
CAUTION
Never shift into the “P” (PARK) or “R”
(REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in
motion. If the lever is shifted into the “P”
(PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position while
the vehicle is in motion, the transmission
may be damaged.
“N” NEUTRAL
WARNING
Never move the selector lever to the “N”
(NEUTRAL) position while driving since
you could accidentally slip it into the “P”
(PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position,
damaging the transmission.
To prevent the vehicle from rolling when
stopped on a slope, the engine should be
started in the “P” (PARK) position, not in
“N” (NEUTRAL) position.
To prevent rolling, always keep your foot
on the brake pedal when the vehicle is in
“N” (NEUTRAL) position, or when shift-
ing into or out of “N” (NEUTRAL) posi-
tion.
“D” DRIVE
CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, never shift
into the “D” (DRIVE) position from the “R”
(REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in
motion.
WARNING
“Ds” DOWNSHIFT & SPORTY-
DRIVING (except for vehicles
equipped with sportronic steering
wheel paddle shifter)
“L” LOW
WARNING
This position can be used for maximum
engine braking.
Be very careful not to shift into “L”
(LOW) suddenly.
Sudden engine braking may cause the
tires to skid.
Select this position according to the road
conditions and vehicle speed.
Continuously variable transmission (CVT)
5-58 Features and controls
5
N00560701111
While the vehicle is stopped or being driven
with the selector lever in the “D” (DRIVE),
sports mode can be selected by pulling one of
the sportronic steering wheel paddle shifter
towards you.
In sports mode, rapid shifting is possible sim-
ply by operating the sportronic steering wheel
paddle shifter.
Unlike the manual transaxle, sports mode
allows shifting with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
+ (SHIFT UP)
Transmission shifts up once by each opera-
tion.
- (SHIFT DOWN)
Transmission shifts down once by each oper-
ation.
To return to “D” (DRIVE) operation, pull the
sportronic steering wheel paddle shifter on
the + (SHIFT UP) side for longer than 2 sec-
onds.
When returning to “D” (DRIVE) operation,
the selector lever position display will change
to the “D” (DRIVE) position.
Sports mode (for vehicles
equipped with sportronic steer-
ing wheel paddle shifter)
SHIFT DOWN SHIFT UP
CAUTION
In sports mode, the driver must execute
upward shifts in accordance with prevailing
road conditions, taking care to keep the
engine speed below the red zone.
Repeated continuous operation of the spor-
tronic steering wheel paddle shifter will con-
tinuously switch shift position.
Shift ranges may not change when the lateral
paddle shifters are operated at the same time.
NOTE
The upward shift may be made automatically
in sports mode when the engine revolutions
rises and approach the tachometer’s red zone
(the red-colored part of the tachometer dial).
Shift ranges can only be selected in a for-
ward direction from 1st to 6th. To reverse or
park the vehicle, move the selector lever to
the “R” or “P” position.
To maintain good running performance, the
transmission may refuse to perform an
upshift when the sportronic steering wheel
paddle shifter on the “+ (SHIFT UP)” side is
pulled at certain vehicle speeds. Also, to pre-
vent over-revving of the engine, the trans-
mission may refuse to perform a downshift
when the sportronic steering wheel paddle
shifter on the “- (SHIFT DOWN)” side is
pulled at certain vehicle speeds. When this
happens, a buzzer sounds to indicate that a
downshift is not going to take place.
In sports mode, downward shifts are made
automatically when the vehicle slows down.
When the vehicle stops, 1st position is auto-
matically selected.
Also, the vehicle will automatically return to
“D” (DRIVE) operation if the vehicle is
stopped.
When the selector lever is in the “L” (LOW)
position, the sports mode is not selected even
if you operate the sportronic steering wheel
paddle shifter.
NOTE
Continuously variable transmission (CVT)
Features and controls 5-59
5
N00560901126
In sports mode, the currently selected shift
range is displayed on the information screen
in the multi-information display.
N00560801112
To gain extra acceleration in “D” (DRIVE)
position (when passing another vehicle) push
the accelerator to the floor. The CVT will
automatically downshift.
For short waiting periods, such as at traffic
lights, the vehicle can be left in selector lever
position and held stationary with the service
brake.
For longer waiting periods with the engine
running, place the selector lever in the “N”
(NEUTRAL) position and apply the parking
brake, while holding the vehicle stationary
with the service brake.
Prior to moving off after having stopped the
vehicle, make sure that the selector lever is in
“D” (DRIVE) position or Sports mode posi-
tion.
Sports mode display
Operation of the CVT
CAUTION
Before selecting a position with the engine
running and the vehicle stationary, firmly
depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehi-
cle from creeping.
The vehicle will begin to move as soon as the
CVT is engaged, especially when the engine
speed or idle speed is high, or with the air
conditioning operating.
Do not release the brake pedal until you are
ready to drive away.
Depress the brake pedal with the right foot at
all times.
Using the left foot could cause driver move-
ment delay in case of an emergency.
To prevent sudden acceleration, never run
the engine at high rpms when shifting from
the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL).
Operating the accelerator pedal while the
other foot is resting on the brake pedal will
affect braking efficiency and may cause pre-
mature wear of brake pads.
Use the selector lever in the correct shift
position in accordance with driving condi-
tions.
Never coast downhill backward in the driv-
ing shift position {“D” (DRIVE), “Ds”
(DOWN SHIFT & SPORTY DRVING), “L”
(LOW) position or sports mode} or coast
forward in the “R” (REVERSE) position.
Engine stopping and increased brake pedal
and steering effort could lead to an accident.
Do not rev the engine with the brake pedal
pressed when the vehicle is stationary.
This can damage the CVT.
Also, when you depress the accelerator pedal
while holding down the brake pedal with the
selector lever in the “D” (DRIVE) position,
the engine revolutions may not rise as high
as when performing the same operation with
the selector lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL)
position.
CAUTION
Passing acceleration
NOTE
In sports mode, downshifts do not take place
when the accelerator is depressed all the way
to the floor.
Waiting
Electronically controlled 4WD system (if so equipped)
5-60 Features and controls
5
To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com-
plete stop, fully engage the parking brake,
and then move the selector lever to the “P”
(PARK) position.
If the CVT does not shift while driving, or
your vehicle does not pick up enough speed
when starting on an uphill slope, it may be
that there is something unusual happening in
the transmission, causing a safety device to
activate. Immediately have your vehicle
checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
N00517201208
The electronically controlled 4WD system is
an all-wheel drive system that allows one of
three drive modes to be selected with a
switch, in accordance with the driving condi-
tions.
The following drive modes are available.
4-wheel drive operation requires special driv-
ing skills.
Carefully read the “4-wheel drive operation”
section on page 5-62 and take care to drive
safely.
CAUTION
To avoid transmission overheating, never try
to keep your vehicle stationary on a hill by
using the accelerator pedal. Always apply
the parking brake and/or service brake.
Do not rev the engine unnecessarily while
the vehicle is stationary. Unexpected acceler-
ation may occur if the selector lever is in a
position other than “P” (PARK) or “N”
(NEUTRAL).
Parking
When the CVT makes no speed
change
NOTE
When the warning display and “SLOW
DOWN” or the warning display and
“SERVICE REQUIRED” appear on the
information screen in the multi-information
display, there could be a malfunction in the
CVT. Refer to “Continuously variable trans-
mission (CVT): Warning display” on page
5-56.
Electronically controlled
4WD system
(if so equipped)
Drive mode Function
2WD
This mode is for eco-
nomical driving on
normal dry roads and
freeways.
Driving in front-
wheel drive.
4WD AUTO
The default mode.
This mode is for
automatically con-
trolling the distribu-
tion of driving torque
to all four wheels
according to the
driving conditions.
4WD LOCK
This mode is for
driving in slippery
conditions such as on
snow-covered roads
or sand.
The large amount of
driving torque that is
applied to the rear
tires enables getting
out of slippery areas
and powerful driv-
ing is possible across
all ranges.
Drive mode Function
Electronically controlled 4WD system (if so equipped)
Features and controls 5-61
5
The drive mode can be changed by pressing
the drive mode-selector while the ignition
switch or the operation mode is in ON.
By pressing the drive mode-selector, the drive
mode can be changed in order of “2WD”,
“4WD AUTO” and “4WD LOCK”.
The drive mode is displayed as an interrupt
display on the information screen in the
multi-information display when the drive
mode is changed.
After a few seconds, the information screen
will then return to its prior display.
Normally the indicator illuminates when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position
or the operation mode is put in ON, and then
the drive mode is displayed a few seconds
after the engine is started.
Drive mode-selector
Drive mode Display
2WD
4WD AUTO
4WD LOCK
CAUTION
Do not operate the drive mode-selector with
the front wheels spinning on a snowy road or
in similar conditions. The vehicle could
lunge in an unexpected direction.
Driving on dry, paved roads in “4WD
LOCK” mode causes increased fuel con-
sumption, noise, vibration, and premature
tire wear.
Do not drive with the tires spinning in
“2WD” mode.
Doing so could generate heat in the drive-
system components.
NOTE
The drive mode can be switched while driv-
ing or stopped.
Drive mode indicator
Drive mode Display
Drive
Mode
Drive mode
indicator
“4WD” indi-
cator
“LOCK”
indicator
2WD OFF OFF
4WD AUTO ON OFF
4WD LOCK ON ON
4-wheel drive operation
5-62 Features and controls
5
N00530601254
Your vehicle has been designed primarily for
use on pavement.
But its unique 4 -wheel drive system allows
you to occasionally travel on unpaved roads,
to campgrounds, picnic sites, and similar
locations.
Not only does this ensure better handling on
dry, paved roads but also permits better trac-
tion when driving on slippery, wet or snow-
covered roads and when moving out of mud.
But it is not suitable for heavy off road use or
towing in rough conditions.
It is particularly important to note that 4-
wheel drive may not give sufficient hill
climbing ability and engine braking on steep
slopes. You should try to avoid driving on
steep slopes.
Also, you must exercise caution when driving
on sand and mud and when driving through
water because sufficient traction may not be
available in certain circumstances.
Please avoid driving the vehicle through areas
where the tires may get stuck in deep sand or
mud.
CAUTION
If the selected drive mode indicator is blink-
ing, the vehicle switches automatically to
front-wheel drive in order to protect the
drive-system components, and drive mode
selection is no longer possible with the drive
mode-selector.
The warning display is also displayed in the
information screen in the multi-information
display.
Reduce speed, and if the indicator goes out
after driving a while, resume driving as
before.
If the warning display on the information
screen in the multi-information display, a
problem has occurred with the electronically
controlled 4WD system and the safety device
has activated. Immediately have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
choice.
Always use tires of the same size, type, and
brand that have no wear differences. Using
tires that differ in size, type, brand, or wear
amount may activate the protection of the
drive-system components, causing the drive
mode in “4WD AUTO” mode to lock or the
“4WD” and “LOCK” indicators to blink
alternately.
4-wheel drive operation
CAUTION
WARNING
Do not over-rely on the 4-wheel drive vehi-
cles. Even 4-wheel drive vehicles have lim-
its to the system and ability to maintain
control and traction. Reckless driving may
lead to accidents. Always drive carefully,
taking account of the road conditions.
Improperly operating this vehicle on or
off-pavement can cause an accident or
rollover in which you and your passengers
could be seriously injured or killed.
• Follow all instructions and guidelines in
the owner’s manual.
• Keep your speed low and do not drive
faster than conditions.
NOTE
Driving on rough roads can be hard on a
vehicle. Before you leave the pavement, be
sure all scheduled maintenance and service
has been done, and that you have inspected
your vehicle. Pay special attention to the
condition of the tires, and check the tire pres-
sures.
4-wheel drive operation
Features and controls 5-63
5
When turning a sharp corner in “4WD
LOCK” position at low speed, a slight differ-
ence in steering may be experienced similar
to feeling as if the brakes were applied. This
is called tight corner braking and results from
each of the four tires being at a different dis-
tance from the corner. The phenomenon is
typical of 4-wheel drive vehicles. If this
occurs, either straighten out the steering
wheel or change to another mode.
Set the drive mode-selector to “4WD AUTO”
or “4WD LOCK” in accordance with the road
conditions, and then gradually depress the
accelerator pedal for a smooth start.
Set the drive mode-selector to “4WD LOCK”
and then gradually depress the accelerator
pedal for a smooth start. Keep the pressure on
the accelerator pedal as constant as possible,
and drive at low speed.
Mitsubishi Motors is not responsible to the
operator for any damage or injury caused or
liability incurred by improper and negligent
operation of a vehicle. All techniques of
vehicle operation depend on the skill and
experience of the operator and other partici-
pating parties. Any deviation from the rec-
ommended operating instructions above is at
their own risk.
Note that the stopping distance required of
the 4-wheel drive vehicle differs very little
from that of the front-wheel drive vehicle.
When driving on a snow-covered road or a
slippery, muddy surface, make sure that you
keep a sufficient distance between your vehi-
cle and the one ahead of you.
The driving posture should be more upright;
adjust the seat to a good position for easy
steering and pedal operation. Be sure to wear
the seat belt.
After driving on rough roads, check each
part of the vehicle and wash it thoroughly
with water. Refer to the “Inspection and
maintenance following rough road opera-
tion” section and “Vehicle care and Mainte-
nance” sections.
CAUTION
Setting the drive mode-selector to “4WD
LOCK” position to drive on dry paved road
will increase fuel consumption, with possible
noise and vibration generation.
NOTE
Turning sharp corners
On snowy or icy roads
NOTE
The use of snow tires is recommended.
Maintain a safe distance between vehicles,
avoid sudden braking, and use engine brak-
ing (downshifting).
CAUTION
Avoid sudden braking, sudden acceleration
and sharp turning. Skidding occurs and con-
trol of the vehicle could be lost.
Driving on sandy or muddy
roads
CAUTION
Do not force the vehicle or drive recklessly
on sandy surfaces. In comparison with nor-
mal road surfaces, the engine and other
drive-system components are put under
excessive strain when driving on such a sur-
face. This could lead to accidents.
If any of the following conditions occur
while the vehicle is being driven, immedi-
ately park your vehicle in a safe place and
follow these procedures:
• If the engine coolant temperature display
flashes on the information screen in the
multi-information display or the engine
power drops suddenly.
Refer to “Engine overheating” on page 8-4.
• If the “ ” warning display and “SLOW
DOWN” or the “ ” warning display and
“SERVICE REQUIRED” appear on the
information screen in the multi-information
display.
Refer to “Warning display” on page 5-56.
Inspection and maintenance following rough road operation
5-64 Features and controls
5
Your vehicle may not provide sufficient hill
climbing ability and engine braking on steep
slope. Avoid driving on steep slopes even
though the vehicle is an 4-wheel drive vehi-
cle.
N00537801109
If the electrical circuits become wet, further
operation of the vehicle will be impossible;
therefore, avoid driving through water unless
absolutely necessary. If driving through water
is unavoidable, use the following procedure:
Check the depth of the water and the terrain
before attempting to drive through it. Drive
slowly to avoid creating excessive water
splashing.
N00530700098
After operating the vehicle in rough road con-
ditions, be sure to perform the following
inspection and maintenance procedures:
Check that the vehicle has not been dam-
aged by rocks, gravel, etc.
Carefully wash the vehicle with water.
Drive the vehicle slowly while lightly
depressing the brake pedal in order to dry
out the brakes. If the brakes still do not
function properly, contact an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-
ity of your choice as soon as possible to
have the brakes checked.
Remove the insects, dried grass, etc. clog-
ging the radiator core.
After driving through water, check the
engine, transaxle and differential oil. If
the oil or grease is milky or cloudy
because of water contamination, it must
be replaced with new oil.
Check the inside of the vehicle. If water
entry is found, dry the carpet etc.
Inspect the headlights. If water is in the
headlight housing, have it drained at an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice.
WARNING
When attempting to rock your vehicle out
of a stuck position, be sure that the area
around the vehicle is clear of people and
physical objects. The rocking motion may
cause the vehicle to suddenly launch for-
ward/backward, causing injury or dam-
age to nearby people or objects.
NOTE
Avoid sudden braking, sudden acceleration
and sharp turning; such operations could
result in the vehicle becoming stuck.
If the vehicle becomes stuck in sandy or
muddy roads, it can often be moved with a
rocking motion. Move the selector lever
alternately between the “D” (DRIVE) and
“R” (REVERSE) positions while pressing
lightly on the accelerator pedal.
Driving on rough road can cause rust on the
vehicle; wash the vehicle thoroughly as soon
as possible after such use.
Climbing/descending sharp
grades
Driving through water
CAUTION
Never drive through water that is deep
enough to cover wheel hubs, axles or exhaust
pipe. Do not change the selector lever posi-
tion while driving through water.
Frequent driving through water can
adversely affect the life span of the vehicle;
consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice and
take the necessary measures to prepare,
inspect, and repair the vehicle.
After driving through water, apply the brakes
to be sure they are functioning properly. If
the brakes are wet and not functioning prop-
erly, dry them out by driving slowly while
lightly depressing the brake pedal. Inspect
each part of the vehicle carefully.
Inspection and maintenance
following rough road opera-
tion
Cautions on the handling of 4-wheel drive vehicles
Features and controls 5-65
5
Have an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer replace grease in the wheel bear-
ings.
N00530800187
Since the driving torque can be applied to the
four wheels, the driving performance of the
vehicle when operating in 4-wheel drive is
greatly affected by the condition of the tires.
Pay close attention to the tires.
Install only the specified tires on all
wheels. Refer to “Tires and wheels” on
page 11-5.
Be sure all four tires and wheels are the
same size and type.
When it is necessary to replace any of the
tires or wheels, replace all four.
All tires should be rotated before the wear
difference between the front and rear tires
is recognizable.
Good vehicle performance cannot be
expected if there is a difference in wear
between tires. Refer to “Tire rotation” on
page 9-19.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly.
N00517500275
Overuse of the brake can cause weakening,
resulting in poor brake response and prema-
ture wear of the brake pads.
Cautions on the handling of
4-wheel drive vehicles
Tires and wheels
CAUTION
Always use tires of the same size, type, and
brand that have no wear differences. Using
tires of different size, type, brands or degree
of wear, will increase the differential oil tem-
perature and result in possible damage to the
driving system. Further, the drive train will
be subject to excessive loading, possibly
leading to oil leakage, component seizure, or
other serious failures.
Towing
CAUTION
Do not tow 4-wheel drive vehicles with the
front or rear wheels on the ground (Type A
or Type B) as illustrated. This could result in
damage to the drivetrain, or unstable towing.
If you tow 4-wheel drive vehicles, use Type
C or Type D equipment.
Even in “2WD” mode, the vehicle cannot be
towed with the front or the rear wheels on
the ground.
Jacking up a 4-wheel drive
vehicle
WARNING
Do not crank the engine while jacking up
the vehicle.
The tire on the ground may turn and the
vehicle may roll off the jack.
Service brake
Brake pedal
Hill start assist
5-66 Features and controls
5
When driving down a long or steep hill, use
engine braking by downshifting.
N00517600436
Your vehicle is equipped with power brakes
for more braking force with less brake pedal
effort.
Your brakes are designed to operate at full
capacity, even if the power assist is not being
used.
If the power assist is not being used, the effort
needed to press the brake pedal is greater.
If you should lose the power assist for some
reason, the brakes will still work.
If the power brake unit or either of the two
brake hydraulic systems stops working prop-
erly, the rest of the brake system will still
work, but the vehicle will not slow down as
quickly.
You will know this has happened if you find
you need to press the brake down farther, or
harder when slowing down or stopping, or if
the brake warning light and the warning dis-
play in the multi-information display come
on. Have the brake system repaired at an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice immediately.
N00550700124
The disc brakes have an alarm that makes a
metallic squeal when the brake pads have
worn down enough to need service.
If you hear this sound, have the brake pads
replaced at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
N00562600074
The hill start assist makes it easy to start off
on a steep uphill slope by preventing the
vehicle from moving backwards. It keeps the
braking force for about 2 second when you
move your foot from the brake pedal to the
accelerator pedal.
WARNING
Do not leave any objects near the brake
pedal or let a floor mat slide under it;
doing so could prevent the full pedal
stroke that would be necessary in an
emergency. Make sure that the pedal can
be operated freely at all times. Make sure
the floor mat is securely held in place.
CAUTION
It is important not to drive the vehicle with
your foot resting on the brake pedal when
braking is not required. This practice can
result in very high brake temperatures, pre-
mature lining wear, and possible damage to
the brakes.
Power brakes
WARNING
Never coast downhill with the engine OFF.
Keep the engine running whenever your
vehicle is in motion. If you turn off the
engine while driving, the power brake
booster will stop working and your brakes
will not work as well.
If the power assist is lost or if either brake
hydraulic system stops working properly,
take your vehicle to an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-
ity of your choice immediately.
Brake pad wear alarm
WARNING
Driving with worn brake pads will make it
harder to stop, and can cause an accident.
Hill start assist
Hill start assist
Features and controls 5-67
5
N00562701173
1. Stop the vehicle completely using the
brake pedal.
2. Place the selector lever into the “D” posi-
tion.
3. Release the brake pedal and the hill start
assist will maintain the braking force
applied while stopping for approximately
2 seconds.
4. Depress the accelerator pedal and the hill
start assist gradually will decrease the
braking force as the vehicle starts moving.
N00562801158
If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys-
tem, the following display/indicator will turn
on.
Warning display
CAUTION
Do not overly rely on the hill start assist to
prevent backwards movement of the vehicle.
Under certain circumstances, even when hill
start assist is activated, the vehicle may
move backwards if the brake pedal is not suf-
ficiently depressed, if the vehicle is heavily
loaded, or if the road is very steep or slip-
pery.
The hill start assist is not designed to keep
the vehicle stopped in place on uphill slopes
for more than 2 seconds.
When facing uphill, do not rely on using the
hill start assist to maintain a stopped position
as an alternative to depressing the brake
pedal.
Doing so could cause an accident.
Do not perform the following operation
while the hill start assist is operating.
[Except for vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key]
Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” or
“ACC” position.
[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]
Put the operation mode in OFF or ACC. The
hill start assist could stop operating, which
could result in an accident.
To operate
NOTE
When reversing on an uphill slope, place the
selector lever into the “R” position.
NOTE
The hill start assist is activated when all of
the following conditions are met.
• The engine is running.
(The hill start assist will not be activated
while the engine is starting or immediately
after the engine is started.)
• The selector lever is in any position other
than “P” or “N”.
• The vehicle is completely stationary, with
the brake pedal depressed.
• The parking brake is released.
The hill start assist will not operate if the
accelerator pedal is depressed before the
brake pedal is released.
The hill start assist also operates when
reversing on an uphill slope.
Warning display
-
ASC indicator
CAUTION
If the warning is displayed, the hill start
assist will not operate. Start off carefully.
Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the
engine.
Restart the engine and check whether the
indicator/display goes out, in which case the
hill start assist is again working normally.
If they remain displayed or reappear fre-
quently, it is not necessary to stop the vehicle
immediately, but the vehicle should be
inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
choice as soon as possible.
Brake assist system
5-68 Features and controls
5
N00567301103
The brake assist system is a device assisting
drivers who cannot depress the brake pedal
firmly such as in emergency stop situations
and provides greater braking force.
If the brake pedal is depressed suddenly, the
brakes will be applied with more force than
usual.
N00517900240
The anti-lock braking system helps prevent
the wheels from locking up when braking.
This helps maintain vehicle drivability and
steering wheel handling.
When using the anti-lock brakes (sudden
braking), steering is slightly different
from normal driving conditions. Use the
steering wheel carefully.
Always keep a safe distance from the
vehicle in front of you. Even if your vehi-
cle is equipped with the anti-lock braking
system, leave a greater braking distance
when:
• Driving on gravel or snow-covered
roads.
• Driving on uneven road surfaces.
Operation of anti-lock braking system is
not restricted situations where brakes are
applied suddenly. This system may also
prevent the wheels from locking when
you drive over manholes, steel roadwork
plates, road markings, or any uneven road
surface.
When the anti-lock braking system is in
use, you may feel the brake pedal vibrat-
ing and hear a unique sound. It may also
feel as if the pedal resists being pressed.
In this situation, simply hold the brake
pedal down firmly. Do not pump the
brake, which will result in reduced
braking performance.
Brake assist system
CAUTION
The brake assist system is not a device
designed to exercise braking force greater
than its capacity. Make sure to always keep a
sufficient distance between vehicles in front
of you without relying too much on the brake
assist system.
NOTE
Once the brake assist system is operational,
it maintains great braking force even if the
brake pedal is lightly released.
To stop its operation, completely remove
your foot from the brake pedal.
When the brake assist system is in use while
driving, you may feel as if the depressed
brake pedal is soft, the pedal moves in small
motions in conjunction with the operation
noise, or the vehicle body and the steering
wheel vibrate. This occurs when the brake
assist system is operating normally and does
not indicate faulty operation. Continue to
depress the brake pedal.
You may hear an operation noise when the
brake pedal is suddenly or fully depressed
while stationary. This does not indicate a
malfunction and the brake assist system is
operating normally.
When the anti-lock brake system warning
light/display or only ASC warning display
illuminate, the brake assist system in not
functioning.
Anti-lock braking system
NOTE
Driving hints
Anti-lock braking system
Features and controls 5-69
5
N00531601727
Warning light
Warning display
If there is a malfunction in the system, the
anti-lock braking system warning light will
come on and the warning display will appear
on the information screen in the multi-infor-
mation display.
Under normal conditions, the ABS warning
light only comes on when the ignition switch
is turned to the “ON” position or the opera-
tion mode is put in ON and goes off a few
seconds later.
N00531701685
Avoid hard braking and high-speed driv-
ing. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Test the system by restarting the engine
and driving at a speed of about 12 mph
(20 km/h) or higher.
If the warning light/display then remains
off during driving, there is no abnormal
condition.
However, if the warning light/display do
not disappear, or if they come on again
when the vehicle is driven, have the vehi-
cle checked by an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or repair facility of your
choice as soon as possible.
CAUTION
The anti-lock braking system cannot prevent
accidents. It is your responsibility to take
safety precautions and to drive carefully.
To prevent failure of the anti-lock braking
system, be sure all 4 wheels and tires are the
same size and the same type.
NOTE
A whining sound is emitted from the engine
compartment when driving immediately
after starting the engine. These are the nor-
mal sounds the anti-lock braking system
makes when performing a self-check. It does
not indicate a malfunction.
The anti-lock braking system can be used
after the vehicle has reached a speed over
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). It stops
working when the vehicle slows below 3
mph (5 km/h).
Anti-lock braking system warn-
ing light/display
CAUTION
Any of the following indicates that the anti-
lock braking system is not functioning and
only the standard brake system is working.
(The standard brake system is functioning
normally.) If this happens, take your vehicle
to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
a repair facility of your choice.
• When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position or the operation mode is put
in ON, the warning light does not come on
or it remains on and does not go off.
• The warning light comes on while driving
• The warning display appears while driving
If the warning light/display illu-
minate while driving
If only the anti-lock braking sys-
tem warning light/display illumi-
nate
Electric power steering system (EPS)
5-70 Features and controls
5
Warning light
Warning display
The anti-lock braking system and brake force
distribution function may not work, so hard
braking could make the vehicle unstable.
Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or repair
facility of your choice.
N00529200077
After driving on snow or icy roads, remove
any snow and ice which may have be left
around the wheels. On vehicles that have an
anti-lock braking system, be careful not to
damage the wheel speed sensors (A) or the
cables located at each wheel.
N00568401143
The power steering system operates while the
engine is running. It helps reduce the effort
needed to turn the steering wheel.
The power steering system has mechanical
steering capability in case the power assist is
lost. If the power assist is lost for some rea-
son, you will still be able to steer your vehi-
cle, but you will notice it takes much more
effort to steer. If this happens, have your vehi-
cle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
choice.
If the anti-lock braking system
warning light/display and brake
warning light/display illuminate at
the same time
NOTE
The anti-lock braking system warning light
and brake warning light illuminate at the
same time and the warning displays appear
alternately on the information screen in the
multi-information display.
After driving on icy roads
Front
Electric power steering sys-
tem (EPS)
Rear
Active stability control (ASC)
Features and controls 5-71
5
If there is a malfunction in the system, the
warning display will appear on the informa-
tion screen in the multi-information display.
N00559100134
The Active stability control (ASC) takes
overall control of the anti-lock braking sys-
tem, traction control function and skid control
function to help maintain the vehicle’s control
and traction. Please read this section in con-
junction with the page on the anti-lock brak-
ing system, traction control function and skid
control function.
Anti-lock braking system P.5-68
Traction control function P.5-72
Skid control function P.5-72
WARNING
Do not stop the engine while the vehicle is
moving. Stopping the engine would make
the steering wheel extremely hard to turn,
possibly resulting in an accident.
NOTE
During repeated full-lock turning of the
steering wheel (for example, while you are
manoeuvring the vehicle into a parking
space), a protection function may be acti-
vated to prevent overheating of the power
steering system. This function will make the
steering wheel gradually harder to turn. In
this event, limit your turning of the steering
wheel for a while. When the system has
cooled down, the steering effort will return
to normal.
If you turn the steering wheel while the vehi-
cle is stationary with the headlights on, the
headlights may become dim. This behavior
is not abnormal. The headlights will return to
their original brightness after a short while.
Electric power steering system
warning display
CAUTION
If the warning display appears while the
engine is running, have the vehicle inspected
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
a repair facility of your choice as soon as
possible. It may become harder to turn the
steering wheel.
Active stability control
(ASC)
CAUTION
Do not over-rely on the ASC. Even the ASC
cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle. This system, like
any other system, has limits and cannot help
you to maintain traction and control of the
vehicle in all circumstances. Reckless driv-
ing can lead to accidents. It is the driver’s
responsibillty to drive carefully, This means
taking into account the traffic, road and envi-
ronmental conditions.
Be sure to use the same specified type and
size of tire on all four wheels. Otherwise, the
ASC may not work properly.
Do not install any aftermarket limited slip
differential (LSD) on your vehicle. The ASC
may stop functioning properly.
NOTE
An operation noise may be emitted from the
engine compartment in the following situa-
tions. The sound is associated with checking
the operations of the ASC. At this time, you
may feel a shock from the brake pedal if you
depress it. These do not indicate a malfunc-
tion.
Active stability control (ASC)
5-72 Features and controls
5
N00559200076
On slippery surfaces, the traction control
function prevents the drive wheels from spin-
ning excessive, thus helping the vehicle to
start moving from a stopped condition. It also
provides sufficient driving force and steering
performance as the vehicle turns while press-
ing the acceleration pedal.
N00559300051
The skid control function is designed to help
the driver maintain control of the vehicle on
slippery roads or during rapid steering
maneuvers. It works by controlling the engine
output and the brake on each wheel.
N00559401352
The ASC is automatically activated when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position
or the operation mode is put in ON. You can
deactivate the system by pressing down the
“ASC OFF” switch for 3 seconds or longer.
When the ASC is deactivated, the indica-
tor will turn on. To reactivate the ASC,
momentarily press the “ASC OFF” switch;
the indicator is turned off.
• When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position or the operation mode is put
in ON.
• When the vehicle is driven for a while after
the engine is turned on.
When the ASC is activated, you may feel a
vibration in the vehicle body or hear a whin-
ing sound from the engine compartment.
This indicates that the system is operating
normally. It does not indicate a malfunction.
When the anti-lock braking system warning
light is illuminated, the ASC is not active.
Traction control function
CAUTION
When driving a vehicle on a snowy or icy
road, be sure to install snow tires and drive
the vehicle at moderate speeds.
NOTE
Skid control function
NOTE
The skid control function operates at speeds
of about 9 mph (15 km/h) or higher.
ASC OFF switch
CAUTION
For safety reasons, the “ASC OFF” switch
should be operated when your vehicle is
stopped.
Be sure to keep the ASC on while driving in
normal circumstances.
NOTE
Using the “ASC OFF” switch turns off both
the stability control function and the traction
control function.
When moving out of mud, sand or fresh
snow, pressing the accelerator pedal may not
allow the engine speed to increase. In such
situations, temporarily turning off ASC with
the “ASC OFF” switch will make it easier to
move out your vehicle.
If you continue to press the “ASC OFF”
switch after the ASC is turned off, the “mis-
taken operation protection function” will
activate and the ASC will turn back on.
Active stability control (ASC)
Features and controls 5-73
5
N00546501157
N00546601190
If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys-
tem, the following display/indicator will turn
on.
Warning display
ASC operation display or ASC
OFF display
-
ASC operation display/ASC indicator
The display/indicator will blink when
the ASC is operating.
-
ASC OFF indicator
This indicator will turn on when the
ASC is turned off with the “ASC
OFF” switch.
CAUTION
When display/indicator blinks, ASC is
operating, which means that the road is slip-
pery or that your vehicle’s wheels are begin-
ning to slip. If this happens, drive slower
with less accelerator input.
If the temperature in the braking system con-
tinues to increase due to continuous brake
control on a slippery road surface, the
indicator will blink. To prevent the brake
system from overheating, the brake control
of the traction control function will be tem-
porarily suspended.
The engine control of the traction control
function and normal brake operation will not
be affected. Park your vehicle in a safe place.
When the temperature in the braking system
has come down, the indicator will be
turned off and the traction control function
will start operating again.
NOTE
The indicator may turn on when you start
the engine. This means that the battery volt-
age momentarily dropped when the engine
was started. It does not indicate a malfunc-
tion, provided that the display goes out
immediately.
When a compact spare tire has been put on
your vehicle, the gripping ability of the tire
will be lower, making it more likely that the
display/indicator will blink.
CAUTION
ASC warning display
-
ASC indicator
-
ASC OFF indicator
CAUTION
The system may be malfunctioning.
Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the
engine.
Restart the engine and check whether the dis-
play/indicator goes out. If they go out, there
is no abnormal condition. If they do not go
out or appear frequently, it is not necessary
to stop the vehicle immediately, but you
should have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice as soon as pos-
sible.
Cruise control
5-74 Features and controls
5
N00546300031
N00518301727
Cruise control is an automatic speed control
system that keeps a set speed. It can be acti-
vated at speeds from approximately 25 mph
(40 km/h). Cruise control does not work at
speeds below approximately 25 mph
(40 km/h).
N00518401513
1. With the ignition switch in “ON” position
or the operation mode is in ON, press the
CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch (A)
to turn on the cruise control. The
“CRUISE” indicator light in the meter
cluster will come on.
Towing
CAUTION
When towing the vehicle with only the front
wheels or only the rear wheels raised off the
ground, do not place the ignition switch in
the “ON” position or do not put the operation
mode in ON. Placing the ignition switch in
the “ON” position or putting the operation
mode in ON could cause the ASC to operate,
resulting in an accident.
Note that the correct towing method depends
on the transmission type and the vehicle’s
drive configuration.
For details, refer to “Towing” on page 8-12.
Cruise control
CAUTION
When you do not wish to drive at a set speed,
turn off the cruise control for safety.
Do not use cruise control when driving con-
ditions will not allow you to stay at the same
speed, such as in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered, wet,
slippery, on a steep downhill slope.
NOTE
Cruise control may not be able to keep your
speed on uphills or downhills.
Your speed may decrease on a steep uphill.
You may use the accelerator pedal if you
want to stay at your set speed.
Your speed may increase to more than the set
speed on a steep downhill. You have to use
the brake to control your speed. As a result,
the set speed driving is deactivated.
Cruise control switches
CAUTION
A- CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch
Used to turn on and off the cruise control.
B- SET - switch
Used to reduce the set speed and to set the
desired speed.
C- RES + switch
Used to increase the set speed and to
return to the original set speed.
D- CANCEL switch
Used to deactivate the set speed driving.
NOTE
When operating the cruise control switches,
press the cruise control switches correctly.
The set speed driving may be deactivated
automatically if two or more switches of the
cruise control are pressed at the same time.
To activate
Cruise control
Features and controls 5-75
5
2. Accelerate or decelerate to your desired
speed, then push down and release the
SET - switch (B) when the “CRUISE”
indicator light is illuminated. The vehicle
will then maintain the desired speed.
N00518501367
There are 2 ways to increase the set speed.
Push up and hold the RES + switch (C) while
driving at the set speed, and your speed will
then gradually increase.
When you reach your desired speed, release
the switch. Your new cruising speed is now
set.
To increase your speed in small amounts,
push up the RES + switch for less than about
1 second and release it.
Each time you push up the RES + switch,
your vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
faster.
While driving at the set speed, use the accel-
erator pedal to reach your desired speed and
then push down the SET - switch (B) and
release the switch momentarily to set a new
desired cruising speed.
N00518601296
There are 2 ways to decrease the set speed.
NOTE
When you release the SET - switch, the vehi-
cle speed will be set.
To increase the set speed
RES + switch
Accelerator pedal
To decrease the set speed
Cruise control
5-76 Features and controls
5
Push down and hold the SET - switch (B)
while driving at the set speed, and your speed
will slow down gradually.
When you reach your desired speed, release
the switch. Your new cruising speed is now
set.
To slow down your speed in small amounts,
push down the SET - switch for less than
about 1 second and release it.
Each time you push down the SET - switch,
your vehicle will slow down by about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h).
While driving at the set speed, use the brake
pedal, which disengages the cruise control,
then push down the SET - switch (B) and
release the switch momentarily to set a new
desired cruising speed.
N00541701079
Depress the accelerator pedal as you would
normally. When you release the pedal, you
will return to your set speed.
Depress the brake pedal to decrease the
speed. To return to the previously set speed,
push up the RES + switch (C).
Refer to “To resume the set speed” on page
5-77.
SET - switch
Brake pedal
To temporarily increase or
decrease the speed
To temporarily increase the speed
To temporarily decrease the speed
Cruise control
Features and controls 5-77
5
N00518801692
The set speed driving can be deactivated as
follows:
Press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
switch (A). (Cruise control will be turned
off.)
Press the CANCEL switch (D).
Depress the brake pedal.
The set speed driving is deactivated automati-
cally in any of the following ways.
When your speed slows to approximately
10 mph (15 km/h) or more below the set
speed because of a hill, etc.
When your speed slows to approximately
25 mph (40 km/h) or less.
When the active stability control (ASC)
starts operating.
Refer to “Active stability control (ASC)”
on page 5-71.
Also, the set speed driving may be deacti-
vated as follows:
When the engine speed rises and
approaches the tachometer’s red zone (the
red-colored part of the tachometer dial).
N00518901329
If the set speed driving is deactivated by any
condition described in “To deactivate” on
page 5-77, you can resume the previously set
speed by pushing up the RES + switch (C)
while driving at a speed of about 25 mph (40
km/h) or higher.
Under either of the following conditions,
however, using the switch does not allow you
to resume the previously set speed. In these
situations, repeat the speed setting procedure:
The CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
switch is pressed.
[Except for vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key]
Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” or
“ACC” position.
[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]
To deactivate
WARNING
Although the set speed driving will be
deactivated when shifting to the “N”
(NEUTRAL) position, never move the
selector lever to the “N” (NEUTRAL)
position while driving.
You would have no engine braking and
could cause a serious accident.
CAUTION
When the set speed driving is deactivated
automatically in any situation other than
those listed above, there may be a system
malfunction.
Press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
switch to turn off the cruise control and have
your vehicle inspected by an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
of your choice.
To resume the set speed
Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM) (if so equipped)
5-78 Features and controls
5
Put the operation mode in OFF or ACC.
“CRUISE” indicator light is turned OFF.
N00577300082
The Forward Collision Mitigation system
(FCM) is designed to help reduce the risk of a
collision with a vehicle or a pedestrian
straight ahead of your vehicle. The FCM uses
a sensor (A) to determine the distance and
relative speed to a vehicle and a pedestrian in
front. The FCM is not designed as an auto-
matic driving system or as a collision avoid-
ance system.
When your vehicle is approaching a vehicle
or a pedestrian straight-ahead in your path
and the FCM judges that there is the risk of a
collision, the system will give audible and
visual warnings.
When the FCM judges that a collision with
the vehicle or the pedestrian straight-ahead is
imminent, the system will automatically
apply moderate braking to warn you to apply
the brakes immediately.
When the FCM judges that a collision with
the vehicle or the pedestrian straight-ahead is
highly unavoidable, the system will apply
emergency braking to reduce the severity of
the collision and, if possible, to avoid the col-
lision.
Stop lights are illuminated during automatic
braking.
Forward Collision Mitiga-
tion system (FCM)
(if so
equipped)
WARNING
Before using the FCM, read this entire
section to fully understand the limitations
of this system. Failure to follow instruc-
tions could result in an accident.
The FCM is designed to help avoid certain
frontal collisions or reduce the crash
speed in such collisions. It is not a substi-
tute for your safe and careful driving.
Under certain circumstances, the system
may not operate or may not detect cor-
rectly a vehicle or a pedestrian in front.
When your vehicle is approaching a vehi-
cle or a pedestrian too closely, take all nec-
essary actions to avoid a collision, such as
braking and steering, regardless of
whether the FCM is activated or not.
Never rely on the FCM to prevent a colli-
sion.
Never attempt to test the operation of the
FCM. Doing so could cause an accident,
resulting in serious injury or death.
WARNING
Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM) (if so equipped)
Features and controls 5-79
5
N00577400100
If the system judges that there is a risk of
your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or the
pedestrian in front, this function warns you of
the potential hazard with visual and audible
alarms.
When this function is triggered, a buzzer
sounds and, at the same time, the indicator
flashes.
The FCM will also prepare to provide quick
brake response and greater brake force when
you apply the brakes.
The forward collision warning function oper-
ates at the following vehicle speeds:
Against a vehicle: Approximately 10 mph
(15 km/h) to 87 mph (140 km/h).
Against a pedestrian: Approximately 5
mph (7 km/h) to 40 mph (65 km/h).
N00577700158
When the FCM judges that a collision with
the vehicle or the pedestrian straight-ahead is
imminent, the FCM will automatically apply
moderate braking to warn the driver to apply
the brakes immediately.
If the FCM judges that the collision is highly
unavoidable, it will automatically apply
emergency braking to reduce the severity of
the collision and, if possible, to avoid the col-
lision.
When the FCM applies emergency braking, a
warning message is displayed in the informa-
tion screen of the multi-information display.
The FCM braking function operates at the
following vehicle speeds:
Against a vehicle: Approximately 3 mph
(5 km/h) to 50 mph (80 km/h)
Against a pedestrian: Approximately
3 mph (5 km/h) to 40 mph (65 km/h)
Forward collision warning
function
FCM braking function
WARNING
If the ASC is turned off, the FCM braking
function will not operate. Refer to “Active
stability control” on page 5-71.
If the brake pedal is not depressed within
2 seconds after your vehicle has been
stopped by the FCM, a warning buzzer
will sound and the brakes activated by the
FCM will automatically be released.
Apply the brakes as necessary to keep
your vehicle stationary.
The FCM will not activate and will not
provide either warning or braking in cer-
tain situations. Some of these include:
• When the selector lever is in the “P”
(PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position.
• When an object other than a vehicle or a
pedestrian is in front.
• When the FCM has detected a problem
in the system.
• When a vehicle or a pedestrian suddenly
cuts in front of your vehicle.
The FCM may or may not detect a motor-
cycle, bicycle or wall depending on the sit-
uation. The FCM is not designed to detect
these objects.
The forward collision warning function
and/or the FCM braking function may not
activate in certain situations. Some of
these include:
• When a vehicle suddenly appears just in
front of your vehicle.
• When a vehicle cuts into your path at a
close distance.
Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM) (if so equipped)
5-80 Features and controls
5
• When a vehicle ahead is not completely
in your path.
• When your vehicle changed lanes, and
your vehicle approached immediately
behind the vehicle ahead.
• When a vehicle ahead is towing a trailer.
• When a vehicle ahead is a truck loaded
with freight that protrudes rearward
from the cargo bed.
• When the height of a vehicle ahead is
extremely low or its road clearance is
extremely high.
• When a vehicle ahead is extremely dirty.
• When a vehicle ahead is covered with
snow.
• When a vehicle ahead has a large glass
surface.
• When a vehicle ahead does not have
reflectors (light reflector) or the position
of the reflector is low.
• When a vehicle ahead is a car carrier or
a similar shaped vehicle.
• When accelerating and decelerating
quickly.
• When driving on a slippery road covered
by rain water, snow, ice, etc.
• When driving on a road with alternating
up and down steep slopes.
• When driving on a curve.
• When driving on a bumpy or rough road.
• When driving in dark areas, such as in a
tunnel or at night.
WARNING
• When the system recognizes driver’s
steering, accelerating, braking or gear
shifting actions as evasive actions to
avoid collision.
• When the rear of your vehicle is weighed
down with the weight of passengers and
luggage.
• Up to several seconds after starting driv-
ing.
• In adverse weather conditions, such as
rain, snow, fog or sand-storm.
• When the windshield of the sensor por-
tion is covered with dirt, water droplets,
snow and ice, etc.
• When a vehicle ahead or an oncoming
vehicle is splashing water, snow or dirt.
• When using a windshield washer.
• If windshield wipers are not Mitsubishi
Motors Genuine parts or equivalent.
• When the sensor becomes extremely hot
or cold.
• If the battery becomes weak or runs
down.
• When the sensor is affected by strong
light, such as direct sunlight or the head-
lights of an oncoming vehicle.
The FCM may not detect a pedestrian in
certain situations. Some of these include:
• If the pedestrian is shorter than approxi-
mately 3.2 feet (1 m) or taller than
approximately 6.5 feet (2 m).
WARNING
• If the pedestrian is wearing loose-fitting
clothes.
• If part of a pedestrian’s body is hidden,
such as when holding an umbrella, large
bag, etc.
• If a pedestrian bends forward, sits or lies
on the road.
• When a pedestrian is pushing/pulling
something, such as a stroller, bicycle or
wheelchair.
• When pedestrians gather in a group.
• When a pedestrian clothing appears to
be nearly the same color or brightness as
its surroundings.
• When a pedestrian is very close to an
object, such as a vehicle.
• When a pedestrian is in a dark area, such
as at night or in a tunnel.
• When a pedestrian is walking fast or
running.
• When a pedestrian suddenly rushes in
front of the vehicle.
• When the position of a pedestrian is close
to the edge of the vehicle.
When the system recognizes driver’s
steering or accelerating actions as evasive
actions to avoid a collision, FCM control
and alarm functions may be canceled.
In certain situations, though there is little
or no risk of a collision, the FCM may
activate. Examples include:
• When overtaking a vehicle.
WARNING
Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM) (if so equipped)
Features and controls 5-81
5
• When driving on a curve.
• When there is a road side object (B) that
reflects the radar sensor signal, such as a
road sign.
• When approaching a gate, a railroad
crossing, an underpass, a narrow bridge,
manhole lid or a speed bump.
• When driving under an overpass or
pedestrian bridge.
• When driving in a narrow tunnel.
• When driving in a parking structure.
• When approaching a slope where the
incline changes significantly.
• When trying to stop your vehicle very
close to a vehicle or an object in front.
• When passing a vehicle, a pedestrian or
an object closely.
WARNING
• When a vehicle in the next lane becomes
positioned directly in front of your vehi-
cle due to winding road conditions.
• When passing through an area that
objects may contact the vehicle, such as
thick grass, tree branches, or a banner.
• When there are patterns on the road that
may be mistaken for a vehicle or a pedes-
trian.
• When a vehicle cuts into your path in the
detecting range of the sensor.
• When an oncoming vehicle is positioned
straight ahead of your vehicle on a
curved road.
• When the FCM detects a long object car-
ried on your vehicle, such as skis or a
roof carrier.
• When driving through fog, steam, smoke
or dust.
The FCM should be tuned off if any of the
following situations occur:
• When using an automatic car wash.
• When the tires are not properly inflated.
• When the emergency spare tire is used.
WARNING
• When your vehicle is towed or your vehi-
cle tows another vehicle.
• When your vehicle is carried on a truck.
• When your vehicle is on a chassis dyna-
mometer or free rollers.
• If the windshield on or surrounding the
sensor is cracked or scratched.
NOTE
When depressing the brake pedal while auto-
matic braking is applied, the brake pedal will
feel firm. This is normal. Depress the brake
pedal harder to apply greater braking force.
During the automatic braking, operating
sounds may be heard. This is normal.
WARNING
Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM) (if so equipped)
5-82 Features and controls
5
N00577800159
This switch is used to turn on or off the FCM,
and also to select the distance which will trig-
ger the forward collision warning function.
Every time the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position or the operation mode is put in
ON, the FCM will automatically be turned
on.
To turn off the FCM, press and hold the FCM
ON/OFF switch. The following message
appears on the information screen of the
multi-information display and the indica-
tor will come on in the instrument cluster.
To turn on the FCM again, press the FCM
ON/OFF switch. The indicator on the
instrument cluster will go off, and a current
distance mode for the forward collision warn-
ing will be shown in the information screen
of the multi-information display.
The distance to the vehicle ahead which trig-
gers the forward collision warnings can be
selected from three levels (far, middle or
near).
To change the distance mode, push the FCM
ON/OFF switch. Every time the switch is
pushed, the distance mode will be switched.
The selected distance mode is shown on the
information screen of the multi-information
display.
Distance mode: Far
Distance mode: Middle
FCM ON/OFF switch
To turn on/off the FCM To change forward collision warn-
ing distance
Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM) (if so equipped)
Features and controls 5-83
5
Distance mode: Near
N00593300064
If there is a malfunction in the system, a
warning will appear on the information
screen of the multi-information display
depending on the situation.
When the FCM system determines that its
performance has been degraded, the FCM
will become inoperative.
This can occur when:
Foreign objects, such as dirt, snow, ice,
mist or dew condensation adhere to the
windshield of the sensor portion.
In adverse weather conditions, such as
rain, snow, sand storms, etc.
A front vehicle or an oncoming vehicle is
splashing water, snow or dirt.
The following message will appear on the
information screen of the multi-information
display and the indicator will come on in
the instrument cluster.
When the sensor performance returns, the
FCM functions will resume operation.
If the message continues showing, there is a
possibility that the sensor has a malfunction.
Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer for inspection of the sensor.
If the system becomes temporarily unavail-
able for some reason, the following message
will appear on the information screen of the
multi-information display, the indicator
will come on in the instrument cluster, and
the FCM will automatically be turned off.
If the message continues showing, there is a
possibility that the FCM has a malfunction.
Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer for inspection of the system.
NOTE
Actual distance which triggers the forward
collision warnings will vary depending on
your vehicle speed and the front vehicle
speed. The distance will become longer
when the vehicle speeds are higher.
The distance which will trigger the FCM
braking function cannot be adjusted.
System problem warning
Windshield is dirty
NOTE
The “CAMERA BLOCKED” message may
temporarily appear on the information screen
when the sensor cannot detect a vehicle, a
pedestrian or an object within range. This is
not a malfunction. When a vehicle or an
object comes within range, the FCM func-
tion will resume and the message will go off.
The “CAMERA BLOCKED” message may
appear on the information screen when driv-
ing on a nonbusy road with a few vehicles
and obstacles in front.
When the system cannot operate
temporarily
NOTE
Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM) (if so equipped)
5-84 Features and controls
5
If the system becomes temporarily unavail-
able due to the high or low temperature of the
sensor, the following message will appear on
the information screen of the multi-informa-
tion display, the indicator will come on in
the instrument cluster, and the FCM will
automatically be turned off.
After the temperature of the sensor has been
in range, the system will automatically return
to operation.
If the message continues showing, there is a
possibility that the FCM has a malfunction.
Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer for inspection of the sensor.
If the FCM detects a malfunction in the sys-
tem, either of the following messages will
appear on the information screen of the multi-
information display, the indicator will
come on in the instrument cluster, and the
FCM will automatically be turned off.
If the message remains even after the ignition
switch is turned to the “OFF” position and
then turned back to “ON” position or the
operation mode is put in OFF, and then turned
back to ON, please contact your authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
Sensor is too hot or cold FCM deactivation due to fault
NOTE
If the sensor or its surrounding area becomes
extremely hot (after prolonged exposure to
direct sunlight, for example), the “FCM
SERVICE REQUIRED” message may
appear.
After the temperature of the sensor or its sur-
rounding area has been in range, if the mes-
sage remains even after restarting the engine,
please contact an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer.
Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM) (if so equipped)
Features and controls 5-85
5
N00593400108
The sensor (A) is located inside the wind-
shield as shown in the illustration.
The sensor is shared in the following sys-
tems:
Forward Collision Mitigation system
(FCM) (if so equipped)
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) (if so
equipped)
Automatic High Beam (AHB) (if so
equipped)
Handling of the sensor
CAUTION
To maintain proper performance of the FCM,
LDW and AHB;
• Always keep the windshield clean.
If the inside of the windshield where the
sensor is installed becomes dirty or fogged,
contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer.
• Do not apply an impact or load on the sen-
sor or its surrounding area.
• Do not put anything including a sticker or
film to the outer side of windshield in front
of or surrounding the area of the sensor.
Also, do not put anything including a
sticker of film to inner side of the wind-
shield under the sensor.
• Do not attempt to detach or disassemble the
sensor.
• If the windshield is misted, remove the mist
from the windshield by using the defogger
switch.
• Maintain the wiper blades in good condi-
tion. Refer to “Wiper blades” on page 9-39.
When replacing the wiper blades, use only
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine parts or equiva-
lent.
• Do not dirty or damage the sensor.
CAUTION
• Do not spray glass cleaner on the sensor.
Also, do not spill liquid, such as a bever-
age, on the sensor.
• Do not install an electronic device, such as
an antenna, or a device that emits strong
electric waves, near the sensor.
• Always use tires of the same size, same
type and same brand, and which have no
significant wear differences.
• Do not modify the vehicle’s suspensions.
If the windshield in front of the sensor or in
the surrounding area of the sensor is cracked
or scratched, the sensor may not detect an
object properly. This could cause a serious
accident. Turn off the FCM and have your
vehicle inspected as soon as possible at an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
If you need to replace the windshield, con-
tact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
The sensor emits infrared rays when the
operation mode is in ON. Do not look into
the sensor by using optical goods such as a
magnifying glass. The infrared ray might
injure your eyes.
Laser radar specifications
Laser classification
Max average power 45 mW
Pulse duration 33 ns
CAUTION
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (with Lane Change Assist) (if so equipped)
5-86 Features and controls
5
N00592200079
The Blind Spot Warning (BSW) is a driving
aid system that alerts the driver when another
vehicle which may not be visible through the
outside rearview mirror is traveling in the
next lane behind your vehicle.
When a vehicle in the next lane is traveling at
same speed or faster in the detection areas,
the Blind Spot Warning light in the corre-
sponding outside rearview mirror will illumi-
nate. If the turn signal lever is operated to the
side where the Blind Spot Warning light is
illuminated, the Blind Spot Warning light will
blink and the system will beep 3 times to alert
the driver.
Depending on the relative speed between
your vehicle and a vehicle in the next lane,
the BSW will detect up to approximately
230 feet (70 m) from your vehicle (Lane
Change Assist).
N00592300126
The BSW uses 2 sensors (A) located inside
the rear bumper.
The detection areas are shown as illustrated.
Wavelength 905 nm
Divergent angle
(horizon x vertical)
28° x 12°
Laser classification label
Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
(with Lane Change Assist)
(if
so equipped)
WARNING
Before using the BSW, read this entire sec-
tion to fully understand the limitations of
this system. Failure to follow instructions
could result in an accident.
Never rely solely on the BSW system when
changing lanes. BSW is an aid only. It is
not a substitute for your safe and careful
driving. Always check visually behind and
all around your vehicle for other vehicles.
The performance of the BSW may vary
depending on driving, traffic and/or road
conditions.
Detection areas
WARNING
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (with Lane Change Assist) (if so equipped)
Features and controls 5-87
5
N00593500141
When the BSW switch is pressed while the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position
WARNING
In certain situations, the BSW may not
detect a vehicle in the detection areas or
the detection may be delayed. Some of
these include;
• When a small motorcycle or a bicycle is
behind your vehicle.
• When a vehicle is traveling alongside of
your vehicle at nearly the same speed for
prolonged periods of time.
• When the heights of the next lane and
your lane are different.
• Immediately after the BSW has been
turned on.
• Immediately after the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position or the oper-
ation mode is put in ON.
• Under adverse weather conditions, such
as rain, snow, strong winds, snow or sand
storm.
• When your vehicle becomes too close to
another vehicle.
• While multiple vehicles are overtaking
your vehicle.
• When driving near a pot hole and tram-
line.
• When a surrounding vehicle or an
oncoming vehicle is splashing water,
snow or dirt.
• When driving on a curve including the
beginning and the end of the curve.
• When driving on a road with alternating
up and down steep slopes.
• When driving on a bumpy or rough road.
• When the rear of your vehicle is weighed
down or your vehicle is leaning to the
right or left due to the weight of passen-
gers and luggage or the improper adjust-
ment of tire pressure.
• When the bumper surface around the
radar sensor is covered with dirt, snow
and ice, etc.
WARNING
• When a bicycle carrier or accessory is
installed to the rear of the vehicle.
• When the sensor is extremely hot or cold
(while the vehicle is parked for a long
period of time under a blazing sun or in
cold weather).
CAUTION
To maintain proper performance of the BSW,
follow the instructions below.
• Always keep the bumper surface around the
sensor clean.
• Avoid impacting the sensor or its surround-
ing area.
• Do not put a sticker on the sensor or its sur-
rounding bumper surface.
• Do not paint the sensor or its surrounding
bumper surface.
• Do not modify the sensor or its surrounding
area.
If the bumper has experienced an impact, the
sensor may have been damaged and the BSW
may not function properly. Have the vehicle
inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer.
To operate
WARNING
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (with Lane Change Assist) (if so equipped)
5-88 Features and controls
5
or the operation mode is put in ON, the
indicator (green) will appear on the informa-
tion screen of the multi-information display
and the BSW will enter the standby state.
When the BSW switch is pressed again, the
indicator on the information screen of the
multi-information display will then go out
and the BSW will turn off.
If you turn the BSW ON/OFF, the Rear Cross
Traffic Alert (RCTA) also turns ON/OFF at
the same time.
When the indicator (green) appears on the
information screen of the multi-information
display, if a vehicle is approaching your vehi-
cle in the detection area, the Blind Spot
Warning light in the outside rearview mirror
illuminates.
If the turn signal lever is operated to the side
where the Blind Spot Warning light is illumi-
nated, the Blind Spot Warning light will blink
and the system will beep 3 times to alert the
driver.
NOTE
After the system check screen disappears,
the indicator (green) appears on the infor-
mation screen of the multi-information dis-
play.
Refer to “Information screen (When the igni-
tion switch is turned from the “OFF” posi-
tion to the “ON” position or the operation
mode is changed from OFF to ON)” on page
5-111.
When the operation mode is set to OFF, the
selected condition (BSW ON/OFF) just
before setting to OFF is retained.
The BSW operates when all of the following
conditions are met.
• The ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position or the operation mode is put in ON.
• The selector lever is in positions other than
“P” (PARK) and “R” (REVERSE).
• The speed of your vehicle is approximately
6 mph (10 km/h) or higher.
When the sensor detects an
approaching vehicle
NOTE
The Blind Spot Warning light in the outside
rearview mirror may come on or blink in the
following conditions.
• When driving very near the guardrail or the
concrete wall.
• When driving near the entrance and outlet
of a tunnel or very near the wall or near the
evacuation area inside the tunnel.
• When turning at an intersection in a town
area.
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (with Lane Change Assist) (if so equipped)
Features and controls 5-89
5
N00592400042
If a problem occurs with the system, a visual
warning specific to the type of the problem is
given together with an audible alarm.
The warnings are combined with the Rear
Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system.
N00592700058
When the warning display appears, the BSW
does not operate normally because there is a
malfunction in the system. Have the vehicle
inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer as soon as possible.
N00592800059
When the warning display appears, the sensor
is temporarily not available for some reason
such as the environmental condition or
increase of the sensor temperature. When the
warning display does not disappear after
waiting for a while, contact an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
• Under adverse weather conditions (rain,
snow, sand storm etc.).
• When driving while your vehicle is blowing
up water, snow, sand, etc., on the road.
• When driving near a curb, pot hole and
tramline.
Set the BSW to OFF when towing.
The Blind Spot Warning light in the outside
rearview mirror may not be visible due to
strong direct sunlight or the glare from the
headlights of vehicles behind you during
night driving.
System problem warning
NOTE
When there is a malfunction in the
system
NOTE
When the warning display appears, the BSW
will be deactivated.
When the sensor is temporarily
not available
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (with Lane Change Assist) (if so equipped)
5-90 Features and controls
5
N00592900076
When the warning display appears, the radar
sensor cannot detect a vehicle traveling side
by side or an approaching vehicle, because
foreign objects, such as dirt, snow or ice,
adhere to the bumper surface around the sen-
sor.
Remove a dirt, freezing or foreign material on
the bumper surface around the sensor.
When the warning display does not disappear
after having cleaned the bumper surface
around the sensor, contact an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
When there is a foreign object on
the sensor
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (with Lane Change Assist) (if so equipped)
Features and controls 5-91
5
N00593900086
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
General information
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if so equipped)
5-92 Features and controls
5
For vehicles sold in Canada
Applicable law: Canada 310
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation of the device.
Frequency bands: 24.05 - 24.25 GHz
Output power: less than 20 milliwatts
N00593000133
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) is an
aid system for backing up. When the RCTA
system detects vehicles approaching from the
sides while your vehicle is reversing, the
Blind Spot Warning lights in the outside rear-
view mirrors on both sides will blink and a
buzzer will sound to alert the driver. A warn-
ing message will appear on the information
screen of the multi-information display and
the indicator will be changed from green
to flashing in yellow.
Rear Cross Traffic Alert
(RCTA)
(if so equipped)
WARNING
Before using the RCTA, read this entire
section to fully understand the limitations
of this system. Failure to follow instruc-
tions could result in an accident.
Never rely solely on the RCTA when back-
ing up. The RCTA is an aid system. It is
not a substitute for your safe and careful
driving. Always check visually behind and
all around your vehicle for other vehicles,
persons, animals or obstructions.
The performance of the RCTA may vary
depending on driving, traffic and/or sur-
rounding conditions.
NOTE
The Blind Spot Warning lights in the outside
rearview mirrors on both sides will blink,
even when only one vehicle is approaching
from one side.
If a system problem, etc., is detected after the
RCTA warning message appears on the
information screen in the multi-information
display, the information screen may change
to another warning message.
WARNING
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if so equipped)
Features and controls 5-93
5
The detection area is shown as illustrated.
1. Press the BSW switch while the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position or
the operation mode is put in ON.
(Refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW): To
operate” on page 5-87.)
2. When the selector lever is moved to the
“R” (REVERSE) position, the RCTA will
operate.
Detection areas
CAUTION
In certain situations, the RCTA may not
detect a vehicle in the detection areas. Some
of these situations include;
• When the reversing speed of your vehicle is
approximately 11 mph (18 km/h) or higher.
• When the speed of an approaching vehicle
is approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) or less.
• If the sensor detection area is blocked by a
nearby object, such as wall or parked vehi-
cle.
• When a vehicle is approaching from
straight behind your vehicle.
• When your vehicle is exiting from an
angled parking spot.
• Immediately after the RCTA has been
turned on.
• Immediately after the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position or the opera-
tion mode is put in ON.
• When the bumper surface around the sensor
is covered with dirt, snow and ice, etc.
• When the sensor becomes extremely hot or
cold, such as after the vehicle has been
parked for a prolonged time under the blaz-
ing sun or in cold weather.
CAUTION
If the bumper has experienced an impact, the
sensor may have been damaged and the
RCTA may not function properly. Have the
vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer.
To operate
CAUTION
Within approximately 7 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-
tion or the operation mode is put in ON, a
warning message will not appear on the
information screen of the multi-information
display even if the system detects a vehicle
approaching your vehicle.
CAUTION
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if so equipped)
5-94 Features and controls
5
If the system detects a problem, a warning is
displayed on the information screen in the
multi-information display.
Refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW): Sys-
tem problem warning” on page 5-89.
NOTE
After the system check screen disappears,
the indicator (green) appears on the infor-
mation screen of the multi-information dis-
play.
Refer to “Information screen (When the igni-
tion switch is turned from the “OFF” posi-
tion to the “ON” position or the operation
mode is changed from OFF to ON)” on page
5-111.
Set the RCTA to OFF when towing.
The Blind Spot Warning light in the outside
rearview mirror may not be visible due to
strong direct sunlight or the glare from the
headlights of vehicles behind you during
night driving.
When a problem is detected in
the system
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if so equipped)
Features and controls 5-95
5
N00594000084
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
General information
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) (if so equipped)
5-96 Features and controls
5
For vehicles sold in Canada
Applicable law: Canada 310
This device complies with Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1)
this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation of the device.
Frequency bands: 24.05 - 24.25 GHz
Output power: less than 20 milliwatts
N00577900105
The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) is a
driving aid system to help prevent uninten-
tional lane departure. The LDW is designed
to read lane markers by using a sensor (A)
under certain conditions. The LDW will give
you both visual and audible warnings when
your vehicle is leaving or has left the lane.
For details about handling the sensor, refer to
“Handling of the sensor” on page 5-85.
N00578000060
To turn on the LDW, press the LDW switch.
The indicator will appear on the informa-
tion screen of the multi-information display.
Lane Departure Warning
(LDW)
(if so equipped)
WARNING
Never rely solely on the LDW. The LDW is
not a collision avoidance system and is not
a substitute for your safe and careful driv-
ing.
Before using the LDW, read this entire
section to understand the limitations of
this system. Failure to follow instructions
could result in an accident.
To turn on/off the LDW
NOTE
The LDW is turned on when the vehicle is
shipped from the factory.
The currently selected LDW setting (on or
off) is stored even when the ignition switch
is turned to the “OFF” position or the opera-
tion mode is put in OFF.
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) (if so equipped)
Features and controls 5-97
5
To turn off the LDW, press the LDW switch.
The indicator on the information screen of
the multi-information display will then go
out.
To return the LDW to “ON”, press the LDW
switch again.
N00581100081
The LDW, when turned ON, is capable of
recognizing the lane in which your vehicle is
travelling and issuing an audible warning
when your vehicle begins to leave that travel
lane. When operating, the indicator on the
information screen in the multi-information
display will be changed to green. However,
the LDW will not operate in the following sit-
uations even if the indicator appears:
The vehicle speed is less than approxi-
mately 38 mph (60 km/h).
The turn signal lever is being operated or
has been operated in the past 7 seconds.
The hazard warning light is being oper-
ated or has been operated in the past
7 seconds.
N00581200079
While the indicator on the information
screen in the multi-information display is lit
in green, if your vehicle is leaving or has left
the lane, a buzzer will sound intermittently,
and the indicator will be flashing in yel-
low.
Operation of the LDW
Lane departure warning
NOTE
The warning will not continue for more than
3 seconds, even if your vehicle continues
leaving the lane.
(green) (flashing in yellow)
If the lane markers are only on one side of
the road, the LDW will operate only for the
appropriate side where the lane marker is
drawn.
WARNING
The LDW will not function when no lane
marker exists, such as at an intersection
or near a toll booth.
The LDW may not operate correctly in the
following situations and the LDW may not
give warnings or may give false warnings:
• When lane markers are not clearly visi-
ble due to rain, snow, fog, dark area, etc.
• When the road surface is shiny.
• When old lane markers remain on the
road surface.
• When the lane markers are double lines
or the shape of the lane markers are
complicated.
• When driving in an extremely narrow
lane.
• When the distance between your vehicle
and a vehicle in front is short.
• When driving into the sun light.
• When driving on curves.
• When driving on bumpy roads.
• When driving in construction zones.
• When passing through a place where the
brightness suddenly changes, such as at
the entrance to or exit of a tunnel.
NOTE
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) (if so equipped)
5-98 Features and controls
5
N00578100061
If a problem occurs with the system, a visual
warning specific to the type of the problem is
given together with an audible alarm.
The alarm shown below is displayed if the
system becomes temporarily unavailable due
to the high or low temperature of the sensor.
After temperature of the sensor has been in
range, the system will automatically return to
operation.
If the alarm continues showing, there is a pos-
sibility that the LDW has a malfunction. Con-
tact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
for inspection of the system.
The alarm shown below is displayed if the
system becomes temporarily unavailable due
to the dirty windshield of the sensor portion.
After having cleaned the windshield, the sys-
tem will automatically return to operation.
If the alarm continues showing, there is a pos-
sibility that the LDW has a malfunction. Con-
tact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
for inspection of the sensor.
• When the headlights of an oncoming
vehicle are very bright.
• When the rear of your vehicle is weighed
down with the weight of passengers and
luggage.
• When the headlights of your vehicle are
not clean or are not properly aimed.
• When the front windshield is not clean.
• When the front windshield wipers do not
clean the windshield properly.
CAUTION
To maintain proper function of the LDW:
• Always keep the windshield and the head-
lights clean.
• Do not put anything, such as a sticker, on
the front windshield in front of the sensor.
• Avoid applying a shock or load to the sen-
sor.
• Do not attempt to detach or disassemble the
sensor.
• Use only Mitsubishi Motors Genuine parts
when replacing the windshield wipers.
NOTE
When driving conditions are not suitable to
use the LDW, turn off the LDW.
WARNING
System problem warning
Sensor is too hot or cold
Windshield is dirty
Tire pressure monitoring system
Features and controls 5-99
5
If the LDW is deactivated due to a malfunc-
tion in the system, the either alarm shown
below is displayed. Contact your authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer for inspection of the
system.
N00530201625
The tire pressure monitoring system uses tire
inflation pressure sensors (A) on the wheels
to monitor the tire inflation pressures. The
system only indicates when a tire is signifi-
cantly under-inflated.
LDW deactivation due to fault
NOTE
If the sensor or its surrounding area becomes
extremely hot (after prolonged exposure to
direct sunlight, for example), the “LDW
SERVICE REQUIRED” message may
appear.
If the message remains even after the tem-
perature of the sensor or its surrounding area
has been in range, please contact an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
Tire pressure monitoring
system
WARNING
The compact spare wheel does not have a
tire inflation pressure sensor.
When the spare tire is used, the tire pres-
sure monitoring system will not work
properly.
See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer as soon as possible to replace or
repair the original tire.
NOTE
The tire pressure monitoring system is not a
substitute for regularly checking tire infla-
tion pressures.
Be sure to check the tire inflation pressures
as described in “Tires” on page 9-13.
The tire inflation pressure sensor (B) is
installed in the illustrated location.
• On vehicles with Type 1 sensor which has
the metallic air valve (C), replace grommet
and washer (D) with a new one when the
tire is replaced.
• On vehicles with Type 2 sensor which has
the rubber air valve (E), replace rubber air
valve (E) with a new one when the tire is
replaced.
Tire pressure monitoring system
5-100 Features and controls
5
N00532701406
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position or the operation mode is put in
ON, the tire pressure monitoring system
warning light normally illuminates and goes
off a few seconds later.
If one or more of the vehicle tires (except for
the spare tire) is significantly under-inflated,
the warning light will remain illuminated
while the ignition switch or the operation
mode is in ON.
Refer to “If the warning light / display illumi-
nates while driving” on page 5-101 and take
the necessary measures.
For details, please contact your authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
The tire pressure monitoring
system warning light / display
NOTE
Type 1
Type 2
NOTE
In addition, the warning display is displayed
on the information screen in the multi-infor-
mation display.
CAUTION
If the tire pressure monitoring system warn-
ing light does not illuminate when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position or
the operation mode is put in ON, it means
that the tire pressure monitoring system is
not working properly. Have the system
inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer.
In such situations, a malfunctioning of the
system may be preventing the monitoring of
the tire pressure. Avoid sudden braking,
sharp turning and high-speed driving.
If a malfunction is detected in the tire pres-
sure monitoring system, the tire pressure
monitoring system warning light will blink
for approximately 1 minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. The warning light
will issue further warnings each time the
engine is restarted as long as the malfunction
exists.
Check to see whether the warning light goes
off after few minutes driving.
If it then goes off during driving, there is no
problem.
However, if the warning light does not go
off, or if it blinks again when the engine is
restarted, have the vehicle inspected by an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
In such situations, a malfunctioning of the
system may be preventing the monitoring of
the tire pressure. For safety reasons, when
the warning light appears while driving,
avoid sudden braking, sharp turning and
high-speed driving.
Tire pressure monitoring system
Features and controls 5-101
5
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size
than the size indicated on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure
for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure tell-
tale illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a sig-
nificantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi-
cle’s handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pres-
sure, even if under-inflation has not reached
the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale.
When the system detects a malfunction, the
telltale will flash for approximately one min-
ute and then remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon subsequent
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illumi-
nated, the system may not be able to detect or
signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from function-
ing properly. Always check the TPMS mal-
function telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that
the replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function prop-
erly.
N00532801524
1. If the tire pressure monitoring system
warning light illuminates, avoiding hard
braking, sharp steering maneuvers and
high speeds. You should stop and adjust
the tires to the proper inflation pressure as
soon as possible. Adjust the spare tire at
the same time. Refer to “Tires” on page
9-13.
NOTE
In addition, the warning display is displayed
on the information screen in the multi-infor-
mation display.
If the warning light/display illu-
minates while driving
NOTE
In addition, the warning display is displayed
on the information screen in the multi-infor-
mation display.
When inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
sure, do not apply excessive force to the
valve stem to avoid breakage.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
sure, always reinstall the valve cap on the
valve stem.
Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could
get into the valve, resulting in damage to the
tire inflation pressure sensor.
Do not use metal valve caps, which may
cause a metal reaction, resulting in corrosion
and damage of the tire inflation pressure sen-
sors.
Tire pressure monitoring system
5-102 Features and controls
5
2. If the tire pressure monitoring system
warning light remains illuminated after
you have been driving for about 20 min-
utes after you adjust the tire inflation pres-
sure, one or more of the tires may have a
puncture. Inspect the tire and if it has a
puncture, have it repaired by an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as
possible.
The tire pressure monitoring system may not
work normally in the following circum-
stances:
A wireless facility or device using the
same frequency is near the vehicle.
Snow or ice is stuck inside the fenders
and/or on the wheels.
The tire inflation pressure sensor’s battery
is dead.
Wheels other than Mitsubishi genuine
wheels are being used.
Wheels that are not fitted with tire infla-
tion pressure sensors are being used.
Wheels whose ID codes are not memo-
rized by the vehicle are used.
Compact spare tire is fitted on a road
wheel.
A window tint that affects the radio wave
signals is installed.
N00532901192
If new wheels with new tire inflation pressure
sensors are installed, their ID codes must be
programmed into the tire pressure monitoring
system. Have the tire and wheel replacement
performed by an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer to avoid the risk of damaging
the tire inflation pressure sensors. If the
wheel replacement is not done by an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it is not cov-
ered by your warranty.
Once adjustments have been made, the warn-
ing light will go off after a few minutes of
driving.
WARNING
If the warning light/display illuminates
while you are driving, avoid hard braking,
sharp steering maneuvers and high
speeds.
Driving with an under-inflated tire
adversely affects vehicle performance and
can result in an accident.
CAUTION
If a tire has a puncture, replace that tire with
the spare tire. Driving on a punctured tire
could lead to an accident.
The warning light/display may not illuminate
immediately in the event of a tire blowout or
rapid leak.
NOTE NOTE
To avoid the risk of damage to the tire infla-
tion pressure sensors, have any punctured
tire repaired by an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer. If the tire repair is not done by
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it is
not covered by your warranty.
Do not use an aerosol puncture-repair spray
on any tire.
Such a spray could damage the tire inflation
pressure sensors.
Have any puncture repaired by an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
NOTE
Tire inflation pressures vary with the ambi-
ent temperature. If the vehicle is subjected to
large variations in ambient temperature, the
tire inflation pressures may be under-inflated
(causing the warning light/display to come
on) when the ambient temperature is rela-
tively low. If the warning light/display
comes on, adjust the tire inflation pressure.
Whenever the tires and wheels
are replaced with new ones
Rear-view camera
Features and controls 5-103
5
N00533001246
Your tire pressure monitoring system oper-
ates on a radio frequency subject to Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules
(For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry
Canada Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada).
This device complies with part 15 of FCC
Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt
RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions.
This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference.
This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
N00546201402
When the selector lever is in the “R” position
with the ignition switch or the operation
mode is in ON, the rear-view image will be
displayed on the screen of the Smartphone-
link Display Audio (SDA) or the DISPLAY
AUDIO in the center panel.
When the selector lever is shifted out of the
“R” position, the rear-view image will go off.
The rear-view camera (A) is in the liftgate, at
the left side of the liftgate handle.
Reference lines and upper surface of the rear
bumper (A) are displayed on the screen.
CAUTION
The use of non-genuine wheels will prevent
the proper fit of the tire inflation pressure
sensors, resulting air leakage or damage of
the sensors.
General information
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the manufacturer for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
Rear-view camera
WARNING
Never rely solely on the rear-view camera
to clear the area behind your vehicle.
Always check visually behind and all
around your vehicle for persons, animals,
obstructions or other vehicles. Failure to
do so can result in vehicle damage, serious
injury or death.
The rear-view camera is an aid system for
backing up, but it is not a substitute for
your visual confirmation.
The view on the screen is limited, and
objects outside the view, such as under the
bumper or around either corner of the
bumper end, cannot be seen on the screen.
Location of rear-view camera
CAUTION
If the camera lens gets dirty, a clear image
cannot be obtained. As necessary, rinse the
lens with clean water and gently wipe with a
clean, soft cloth.
To avoid damaging the camera;
• Do not rub the cover excessively or polish
it by using an abrasive compound.
• Do not disassemble the camera.
• Do not splash hot water directly on the lens.
• Do not spray the camera and its surround-
ings with high-pressure water.
• Make sure that the liftgate is securely
closed when backing up.
Reference lines on the screen
Rear-view camera
5-104 Features and controls
5
Red line (B) indicates approximately
20 inches (50 cm) behind the rear bumper.
Two Green lines (C) indicate approxi-
mately 8 inches (20 cm) outside of the
vehicle body.
Short transverse lines (1 to 3) indicate dis-
tance from the rear bumper.
1: Approximately at the rear edge of the
rear bumper (if so equipped)
2: Approximately 39 inches (100 cm)
3: Approximately 79 inches (200 cm)
CAUTION
The rear-view camera uses a wide-angle
lens. As a result, images and distances shown
on the screen are not exact.
Actual distance may be different from dis-
tance indicated by the lines on the screen,
depending on the loading condition of the
vehicle and road surface condition.
The reference lines for distance and vehicle
width are based on a level, flat road surface.
In the following cases, objects shown on the
screen will appear to be farther off than they
actually are.
• When the rear of the vehicle is weighed
down with the weight of passengers and
luggage in the vehicle. (Case 1)
• When there is an upward slope at the back.
(Case 2)
CAUTION
Case 1
A- Actual objects
B- Objects shown on the screen
CAUTION
The reference lines for distance and vehicle
width are intended to indicate the distance to
a flat object such as a level, flat road surface.
They may not indicate correct distance
depending on the shape of an obstacle.
For example, when there is an object behind
the vehicle that has upper sections projecting
in the direction of the vehicle, the reference
lines on the screen will indicate that point A
is the farthest point and point B is the closest
point to the vehicle. In reality, point A and B
are actually the same distance from the vehi-
cle, and point C is farther off than point A
and B.
Case 2
A- Actual objects
B- Objects shown on the screen
Instrument cluster
Features and controls 5-105
5
N00519000388
N00519100259
The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in
miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour
(km/h).
N00519201345
The tachometer shows engine revolutions per
minute. This allows the driver to determine
the most efficient selector position and engine
speed combinations.
This gauge also assists in evaluating engine
performance.
NOTE
Mirror image is displayed on the screen.
Monitor brightness is adjusted automatically
by sensors.
On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone-
link Display Audio (SDA), it is possible to
change the display language of the screen.
For details, please refer to the separated
owner’s manual.
Under certain circumstances, it may become
difficult to see an image on the screen, even
when the system is functioning correctly.
• In a dark area, such as at night.
• When water drops or condensation are on
the lens.
• When sun light or headlights shine directly
into the lens.
Instrument cluster
1- Tachometer P.5-105
2- Multi-information display P.5-107
Information screen display list
P.5-127
3- Speedometer P.5-105
4- Rheostat meter illumination button
P.5-106
Speedometer
Tachometer
Type A
Type B
Instrument cluster
5-106 Features and controls
5
N00554901352
Each time you press this button, there is a
sound and the brightness of the instruments
changes.
CAUTION
The red zone indicates an engine speed
beyond the range of safe operation.
Select the correct selector position to control
the engine speed so that the tachometer indi-
cator does not enter the red zone.
Rheostat meter illumination
button
NOTE
You can adjust to 8 different levels respec-
tively for when the front side-marker and
parking lights are illuminated and when they
are not.
If the vehicle is equipped with the automatic
light control, when the light switch is in a
position other than the “OFF” position, the
meter illumination switches automatically to
the adjusted brightness, depending on the
brightness outside the vehicle.
The brightness level of the instruments is
stored when the ignition switch is turned to
the “OFF” position or the operation mode is
put in OFF.
If you press and hold the button for longer
than approximately 1 second when the front
side-marker lights are illuminated, the
brightness level changes to the maximum
level. Pressing and holding the button for
longer than approximately 1 second again
returns the brightness level to the previous
level.
On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone-
link Display Audio (SDA), the following
conditions may occur when the meter illumi-
nation brightness level is at the maximum.
• The screen color does not switch to night-
time setting.
• The switch brightness does not illuminate.
NOTE
1- Brightness display
2- Rheostat illumination button
Multi-information display
Features and controls 5-107
5
N00555001493
The multi-information display displays warnings, the odometer, trip odometer, service reminder, engine coolant temperature, fuel remaining, out-
side temperature, selector lever position, all-wheel drive operation status, average and momentary fuel consumption, driving range, average
speed, instrument brightness, etc.
It is also possible to change elements such as the language and units used on the multi-information display.
Multi-information display
With ignition switch or operation mode in OFF With ignition switch or operation mode in ON
1-
Warning display screen (With igni-
tion switch or operation mode in OFF)
P.5-108
2- Information screen (With ignition
switch or operation mode in OFF)
P.5-109
Interrupt display screen (With ignition
switch or operation mode in OFF)
P.5-110
3- Door ajar warning display screen (With
ignition switch or operation mode in
OFF) P.5-110
4- Odometer P.5-109
5- Drive mode indicator display screen (if
so equipped) P.5-111
6-
Warning display screen (With igni-
tion switch or operation mode in ON)
P.5-112
7- Lane Departure Warning (LDW) dis-
play screen (if so equipped) P.5-96
8- Blind Spot Warning (BSW) display
screen (if so equipped) P.5-86
9- ECO indicator P.5-116
10- Information screen (With ignition
switch or operation mode in ON)
P.5-112
Interrupt display screen (With ignition
switch or operation mode in ON)
P.5-115
11- Fuel remaining display screen
P.5-116
12- Outside temperature display screen
P.5-116
13- Selector lever position display screen
P.5-116
Multi-information display
5-108 Features and controls
5
N00555101250
The multi-information meter switch is a but-
ton marked “INFO” on the left side of the
dash.
Each time the multi-information meter switch
is operated, a sound is emitted and the multi-
information display changes between infor-
mation such as warnings, trip odometer, ser-
vice reminder, average and momentary fuel
consumption, driving range, and average
speed.
It is also possible to change elements such as
the language and units used on the multi-
information display by operating the multi-
information meter switch.
N00555200179
If you press the multi-information meter
switch and return from the warning display
screen to the previous screen, the warning
is displayed.
Refer to “Returning to the display screen
from before the warning display” on page
5-110.
This mark is also displayed if there is another
warning other than the one displayed. When
the cause of the warning display is elimi-
nated, the warning goes out automatically.
14- Engine coolant temperature display
P.5-112
NOTE
The fuel units, temperature units, display
language, and other settings can be changed.
Refer to “Changing the function settings
(With ignition switch or operation mode in
ON)” on page 5-119.
The display screen is different depending on
whether the ignition switch or the operation
mode in OFF or ON.
Refer to “Information screen (With ignition
switch or operation mode in OFF)” on page
5-109.
Refer to “Warning display list (With ignition
switch or operation mode in OFF)” on page
5-127.
Refer to “Information screen (When the igni-
tion switch is turned from the “OFF” posi-
tion to the “ON” position or operation mode
changed from OFF to ON)” on page 5-111.
Refer to “Information screen (With ignition
switch or operation mode in ON)” on page
5-112.
Refer to “Warning display list (With ignition
switch or operation mode in ON)” on page
5-131.
Multi-information meter switch Warning display screen
(With ignition switch or opera-
tion mode in OFF)
NOTE
When the warning is displayed, the warn-
ing display screen can be redisplayed on the
information screen.
Refer to “Information screen (With ignition
switch or operation mode in OFF)” on page
5-109.
Refer to “Information screen (With ignition
switch or operation mode in ON)” on page
5-112.
Multi-information display
Features and controls 5-109
5
N00555301223
Each time you lightly press the multi-infor-
mation meter switch, the display screen
switches in the following order.
N00555401152
Shows the total distance traveled.
Shows the distance traveled between two
points.
To return the display to 0, hold down the
multi-information meter switch for about 2
seconds or more. Only the currently dis-
played value will be reset.
Example
If trip odometer is displayed, only trip
odometer will be reset.
N00555500042
Shows the distance and number of months
until the next periodic inspection.
Information screen (With igni-
tion switch or operation mode
in OFF)
1-
Trip odometer
2-
Trip odometer
3- Service reminder
4- Redisplay of a warning display screen
When there is no
warning display
When there is a
warning display
Odometer/Trip odometer
Odometer
Trip odometer
Usage examples for trip odometer , trip
odometer
It is possible to measure two currently
traveled distances, from home using trip
odometer and from a particular point
on the way using trip odometer .
To reset the trip odometer
NOTE
If there is no warning display, the switching
sequence is: trip odometer trip odom-
eter service reminder trip odome-
ter .
Both trip odometers and can count
up to 9999.9 miles/kilometers.
When a trip odometer goes past 9999.9
miles/kilometers, it returns to 0.0 miles/kilo-
meters.
When disconnecting the battery terminal, the
memories of trip odometer displays and
are cleared, and their displays return to
“0.0 miles/kilometers”.
Service reminder
Multi-information display
5-110 Features and controls
5
Refer to “Service reminder” on page 5-117.
N00559601224
When there is information to be announced,
such as a key reminder, the buzzer sounds and
switches to the warning display screen. Refer
to the appropriate page and take the necessary
measures.
When the cause of the warning display is
eliminated, the warning display goes out
automatically.
Refer to “Warning display list (With ignition
switch or operation mode in OFF)” on page
5-127.
Even if the cause of the warning display is
not eliminated, you can return to the screen
that was displayed before the warning dis-
play.
If you press the multi-information meter
switch, the display screen switches to the
screen display from before the warning and
the warning (A) is displayed.
When the warning is displayed, if you
lightly press the multi-information meter
switch a few times, the warning display
screen you switched from is redisplayed.
Refer to “Information screen (With ignition
switch or operation mode in OFF)” on page
5-109.
N00559701179
If any of the doors or the liftgate is not com-
pletely closed, this displays the open door or
liftgate.
Interrupt display screen (With
ignition switch or operation
mode in OFF)
1- Information generated
2- Cause eliminated
Returning to the display screen
from before the warning display
NOTE
Warning display screens with a “ ” or
“ ” mark displayed in the upper right of the
screen can be switched. If you want to switch
the display, press the multi-information
meter switch as follows.
“ ”: Press lightly.
“ ”: Press for about 2 seconds or more.
Redisplay of a warning display screen
Door ajar warning display
screen (With ignition switch or
operation mode in OFF)
Multi-information display
Features and controls 5-111
5
N00555801316
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position or the operation mode changed
to ON, the display screen switches in the fol-
lowing order.
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position or the operation mode is
changed to ON, the system check screen is
displayed for approximately 4 seconds. If
there in no fault, the information screen is
displayed.
If there is a fault, the screen changes to warn-
ing display.
Refer to “Warning display list (With ignition
switch or operation mode in ON)” on page
5-131.
When the time for periodic inspection arrives,
the warning display is displayed for a few
seconds after the screen that is initially dis-
played when the ignition switch is turned
“ON” or the operation mode is changed to
ON.
Refer to “Service reminder” on page 5-117.
N00555900020
Shows the 4WD drive status.
Refer to “Drive mode-selector” on page 5-60.
1- Doors and liftgate are closed
2- Doors or liftgate is open
Information screen (When the
ignition switch is turned from
the “OFF” position to the “ON”
position or the operation mode
is changed from OFF to ON)
1- Screen when the ignition switch or oper-
ation mode is OFF
2- System check screen
3- Screen when the ignition switch or oper-
ation mode is ON
System check screen
NOTE
The system check screen display varies
depending on your equipment.
Service reminder
Drive mode indicator display
screen (if so equipped)
Multi-information display
5-112 Features and controls
5
N00555200182
This is displayed when you press the multi-
information meter switch and switch the
warning display screen.
This mark is also displayed if there is another
warning other than the one displayed.
When the cause of the warning display is
eliminated, the warning goes out automat-
ically.
N00556201290
Each time you lightly press the multi-infor-
mation meter switch, the display screen
switches in the following order.
The operation method is the same as when
the ignition switch or the operation mode is in
OFF.
For further details, refer to “Odometer/Trip
odometer” on page 5-109.
Warning display screen
(With ignition switch or opera-
tion mode in ON)
NOTE
When the warning is displayed, the warn-
ing display screen can be redisplayed on the
information screen.
Refer to “Information screen (With ignition
switch or operation mode in OFF)” on page
5-109.
Refer to “Information screen (With ignition
switch or operation mode in ON)” on page
5-112.
Information screen (With igni-
tion switch or operation mode
in ON)
1-
Trip odometer
2-
Trip odometer
3- Service reminder
4- Driving range display, momentary fuel
consumption display
When there is no
warning display
When there is a
warning display
5- Average fuel consumption display,
momentary fuel consumption display
6- Average speed display, momentary fuel
consumption display
7- Function setting screen
8- Redisplay of a warning display screen
NOTE
While driving, the function setting screen is
not displayed even if you operate the multi-
information meter switch. Always park the
vehicle in a safe place before operating.
Refer to “Changing the function settings
(With ignition switch or operation mode in
ON)” on page 5-119.
When there is information to be announced,
such as a system fault, the tone sounds and
the screen display is switched.
Refer to “Interrupt display screen (With igni-
tion switch or operation mode in ON)” on
page 5-115.
Odometer/Trip odometer
Multi-information display
Features and controls 5-113
5
Shows the distance and number of months
until the next periodic inspection.
Refer to “Service reminder” on page 5-117.
Shows the engine coolant temperature.
If the coolant becomes hot, “ ” will blink.
Pay careful attention to the engine coolant
temperature display while you are driving.
Shows the approximate driving range (how
many more miles or kilometers you can
drive). When this driving range falls below
30 miles (50 km), “---” is displayed.
Refuel as soon as possible.
While driving, the momentary fuel consump-
tion is shown with a bar graph.
When the momentary fuel consumption sur-
passes the average fuel consumption, the
momentary fuel consumption is displayed
with a green bar graph.
Be conscious of maintaining the momentary
fuel consumption above the average fuel con-
sumption, it can help you drive with the better
fuel consumption.
This displays the average fuel consumption
from the last reset to the present.
There are 2 types of mode settings as follows.
For details on how to change the average fuel
consumption display setting, refer to “Chang-
ing the function settings (With ignition switch
or operation mode in ON)” on page 5-119.
The “ ” mark in the momentary fuel gauge
shows the average fuel consumption.
Service reminder
Engine coolant temperature dis-
play
CAUTION
If the engine is overheating, “ ” will blink.
In this case, the bar graph is on the red zone.
Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place
and take the required measures. Refer to
“Engine overheating” on page 8-4.
Driving range display
NOTE
The driving range is determined based on the
fuel consumption data. This may vary
depending on the driving conditions and hab-
its. Treat the distance displayed as just a
rough guideline.
When you refuel, the driving range display is
updated.
However, if you only add a small amount of
fuel, the correct value will not be displayed.
Fill to a full tank whenever possible.
When your vehicle is stopped on an
extremely steep hill, the driving range value
may, change. This is due to the movement of
fuel in the tank and does not indicate any
breakdown.
The display setting can be changed to the
preferred units (miles or km).
Refer to “Changing the function settings
(With ignition switch or operation mode in
ON)” on page 5-119.
Momentary fuel consumption dis-
play
NOTE
When the momentary fuel consumption can-
not be measured, a bar graph is not shown.
The display setting can be changed to the
preferred units {mpg (US), mpg (UK),
L/100km or km/L}.
Refer to “Changing the function settings
(With ignition switch or operation mode in
ON)” on page 5-119.
It is possible to cancel the green bar graph.
Refer to “Changing the function settings
(With ignition switch or operation mode in
ON)” on page 5-119.
Average fuel consumption display
Multi-information display
5-114 Features and controls
5
When the average fuel consumption is
being displayed, if you hold down the
multi-information meter switch, these cal-
culations will be reset to zero.
When the following operation is per-
formed, the mode setting changes auto-
matically from manual to auto.
[Except for vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key]
Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
tion from the “ACC” or “OFF” position.
[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
key]
Change the operation mode to ON from
ACC or OFF.
When the average fuel consumption is
being displayed, if you hold down the
multi-information meter switch, these cal-
culations will be reset to zero.
When the engine switch or the operation
mode is in the following conditions, the
average fuel consumption display will
automatically reset.
[Except for vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key]
The ignition switch has been set to the
“ACC” or “OFF” position for about
4 hours or more.
[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
key]
The operation mode has been set to ACC
or OFF for about 4 hours or more.
This displays the average speed from the last
reset to the present.
There are 2 types of mode settings as follows.
For details on how to change the average
speed display setting, refer to “Changing the
function settings (With ignition switch or
operation mode in ON)” on page 5-119.
When the average speed is being dis-
played, if you hold down the multi-infor-
mation meter switch, these calculations
will be reset to zero.
When the following operation is per-
formed, the mode setting changes auto-
matically from manual to auto.
[Except for vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key]
Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
tion from the “ACC” or “OFF” position.
[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
key]
Change the operation mode to ON from
ACC or OFF.
Manual reset mode
Auto reset mode
NOTE
The average speed display and the average
fuel consumption display can be reset sepa-
rately in both auto reset mode and manual
reset mode.
“---” is displayed when the average fuel con-
sumption cannot be measured.
The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset
mode”.
Average fuel consumption may vary depend
on the driving conditions (road conditions,
how you drive, etc.) The actual fuel con-
sumption may differ from the fuel consump-
tion displayed, so treat the fuel consumption
displayed as just a rough guideline.
Disconnecting the battery cable will erase
from memory the manual reset mode or auto
reset mode setting for the average fuel con-
sumption display.
The display setting can be changed to the
preferred units {mpg (US), mpg (UK),
L/100km or km/L}.
Refer to “Changing the function settings
(With ignition switch or operation mode in
ON)” on page 5-119.
Average speed display
Manual reset mode
Multi-information display
Features and controls 5-115
5
When the average speed is being dis-
played, if you hold down the multi-infor-
mation meter switch, these calculations
will be reset to zero.
When the engine switch or the operation
mode is in the following conditions, the
average speed display will automatically
reset.
[Except for vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key]
The ignition switch has been set to the
“ACC” or “OFF” position for about
4 hours or more.
[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
key]
The operation mode has been set to ACC
or OFF for about 4 hours or more.
The “Display language”, “Temperature unit”,
“Fuel consumption unit”, and “Average fuel
consumption and speed reset method” set-
tings can be modified as desired.
For further details, refer to “Changing the
function settings (With ignition switch or
operation mode in ON)” on page 5-119.
N00556301262
When there is information to be announced,
such as a system fault, a tone sounds and the
information screen is switched to the warning
display screen.
Refer to the warning list and take the neces-
sary measures. Refer to “Warning display list
(With ignition switch or operation mode in
ON)” on page 5-131.
When the cause of the warning display is
eliminated, the warning display goes out
automatically.
Even if the cause of the warning display is
not eliminated, you can return to the screen
that was displayed before the warning dis-
play.
If you press the multi-information meter
switch, the display screen switches to the
screen display from before the warning and
the warning (A) is displayed.
Auto reset mode
NOTE
The average speed display and the average
fuel consumption display can be reset sepa-
rately in both auto reset mode and manual
reset mode.
“---” is displayed when the average speed
cannot be measured.
The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset
mode”.
The display setting can be changed to the
preferred units (mph or km/h).
Refer to “Changing the function settings
(With ignition switch or operation mode in
ON)” on page 5-119.
Disconnecting the battery cable will erase
from memory the manual reset mode or auto
reset mode setting for the average speed dis-
play.
Function setting screen
Interrupt display screen (With
ignition switch or operation
mode in ON)
Warning display
NOTE
Returning to the display screen from
before the warning display
Multi-information display
5-116 Features and controls
5
When the warning is displayed, if you
lightly press the multi-information meter
switch a few times, the warning display
screen you switched from is redisplayed.
The operation status of each system is dis-
played on the information screen.
For further details, refer to the appropriate
page in the warning display list.
Refer to “Other interrupt displays” on page
5-140.
N00556401074
Shows the position of the selector lever.
Refer to “Selector lever operation” on page
5-53.
N00556500065
Shows the temperature outside the vehicle.
N00568701061
This indicator will be displayed when fuel-
efficient driving is achieved.
N00556601223
Shows the amount of fuel remaining.
NOTE
Warning display screens with a “ ” or
“ ” mark displayed in the upper right of the
screen can be switched. If you want to switch
the display, press the multi-information
meter switch as follows.
“ ”: Press lightly.
“ ”: Press for about 2 seconds or more.
Redisplay of a warning display
screen
Other interrupt displays
Selector lever position display
screen
Outside temperature display
screen
NOTE
The display setting can be changed to the
preferred units (°F or °C).
Refer to “Changing the function settings
(With ignition switch or operation mode in
ON)” on page 5-119.
Depending on factors such as the driving
conditions, the displayed temperature may
vary from the actual outside temperature.
ECO indicator
Fuel remaining display screen
CAUTION
Running out of gas could damage the cata-
lytic converter. If the warning display
appears, refuel as soon as possible.
NOTE
It may take several seconds to stabilize the
display after refilling the tank.
Multi-information display
Features and controls 5-117
5
The arrow (A) indicates that the fuel tank
filler door is located on the left side of the
vehicle. (Refer to “Filling the fuel tank” on
page 3-3.)
When the fuel level runs low, the information
screen switches to the interrupt display of the
fuel remaining warning display and the mark
(B) on the fuel remaining display flashes. If
the warning display appears, refuel as soon as
possible.
N00556701354
Displays the approximate time until the next
recommended periodic inspection. “---” is
displayed when the inspection time has
arrived.
1. Shows the time until the next periodic
inspection.
2. This informs you that a periodic inspec-
tion is due. Contact an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-
ity of your choice to have the system
checked.
At that time, when the ignition switch is
switched from the “OFF” position to the
“ON” position or the operation mode is
changed from OFF to ON, the warning
display is displayed for a few seconds on
the information screen.
If fuel is added with the ignition switch or
operation mode in ON, the remaining fuel
display may incorrectly indicate the fuel
level.
Fuel tank filler door mark
Fuel remaining warning display
NOTE
NOTE
On hills or curves, the display may be incor-
rect due to the movement of fuel in the tank.
Service reminder
NOTE
The service reminder time can be modified
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer,
to adjust for severe usage, etc. Refer to
“Severe maintenance schedule” in your vehi-
cle’s Warranty and Maintenance Manual. For
further information, please contact your
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
NOTE
Shows the distance in units of 100 miles
(100 km) and the time in units of 1 month.
Multi-information display
5-118 Features and controls
5
3. After your vehicle is inspected at an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it
displays the time until the next periodic
inspection.
The “---” display can be reset while the igni-
tion switch or the operation mode is in OFF.
When the display is reset, the time until the
next periodic inspection is displayed and the
warning display is no longer displayed when
the ignition switch is switched from the
“OFF” position to the “ON” position or the
operation mode is changed from OFF to ON.
1. When you lightly press the multi-informa-
tion meter switch, the information screen
switches to the service reminder display
screen.
2. Press and hold the multi-information
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
more) to display “ ” and make it flash.
(If there is no operation for about 10 sec-
onds with this indicator flashing, the dis-
play returns to the previous screen.)
3. With this indicator flashing, if you lightly
press the multi-information meter switch,
the screen switches from “---” to
“CLEAR”. After that, the time until the
next periodic inspection is shown.
To reset
CAUTION
The customer is responsible for making sure
that regular inspections and maintenance and
periodic inspections and maintenance are
performed.
Inspections and maintenance must be per-
formed to prevent accidents and malfunc-
tions.
NOTE
The “---” display cannot be reset while the
ignition switch or the operation mode is in
ON.
When “---” is displayed, after a certain dis-
tance and a certain period of time, the dis-
play is reset and the time until the next
periodic inspection is displayed.
If you accidentally reset the display, consult
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for
assistance.
Multi-information display
Features and controls 5-119
5
N00555701155
If any of the doors or the liftgate is not com-
pletely closed, this displays the open door or
liftgate.
If the speed increases to about 5 mph
(8 km/h) or higher with a door ajar, a tone
will sound 4 times to inform you that a door
is ajar.
N00556801326
1. Park your vehicle in a safe place.
Fully apply the parking brake and move
the selector lever into the “P” (PARK)
position.
2. When you lightly press the multi-informa-
tion meter switch, the information screen
switches to the function setting screen.
Refer to “Information screen (With igni-
tion switch or operation mode in ON)” on
page 5-112.
3. Press and hold the multi-information
meter switch (for approximately 2 sec-
onds or more) to switch from the setting
mode screen to the menu screen.
4. Select the item to change on the menu
screen and change to the desired setting.
For further details on the operation meth-
ods, refer to the following sections.
Refer to “Changing the reset mode for
average fuel consumption and average
speed” on page 5-120.
Refer to “Changing the fuel consumption
display unit” on page 5-121.
Door ajar warning display
screen (With ignition switch or
operation mode is in ON)
CAUTION
Always make sure that the warning display
goes out before beginning to drive.
Changing the function settings
(With ignition switch or opera-
tion mode is in ON)
CAUTION
For safety, stop the vehicle before operating.
While driving, even if you operate the multi-
information meter switch, the function set-
ting screen is not displayed.
NOTE
To return the menu screen to the function set-
ting screen, press and hold the multi-infor-
mation meter switch (for approximately
2 seconds or more).
If no operations are made within approxi-
mately 15 seconds of the menu screen being
displayed, the display returns to the function
setting screen.
Multi-information display
5-120 Features and controls
5
Refer to “Changing the temperature unit”
on page 5-122.
Refer to “Changing the display language”
on page 5-122.
Refer to “Operation sound setting” on
page 5-122.
Refer to “Changing the time until “REST
REMINDER” is displayed” on page
5-123.
Refer to “Changing the turn signal sound”
on page 5-123.
Refer to “Changing the momentary fuel
consumption display” on page 5-124.
Refer to “Returning to the factory set-
tings” on page 5-124.
N00557001282
You can change the mode condition for the
average fuel consumption and average speed
display to “Auto reset” or “Manual reset.”
1. Press and hold the multi-information
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
more) to switch from the setting mode
screen to the menu screen.
Refer to “Changing the function settings
(With ignition switch or operation mode is
in ON)” on page 5-119.
2. Lightly press the multi-information meter
switch to select “AVG” (average fuel con-
sumption and average speed setting).
3. Press and hold the multi-information
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
more) to switch in sequence from A or 1
(Auto reset) M, 2 or P (Manual reset)
A or 1 (Auto reset).
The setting is changed to the selected
reset condition.
If you press and hold the multi-informa-
tion meter switch when the average fuel
consumption and average speed are dis-
played, these calculations will be reset to
zero.
When the following operation is per-
formed, the mode setting changes auto-
matically from manual to auto.
[Except for vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key]
Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
tion from the “ACC” or “OFF” position.
[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
key]
Change the operation mode to ON from
ACC or OFF.
When the average fuel consumption and
average speed are being displayed, if you
hold down the multi-information meter
switch, these calculations will be reset to
zero.
When the engine switch or the operation
mode is in the following conditions, the
average fuel consumption display and the
average speed display will automatically
reset.
[Except for vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key]
The ignition switch has been set to the
“ACC” or “OFF” position for about
4 hours or more.
[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
key]
The operation mode has been in ACC or
OFF for about 4 hours or more.
Changing the reset mode for aver-
age fuel consumption and average
speed
Manual reset mode
Auto reset mode
Multi-information display
Features and controls 5-121
5
N00557101212
The fuel consumption display unit can be
changed. The distance, speed, and amount
units are also changed to match the selected
fuel consumption unit.
1. Press and hold the multi-information
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
more) to change from the setting mode
screen to the menu screen.
Refer to “Changing the function settings
(With ignition switch or operation mode is
in ON)” on page 5-119.
2. Lightly press the multi-information meter
switch to select “AVG UNIT” (fuel con-
sumption display unit setting).
3. Press and hold the multi-information
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
more) to display “AVG UNIT” (fuel con-
sumption display unit setting).
4. Lightly press the multi-information meter
switch to switch in sequence from km/L
L/100 km mpg (US) mpg (UK)
RETURN km/L.
5. Press and hold the multi-information
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
more) to change the setting to the selected
unit.
The distance and speed units are also changed
in the following combinations to match the
selected fuel consumption unit.
NOTE
Disconnecting the battery cable will erase
from memory the manual reset mode or auto
reset mode setting for the average speed dis-
play and average fuel consumption display.
The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset
mode”.
Changing the fuel consumption
display unit
NOTE
The display units for the driving range, the
average fuel consumption, the average speed
and the momentary fuel consumption are
changed, but the units for the indicating nee-
dle (speedometer), the odometer and the trip
odometer will remain unchanged.
If the battery is disconnected, the memory of
the unit setting is erased and is automatically
set to {mpg (US) or L/100 km}.
Fuel
economy
Distance
(driving
range)
Speed
(average
speed)
mpg (US) mile (s) mph
mpg (UK) mile (s) mph
km / L km km / h
L / 100 km km km / h
Multi-information display
5-122 Features and controls
5
N00557201239
The temperature display unit can be switched.
1. Press and hold the multi-information
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
more) to switch from the setting mode
screen to the menu screen.
Refer to “Changing the function settings
(With ignition switch or operation mode is
in ON)” on page 5-119.
2. Lightly press the multi-information meter
switch to select “ ” (temperature unit
setting).
3. Press and hold the multi-information
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
more) to change in sequence from °F
°C °F.
The setting is changed to the selected tem-
perature unit.
N00557301227
The language of the multi-information dis-
play can be changed.
1. Press and hold the multi-information
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
more) to change from the setting mode
screen to the menu screen.
Refer to “Changing the function settings
(With ignition switch or operation mode is
in ON)” on page 5-119.
2. Lightly press the multi-information meter
switch to select “LANGUAGE” (lan-
guage setting).
3. Press and hold the multi-information
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
more) to display “LANGUAGE” (lan-
guage setting).
4. Lightly press the multi-information meter
switch to select the desired language.
5. Press and hold the multi-information
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
more) to change the setting to the selected
language.
N00557401198
You can turn off the operation sounds of the
multi-information meter switch and rheostat
meter illumination button.
1. Press and hold the multi-information
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
more) to switch from the setting mode
screen to the menu screen.
Refer to “Changing the function settings
(With ignition switch or operation mode is
in ON)” on page 5-119.
Changing the temperature unit
NOTE
If the battery is disconnected, the memory of
the unit setting is erased and is automatically
set to °F (°C).
Changing the display language
NOTE
If the battery is disconnected, the memory of
the language setting is erased and is automat-
ically set to ENGLISH.
If “---” is selected in the language setting, a
warning message is not displayed when there
is a warning display or interrupt display.
Operation sound setting
Multi-information display
Features and controls 5-123
5
2. Lightly press the multi-information meter
switch to select “ ” (operation sound
setting).
3. Press and hold the multi-information
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
more) to switch in sequence from ON
(operation sound on) OFF (operation
sound off) ON (operation sound on).
The setting is changed to the selected con-
dition.
N00557501203
The time until the display appears can be
changed.
1. Press and hold the multi-information
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
more) to switch from the setting mode
screen to the menu screen.
Refer to “Changing the function settings
(With ignition switch or operation mode is
in ON)” on page 5-119.
2. Lightly press the multi-information meter
switch to select “ALARM” (rest time set-
ting).
3. Press and hold the multi-information
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
more) to display “ALARM” (rest time
setting).
4. Lightly press the multi-information meter
switch to select the time until the display
appears.
5. Press and hold the multi-information
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
more) to change the setting to the selected
time.
N00563501123
It is possible to change the turn signal sound.
NOTE
If the battery is disconnected, the memory of
the operation sound setting is erased and is
automatically set to “ON” (operation sound
on).
The operation sound setting only deactivates
the operation sound of the multi-information
meter switch and rheostat meter illumination
button. The warning display and other
sounds cannot be deactivated.
Changing the time until “REST
REMINDER” is displayed
NOTE
If the battery is disconnected, the memory of
the unit setting is erased and is automatically
set to the “OFF”.
The drive time is reset when the ignition
switch is in the “OFF” position or the opera-
tion mode is in OFF.
Changing the turn signal sound
Multi-information display
5-124 Features and controls
5
1. Press and hold the multi-information
meter switch for about 2 seconds or more
to switch from the setting mode screen to
the menu screen.
Refer to “Changing the function settings
(With ignition switch or operation mode is
in ON)” on page 5-119.
2. Lightly press the multi-information meter
switch to select . (changing the turn
signal sound)
3. Press and hold the multi-information
meter switch for about 2 seconds or more
to switch in sequence from 1 (turn signal
sound 1) 2 (turn signal sound 2) 1
(turn signal sound 1).
The setting changes to the selected turn-
signal sound.
N00563601065
It is possible to change the bar graph setting
of the momentary fuel consumption display.
1. Press and hold the multi-information
meter switch for about 2 seconds or more
to switch from the setting mode screen to
the menu screen.
Refer to “Changing the function settings
(With ignition switch or operation mode is
in ON)” on page 5-119.
2. Lightly press the multi-information meter
switch to select . (changing the
momentary fuel consumption display)
3. Press and hold the multi-information
meter switch for about 2 seconds or more
to switch in sequence from ON (with the
green bar graph) OFF (without the
green bar graph) ON (with the green
bar graph).
The setting changes to the selected bar
graph setting.
N00557601259
All of the function settings can be returned to
their factory settings.
1. Press and hold the multi-information
meter switch (for about 2 seconds or
more) to switch from the setting mode
screen to the menu screen.
Refer to “Changing the function settings
(With ignition switch or operation mode is
in ON)” on page 5-119.
2. Lightly press the multi-information meter
switch to select “RESET” (return to the
factory settings).
Changing the momentary fuel con-
sumption display
Returning to the factory settings
Multi-information display
Features and controls 5-125
5
3. Press and hold the multi-information
meter switch (for about 5 seconds or
more), the buzzer sounds and all of the
function settings are returned to the fac-
tory settings.
NOTE
The factory settings are as follows.
• Average fuel consumption and average
speed reset mode: A (Auto reset)
• Fuel consumption display unit: mpg (US)
or (L/100 km)
• Temperature unit: °F (Fahrenheit) or °C
(Celsius)
• Display language: ENGLISH
• Cooperative language setting: A
• Operation sounds: ON (Operation sound
on)
• “REST REMINDER” display: OFF
• Turn signal sound: Turn signal sound 1
• Momentary fuel consumption with the
green bar graph: ON
NOTE
Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list
5-126 Features and controls
5
N00557700048
N00557801453
Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list
Indicator and warning light list
Type 1 Type 2
1- Position indicator P.5-143
2- High beam indicator P.5-143
3- Charging system warning light
P.5-145
4- Turn signal indicator/hazard warning
light P.5-143
5- Front fog light indicator (if so
equipped) P.5-143
6- Forward Collision Mitigation system
(FCM) OFF indicator (if so equipped)
P.5-82
7- Forward Collision Mitigation system
(FCM) indicator (if so equipped)
P.5-82
8- Tire pressure monitoring system warn-
ing light P.5-100
9- Brake warning light P.5-144
10- Cruise control indicator (if so
equipped) P.5-74
11- Seat belt reminder/warning light
P.4-15
12- Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
warning light P.4-34
13- Automatic High Beam (AHB) indicator
(if so equipped) P.5-150
14- Engine malfunction indicator (“SER-
VICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check
engine light”) P.5-144
15- Active stability control (ASC) OFF
indicator (if so equipped) P.5-73
16- Active stability control (ASC) indicator
P.5-73
Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list
Features and controls 5-127
5
N00557900082
When there is information to be announced, such as light reminder, the tone sounds and the screen switches to the displays shown below. Refer to
the appropriate page and take the necessary measures.
When the cause of the warning display is eliminated, the warning display goes out automatically.
Refer to “Warning display list (With ignition switch or operation mode is in OFF)” on page 5-127.
Refer to “Warning display list (With ignition switch or operation mode is in ON)” on page 5-131.
Refer to “Other interrupt displays” on page 5-140.
N00558001348
17- Information screen display list
P.5-127
18- Anti-lock braking system warning light
P.5-69
Information screen display list
NOTE
In the following cases, a warning may be displayed on the information screen and the buzzer may sound for a few seconds, at times.
This is caused by the system picking up interference such as strong electromagnetic waves or noise, and is not a functional problem.
• An extremely strong electromagnetic wave is received from a source such as an illegal radio set, a spark from a wire, or a radar station.
• Abnormal voltage or a static electricity discharge is generated by the operation of your vehicle’s electronics (including after-market parts).
If the warning display has occurred a number of times, take your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice and
have the system checked.
Warning display list (With ignition switch or operation mode is in OFF)
Screen Cause Do this (Reference)
You have forgotten to remove the key from the ignition
switch.
Remove the key.
Refer to “Key reminder system” on page 5-33.
Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list
5-128 Features and controls
5
You have forgotten to turn off the lights. Refer to “Light auto-cutout function (headlights and other
lights)” on page 5-148.
The theft-alarm system is operating. Refer to “Theft-alarm system” on page 5-38.
The system has received the customer key program-
ming request correctly and is currently processing the
registration request.
Refer to “Customer key programming (Except for vehi-
cles sold in Canada)” on page 5-5.
Refer to “Customer F.A.S.T.-key programming (Except
for vehicles sold in Canada)” on page 5-26.
Screen Cause Do this (Reference)
Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list
Features and controls 5-129
5
There is a fault in the F. A. S. T. -key. Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter
(F.A.S.T.-key)” on page 5-13.
There is a fault in the electronic immobilizer. (Anti-
theft starting system).
Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice to have the system
checked.
Screen Cause Do this (Reference)
Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list
5-130 Features and controls
5
The F. A. S. T. -key is not detected. Insert the F. A. S. T. -key into the key slot in the glove
compartment. Refer to “If the F. A. S. T. -key is not
operating properly” on page 5-24.
You have forgotten to remove the F. A. S. T. -key from
the key slot in the glove compartment.
Remove the F. A. S. T. -key from the key slot in the
glove compartment.
The engine switch is pressed to stop the engine while
the selector lever is in a position other than the “P”
(PARK) position.
Place the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position to
put the operation mode in OFF.
There is a fault in the electrical system. Park your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible
and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
a repair facility of your choice to have the system
checked.
Screen Cause Do this (Reference)
Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list
Features and controls 5-131
5
N00558101424
Warning display list (With ignition switch or operation mode is in ON)
Screen Cause Do this (Reference)
(if so equipped)
The washer fluid is running low. Replenish the container with washer fluid.
Refer to “Washer fluid” on page 9-9.
Refer to “Capacity” on page 11-5.
There is a fault in the EPS. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
choice as soon as possible.
Refer to “Electric power steering system (EPS)” on
page 5-70.
Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list
5-132 Features and controls
5
There is a fault in the F.A.S.T.-key. Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter
(F.A.S.T.-key)” on page 5-13.
The system has received the customer key program-
ming request correctly and is currently processing the
registration request.
Refer to “Customer key programming (Except for vehi-
cles sold in Canada)” on page 5-5.
Refer to “Customer F.A.S.T.-key programming (Except
for vehicles sold in Canada)” on page 5-26.
Screen Cause Do this (Reference)
Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list
Features and controls 5-133
5
The brake fluid level is low.
There is a fault in the brake system.
Park the vehicle in a safe place and inspect it.
If the light still illuminates after the inspection, contact
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
facility of your choice for assistance.
Refer to “Brake warning display” on page 5-145.
There is a fault in the Anti-lock braking system. Avoid sudden braking and high-speed driving, park the
vehicle in a safe place, and take corrective measures.
Refer to “Anti-lock braking system warning” on page
5-69.
The tire pressure in one of the tires (except spare tire)
is low.
Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System” on page 5-99.
There is a fault in the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
tem.
Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System” on page 5-99.
One of the doors or the liftgate is not completely
closed.
The open door is displayed.
Close the door or liftgate.
Refer to “Door ajar warning display screen (With igni-
tion switch or operation mode is in ON)” on page
5-119.
The engine hood is open. Close the engine hood.
Refer to “Engine hood” on page 9-3.
Screen Cause Do this (Reference)
Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list
5-134 Features and controls
5
There is a fault in the electronic immobilizer (Anti-
theft starting system).
Put the operation mode in OFF, and then start the
engine again.
If the warning is not cancelled, please contact an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
of your choice.
The driver’s door is open when the operation mode is
in any mode other than OFF.
Put the operation mode in OFF.
Refer to “Operation mode ON reminder system” on
page 5-34.
An attempt was made to lock all the doors and the lift-
gate when the operation mode is in any mode other
than OFF.
Put the operation mode in OFF.
Refer to “Operation mode OFF reminder system” on
page 5-22.
There is a fault in the electrical system. Park your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible
and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
a repair facility of your choice to have the system
checked.
The engine is overheated. Park the vehicle in a safe place and take corrective
measures.
Refer to “Engine overheating” on page 8-4.
The CVT fluid temperature is increased. Park the vehicle in a safe place and take corrective
measures.
Refer to “Continuously variable transmission (CVT)”
on page 5-53.
Screen Cause Do this (Reference)
Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list
Features and controls 5-135
5
The seat belt is not fastened when the ignition switch
or operation mode is in ON.
Wear your seat belt properly.
Refer to “Driver’s seat belt reminder/warning light and
display” on page 4-15.
There is a fault in the fuel system. Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice to have the system
checked.
The vehicle is being driven with the parking brake still
applied.
Release the parking brake. Refer to “Brake warning
display” on page 5-145.
There is a fault in the engine oil circulation system. Park your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible
and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
a repair facility of your choice to have the system
checked.
Refer to “Oil pressure warning display” on page
5-146.
There is a fault in the charging system. Park your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible
and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
a repair facility of your choice for assistance.
Refer to “Charging system warning light” on page
5-145.
Screen Cause Do this (Reference)
Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list
5-136 Features and controls
5
There is a fault in the SRS airbag or the pre-tensioner
system.
Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice to have the system
checked, immediately.
Refer to “SRS warning light/display” on page 4-34.
There is a fault in the Active stability control (ASC). Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice to have the system
checked.
Refer to “Active stability control (ASC)” on page
5-71.
There is a fault in the Hill start assist. Have the vehicle checked at an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
Refer to “Hill start assist” on page 5-66.
There is a fault in the electronically controlled 4WD
system.
Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice to have the system
checked.
Refer to “Electronically controlled 4WD system” on
page 5-60.
There is a fault in the CVT. Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice to have the system
checked.
Refer to “Continuously variable transmission (CVT)”
on page 5-53.
The electronically controlled 4WD system is hot. Refer to “Electronically controlled 4WD system” on page
5-60.
Screen Cause Do this (Reference)
Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list
Features and controls 5-137
5
The fuel is running low. Refuel as soon as possible.
Refer to “Fuel remaining display screen” on page
5-116.
The outside temperature is 37 °F (3 °C) or less. Be careful driving on frozen ground.
The ground may be frozen even when this warning is
not displayed, so drive carefully.
There is a fault in the Forward Collision Mitigation
system (FCM).
Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice to have the system
checked.
Refer to “System problem warning: FCM deactivation
due to fault” on page 5-83.
FCM braking function of the Forward Collision Miti-
gation system (FCM) has been activated.
Refer to “FCM braking function” on page 5-79.
The Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM) is
temporarily unavailable for some reason.
This is not a malfunction.
Refer to “System problem warning” on page 5-83.
Screen Cause Do this (Reference)
Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list
5-138 Features and controls
5
(flashing in yellow)
The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) has detected that
your vehicle is about to leave or has left the lane.
Refer to “Lane Departure Warning (LDW)” on page 5-96.
There is a fault in the Lane Departure Warning (LDW). Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice to have the system
checked.
Refer to “Lane Departure Warning (LDW)” on page
5-96.
The Blind Spot Warning (BSW) sensor is temporarily
not available for some reason such as the environmen-
tal condition or increase of the sensor temperature.
When the warning display does not disappear after
waiting for a while, contact an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer.
Refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW): When the sen-
sor is temporarily not available” on page 5-89.
The Blind Spot Warning (BSW) does not operate nor-
mally because there are some malfunctions in the sen-
sor or the system.
Immediately have your vehicle inspected at an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
Refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW): When there is a
malfunction in the system” on page 5-89.
Screen Cause Do this (Reference)
Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list
Features and controls 5-139
5
Foreign objects, such as dirt, snow or ice, adhere to the
bumper surface around the sensor.
Remove a foreign object on the bumper surface around
the sensor.
When the warning display does not disappear after
having cleaned the bumper surface around the sensor,
contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
Refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW): When there is a
foreign object on the sensor” on page 5-90.
(flashing in yellow)
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) is detected the
vehicle approaching your vehicle.
Pay special attention to the rear of your vehicle.
Refer to “Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)” on page
5-92.
There is a fault in the sensor. Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
Refer to “Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM):
System problem warning” on page 5-83.
Refer to “Lane Departure Warning (LDW): System
problem warning” on page 5-98.
Refer to “Automatic High Beam (AHB): System prob-
lem warning” on page 5-153.
Screen Cause Do this (Reference)
Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list
5-140 Features and controls
5
N00558201454
The Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM),
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) and Automatic High
Beam (AHB) is temporarily unavailable due to the
high or low temperature of the sensor.
After the temperature of the sensor has been in range,
the system will automatically return to operation.
Refer to “Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM):
System problem warning” on page 5-83.
Refer to “Lane Departure Warning (LDW): System
problem warning” on page 5-98.
Refer to “Automatic High Beam (AHB): System prob-
lem warning” on page 5-153.
The sensor is temporarily unavailable due to condi-
tions such as the adhesion of contaminants to the sen-
sor or windshield.
This is not a malfunction.
Refer to “Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM):
System problem warning” on page 5-83.
Refer to “Lane Departure Warning (LDW): System prob-
lem warning” on page 5-98.
Refer to “Automatic High Beam (AHB): System problem
warning” on page 5-153.
There is a fault in the system of Automatic High Beam
(AHB).
Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
Refer to “Automatic High Beam (AHB): System prob-
lem warning” on page 5-153.
Other interrupt displays
Screen System operation status Reference
When starting the engine, the selector lever is in a
position other than the “P” (PARK) or the “N” (NEU-
TRAL) position, or you pressed the engine switch
without depressing the brake pedal.
Place the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position,
depress and hold the brake pedal with the right foot,
and then press the engine switch to start the engine.
Refer to “Starting and stopping the engine” on page
5-22.
Screen Cause Do this (Reference)
Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list
Features and controls 5-141
5
The operation status of each system is displayed on the information screen. For further details, refer to the appropriate page for each system.
NOTE
When operating each system, confirm that the operation status of the system has changed on the information screen. However, the operation status of the
system may not be displayed immediately after the warning display appears even if the system is operated.
Screen System operation status Reference
When “2WD” drive mode is selected with the drive
mode selector.
Refer to “Electronically controlled 4WD system” on page
5-60.
When “4WD AUTO” mode is selected with the drive
mode selector.
When “4WD LOCK” mode is selected with the drive
mode selector.
When the Active stability control (ASC) is operating. Refer to “Active stability control (ASC)” on page 5-71.
Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list
5-142 Features and controls
5
This informs you that a periodic inspection is due.
When the Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM)
is activated or the timing of an alarm is changed.
Refer to “FCM ON/OFF switch” on page 5-82.
When the Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM)
is deactivated.
Refer to “FCM ON/OFF switch” on page 5-82.
Screen Do this
Have an inspection made by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. For further details, refer to “Service reminder” on
page 5-117.
Screen System operation status Reference
Indicators
Features and controls 5-143
5
The rest time can be set.
N00519901182
N00520000216
The arrows will flash in time with the corre-
sponding exterior turn signals when the turn
signal lever is used.
Both arrows will flash when the hazard warn-
ing flasher switch is pressed.
N00520100086
A blue light comes on when the headlights
are on high beam.
N00520200175
This indicator comes on while the front fog
lights are on.
N00551301081
This indicator light illuminates while the
parking lights are on.
Screen Do this
Park the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine, and take a rest.
Use this display as rough guide for taking rests during a long drive.
The interval from the start of your trip until this message is displayed can be set.
Refer to “Changing the function settings (With the ignition switch or operation mode is in ON)” on page 5-119.
The display and buzzer alert the driver when the set time is reached. If you continue to drive without having a rest, the
buzzer sounds approximately every 5 minutes to encourage you to take a rest.
In the following cases, the time driven is reset and the display returns to the previous display screen. After this,
when the set time is reached again, the display and buzzer encourage you to take a rest.
• The buzzer sounds 3 times.
• The ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” position or the operation mode is put in OFF.
• The multi-information meter switch is held (for approximately 2 seconds or more).
Indicators
Turn signal indicators/Hazard
warning lights
NOTE
If the indicator flashes faster than usual or if
the indicator stays on without flashing, check
for a malfunctioning turn signal light bulb or
turn signal connection.
High beam indicator
Front fog light indicator (if so
equipped)
Position indicator
Warning lights
5-144 Features and controls
5
N00520300147
N00520400470
This light comes on when the ignition switch
is turned to the “ON” position (engine off) or
the operation mode is put in ON.
When the engine is started, the light should
go off a few seconds later. A warning is also
displayed in the multi-information display.
The warning light also illuminates after start-
ing the engine under the following condi-
tions.
When the parking brake is still applied.
When the brake fluid level is low.
When the brake system circuit is not
working properly.
Before driving, be sure that the parking brake
is fully released and brake warning light is
off.
N00520500804
This indicator is a part of the onboard diag-
nostic (OBD) system which monitors the
emissions, engine control system or continu-
ously variable transmission (CVT) control
system. If a problem is detected in one of
these systems, this indicator illuminates or
flashes. When the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position or the operation mode is
put in ON, this indicator normally comes on
and goes off after the engine has started.
This indicator will come on if the fuel tank
filler cap is not properly tightened. If this
indicator comes on and stays on after refuel-
ing, stop the engine and check that the cap is
properly tightened. (Turn the cap clockwise
until you hear clicking sounds.)
If this indicator does not go off after several
seconds or lights up while driving, have the
system checked as soon as possible at an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice.
Warning lights
Brake warning light
CAUTION
If the brake warning light and the Anti-lock
braking system warning light are illuminated
at the same time, the braking force distribu-
tion function will not operate, so the vehicle
may be destabilized during sudden braking
under the following conditions.
• When the brake warning light does not go
out even when the parking brake is
released.
• When the brake warning light stays on
while driving.
• If the above occurs, avoid sudden braking
and high-speed driving. Park the vehicle in
a safe place, and contact an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
of your choice as soon as possible.
The vehicle should be brought to a halt in the
following manner when brake performance
is deteriorated.
• Confirm that the vehicle slows down when
you press down on the brake pedal harder
than usual. In some cases, the brake pedal
may go all the way to the floor.
• Should the brakes fail, use engine braking
to reduce your speed and slowly apply the
parking brake.
Depress the brake pedal to illuminate the
stop lights to alert the vehicles behind you.
Engine malfunction indicator
(“SERVICE ENGINE SOON”
or “Check engine light”)
CAUTION
CAUTION
Driving for a long time with the engine mal-
function indicator on may cause more dam-
age to the emission control system. This
could also affect fuel economy and drivabil-
ity.
If this indicator does not come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-
tion or the operation mode is put in ON, have
the system checked at an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
of your choice.
Information screen display
Features and controls 5-145
5
N00520600300
This light comes on in the event of a malfunc-
tion in the charging system or when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position
(engine off) or the operation mode is put in
ON. A warning is also displayed in the multi-
information display. When the engine is
started, the light should go out. Check to
make sure that the light has gone out before
driving.
N00558300038
N00558401209
This warning is displayed if the vehicle is
being driven with the parking brake still
applied. The warning light in the instrument
cluster only comes on when the parking brake
is applied.
When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position or the operation mode is put in
ON, if the brake fluid is low, this warning is
displayed.
The warning light in the instrument cluster
also illuminates.
If the engine malfunction indicator comes on
while the engine is running, avoid driving at
high speeds.
During vehicle operation with the indicator
on, the vehicle may not accelerate when you
depress the accelerator pedal.
When the vehicle is stationary with the indi-
cator on, you must depress the brake pedal
more firmly than usual since the engine
idling speed is higher than usual and a vehi-
cle with a CVT has a stronger tendency to
creep forward.
NOTE
Do not disconnect the battery cable when the
engine malfunction indicator (“SERVICE
ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine light”) is
on.
The engine electronic control module stores
critical OBD information (especially exhaust
emission data), which may be lost if the bat-
tery cable is disconnected while the engine
malfunction indicator is on. This will make it
difficult to diagnose the cause of future prob-
lems.
Charging system warning light
CAUTION
CAUTION
If the warning light stays on while the engine
is running, park your vehicle in a safe place
as soon as possible and contact an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
of your choice to have the system checked.
Information screen display
Brake warning display
CAUTION
If a vehicle is driven without releasing the
parking brake, the brakes will overheat,
resulting in ineffective braking and possible
brake failure.
If this warning is displayed, release the park-
ing brake.
CAUTION
If this warning stays on and does not go out
while driving, there is a danger of ineffective
braking. If this happens, park the vehicle in a
safe place, and contact an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
of your choice.
Combination headlights and dimmer switch
5-146 Features and controls
5
N00558601139
If there is a fault in the charging system, the
warning display warning is displayed on the
information screen in the multi-information
display. The warning light in the instrument
cluster also illuminates.
N00558701143
If the engine oil pressure drops while the
engine is running, the warning display is dis-
played on the information screen in the multi-
information display.
N00522501964
If the brake warning display, brake warning
light, and the Anti-lock braking system
warning light are illuminated at the same
time, the braking force distribution function
will not operate, so the vehicle may be desta-
bilized during sudden braking. Avoid sudden
braking and high-speed driving. Park the
vehicle in a safe place, and contact an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
facility of your choice.
The vehicle should be brought to a halt in the
following manner when brake performance
is deteriorated.
• Confirm that the vehicle slows down when
you press down on the brake pedal harder
than usual. In some cases, the brake pedal
may go all the way to the floor.
• Should the brakes fail, use engine braking
to reduce your speed and slowly apply the
parking brake.
Depress the brake pedal to illuminate the
stop lights to alert the vehicles behind you.
Charging system warning dis-
play
CAUTION
CAUTION
If warnings are displayed while the engine is
running, park your vehicle in a safe place as
soon as possible and contact an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
of your choice to have the system checked.
Oil pressure warning display
CAUTION
If the vehicle is driven while the engine oil is
low, or the oil level is normal but the warn-
ing is displayed, the engine may overheat
and damage may result.
If the warning is displayed while the engine
is running, park your vehicle in a safe place
as soon as possible and check the engine oil
level.
If this warning display comes on when the
engine oil level is proper, have your vehicle
checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
NOTE
The oil pressure warning display does not
show the amount of oil. The oil level must be
checked using the dipstick.
Combination headlights and
dimmer switch
Headlights
NOTE
Do not leave the headlights and other lights
on for a long period of time when the engine
is not running. The battery will run down.
CAUTION
Combination headlights and dimmer switch
Features and controls 5-147
5
Rotate the switch to operate the lights.
The combinations of switch operations and
illuminated lights differ in accordance with
the following conditions.
[When the engine is started after the parking
brake is released]
[When the engine is not running, or when the
engine is started before the parking brake is
released]
Rotate the switch to operate the lights.
The combinations of switch operations and
illuminated lights differ in accordance with
the following conditions.
[When the engine is started after the parking
brake is released]
When it rains, or when the vehicle has been
washed, the inside of the lens sometimes
becomes foggy. This is the same as when
window glass mists up on a humid day, and
does not indicate a problem. When the light
is switched on, the heat will dry out the fog.
However, if water collects inside the light,
have it checked by an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
choice.
Type 1
NOTE
OFF
The daytime running lights illumi-
nated
The daytime running lights illumi-
nated
Tail, front and rear side-marker
lights, license plate and instrument
panel lights on
Headlights and other lights on
NOTE
Once the daytime running light come on,
they do not go out until the ignition switch is
turned to the “OFF” or “ACC” position or
the operation mode is changed to OFF or
ACC.
OFF All lights off
Parking, tail, front and rear side-
marker lights, license plate and
instrument panel lights on
Headlights and other lights on
NOTE
Even if the daytime running lights are not on,
they will come on once the vehicle starts
moving.
Once the daytime running light come on,
they do not go out until the ignition switch is
turned to the “OFF” or “ACC” position or
the operation mode is changed to OFF or
ACC.
Type 2
Combination headlights and dimmer switch
5-148 Features and controls
5
[When the engine is not running, or when the
engine is started before the parking brake is
released]
N00532601593
If the following operation is performed
with the combination headlights and dim-
mer switch in the “ ” or “ ” position,
the lights automatically turn off.
[Except for vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key]
The ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”
or “ACC” position or the key is removed
from the ignition switch and the driver’s
door is opened.
OFF
The daytime running lights illumi-
nated
AUTO
The daytime running lights illumi-
nated (when it is light outside the
vehicle)
Headlights and other lights turn on
and off automatically in accordance
with outside light level.
The daytime running lights illumi-
nated
Tail, front and rear side-marker
lights, license plate and instrument
panel lights on
Headlights and other lights on
NOTE
Once the daytime running light come on,
they do not go out until the ignition switch is
turned to the “OFF” or “ACC” position or
the operation mode is changed to OFF or
ACC.
OFF All lights off
AUTO
Headlights and other lights turn on
and off automatically in accordance
with outside light level.
Parking, tail, front and rear side-
marker lights, license plate and
instrument panel lights on
Headlights and other lights on
NOTE
Even if the daytime running lights are not on,
they will come on once the vehicle starts
moving.
Once the daytime running light come on,
they do not go out until the ignition switch is
turned to the “OFF” or “ACC” position or
the operation mode is changed to OFF or
ACC.
The sensitivity of the automatic on/off con-
trol can be adjusted.
For further information, please contact your
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice.
Do not cover the sensor (A) for the automatic
on/off control by affixing a sticker or label to
the windshield.
If the lights do not turn on or off with the
switch in the “AUTO” position, manually
operate the switch. Have the system checked
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
a repair facility of your choice.
Light auto-cutout function
(headlights and other lights)
NOTE
Combination headlights and dimmer switch
Features and controls 5-149
5
[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
key]
The operation mode is changed to OFF or
ACC and the driver’s door is opened.
When using a key to start the engine
• If the driver’s door is opened after the
key is removed from the ignition switch,
a high-pitched constant tone will sound
to remind you to turn off the lights.
• If the driver’s door is opened with the
key in the ignition switch, a low-pitched
beep will sound to remind you to remove
the key.
When using the F.A.S.T.-key to start
the engine
• If the operation mode is put in OFF and
the driver’s door is opened, a high-
pitched constant buzzer will sound to
remind you to turn off the lights.
• If the operation mode is changed to any
mode other than OFF and the driver’s
door is opened, a low-pitched constant
buzzer will sound to remind you to put
the operation mode in OFF.
If the following operation is performed
with the combination headlights and dim-
mer switch in the “ ” or “ ” position,
the lights automatically turn off after
about 3 minutes.
[Except for vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key]
The ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”
or “ACC” position or the key is removed
from the ignition switch and the driver’s
door is not opened.
[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
key]
The operation mode is changed to OFF or
ACC and the driver’s door is not opened.
If the combination headlights and dimmer
switch is turned to the “ ” or “ ” posi-
tion again after the engine is turned off, the
about 3-minute auto-cutout function
described above will not work. The lights (the
parking lights, tail lights and license plate
lights) will stay on and will not turn off auto-
matically.
N00549800226
[When using a key to start the engine]
If the driver’s door is opened with the key in
the “OFF” or “ACC” position or removed
from the ignition switch while the lights are
on, the tone will sound to remind you to turn
off the lights.
NOTE
The light auto-cutout function can be deacti-
vated.
See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer for details.
When you want to keep the lights
on:
NOTE
When the engine is started using the key, if
the driver’s door is opened and the key is
removed, the headlight reminder buzzer
intermittently emits a high-pitched sound. If
the key is still in the ignition switch the key
reminder buzzer intermittently emits a low-
pitched sound.
The buzzer stops when the driver’s door is
closed. (A warning is also displayed in the
multi-information display.)
When the engine is started using the
F.A.S.T.-key, if the driver’s door is opened
and the operation mode is put in OFF, the
headlight reminder buzzer intermittently
emits a high-pitched sound. If the operation
mode is in any mode other than OFF, the
operation mode on reminder buzzer intermit-
tently emits a low-pitched sound.
The buzzer stops when the driver’s door is
closed. (A warning is also displayed in the
multi-information display.)
Headlight reminder buzzer
Combination headlights and dimmer switch
5-150 Features and controls
5
[When using the F.A.S.T.-key to start the
engine]
If the driver’s door is opened with the opera-
tion mode is put in OFF or ACC, or if the
operation mode is changed to OFF while the
lights are on, the tone will sound to remind
you to turn off the lights.
In either case, the lights will turn off automat-
ically and so will the tone. Or you can turn
the light switch to the “OFF” position to stop
the tone.
N00549900142
To change the headlights from high beam to
low beam and vice versa, pull the turn signal
lever to (1). Switch the headlights to low
beam as a courtesy whenever there are
oncoming vehicles, or when there is traffic
moving ahead of you. An illuminated blue
light in the instrument cluster indicates when
the headlights are on high beam.
N00550000185
You can flash the high beams by pulling the
lever gently toward you (2). The lights will
go back to normal when you let go. While the
high beam is on, you will see a blue light on
the instrument panel.
N00591300086
The Automatic High Beam (AHB) turns the
high beam light on or off automatically
according to surrounding light conditions.
The sensor (A) detects lights, such as the
lights of an oncoming vehicle, a vehicle
ahead or street lights.
For details about handling the sensor, refer to
“Handling of the sensor” on page 5-85.
Dimmer (high/low beam
change)
Headlight flasher
NOTE
You can flash the high beams by pulling the
lever toward you, even if the light switch is
off.
If you turn the lights off with the head lights
set to high-beam illumination, the headlights
are automatically returned to their low-beam
setting when the light switch is next turned
to the “ ” position.
Automatic High Beam (AHB) (if
so equipped)
WARNING
Do not rely solely on the AHB. Always
observe surrounding traffic and light con-
ditions. If necessary, manually turn the
high beams on or off.
Refer to “Dimmer (high/low beam
change)” on page 5-150.
Combination headlights and dimmer switch
Features and controls 5-151
5
N00593600083
1. Rotate the light switch to “ ” position
or “AUTO” position when the engine is
running.
2. Press the AHB switch.
The AHB is activated and the indicator is
illuminated.
If the AHB switch is pressed again, the
AHB will be deactivated and AHB indica-
tor will go off.
1. Pull the turn signal lever toward you.
2. The AHB indicator will go off.
3. The AHB switch is pressed again, the
AHB will be activated.
1. Pull the turn signal lever toward you.
2. The AHB indicator will go off and the
high beam indicator illuminates.
3. The AHB switch is pressed again, the
AHB will be activated.
N00593700084
The high beam headlights illuminate when all
of the following conditions are met:
Your vehicle speed exceeds approxi-
mately 33 mph (53 km/h).
It is dark ahead of your vehicle.
There are no vehicles in front or oncom-
ing vehicles, or none of their exterior
lights are illuminating.
The low beam headlights illuminate when
any of the following conditions occur:
Your vehicle speed does not exceed
approximately 28 mph (45 km/h).
It is bright ahead of your vehicle.
An exterior light of a vehicle in front or
oncoming vehicle is illuminating.
How to use the AHB
NOTE
If the headlights are on when the light switch
is in the “AUTO” position, the AHB works.
You can switch the headlight beams
(high/low) manually by operating the lever
even if the AHB is working.
Refer to “Dimmer (high/low beam change)”
on page 5-150.
If the lever is operated manually, the AHB
indicator will go off and the AHB will be
deactivated.
Refer to “Manual switching” on page 5-151.
The AHB is not deactivated when you pull
the lever slightly (operation of the headlight
flasher).
Manual switching
Switching to low beam
Switching to high beam
Automatic switching conditions
Combination headlights and dimmer switch
5-152 Features and controls
5
The sensitivity of the sensor can be temporar-
ily lowering in the following ways.
1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and the
ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”
position or the operation mode is put in
OFF.
NOTE
The headlights may not be switched from
high beam to low beam under the following
circumstances.
• A vehicle in front or oncoming vehicle is
hindered by any object such as continuous
bends, elevated median/island, traffic signs,
roadside trees.
• Your vehicle passes an oncoming vehicle
suddenly on a bend with poor visibility.
• Another vehicle crosses ahead of your vehi-
cle.
The headlights may remain at low beam (or
be switched from high beam to low beam)
when a reflective object (e.g. street light,
traffic signal, noticeboard and signboard)
reflects light.
Any of the following factors may influence
the headlight beam switching timing:
• How brightly the exterior lights of a vehicle
in front or oncoming vehicle illuminate.
• Movement or direction of a vehicle in front
or oncoming vehicle.
• Only right or left exterior light of a vehicle
in front or oncoming vehicle is illuminat-
ing.
• A vehicle in front or oncoming vehicle is a
motorcycle.
• Road conditions (gradient, bends and road
surface).
• The number of occupants and luggage load.
The AHB recognises environmental condi-
tions by sensing a light source ahead of your
vehicle. Therefore, you may feel like some-
thing is not quite right when the headlight
beams are switched automatically.
The system may not detect a light vehicle
such as a bicycle.
The system may not detect an ambient
brightness precisely. This causes the traffic
to be dazzled by high beam or the low beam
to be maintained. In such cases, you should
switch the headlight beams manually.
• In bad weather (heavy rain, fog, snow or
sandstorm).
• The windshield is dirty or fogged up.
• The windshield is cracked or broken.
• The sensor is deformed or dirty.
• A light, which is similar to the headlights or
tail lights, is shining around your vehicle.
• A vehicle in front or oncoming vehicle is
driven without lights, the exterior lights are
dirty or discolored, or the direction of the
headlight beams is adjusted improperly.
• It becomes dark and bright suddenly and
continuously around your vehicle.
• Your vehicle is driven on uneven surfaces.
• Your vehicle is driven on a winding road.
• A reflective object such as a noticeboard or
a mirror reflects a light ahead of your vehi-
cle.
NOTE
• When lights of the vehicle in front or head-
lights of an oncoming vehicle blend into the
other lights.
• The rear end of a vehicle in front (such as a
container truck) reflect a strong light.
• Your vehicle’s headlight is broken or dirty.
• Your vehicle is inclined due to a flat tire or
towing.
• The warning display appears.
(Refer to “System problem warning” on
page 5-153.)
Observe the precautions below to maintain
good usage conditions:
• Do not attempt to disassemble the sensor.
• Do not affix a sticker or label on the wind-
shield near the sensor.
• Avoid overload.
• Do not modify your vehicle.
• When the windshield is replaced, use the
Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts.
To adjust the sensitivity of the sensor
NOTE
Combination headlights and dimmer switch
Features and controls 5-153
5
2. Press the AHB switch more than 15 times
within 5 seconds after operation mode is
turned on.
N00593800072
If a problem occurs with the system, the fol-
lowing warning display will appear to the
type of the problem.
If a failure is detected in the system, the fol-
lowing warning display will appear and the
AHB will automatically be turned off.
If the warning display remains even after the
ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” posi-
tion or the operation mode is put in OFF and
then turned back to ON, please contact an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
[When the AHB is malfunctioning]
[When the sensor is malfunctioning]
If the system becomes temporarily unavail-
able due to the high or low temperature of the
sensor, the following warning display will
appear.
After the temperature of the sensor has been
in range, the system will automatically return
to operation.
If the warning display does not disappear
after waiting for a while, there is a possibility
that the AHB has a malfunction. Contact an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for
inspection of the system.
System problem warning
The AHB deactivation due to fault
NOTE
If the sensor or its surrounding area becomes
extremely high temperature when parking
the vehicle under a blazing sun, the “AHB
SERVICE REQUIRED” warning display
may appear.
If the message remains even after the tem-
perature of the sensor or its surrounding area
has been in range, please contact an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
Sensor is too hot or cold
Combination headlights and dimmer switch
5-154 Features and controls
5
If the AHB determines that its performance
has been degraded, the warning display will
appear.
This can occur when
Foreign objects, such as dirt, snow or ice,
adhere to the windshield of the sensor
portion.
In adverse weather conditions, such as
rain, snow, sand storms, etc.
A front vehicle or an oncoming vehicle is
splashing water, snow or dirt.
When the sensor performance returns, the
AHB will resume operation.
If the warning display does not disappear
after waiting for a while, there is a possibility
that the sensor has a malfunction. Contact an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for
inspection of the sensor.
N00563201247
This function turns on the front side-marker
and parking lights for about 30 seconds after
the UNLOCK button (A) on the remote con-
trol transmitter is pressed when the combina-
tion headlights and dimmer switch is in the
“OFF” or “AUTO” position (for vehicles
equipped with the automatic light control).
On vehicles equipped with the automatic light
control, the welcome light function will oper-
ate only when it is dark outside the vehicle.
N00547301123
This function turns on the headlights in the
low beam setting for about 30 seconds after
the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”
position or the operation mode is put in OFF.
Windshield is dirty
Welcome light
NOTE
While the welcome light function is operat-
ing, perform one of the following operations
to cancel the function.
• Push the LOCK button (B) on the remote
control transmitter.
• Turn the combination headlights and dim-
mer switch to the “ ” or “ ” position.
• Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
tion or put the operation mode in ON.
It is possible to modify functions as follows:
• The headlights can be set to come on in the
low beam setting.
• The welcome light function can be deacti-
vated.
For details, consult a Mitsubishi Motors
dealer.
Coming home light
NOTE
Headlight leveling switch (if so equipped)
Features and controls 5-155
5
1. Turn the combination headlights and dim-
mer switch to the “OFF” or “AUTO”
position (for vehicles equipped with the
automatic light control).
2. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
position or put the operation mode in
OFF. Also, if a key was used to start the
engine, remove the key from the ignition
switch.
3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition
switch to the “OFF” position or putting
the operation mode in OFF, pull the turn
signal lever toward you.
4. The headlights will come on in the low
beam setting for about 30 seconds. After
the headlights go off, the headlights can
be turned on again in the low beam setting
for about 30 seconds by pulling the turn
signal lever toward you within 60 seconds
of turning the ignition switch to the
“OFF” position or putting the operation
mode in OFF. To turn on the headlights
again after 60 seconds of turning the igni-
tion switch to the “OFF” position or put-
ting the operation mode in OFF, repeat the
process from step 1.
N00537100105
The direction of the headlight beam (the
direction in which the light shines) alters
according to the number of people and the
load in the vehicle. Lower the headlight angle
if it is too high due to the number of people
and/or the load in the vehicle so that the head-
lights’ glare does not distract the drivers of
approaching vehicles. First set the light
switch to the “ ” position, then turn the
headlight leveling switch knob to lower the
beam. The greater the number on the head-
light leveling switch knob, the lower the
beam will point.
Set the switch to the appropriate position so
that the headlight beam is level with the road.
NOTE
While the coming home light function is
operating, perform one of the following
operations to cancel the function.
• Pull the turn signal lever toward you.
• Turn the combination headlights and dim-
mer switch to the “ ” or “ ” position
or put the operation mode in ON.
• Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
tion or put the operation mode in ON.
It is possible to modify functions as follows:
• The time that the headlights remain on can
be changed.
• The coming home light function can be
deactivated.
For details, consult a Mitsubishi Motors
dealer.
Headlight leveling switch (if
so equipped)
Turn signal lever
5-156 Features and controls
5
N00522601646
When changing lanes, or to making a gradual
turn, hold the lever in the “lane change” posi-
tion (1). It will return to the neutral position
when you let go. Use the full position (2)
when making a normal turn. The lever will
return to the neutral position when the turn is
complete. There may be times when the lever
does not return to the neutral position. This
usually happens when the steering wheel is
turned only slightly. You can easily return the
lever by hand.
Also, when you move the lever to (1) slightly
then release it, the turn signal lights and the
indicator light in the instrument cluster will
flash three times.
N00522700275
If you press the flasher switch, the front and
rear turn signals will flash intermittently, and
so will the hazard warning lights. This is an
emergency warning system and should not be
used when the vehicle is in motion, except for
emergencies.
If you need to leave your vehicle, the flashers
will keep working after the ignition switch is
removed or the operation mode is put in OFF.
WARNING
To avoid distraction while driving, always
perform headlight adjustments before
vehicle operation.
NOTE
Start adjusting when the knob is at the “0”
position (when the beam is at its highest).
Keep the knob in the “0” position except
when using the knob to lower the headlight
beam angle.
Always return the knob to the “0” position
when the load is removed and the people
have left the vehicle.
Turn signal lever
NOTE
A light in the instrument panel flashes to
show when the front and rear turn signal
lights are working properly.
If this light flashes faster than usual, check
for a burned out turn signal light bulb or mal-
functioning connection in the signal.
If the panel light does not come on when the
lever is moved, check for a blown fuse or a
burned out bulb in the panel.
Have the system inspected by your autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
facility of your choice.
It is possible to modify functions as follows:
• Deactivate the turn signal light 3-flash
function for lane changes.
• Adjust the time required to operate the
lever for the 3-flash function.
See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer for details.
Hazard warning flasher
switch
NOTE
Front fog light switch (if so equipped)
Features and controls 5-157
5
N00522800393
The front fog lights illuminate only when the
headlights are on low beam.
Turning the knob in the direction of the “ON”
position turns on the front fog lights as well
as the indicator in the instrument cluster. To
turn them off, turn the knob in the direction of
the “OFF” position.
The knob will return to the neutral position
when it is released.
N00523001807
The windshield wiper and washer can be
operated with the ignition switch or the oper-
ation mode is in ON or ACC.
If the blades are frozen to the windshield, do
not operate the wipers until the ice has melted
and the blades are freed, otherwise the wiper
motor may be damaged.
NOTE
If the flashers are used for several hours, the
battery will run down. This could make it
difficult or impossible to restart your vehicle.
Front fog light switch (if so
equipped)
NOTE
If the headlights are switched to high beam,
the front fog lights will go out; they will illu-
minate again when the headlights are
switched back to low beam.
If the light switch is rotated to the “OFF” or
“ ” position while the front fog lights are
illuminated, they will automatically turn off.
They can be turned back on again by rotating
the combination headlights and dimmer
switch back to “ ” position, and turning
the knob in the direction of the “ON” posi-
tion.
Do not use fog lights except in conditions of
fog, otherwise excessive light glare may
temporarily blind oncoming vehicle drivers.
Wiper and washer switch
CAUTION
If the washer is used in cold weather, the
washer fluid sprayed against the glass may
freeze, which may hinder visibility. Warm
the glass with the defroster before using the
washer.
Windshield wipers
NOTE
To ensure a clear rearward view, the rear
window wiper will automatically perform
several continuous operations if the selector
lever is put in the “R” position while the
windshield wipers are operating.
Refer to “Rear window wiper and washer”
on page 5-161.
Except for vehicle with rain sensor
Wiper and washer switch
5-158 Features and controls
5
With the lever in the “INT” (speed sensitive
intermittent operation) position, the intermit-
tent intervals can be adjusted by turning the
knob (A).
The misting function can be used when the
ignition switch or the operation mode is in
ON or ACC.
The wipers will operate once if the wiper
lever is raised to the “MIST” position and
released. This operation is useful when it is
drizzling, etc. The wipers will continue to
operate while the lever is held in the “MIST”
position.
The windshield wipers can be operated with
the ignition switch or the operation mode is in
ON or ACC.
If the blades are frozen to the windshield or
rear window, do not operate the wipers until
the ice has melted and the blades are freed,
otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged.
MIST- Misting function
The wipers will operate once.
OFF- Off
INT- Intermittent (Speed sensitive)
LO- Slow
HI- Fast
To adjust intermittent intervals
1- Fast
2- Slow
NOTE
The speed-sensitive-operation function of
the windshield wipers can be deactivated.
For further information, please contact your
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice.
Misting function
Vehicle with rain sensor
Wiper and washer switch
Features and controls 5-159
5
Can only be used when the ignition switch or
the operation mode is in ON.
If the lever is put in the “AUTO” position, the
rain sensor (A) will detect the extent of rain
(or snow, other moisture, dust, etc.) and the
wipers will operate automatically.
Keep the lever in the “OFF” position if the
windshield is dirty and the weather is dry.
Wiper operation under these conditions can
scratch the windshield and damage the wip-
ers.
MIST- Misting function
The wipers will operate once.
OFF- Off
AUTO- Auto-wiper control
Rain sensor
The wipers will automatically
operate depending on the degree of
wetness on the windshield.
LO- Slow
HI- Fast
Rain sensor (if so equipped)
CAUTION
With the ignition switch or the operation
mode in ON and the lever in the “AUTO”
position, the wipers may automatically oper-
ate in the situations described below.
• When cleaning the outside surface of the
windshield, if you touch the rain sensor.
• When cleaning the outside surface of the
windshield, if you wipe with a cloth the rain
sensor.
• When using an automatic car wash.
• A physical shock is applied to the wind-
shield.
• A physical shock is applied to the rain sen-
sor.
If your hands get trapped, you could suffer
injuries or the wipers could malfunction. Be
sure to turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
position or put the operation mode in OFF, or
move the lever to the “OFF” position to
deactivate the rain sensor.
NOTE
To protect the rubber parts of the wipers, this
operation of the wipers does not take place
when the vehicle is stationary and the ambi-
ent temperature is approximately 32 °F
(0 °C) or lower, even if the lever is put in the
“AUTO” position.
Do not cover the sensor by affixing a sticker
or label to the windshield. Also, do not put
any water-repellent coating on the wind-
shield. The rain sensor would not be able to
detect the extent of rain, and the wipers
might stop working normally.
In the following cases, the rain sensor may
be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked
at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
a repair facility of your choice.
• When the wipers operate at a constant inter-
val despite changes in the extent of rain.
• When the wipers do not operate even
though it is raining.
CAUTION
Wiper and washer switch
5-160 Features and controls
5
With the lever in the “AUTO” (rain sensor)
position, it is possible to adjust the sensitivity
of the rain sensor by turning the knob (B).
Move the lever in the direction of the arrow
and release, to operate the wipers once.
Use this function when you are driving in
mist or drizzle.
The wipers will operate once if the lever is
raised to the “MIST” position and released
when the ignition switch or the operation
mode is in ON or ACC. The wipers will con-
tinue to operate while the lever is held in the
“MIST” position.
The wipers will operate once if the lever is
moved to the “AUTO” position and the knob
(C) is turned in the “+” direction when the
ignition switch or the operation mode is in
ON.
The wipers may automatically operate when
things such as insects or foreign objects are
affixed to the windshield on top of the rain
sensor or when the windshield is frozen.
Objects affixed to the windshield will stop
the wipers when the wipers cannot remove
them. To operate the wipers again, move the
lever to the “LO” or “HI” position.
Also, the wipers may operate automatically
due to strong direct sunlight or electromag-
netic wave. To stop the wipers, move the
lever to the “OFF” position.
Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice
when replacing the windshield glass.
To adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensor
NOTE
“+”- Higher sensitivity to rain
“-”- Lower sensitivity to rain
NOTE
Automatic wiper operation (rain sensitive)
can be changed to intermittent operation,
either vehicle speed sensitive or not vehicle
speed sensitive.
For further information, please contact your
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice.
Misting function
Wiper and washer switch
Features and controls 5-161
5
N00504601468
The windshield washer can be operated with
the ignition switch or the operation mode is in
ON or ACC.
The washer fluid will be sprayed onto the
windshield by pulling the lever toward you.
When the wipers are not in operation or in
intermittent operation, by pulling the lever
toward you, the wipers will operate several
times while the washer fluid is being sprayed.
By releasing the lever soon after pulling it
toward you, the washer fluid will be sprayed
several times while the wipers are operating
several times.
Intelligent washer will stop operating with
any operation of the lever.
N00523201492
The rear window wiper and washer can be
operated when the ignition switch or the
operation mode is in ON or ACC.
Turn the knob to operate the rear window
wiper.
Windshield washer
NOTE
It is possible to modify functions as follows:
• Intelligent washer can be activated.
Refer to “Intelligent washer” on page
5-161.
• The wipers can be set to operate again after
about 6 seconds.
These functions are not activated when the
vehicle is shipped from the factory.
To activate or deactivate these functions,
please contact your authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer.
Intelligent washer
NOTE
Rear window wiper and washer
OFF- Off
INT- The wiper operates continuously for
several seconds then operates inter-
mittently at intervals of approxi-
mately 8 seconds.
-
Washer fluid will be sprayed onto the
rear window glass while the knob is
turned fully in either direction.
When the washer fluid is sprayed, the
wiper will automatically operate 2 or
3 times.
Electric rear window defogger switch
5-162 Features and controls
5
N00523501307
N00523701543
The rear window defogger can be used when
the engine is running.
The indicator light (A) will come on when
you press the electric rear window defogger
switch. Electric current will flow through the
heating wires on the rear window to help
clear away moisture or frost.
NOTE
The rear window wiper will automatically
perform several continuous operations if the
selector lever is put in the “R” position while
the windshield wipers or the rear window
wiper is operating. (automatic operation
mode)
After the automatic operation, the rear win-
dow wiper will stop operating if the knob is
in the “OFF” position. If the knob is in the
“INT” position, the rear window wiper will
return to the intermittent operation.
It is possible to set the rear window wiper to
perform the automatic operation only if the
selector lever is put in the “R” position while
the rear window wiper is operating with the
knob in the “INT” position.
See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer for details.
If the knob is in the “OFF” position, turn the
knob to the “INT” position twice quickly to
operate the rear window wiper continuously.
(continuous operation mode)
Turn the knob to the “OFF” position to stop
the rear window wiper continuous operation.
The wiper intermittent operation time can be
adjusted.
See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer for details.
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the
engine compartment.
Check the fluid level regularly and refill if
necessary. (Refer to “Washer fluid” on page
9-9.)
Precautions to observe when
using wipers and washers
CAUTION
If the washer is used in cold weather, the
washer fluid sprayed onto the glass might
freeze, blocking your view. Heat the glass
with the defroster before using the washer.
NOTE
Do not use the wipers when the windshield is
dry. This could scratch the glass and wear the
wiper blades prematurely.
Before using the wipers in cold weather,
check to be sure that the wiper blades are not
frozen to the windshield or rear window.
Using the wipers while the blades are frozen
could cause the wiper motor to burn out.
If the moving wipers become blocked part-
way through a sweep by ice or other deposits
on the glass, the wipers may temporarily stop
operating to prevent the motor from over-
heating. In this case, park the vehicle in a
safe place, turn the ignition switch to the
“OFF” position or put the operation mode in
OFF, and then remove the ice or other depos-
its.
Because the wipers will start operating again
after the wiper motor cools down, check that
the wipers operate before using them.
Avoid using the washer for more than 20 sec-
onds at a time. Do not operate the washer
when the washer fluid reservoir is empty or
the pump may fail.
During cold weather, add a recommended
washer solution that will not freeze in the
washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise the washer
may not work or may be damaged.
Replace the wiper blades when they are
worn. Use the proper size replacement
blades. For further information, please con-
tact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer.
Electric rear window defog-
ger switch
NOTE
Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped)
Features and controls 5-163
5
After approximately 20 minutes of operation,
the system will shut off automatically.
To switch the defogger OFF before 20 min-
utes have passed, press the switch again. The
indicator light will go out and the defogger
will turn off.
If you need the defogger for more than
20 minutes, press the switch again. This will
add 20 more minutes.
N00589100061
The heated steering wheel contains internal
heaters in the rim. Heating areas are shown in
the illustration.
: Heating area
The heated steering wheel can be operated
when the ignition switch or operation mode is
in ON.
To turn on the heated steering wheel, push the
heated steering wheel switch. The heated
steering wheel will operate for approximately
30 minutes and then it will automatically turn
off.
The indicator light (A) will illuminate while
the heated steering wheel is operating.
CAUTION
The rear window defogger is not designed to
melt snow. Remove any snow manually
before using the rear window defogger.
Use the rear window defogger only after the
engine has started and is running. Be sure to
turn the defogger switch off immediately
after the window is clear to save on battery
power.
Do not place stickers, tape, or other items
that are attached with adhesive over the grid
wires on the rear window.
When cleaning the inside rear window, use a
soft cloth and wipe lightly over the grid
wires.
NOTE
As your vehicle is equipped with heated mir-
rors, mist can also be removed from the out-
side rearview mirrors when the rear window
defogger switch is pressed. (Refer to “Door
mirror heater” on page 5-50.)
CAUTION
Heated steering wheel
switch
(if so equipped)
Horn switch
5-164 Features and controls
5
N00523801209
To honk the horn, press around the “ ” mark
on the steering wheel.
N00563701213
The Link System takes overall control of the
devices connected via the USB input terminal
allowing the connected devices to be operated
by using the switches in the vehicle. Refer to
“USB input terminal” on page 5-164.
N00566701227
You can connect your USB memory device or
iPod* to play music files stored in the USB
memory device or iPod.
*: “iPod” is a registered trademark of Apple
Inc. in the United States and other countries.
N00566801228
1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn
the ignition switch to the “OFF” position
or put the operation mode in OFF.
2. Connect a commercially available USB
connector cable (B) to the USB memory
device (A).
3. Connect the USB connector cable (B) to
the USB input terminal (C).
WARNING
Persons who are unable to feel tempera-
ture change or skin pain due to age, ill-
ness, injury, medication, fatigue or other
physical conditions or who have sensitive
skin may suffer burns when using the
heated steering wheel. To reduce the risk
of burns, people with such conditions must
use care when using the heated steering
wheel.
CAUTION
If water or any other liquid is spilled on the
steering wheel, allow it to dry thoroughly
before attempting to use the heated steering
wheel. Turn the heated steering wheel off
immediately if it appears to be malfunction-
ing during use.
Also be aware that using the heated steering
wheel with the engine off may run the bat-
tery down.
Horn switch
Link System
USB input terminal
How to connect a USB memory
device
Sun visors
Features and controls 5-165
5
4. To remove the USB connector cable, turn
the ignition switch to the “OFF” position
or put the operation mode in OFF first and
perform the installation steps in reverse.
N00566901258
1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn
the ignition switch to the “OFF” position
or put the operation mode in OFF.
2. Connect the connector cable to the iPod.
3. Connect the connector cable (A) to the
USB input terminal (B).
4. To remove the connector cable, turn the
ignition switch to the “OFF” position or
put the operation mode in OFF first and
perform the installation steps in reverse.
N00567001139
On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone-
link Display Audio (SDA) or the DISPLAY
AUDIO, refer to the separate owner’s manual
for details about the types of connectable
devices and supported file specifications.
N00524601422
Pull the sun visor downward (1) to reduce
front glare while driving. To reduce side
glare, turn the visor to the side (2).
A vanity mirror is fitted to the back of the sun
visor.
Operating the lid of the vanity mirror will
automatically turn on the mirror light (A).
NOTE
Do not connect the USB memory device to
the USB input terminal directly.
The USB memory device may be damaged.
How to connect an iPod
Type 1
Type 2
NOTE
Use a genuine connector cable from Apple
Inc.
Types of connectable devices
and supported file specifica-
tions
Type 1
Type 2
Sun visors
Vanity mirror
Type 1
12 V power outlets
5-166 Features and controls
5
A vanity mirror is fitted to the back of the sun
visor.
The holder (B) is located on the back of the
sun visor.
N00525001742
To use a “plug-in” type accessory, open the
cover or remove the cap, and insert the plug
in the power outlet.
CAUTION
If the lid of vanity mirror with light is kept
open for prolonged periods of time, the vehi-
cle’s battery will be discharged.
Type 2
Ticket holder
CAUTION
Do not leave plastic cards in the ticket
holder. Because the inside of the vehicle will
become hot if the vehicle is parked in strong
sunlight, the cards could deform or crack.
12 V power outlets
CAUTION
Be sure to use a “plug-in” type accessory
operating at 12 V and at 120 W or less.
When using more than one socket at the
same time, make sure the total power con-
sumption of the electrical accessories does
not exceed 120 W at 12 V.
Also be aware that using electronic equip-
ment with the engine off may run the battery
down.
When the power outlet is not in use, be sure
to close the power outlet cover or replace the
cap. This will prevent the power outlet from
becoming clogged and short circuiting.
HomeLink® Wireless Control System (if so equipped)
Features and controls 5-167
5
Accessories can be operated while the igni-
tion switch or the operation mode is in ON or
ACC.
Accessories can be operated in all ignition
switch positions or all operation modes.
N00554301109
HomeLink
®
and the HomeLink
®
house icon
are registered trademarks of Gentex Corpora-
tion.
HomeLink
®
provides a convenient way to
replace up to 3 hand-held radio-frequency
(RF) transmitters used to activate devices
such as gate operators, garage door openers,
entry door locks, security systems, even home
lighting. Additional HomeLink
®
information
can be found at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or by
calling the toll-free HomeLink
®
-Hotline at 1-
800-355-3515.
NOTE
If your vehicle is equipped with two 12V
power outlets, they can be used simultane-
ously.
Type 1
WARNING
The hole next to the power outlet in the
center console is not a cup holder. This
hole can be used as a personal compart-
ment, but should never be used as a cup
holder. Spilling beverages onto the power
outlet could cause a short-circuit or an
electric shock.
Center console
Type 2
HomeLink
®
Wireless Con-
trol System
(if so equipped)
Floor console box
WARNING
Do not use HomeLink
®
with any garage
door opener that lacks safety stop and
reverse features as required by U.S. Fed-
eral Regulations. A garage door opener
which cannot detect an object in the path
of a closing garage door and then auto-
matically stop and reverse, does not meet
current U.S. Federal Regulations. Using a
garage door opener without these features
increases the risk of serious injury or
death.
During programming, your garage door
or gate may open or close. Make sure that
people and objects are clear of the garage
door or gate that you are programming.
NOTE
Once HomeLink
®
is programmed, retain the
original transmitter for future programming
procedures (for example, new vehicle pur-
chases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the pro-
grammed HomeLink
®
buttons should be
erased for security purposes. Refer to “Clear-
ing the programmed information” on page
5-171.
HomeLink® Wireless Control System (if so equipped)
5-168 Features and controls
5
N00584600032
Some garage door openers manufactured
after 1995 have “rolling code protection”.
To program a garage door opener
equipped with “rolling code protection”;
you will need to access the garage door
opener motor to press the motor’s “Learn”
or “Smart” buttons. For convenience, use
a ladder and another person to assist you.
It is recommended that a new battery be
placed in the hand-held transmitter of the
device being programmed to HomeLink
®
for quicker training and accurate trans-
mission of the radio-frequency signal.
N00584700088
To program HomeLink
®
to operate a garage
door, gate, or entry door opener, home or
office lighting, you need to be at the same
location as the device.
1. Press the HomeLink
®
button that you
would like to program. The indicator light
(A) will flash orange slowly.
2. Position the end of your hand-held trans-
mitter (B) 1 to 3 inches (2 to 8 cm) away
from the HomeLink
®
button while keep-
ing the indicator light in view.
You can program a maximum of 3 devices.
To change or replace any of the 3 devices
after it has been initially programmed, you
must first erase the current settings.
See “Clearing the programmed information”
on page 5-171 or “Reprogramming a single
HomeLink
®
button” on page 5-172.
1-
HomeLink
®
button 1
2-
HomeLink
®
button 2
3-
HomeLink
®
button 3
NOTE
Before programming Home-
Link
®
Programming a new Home-
Link
®
NOTE
You do not need to continue holding the
HomeLink
®
button.
If the indicator light does not flash, refer to
“Clearing the programmed information” on
page 5-171.
HomeLink® Wireless Control System (if so equipped)
Features and controls 5-169
5
3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter
button while watching the indicator light
(A). Continue pressing the button until the
indicator light (A) changes from slowly
flashing orange to either rapidly flashing
green (rolling code) or continuously lit
green (fixed code). Now you may release
the hand-held transmitter button.
4. Press the HomeLink
®
button that was just
programmed and observe the indicator
light.
• If the indicator light continuously illumi-
nates green, programming is complete
and your device should operate when the
HomeLink
®
button is pressed and
released.
• If the indicator light rapidly flashes
green, firmly press, hold for 2 seconds
and release the programmed HomeLink
®
button. Repeat the “press/hold/release”
sequence a second time, and, depending
on the brand of the garage door opener
(or other rolling code equipped device),
repeat this sequence a third time to com-
plete the programming process. At this
point if your device operates, program-
ming is complete.
• If the device does not operate, continue
with “Programming a new HomeLink
®
”
steps 5 to 7 to complete the program-
ming of a rolling code equipped device.
5. At the garage door opener receiver
(motor-head unit) in the garage, locate the
“Learn” or “Smart” button. This can usu-
ally be found where the hanging antenna
wire is attached to the motor-head unit
(see the garage door opener manual to
identify the “Learn” button.)
6. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or
“Smart” button. (The name and color of
the button may vary by manufacturer.)
There are typically 30 seconds to initiate
step 7.
7. Return to the vehicle and firmly press,
hold for 2 seconds and release the pro-
grammed HomeLink
®
button. Repeat the
“press/hold/release” sequence a second
time, and, depending on the brand of the
garage door opener (or other rolling code
equipped device), repeat this sequence a
third time to complete the programming
process.
HomeLink
®
should now activate your
rolling code equipped device.
NOTE
Some hand-held transmitters may actually
train better from a distance of 6 to 12 inches
(15 to 30 cm). Keep this in mind if you have
difficulty with the programming process.
NOTE
Some devices may require you to replace this
“Programming a new HomeLink
®
” step 3
with procedures noted in the “Gate operator /
Canadian programming” section. If the indi-
cator light does not change to rapidly flash-
ing green or continuously lit green after
performing these steps, contact HomeLink
®
at www.homelink.com
HomeLink® Wireless Control System (if so equipped)
5-170 Features and controls
5
N00584800034
Canadian radio-frequency laws require trans-
mitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after
several seconds of transmission - which may
not be long enough for HomeLink
®
to pick
up the signal during programming. Similar to
this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
are designed to “time-out” in the same man-
ner.
The indicator LED on the hand-held transmit-
ter will go off when the device times out indi-
cating that it has finished transmitting.
If you live in Canada or you are having diffi-
culties programming a gate operator or
garage door opener by using the “Program-
ming” procedures, replace “Programming a
new HomeLink
®
” step 3 with the following:
3. Press and release - every 2 seconds
(“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until the
HomeLink
®
indicator light changes from
slowly flashing orange to either rapidly flash-
ing green (rolling code) or continuously lit
green (fixed code). Now you may release the
hand-held transmitter button.
Proceed with “Programming a new Home-
Link
®
” step 4 to complete.
N00584900035
The HomeLink
®
has the capability of receiv-
ing garage door status from compatible
garage door opener systems. Check your
garage door opener manual for the available
feature and HomeLink
®
compatibility. Also
for a listing of compatible systems contact
HomeLink
®
at: www.homelink.com
1. Within 5 seconds after successfully pro-
gramming the garage door opener (refer
to “Programming a new HomeLink
®
”
section), both garage door operation indi-
cators (A) will flash rapidly green indicat-
ing that the garage door feedback has
been enabled.
If the indicators do not flash, perform
steps 2 and 3 while pressing the Home-
Link
®
button up to the first 10 times after
successful programming.
2. Press and release the programmed Home-
Link
®
button to activate the door. You
now have 1 minute in which to complete
step 3.
NOTE
In the event that there are still programming
difficulties or questions, additional Home-
Link
®
information and programming videos
can be found online at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or by
calling the HomeLink
®
Hotline.
Gate operator/Canadian pro-
gramming
NOTE
If programming a garage door opener or gate
operator, it is advised to unplug the device
during the “cycling” process to prevent pos-
sible overheating.
Additional steps for program-
ming a door system with feed-
back
HomeLink® Wireless Control System (if so equipped)
Features and controls 5-171
5
3. Once the door has stopped, press and
release the “Learn” or “Smart” button on
the garage door opener (refer to your
garage door opener owner’s manual for
the location of the “Learn” button). Both
the HomeLink
®
garage door operation
indicators will flash rapidly green upon
successful synchronization with the door
opener (within 5 seconds).
N00585000033
To operate, simply press and release the pro-
grammed HomeLink
®
button. Activation will
now occur for the trained device (i.e. garage
door opener, gate operator, security system,
entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.).
For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of
the device may also be used at any time.
N00585200035
The HomeLink
®
has the capability of receiv-
ing garage door status from compatible
garage door opener systems. Refer to “Addi-
tional steps for programming a door system
with feedback” on page 5-170.
Garage door status is then displayed with
indicators (A).
The indicators will illuminate/blink in
response to the following conditions:
: Blinking : Illuminates
The HomeLink
®
has the capability of listen-
ing to these messages at a range up to 820.2
feet (250 m) (open line of sight), but range
may be reduced by obstacles such as houses
or trees. You may have to slow your vehicle
speed to receive the CLOSED or OPENED
message feedback from the garage door
opener. If the unit is out of range before
receiving either the UP or DOWN message
from the door opener, both the UP and
DOWN indicators will flash red followed by
a continuous lit orange indicator in the direc-
tion the door was last moving.
Recall of the door state after initial feedback
is possible by simultaneously pressing either
HomeLink
®
buttons 1 and 2 or buttons 2 and
3 for 2 seconds. The last recorded message
will be displayed for 3 seconds, again follow-
ing the garage door status indication of the
figure above.
N00585300036
To erase programming from the 3 buttons
(individual buttons cannot be erased but can
be “reprogrammed” as outlined below), fol-
low the steps noted:
Operating HomeLink
®
Garage door feedback
Garage door opener closing
(orange)
Garage door opener closed
(green)
Out of range
(red)
Garage door opener opening
(orange)
Garage door opener opened
(green)
Out of range
(red)
Clearing the programmed
information
Interior lights
5-172 Features and controls
5
1. Press and hold the 2 outer HomeLink
®
buttons for at least 10 seconds. The indi-
cator will change from continuous yellow
to rapidly flashing green.
2. Release both buttons.
3. HomeLink
®
is now in the train (or learn-
ing) mode and can be programmed at any
time beginning with “Programming a new
HomeLink
®
” step 1.
N00585400037
To reprogram a HomeLink
®
button, complete
the following.
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink
®
button. Do not release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to slowly
flash orange after 20 seconds. The Home-
Link
®
button can be released at this point.
Proceed with “Programming a new
HomeLink
®
” step 2.
N00585600071
Your HomeLink
®
system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communica-
tions Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles
sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules
(For vehicles sold in Canada). This device
complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
RSS- 210 of the Industry Canada Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions.
This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference.
This device must accept any interference
that may be received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired operation.
This equipment complies with FCC radiation
exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment. End Users must follow the spe-
cific operating instructions for satisfying RF
exposure compliance. This transmitter must
be at least 8 inches (20 cm) from the user and
must not be co-located or operating in con-
junction with any other antenna or transmit-
ter.
The term “IC:” before the certification/regis-
tration number only signifies that Industry
Canada technical specifications were met.
N00525301699
NOTE
Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds.
Reprogramming a single
HomeLink
®
button
NOTE
If you do not complete the programming of a
new device to the button, it will revert to the
previously stored programming.
For questions or comments, visit
www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or by
calling the HomeLink
®
Hotline.
General information
CAUTION
The transmitter has been tested and complies
with FCC and IC rules.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for com-
pliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the device.
Interior lights
NOTE
Be aware that leaving the light illuminated
with the engine off may run the battery
down.
Never leave the vehicle without checking
that the light is off.
Interior lights
Features and controls 5-173
5
N00525401472
1- (DOOR)
The light illuminates when a door or the
liftgate is opened. It goes off approxi-
mately 30 seconds after the door or lift-
gate is closed.
However, the light goes off immediately
in the following cases:
• When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position or the operation mode is
put in ON.
• When the power door lock function is
used to lock the vehicle.
• When the remote control transmitter of
the keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T.-
key is used to lock the vehicle.
• If the vehicle is equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key, when the F.A.S.T.-key is
used to lock the vehicle.
2-
The light goes off regardless of whether a
door or the liftgate is open or closed.
1- Cargo room light P.5-174
2- Dome light (Rear) (if so equipped)
P.5-174
3- Dome light (Front)/Reading lights
P.5-173
Sunshade illumination dimming control
switch (if so equipped) P.5-175
4- Center console down light P.5-176
Dome light (front)/Reading
lights
Dome light (front)
NOTE
When the doors other than the driver’s door
and liftgate are closed if the driver’s door is
closed while its lock knob is in the lock posi-
tion, the light goes off immediately.
When the key was used to start the engine, if
the key is removed while the doors and lift-
gate are closed, the light is illuminated and
after approximately 30 seconds it goes off.
When the F.A.S.T.-key was used to start the
engine, if the operation mode is put in OFF
while the doors and liftgate are closed, the
light illuminates and after approximately 30
seconds it goes off.
The time until the light goes off can be
adjusted. See your authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer for details.
Interior lights
5-174 Features and controls
5
N00537600155
Regardless of the position of the dome light
switch, when the lens is pressed, the light on
the side that was pressed will illuminate.
Press the lens again to turn off the light.
N00525801258
1- ( )
The light illuminates regardless of
whether a door or the liftgate is open or
closed.
2- ()
The light illuminates when a door or the
liftgate is opened. It goes off approxi-
mately 30 seconds after the door or lift-
gate is closed.
However, the light goes off immediately
in the following cases:
• When the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position or the operation mode is
put in ON.
• When the power door lock function is
used to lock the vehicle.
• When the remote control transmitter of
the keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T.-
key is used to lock the vehicle.
• If the vehicle is equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key, when the F.A.S.T.-key is
used to lock the vehicle.
3- ( )
The light goes off regardless of whether a
door or the liftgate is open or closed.
N00526100163
The light illuminates when the liftgate is
opened, and goes out when the liftgate is
closed.
Reading lights
Dome light (rear) (if so equipped)
NOTE
When the doors other than the driver’s door
and liftgate are closed if the driver’s door is
closed while its lock knob is in the lock posi-
tion, the light goes off immediately.
When the key was used to start the engine, if
the key is removed while the doors and lift-
gate are closed, the light is illuminated and
after approximately 30 seconds it goes off.
When the F.A.S.T.-key was used to start the
engine, if the operation mode is put in OFF
while the doors and liftgate are closed, the
light illuminates and after approximately 30
seconds it goes off.
The time until the light goes off can be
adjusted. See your authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer for details.
Cargo room light
NOTE
Interior lights
Features and controls 5-175
5
N00568500020
The brightness of the sunshade illumination
can be adjusted to 3 different levels when the
ignition switch or the operation mode is in
ON or ACC.
Each time you press the switch, the bright-
ness switches in sequence from high mid-
dle low off high.
N00568601031
The sunshade illumination turns on when the
ignition switch or the operation mode is in
ON or ACC.
When the sunshade illumination is turned on,
it will go off approximately 30 seconds after
the following operation is performed.
When the key was used to start the
engine, the key is removed while all doors
and the liftgate remain closed.
For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
key, the operation mode is put in OFF
while the engine is running and the doors
and the liftgate are closed.
The sunshade illumination also turns on when
a door or the liftgate is opened, and goes off
30 seconds after the door or the liftgate is
closed, even when the engine switch is in the
“OFF” position or the operation mode is in
OFF.
However, the sunshade illumination immedi-
ately goes off in the following cases.
When the power door lock function is
used to lock the vehicle.
When the remote control transmitter of
the keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T.-
key is used to lock the vehicle.
Sunshade illumination dim-
ming control switch (if so equipped)
NOTE
The brightness can be adjusted even when
the ignition switch is in the “OFF” position
or the operation mode is in OFF, provided
that the sunshade illumination is turned on.
Sunshade illumination (if so
equipped)
NOTE
The sunshade illumination does not turn on if
the sunshade illumination dimming control
switch is off.
Refer to “Sunshade illumination dimming
control switch” on page 5-175.
NOTE
The time until the sunshade illumination
goes off can be adjusted. If it is adjusted, the
time until the dome light go off is also
adjusted automatically at the same time.
See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer for details.
Storage spaces
5-176 Features and controls
5
If the vehicle is equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key, when the F.A.S.T.-key is
used to lock the vehicle.
N00596100021
The center console down light illuminates
when the light switch is in the “ ” or “ ”
position. For vehicles equipped with the auto-
matic light control, when the light switch is in
the “AUTO” position, the center console
down light also illuminates when the parking
lights illuminate.
N00526301452
If any of the interior lights are left
switched on with the ignition switch is in
the “OFF” position or the operation mode
is in OFF, it goes off automatically after
approximately 30 minutes.
The lights will illuminate again after they
automatically go off if the ignition switch
or the engine switch is operated, or if the
keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T.-key
is operated.
N00526400469
NOTE
When the doors other than the driver’s door
and liftgate are closed if the driver’s door is
closed while its lock knob is in the lock posi-
tion, the light goes off immediately.
The sunshade illumination does not turn on if
the sunshade illumination dimming control
switch is off.
The time until the sunshade illumination
goes off can be adjusted. If it is adjusted, the
time until the dome light go off is also
adjusted automatically at the same time. See
your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for
details.
Center console down light
Interior light auto-cutout func-
tion (dome light and other
lights)
NOTE
The interior light auto-cutout function can be
deactivated.
The time until the lights automatically go off
can be adjusted. See your authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details.
Storage spaces
CAUTION
Never leave lighters, carbonated drink cans,
or spectacles in the cabin when parking the
vehicle in hot sunshine. The cabin will
become extremely hot, so lighters and other
flammable items may catch fire and
unopened drink cans (including beer cans)
may rupture. The heat may also deform or
crack plastic spectacle lenses and other spec-
tacle parts that are made of plastic.
Keep the lids of storage spaces closed while
driving the vehicle. A lid or the contents of a
storage space could otherwise cause injuries
during a sudden stop.
NOTE
Do not leave valuables in any storage space
when leaving the vehicle.
Storage spaces
Features and controls 5-177
5
N00551501357
To open, pull the lever (A).
There is a pen holder inside the glove com-
partment.
There is a card holder inside the glove com-
partment.
1- Floor console box
2- Glove compartment
Glove compartment
WARNING
An open glove compartment door can
cause a serious injury or death to the front
passenger in an accident, even if the pas-
senger is wearing his/her seat belt. Always
keep the glove compartment door closed
when driving.
NOTE
When the lights are illuminated with the
light switch in the “ ”, “ ”, or “AUTO”
position (vehicles with automatic light con-
trol), the glove compartment light illumi-
nates.
Pen holder
NOTE
There is a limit to the size of pens that can be
stored in the holder. Forcing large pens into
the holder could cause damage.
Card holder
Cup holders
5-178 Features and controls
5
N00551601316
To open the console box, lift the release lever
(A) and raise the lid.
A pocket-sized tissue pack and a pen can be
stored on the underside of the floor console
box lid.
N00527301547
The cup holder is designed for holding cups
or drink-cans securely in its holes.
The cup holder is located in front of the floor
console.
N00537001244
In order to use the cup holder, allow the arm
rest (A) to drop down.
Floor console box
NOTE
The floor console box can also be used as an
arm rest.
B- Tissue holder
C- Pen holder
D- Tray
Cup holders
WARNING
Do not spray water or spill beverages
inside the vehicle. If the switches, wires, or
electrical components become wet, they
could malfunction or cause a vehicle fire.
If you accidentally spill a beverage, wipe
up as much liquid as possible.
For the front seat
For the rear seat
Bottle holder
Features and controls 5-179
5
N00502801088
There are bottle holders located on the front
doors.
N00500101058
1. Insert the concave portion (A) on the
underside of the cargo area cover into the
inside protruding portion (B) of the lift-
gate.
Bottle holder
WARNING
Do not spray water or spill beverages
inside the vehicle. If the switches, wires, or
electrical components become wet, they
could malfunction or cause a vehicle fire.
If you accidentally spill a beverage, wipe
up as much liquid as possible.
CAUTION
Drink beverages while driving your vehicle
is distracting and can cause an accident.
Vibration and shaking while driving may
cause beverages to spill. Be very careful, as
spilling hot beverages could cause burns.
NOTE
Make sure all lids are tightly closed when
storing beverages that are in plastic bottles,
etc.
Some beverages may not be stored, depend-
ing on the size and shape of the plastic bot-
tles, etc.
Cargo area cover (if so
equipped)
CAUTION
Do not place luggage or other items on the
cargo area cover. Any items on the cargo
area cover would obstruct your rearward
view, and they could fly forward and cause
injuries or other mishap in the event of hard
braking.
To install
Assist grips
5-180 Features and controls
5
2. Hang the strap (C) of the cargo area cover
on the hook (D).
Follow this procedure in reverse to remove.
N00559000061
The assist grips (located above the doors on
the headliner) are not designed to support
body weight. They are intended for use only
while seated in the vehicle.
N00553600153
There is a coat hook on the rear seat assist
grip of the driver’s side.
CAUTION
Lightly push the cargo area cover to make
sure that the concave portion (A) is set
firmly in the protruding portion (B) of the
liftgate. If the cargo area cover is not
securely locked in place, it could unhook
while driving and cause injuries.
To remove
Assist grips
CAUTION
Do not use the assist grips when getting into
or out of the vehicle. The assist grips could
detach causing you to fall.
Coat hook
WARNING
Do not put a hanger or any heavy or
pointed object on the coat hook. If the cur-
tain airbag was activated, any such item
could be propelled away with great force
and could prevent the curtain airbag from
inflating correctly. Hang clothes directly
on the coat hook (without using a hanger).
Make sure there are no heavy or sharp
objects in the pockets of clothes that you
hang on the coat hook.
Luggage hooks
Features and controls 5-181
5
N00528501298
There are hooks on the sides of the luggage
compartment for use in securing luggage.
Luggage hooks
CAUTION
Do not load the luggage higher than the top
of the seatback.
Be sure that luggage is firmly secured.
Restricted rear vision or flying objects enter-
ing the passenger compartment during sud-
den braking could result in a serious
accident.
6
Driving safety
Driving precaution ...........................................................................6-2
Fuel economy ...................................................................................6-2
Driving, alcohol and drugs ..............................................................6-2
Floor mat ..........................................................................................6-3
Vehicle preparation before driving ..................................................6-4
Safe driving techniques ....................................................................6-4
Driving during cold weather ............................................................6-5
Braking ............................................................................................6-5
Parking .............................................................................................6-6
Loading information ........................................................................6-6
Cargo loads ....................................................................................6-10
Trailer towing ................................................................................6-12
Driving precaution
6-2 Driving safety
6
N00629301106
Your vehicle has been designed for both nor-
mal and occasional off-road use. However,
avoid driving the vehicle through areas where
the tires may get stuck in deep sand or mud as
your vehicle is designed primarily for use on
pavement, unlike a conventional off-road
vehicle.
Keep in mind that 2-wheel drive vehicles are
less capable than 4-wheel drive vehicles for
driving on muddy, slippery, wet or snow-cov-
ered roads.
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance
and a narrower track, which enables them to
perform in a wide variety of off-road situa-
tions. Because of the higher ground clear-
ance, these vehicles have a higher center of
gravity, which makes them handle differently
than ordinary vehicles when driving on pave-
ment. They are not designed to maneuver or
corner at the same speed on pavement as con-
ventional 2-wheel drive passenger cars any
more than low-slung sports cars are designed
to perform satisfactorily in off-road condi-
tions.
Always drive safely and steer the vehicle
carefully. Avoid operating the vehicle in a
manner that might require sharp turns or
abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of
this type, failure to operate this vehicle cor-
rectly can result in loss of control or vehicle
rollover.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is sig-
nificantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. Before starting the vehi-
cle, always make certain that you and all your
passengers are properly wearing their seat
belts (with children in the rear seat, in appro-
priate restraints).
N00628800152
Fuel economy is dependent on many factors.
Your personal driving habits can have a sig-
nificant effect on your fuel use. Several rec-
ommendations for achieving the greatest fuel
economy are listed below.
Whenever accelerating from a stop,
always accelerate slowly and smoothly.
When parked for even a short period, do
not idle the engine. Shut it off.
Plan your trips to avoid unnecessary
stops.
Keep your tires inflated to the recom-
mended pressures.
When you drive on highways or dry
improved roads, set the drive mode-selec-
tor “2WD” or “4WD AUTO” position (if
so equipped).
For freeway driving, maintain a speed of
approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when
traffic, roadway and weather conditions
safely permit.
Keep your air filter clean and your vehicle
lubricated according to the recommenda-
tions in this manual.
Always keep your vehicle well main-
tained. A poorly maintained engine
wastes fuel and costs money.
Never overload your vehicle.
N00628900049
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent
causes of accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired
even with blood alcohol levels far below the
legal minimum. If you have been drinking,
don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab or a friend, or use
public transportation. Drinking coffee or tak-
ing a cold shower will not make you sober.
Similarly, prescription and nonprescription
drugs affect your alertness, perception and
reaction time. Consult with your doctor or
Driving precaution
WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
Avoid abrupt maneuvers and excessive
speed. Always buckle up.
Fuel economy
Driving, alcohol and drugs
Floor mat
Driving safety 6-3
6
pharmacist before driving while under the
influence of any of these medications.
N00628600046
The original equipment floor mat provided
with your vehicle was specifically designed
for your vehicle. Always properly position
the floor mat and assure it does not interfere
with operation of the pedals. Always use the
retaining clip on the driver’s floorboard to
secure the floor mat. When used, this clip will
help prevent the floor mat from moving for-
ward and possibly interfering with the opera-
tion of the pedals. To prevent the floor mat
from moving forward and possibly interfering
with the operation of the pedals, Mitsubishi
genuine floor mats are recommended.
N00628700047
1. Place the floor mat to fit the shape of the
floorboard.
2. Align the floor mat with the installation
holes over the retaining clips.
3. Secure the floor mat with retaining clips.
WARNING
NEVER DRINK AND DRIVE.
Your perceptions are less accurate, your
reflexes are slower and your judgment is
impaired.
Floor mat
To install the floor mat
NOTE
The shape of the mat and the number of
retaining clips may vary depending on the
vehicle model.
WARNING
If a floor mat is the wrong size or is not
properly installed, it can interfere with the
operation of the pedals. Interference with
the pedals can cause unintended accelera-
tion and/or increased stopping distances
resulting in a crash and injury. Always
make sure the floor mat does not interfere
with the accelerator or brake pedal.
Always use the retaining clip on the
driver’s floorboard to secure the floor
mat.
Always install the mat with the correct
side facing down.
Never install a second mat over or under
an existing floor mat.
Do not use a floor mat designed for
another model vehicle even if it is a
Mitsubishi genuine floor mat.
Before driving, be sure to check the fol-
lowing:
• Periodically check that the floor mat is
properly secured with the retaining clips.
If you remove the floor mat while clean-
ing the inside of your vehicle or for any
other reason, always check the condition
of the floor mat after it has been rein-
stalled.
• While the vehicle is stopped with the
engine off, check that the floor mat is not
interfering with the pedals by depressing
the pedals fully.
WARNING
Vehicle preparation before driving
6-4 Driving safety
6
N00629001855
For a safer and more enjoyable trip, always
check for the following:
Before starting the vehicle, make certain
that you and all passengers are seated and
wearing their seat belts properly (with
children in the rear seat, in appropriate
restraints), and that all the doors and lift-
gate are locked.
Move the driver’s seat as far backward as
possible, while still keeping good visibil-
ity, and good control of the steering
wheel, brakes, accelerator, and controls.
Check the instrument panel indicators and
multi-information display for any possible
problem.
In the same way, the front passenger seat
should also be moved as far back as possi-
ble.
Make sure that infants and small children
are properly restrained in accordance with
all laws and regulations.
Check these by selecting the defroster mode,
and set the blower switch on high. You should
be able to feel the air blowing against the
windshield.
Refer to “Defrosting or defogging (wind-
shield, door windows)” on page 7-8, 7-14.
Check all the tires for heavy tread wear or
uneven wear patterns. Look for stones, nails,
glass, or other objects stuck in the tread. Look
for any tread cuts or sidewall cracks. Check
the wheel nuts for tightness, and the tires
(including spare tire) for proper pressure.
Replace your tires before they are heavily
worn out.
As your vehicle is equipped with a tire pres-
sure monitoring system, there is a risk of
damage to the tire inflation pressure sensors
when the tire is replaced on the rim. Tire
replacement should, therefore, be performed
only by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer.
Have someone watch while you turn all the
exterior lights on and off. Also check the turn
signal indicators and high-beam indicators on
the instrument panel.
Check the ground under the vehicle after
parking overnight, for fuel, water, oil, or
other leaks. Make sure all the fluid levels are
correct. Also, if you can smell fuel, you need
to find out why immediately and have it
fixed.
N00629201150
Even this vehicle’s safety equipment, and
your safest driving, cannot guarantee that you
can avoid an accident or injury. However, if
you give extra attention to the following
areas, you can better protect yourself and
your passengers:
Drive defensively. Be aware of traffic,
road and weather conditions. Leave plenty
of stopping distance between your vehicle
and the vehicle ahead.
Vehicle preparation before
driving
Seat belts and seats
Defrosters
Tires
Lights
Fluid leaks
Safe driving techniques
Driving during cold weather
Driving safety 6-5
6
Before changing lanes, check your mir-
rors, blind spots, and use your turn-signal
light.
While driving, watch the behavior of
other drivers, bicyclists, and pedestrians.
Always obey applicable laws and regula-
tions. Be a polite and alert driver. Always
leave room for unexpected events, such as
sudden braking.
If you plan to drive in another country,
obey their vehicle registration laws and
make sure you will be able to get the right
fuel.
N00629401514
Check the battery. At the same time,
check the terminals and wiring. During
extremely cold weather, the battery will
not be as strong. Also, the battery power
level may drop because more power is
used for cold starting and driving.
Before driving the vehicle, check to see if
the engine runs at the proper speed and if
the headlights are as bright as normally.
Charge or replace the battery if necessary.
During extreme cold weather, it is possi-
ble that a very low battery could freeze.
Warm the engine sufficiently. After start-
ing the engine, allow a short warm-up
time to distribute oil to all cylinders. Then
drive your vehicle slowly.
Stay at low speeds at first so that the
transaxle, transfer case and rear axle oil
have time to spread to all the lubrication
points.
Check the engine antifreeze.
If there is not enough coolant because of a
leak or from engine overheating, add
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long
Life Coolant Premium or equivalent.
Please read this section in conjunction
with the “Engine coolant” on page 9-7.
N00629500491
All the parts of the brake system are critical
to safety. Have the vehicle serviced by an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice at regular inter-
vals according to the “WARRANTY AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.
Check the brake system while driving at a
low speed immediately after starting, espe-
cially when the brakes are wet, to confirm
they work normally.
A film of water can be formed on the brake
discs and prevent normal braking after driv-
ing in heavy rain or through large puddles, or
after the vehicle is washed. If this occurs, dry
the brakes out by driving slowly while lightly
depressing the brake pedal.
On snowy roads, ice can form on the braking
system, making the brakes less effective.
While driving in such conditions, pay close
attention to preceding and following vehicles
and to the condition of the road surface. From
Driving during cold weather
WARNING
The battery gives off explosive hydrogen
gas. Any spark or flame can cause the bat-
tery to explode, which could cause serious
injury or death.
Always wear protective clothes and a face
mask when working with your battery, or
let a skilled mechanic do it.
WARNING
Never open the radiator cap when the
radiator is hot. You could be seriously
burned.
Braking
When brakes are wet
When driving in cold weather
Parking
6-6 Driving safety
6
time to time, lightly depress the brake pedal
and check how effective the brakes are.
It is important to take advantage of the engine
braking by downshifting while driving on
steep downhill roads in order to prevent the
brakes from overheating.
N00629601402
When parking on a hill, set the parking brake,
and turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill, or away from the curb on an uphill.
If necessary, apply chocks to wheels.
Be sure that the parking brake is firmly set
when parked and that the selector lever is in
the “P” (PARK) position.
When parking on a hill, it is important to set
the parking brake before moving the selector
lever to the “P” (PARK) position. This pre-
vents loading the parking brake against the
transaxle. When this happens, it is difficult to
move the selector lever out of the “P”
(PARK) position.
Never leave the engine running while you
take a short sleep or rest. Also, never leave
the engine running in a closed or poorly ven-
tilated place.
Your front bumper can be damaged if you
scrape it over curbs or parking stop blocks.
Be careful when traveling up or down steep
slopes where your bumper can scrape the
road.
More effort could be required to turn the
steering wheel.
Refer to “Electric power steering system
(EPS)” on page 5-70.
Always remove the key from the ignition
switch and lock all doors and the liftgate
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Always try to park your vehicle in a well lit
area.
N00629900408
It is very important to know how
much weight your vehicle can carry.
This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the
weight of all occupants, cargo
(including the roof load), non-fac-
tory-installed options, if any, being
towed. The tire and loading informa-
tion placard located on the driver’s
door sill of your vehicle will show
When driving downhill
Parking
Parking on a hill
Parking with the engine run-
ning
WARNING
Leaving the engine running risks injury or
death from accidentally moving the selec-
tor lever or from the accumulation of toxic
exhaust fumes in the passenger compart-
ment.
Where you park
WARNING
Do not park your vehicle in areas where
combustible materials such as dry grass or
leaves can come in contact with a hot
exhaust, since a fire could occur.
Do not keep the steering wheel
fully turned for a long time
When leaving the vehicle
Loading information
Loading information
Driving safety 6-7
6
how much weight it may properly
carry.
It is important to familiarize yourself
with the following terms before load-
ing your vehicle:
Vehicle maximum load on the tire:
load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the maximum
loaded vehicle weight and divid-
ing by two.
Vehicle normal load on the tire:
load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal
occupant weight and dividing by
two.
Maximum loaded vehicle weight:
the sum of -
(a) Curb weight;
(b) Accessory weight;
(c) Vehicle capacity weight; and
(d) Production options weight.
Curb weight: the weight of a
motor vehicle with standard
equipment including the maxi-
mum capacity of fuel, oil, and
coolant.
Accessory weight: the combined
weight (in excess of those stan-
dard items which may be
replaced) of automatic transmis-
sion, power steering, power
brakes, power windows, power
seats, radio, and heater, to the
extent that these items are avail-
able as factory-installed equip-
ment (whether installed or not).
Vehicle capacity weight: the rated
cargo and luggage load plus
150 lbs (68 kg)* times the vehi-
cle’s designated seating capacity.
Production options weight: the
combined weight of those
installed regular production
options weighing over 5 lbs
(2.3 kg) in excess of those stan-
dard items which they replace, not
previously considered in curb
weight or accessory weight,
including heavy duty brakes, ride
levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
battery, and special trim.
WARNING
Never overload your vehicle.
Overloading can damage your
vehicle, adversely affect vehi-
cle performance, including
handling and braking, cause
tire failure, and result in an
accident.
Loading information
6-8 Driving safety
6
Normal occupant weight: 150 lbs
(68 kg)* times the number of
specified occupants. (In your
vehicle the number is 3)
Occupant distribution: Occupant
distribution within the passenger
compartment (In your vehicle the
distribution is 2 in front, 1 in sec-
ond row seat)
N00630100383
The tire and loading information
placard is located on the inside sill of
the driver’s door.
This placard shows the maximum
number of occupants permitted to
ride in your vehicle as well as “the
combined weight of occupants and
cargo” (A), which is called the vehi-
cle capacity weight. The weight of
roof load is included in the definition
of “cargo” when determining the
vehicle capacity weight. This placard
also tells you the size and recom-
mended inflation pressure for the
original equipment tires on your
vehicle. For more information, refer
to “Tires” on page 9-13.
N00630201251
1. Locate the statement “The com-
bined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s
placard.
2. Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
*:150 lbs (68 kg) is the weight of
one person as defined by U.S.A.
and Canadian regulations.
Tire and loading information
placard
Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit
Loading information
Driving safety 6-9
6
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For exam-
ple, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lbs. passengers in your vehi-
cle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) =
650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
of your vehicle.
NOTE
The above steps for determining
correct load limit were written in
accordance with U.S.A. regula-
tions.
Your vehicle cannot tow a
trailer, so step 6 is irrelevant.
Cargo loads
6-10 Driving safety
6
N00629700435
N00630301148
To determine the cargo load capacity for your
vehicle, subtract the weight of all vehicle
NOTE
The following table shows examples on how to calculate total cargo/load capacity of your vehicle with varying
seating configurations and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not
be accurate for the seating and load capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear axles
must not be exceeded. For further information on GAWR’s, vehicle loading, see the “Specifications” section of
this manual.
Cargo loads
Cargo load precautions
Cargo loads
Driving safety 6-11
6
occupants from the vehicle capacity weight.
For additional information, if needed, refer to
“Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit”
on page 6-8.
DO NOT USE the Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
ing and Gross Axle Weight Rating numbers
listed on the safety certification label (A)
located on the inside sill of the driver’s door
as the guide for passengers and/or cargo
weight.
N00630401178
WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious injury or
death, the combined weights of the driver,
passengers and cargo must never exceed
the vehicle capacity weight.
Exceeding the vehicle capacity weight will
adversely affect vehicle performance,
including handling and braking, and may
cause an accident.
Do not load cargo or luggage higher than
the top of the seatback. Be sure that your
cargo or luggage cannot move when your
vehicle is in motion.
Having either the rear view blocked, or
your cargo being thrown inside the cabin
if you suddenly have to brake can cause a
serious accident or injury or death.
Put cargo or luggage in the cargo area of
your vehicle. Try to spread the weight
evenly.
Loading cargo on the roof
WARNING
Weight placed on the roof of the vehicle
will raise the vehicle’s center of gravity
and adversely affect its handling charac-
teristics. As a result, driving errors or
emergency maneuvers could lead to a loss
of control and result in an accident. Drive
slowly and avoid excessive maneuvers
such as sudden braking or quick turning.
Make sure that the weight of luggage and
the roof carrier do not exceed the maxi-
mum roof load, 176 lb (80 kg). If the maxi-
mum roof load is exceeded, this could
cause damage to the vehicle or result in an
accident.
WARNING
The total weight of all occupants and lug-
gage, including your roof load, must not
exceed the vehicle capacity weight. For
more information, refer to “Tire and load-
ing information placard” on page 11-2.
Roof load is determined by adding the
weight of the roof carrier and the weight
of the luggage placed on the roof carrier.
For additional information, refer to
“Maximum roof load” on page 11-3.
CAUTION
Do not load luggage directly onto the roof.
Use a roof carrier that properly fits your
vehicle.
For installation, refer to the instruction man-
ual provided with the roof carrier.
Place the luggage on the carrier so that its
weight is distributed evenly with the heaviest
items on the bottom. Do not load items that
are wider than the roof carrier.
When attaching/removing the roof carrier
and loading/removing luggage, do not apply
excessive pressure on a single point.
Depending on how and where the force is
applied, this may cause dents on the vehicle
roof.
WARNING
Trailer towing
6-12 Driving safety
6
N00630601138
When installing the roof carrier, use the
brackets (A).
The brackets (A) are located under each cover
(B).
Slide each cover (B) toward the front of the
vehicle to remove it.
1. With each cover, put the tabs (C) on the
cover in the holes (D) in the roof.
2. Slide the cover (B) toward the rear of the
vehicle to install it.
N00629800306
Before driving and after traveling a short dis-
tance, always check the load to make sure it
is securely fastened to the roof carrier.
Stop the vehicle periodically and check that
the load remains secure. If the load is not
secure, it could fall from the vehicle and
damage your vehicle, another vehicle or cre-
ate a road hazard.
NOTE
To prevent wind noise or reduction in gas
mileage, remove the roof carrier when not in
use.
Before using an automatic car wash, check
with the attendant to determine if the roof
carrier should be removed.
Be sure that adequate clearance is main-
tained for raising the liftgate when installing
a roof carrier.
Roof carrier mounting brackets
(if so equipped)
CAUTION
Attaching the roof carrier
Refitting the covers
Trailer towing
Trailer towing
Driving safety 6-13
6
WARNING
Do not use this vehicle for
trailer towing. It may not be
possible to maintain control or
adequate braking.
7
Comfort controls
Vents ................................................................................................7-2
Automatic air conditioning-Type1 (if so equipped) ........................7-4
Automatic air conditioning-Type2 (if so equipped) ........................7-9
Important air conditioning operating tips ......................................7-15
Air purifier .....................................................................................7-15
General information about your radio ...........................................7-16
Vents
7-2 Comfort controls
7
N00729900249
N00730201409
Move the knob (A) to make adjustments.
To close the vent, move the knob (A) to the
inside as far as possible.
Move the knob (A) to make adjustments.
To close the vent, move the knob (A) to the
outside as far as possible.
N00736401780
To change the position and amount of air
flowing from the vents, turn the mode selec-
tion dial. Refer to “Mode selection dial” on
page 7-5, 7-11.
Vents
A- Center vents
B- Side vents
Air flow and direction adjust-
ments
Center vents
1- Close
2- Open
Side vents
Type 1
Type 2
1- Close
2- Open
NOTE
On rare occasions, air from the vents of an
air-conditioned vehicle may be foggy. This is
only moist air cooling suddenly and does not
indicate a problem.
Do not let drinks or other liquids get into the
vents as they could prevent the air condition-
ing from operating normally.
Changing the mode selection
Left Right
Vents
Comfort controls 7-3
7
These symbols are used in the next several
illustrations to demonstrate the quantity of air
coming from the vents.
: Small amount of air from the vents
: Medium amount of air from the vents
: Large amount of air from the vents
Air flows only to the upper part of the passen-
ger compartment.
Air flows to the upper part of the passenger
compartment, and flows to the leg area.
Air flows mainly to the leg area.
Air flows to the leg area, the windshield and
the door windows.
Face position
Foot/Face position
NOTE
With the mode selection dial between the
“ ” and “ ” positions, air flows mainly
to the upper part of the passenger compart-
ment. With the mode selection dial between
the “ ” and “ ” positions, air flows
mainly to the leg area.
Foot position
Foot/Defroster position
Automatic air conditioning-Type1 (if so equipped)
7-4 Comfort controls
7
Air flows mainly to the windshield and the
door windows.
N00731501366
N00711801796
N00736901277
When the ignition switch or the operation
mode is in ON, select the blower speed by
turning the blower speed selection dial.
Turning the dial clockwise will increase the
blower speed; turning the dial counterclock-
wise will decrease it. When the dial is set to
the “OFF” position, all fan-driven airflow
will stop.
NOTE
With the mode selection dial between the
“ ” and “ ” positions, air flows mainly
to the leg area. With the mode selection dial
between the “ ”and “ ” positions, air
flows mainly to the windshield and the door
windows.
Defroster position
Automatic air conditioning-
Type1
(if so equipped)
CAUTION
The engine speed may increase when the air
conditioning is operating.
With an increased engine speed, a continu-
ously variable transmission (CVT) vehicle
will creep to a greater degree than with a
lower engine speed. Fully depress the brake
pedal to prevent the vehicle from creeping.
Control panel
A- Temperature control dial
B- Air selection switch
C- Blower speed selection dial
D- Air conditioning switch
E- Mode selection dial
F- Electric rear window defogger switch
P.5-162
NOTE
There is an interior air temperature sensor
(G) in the illustrated position.
Never place anything over the sensor, since
doing so will prevent it from functioning
properly.
Blower speed selection dial
Automatic air conditioning-Type1 (if so equipped)
Comfort controls 7-5
7
N00737001549
Use this dial to adjust the temperature in the
passenger compartment. Turn the temperature
control dial clockwise to make the air
warmer. Turn it counterclockwise to make the
air cooler.
The above indicates the factory settings. You
can personalize the air selection switch and
air conditioning switch to match your per-
sonal preferences.
Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice for assistance.
Refer to “Personalizing the air conditioning
switch (Changing the function setting)” on
page7-7.
Refer to “Personalizing the air selection
(Changing the function setting)” on page7-6.
N00737101319
To change the amount of air flowing from the
vents, turn the mode selection dial. Refer to
“Changing the mode selection” on page 7-2.
NOTE
Due to a drop in the battery voltage or some
other problem, the blower speed may tempo-
rarily become less than the blower speed set
using the blower speed selection dial or the
fan may stop.
If the fan stops, turn the ignition switch to
the “OFF” position or set the operation mode
to OFF, wait a few minutes, and then turn the
ignition switch back to the “ON” position or
set the operation mode back to ON.
In the following cases, have the system
inspected by your authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
choice.
• The blower speed remains lower than the
blower speed set using the blower speed
selection dial or the blower speed decreases
frequently.
• The fan does not operate even after stop-
ping and restarting the engine, or the fan
stops frequently.
Temperature control dial
NOTE
While the engine coolant temperature is low,
the temperature of the air from the heater
will be cool/cold until the engine warms up,
even if you have selected warm air with the
dial.
When the temperature is set to the highest or
the lowest setting under the AUTO opera-
tion, the air selection and the air conditioning
will be automatically changed as follows.
• Quick Heating (When the temperature is set
to the highest setting)
Outside air will be introduced and the air
conditioning will stop. In this case, manual
operation is possible.
• Quick Cooling (When the temperature is set
to the lowest setting)
Inside air will be recirculated and the air
conditioning will operate. In this case, you
cannot select outside air and turn the air
conditioning off.
Mode selection dial
NOTE
Automatic air conditioning-Type1 (if so equipped)
7-6 Comfort controls
7
N00737201509
Normally, use the outside air position to keep
the windshield and side windows clear and to
quickly remove fog or frost from the wind-
shield.
To change the air selection, simply press the
air selection switch. A sound will be made
every time you press the switch.
Outside air {Indicator light (A) OFF}
Outside air is introduced into the passen-
ger compartment.
Recirculated air {Indicator light (A) ON}
Air is recirculated inside the passenger
compartment.
When the air conditioning turns on, the air
selection is controlled automatically. When
the air conditioning turns off, the air selection
automatically goes back to the outside air
position.
If high cooling performance is desired, or if
the outside air is dusty or contaminated in
some way, use the recirculation position.
Switch to the outside air position every now
and then to keep the windows from fogging
up.
N00760001103
You can change the following functions to
match your preference.
Enable automatic air control:
When the mode selection dial or the
blower speed selection dial is set to the
“AUTO” position, the air selection switch
will also be automatically controlled.
Disable automatic air control:
Even when the mode selection dial or the
blower speed selection dial is set to the
“AUTO” position, the air selection switch
will not be automatically controlled.
Changing the settings
Air selection switch
CAUTION
Using recirculated air for a long time may
cause the windows to fog up.
NOTE
If the mode selection dial is set between
“ ” and “ ”, you cannot turn the air con-
ditioning off or select the recirculation posi-
tion.
This prevents the windows from fogging up.
When the mode selection dial or the blower
speed selection dial is set to the “AUTO”
position again after manual operation, the air
selection switch will also be automatically
controlled.
Personalizing the air selection
(Changing the function setting)
Automatic air conditioning-Type1 (if so equipped)
Comfort controls 7-7
7
Press the air selection switch for about 10
seconds or longer.
When the setting has changed, the system
will beep and the indicator light will flash.
• When the setting has changed from
enabled to disabled, the system will beep
three times and the indicator will flash
three times.
• When the setting has changed from dis-
abled to enabled, the system will beep
two times and the indicator light will
flash three times.
N00737301513
Push the switch, and the air conditioning
compressor will turn on. The air conditioning
indicator light (A) will come on.
A sound will be made every time you push
the switch.
Push the switch again and the air condition-
ing compressor will stop and the indicator
light (A) goes off.
N00759800045
You can change the following functions to
match your preference.
Enable automatic air conditioning control:
When the mode selection dial or blower
speed selection dial has been set to the
“AUTO” position or when the tempera-
ture control dial has been set to the mini-
mum temperature, the air conditioning
switch is automatically controlled.
Disable automatic air conditioning con-
trol:
The air conditioning switch is not auto-
matically controlled, unless the air condi-
tioning switch is used.
Changing the settings
Press the air conditioning switch for about
10 seconds or longer.
When the setting has changed, the system
will beep and the indicator light will flash.
• When the setting has changed from
enabled to disabled,
the system will beep three times and the
indicator will flash three times.
• When the setting has changed from dis-
abled to enabled,
NOTE
The factory setting is “Enable automatic air
control”.
While the mode selection dial is set between
“ ” and “ ” position, the air selection
will automatically change to the outside air
position, even if the system is set to “Disable
automatic air control”, in order to prevent
windows from fogging up.
Air conditioning switch
NOTE
If a problem is detected in the air condition-
ing compressor, the air conditioning indica-
tor light (A) blinks. Press the air
conditioning switch once to turn it off, then
once more to turn it back on. If the air condi-
tioning indicator light does not blink there is
no problem. If it does blink, have it checked
at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
a repair facility of your choice.
Sometimes, for example after using a high-
pressure car wash, the condenser can get wet,
and the air conditioning indicator light (A)
blinks temporarily. Wait for a while, press
the air conditioning switch once to turn the
system off, then once more to turn it back on.
Once the water evaporates, the blinking will
stop.
Personalizing the air conditioning
switch (Changing the function set-
ting)
Automatic air conditioning-Type1 (if so equipped)
7-8 Comfort controls
7
the system will beep two times and the
indicator light will flash three times.
N00731701632
In normal conditions, use the system in the
AUTO mode and follow these procedures:
1. Set the blower speed selection dial to the
“AUTO” position.
2. Select the temperature control dial to the
desired temperature. The temperature can
be set within a range of around 61 to 89.
The temperature will increase as the dial
is turned to the right.
3. Set the mode selection dial to the
“AUTO” position.
The vents, recirculation/outside air, blower
speed, and ON/OFF of air conditioning will
be controlled automatically.
N00731800072
Blower speed and vent mode may be con-
trolled manually by setting the blower speed
selection dial and the mode selection dial to
the desired positions. To return to automatic
operation, set the dials to the “AUTO” posi-
tion.
N00732401652
To remove frost or mist from the windshield
and door windows, use the mode selection
dial (“ ” or “ ”).
NOTE
The factory setting is “Enable automatic air
conditioning control”.
While the mode selection dial is set between
“ ” and “ ” position, the air condition-
ing will run automatically, even if the system
is set to “Disable automatic air conditioning
control”, in order to prevent windows from
fogging up.
Operating the air conditioning
system (automatic mode)
NOTE
Set the temperature at approximately 75
under normal conditions.
While the engine coolant temperature is low,
the temperature of the air from the heater
will be cool/cold until the engine warms up,
even if you have selected warm air with the
dial. To prevent the windshield and windows
from fogging up, the vent mode will be
changed to “ ” or “ ” and the blower
speed will be reduced.
Operating the air conditioning
system (manual mode)
Defrosting or defogging (wind-
shield, door windows)
CAUTION
For safety, make sure you have a clear view
through all the windows.
Automatic air conditioning-Type2 (if so equipped)
Comfort controls 7-9
7
Use this setting to keep the windshield and
door windows clear of mist, and to keep the
leg area heated (when driving in rain or
snow).
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ”
position.
2. Select your desired blower speed by turn-
ing the blower speed selection dial.
3. Select your desired temperature by turn-
ing the temperature control dial.
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ”
position.
2. Set your blower to the maximum speed.
3. Set the temperature to the highest posi-
tion.
N00731501379
For ordinary defrosting For quick defrosting
NOTE
While the mode selection dial is set between
“ ” and “ ” position, the air condition-
ing compressor will run automatically. The
outside air position will also be selected
automatically.
If the mode selection dial is set between
“ ” and “ ” you cannot turn the air con-
ditioning off or select the recirculation posi-
tion. This prevents the windows from
fogging up.
To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the
side vents toward the door windows.
When defrosting, do not set the temperature
control dial to the maximum cool position.
This will blow cool air on the window glass
and fog it up.
Automatic air conditioning-
Type2
(if so equipped)
CAUTION
The engine speed may increase when the air
conditioning is operating.
With an increased engine speed, a continu-
ously variable transmission (CVT) vehicle
will creep to a greater degree than with a
lower engine speed. Fully depress the brake
pedal to prevent the vehicle from creeping.
NOTE
Automatic air conditioning-Type2 (if so equipped)
7-10 Comfort controls
7
N00711801800
N00736901280
When the ignition switch or the operation
mode is in ON, select the blower speed by
turning the blower speed selection dial.
Turning the dial clockwise will increase the
blower speed; turning the dial counterclock-
wise will decrease it. When the dial is set to
the “OFF” position, all fan-driven airflow
will stop.
Control panel
A- Temperature control dial
B- Air selection switch
C- Blower speed selection dial
D- Air conditioning switch
E- Mode selection dial
F- Electric rear window defogger switch
P.5-162
NOTE
There is an interior air temperature sensor
(G) in the illustrated position.
Never place anything over the sensor, since
doing so will prevent it from functioning
properly.
Blower speed selection dial
NOTE
Due to a drop in the battery voltage or some
other problem, the blower speed may tempo-
rarily become less than the blower speed set
using the blower speed selection dial or the
fan may stop.
If the fan stops, turn the ignition switch to
the “OFF” position or set the operation mode
to OFF, wait a few minutes, and then turn the
ignition switch back to the “ON” position or
set the operation mode back to ON.
In the following cases, have the system
inspected by your authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
choice.
• The blower speed remains lower than the
blower speed set using the blower speed
selection dial or the blower speed decreases
frequently.
• The fan does not operate even after stop-
ping and restarting the engine, or the fan
stops frequently.
Automatic air conditioning-Type2 (if so equipped)
Comfort controls 7-11
7
N00737001552
Use this dial to adjust the temperature in the
passenger compartment. Turn the temperature
control dial clockwise to make the air
warmer. Turn it counterclockwise to make the
air cooler.
The above indicates the factory settings. You
can personalize the air selection switch and
air conditioning switch to match your per-
sonal preferences.
Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice for assistance.
Refer to “Personalizing the air conditioning
switch (Changing the function setting)” on
page7-13.
Refer to “Personalizing the air selection
(Changing the function setting)” on
page7-12.
N00737101322
To change the amount of air flowing from the
vents, turn the mode selection dial. Refer to
“Changing the mode selection” on page 7-2.
N00737201512
Normally, use the outside air position to keep
the windshield and side windows clear and to
quickly remove fog or frost from the wind-
shield.
To change the air selection, simply press the
air selection switch. A sound will be made
every time you press the switch.
Outside air {Indicator light (A) OFF}
Outside air is introduced into the passen-
ger compartment.
Recirculated air {Indicator light (A) ON}
Air is recirculated inside the passenger
compartment.
Temperature control dial
NOTE
While the engine coolant temperature is low,
the temperature of the air from the heater
will be cool/cold until the engine warms up,
even if you have selected warm air with the
dial.
When the temperature is set to the highest or
the lowest setting under the AUTO opera-
tion, the air selection and the air conditioning
will be automatically changed as follows.
Also, if the air selection is operated manually
after an automatic changeover, manual oper-
ation will be selected.
• Quick Heating (When the temperature is set
to the highest setting)
Outside air will be introduced and the air
conditioning will stop.
• Quick Cooling (When the temperature is set
to the lowest setting)
Inside air will be recirculated and the air
conditioning will operate.
Mode selection dial
NOTE
Air selection switch
Automatic air conditioning-Type2 (if so equipped)
7-12 Comfort controls
7
When the air conditioning turns on, the air
selection is controlled automatically. When
the air conditioning turns off, the air selection
automatically goes back to the outside air
position.
If high cooling performance is desired, or if
the outside air is dusty or contaminated in
some way, use the recirculation position.
Switch to the outside air position every now
and then to keep the windows from fogging
up.
N00760000021
You can change the following functions to
match your preference.
Enable automatic air control:
When the mode selection dial or the
blower speed selection dial is set to the
“AUTO” position, the air selection switch
will also be automatically controlled.
Disable automatic air control:
Even when the mode selection dial or the
blower speed selection dial is set to the
“AUTO” position, the air selection switch
will not be automatically controlled.
Changing the settings
Press the air selection switch for about 10
seconds or longer.
When the setting has changed, the system
will beep and the indicator light will flash.
• When the setting has changed from
enabled to disabled,
the system will beep three times and the
indicator will flash three times.
• When the setting has changed from dis-
abled to enabled,
the system will beep two times and the
indicator light will flash three times.
N00737301526
Push the switch, and the air conditioning
compressor will turn on. The air conditioning
indicator light (A) will come on.
A sound will be made every time you push
the switch.
CAUTION
Using recirculated air for a long time may
cause the windows to fog up.
Personalizing the air selection
(Changing the function setting)
NOTE
The factory setting is “Enable automatic air
control”.
While the mode selection dial is set to the
“ ” position, the air selection will auto-
matically change to the outside air position,
even if the system is set to “Disable auto-
matic air control”, in order to prevent win-
dows from fogging up.
Air conditioning switch
Automatic air conditioning-Type2 (if so equipped)
Comfort controls 7-13
7
Push the switch again and the air condition-
ing compressor will stop and the indicator
light (A) goes off.
N00759800029
You can change the following functions to
match your preference.
Enable automatic air conditioning control:
When the mode selection dial or blower
speed selection dial has been set to the
“AUTO” position or when the tempera-
ture control dial has been set to the mini-
mum temperature, the air conditioning
switch is automatically controlled.
Disable automatic air conditioning con-
trol:
The air conditioning switch is not auto-
matically controlled, unless the air condi-
tioning switch is used.
Changing the settings
Press the air conditioning switch for about
10 seconds or longer.
When the setting has changed, the system
will beep and the indicator light will flash.
• When the setting has changed from
enabled to disabled,
the system will beep three times and the
indicator will flash three times.
• When the setting has changed from dis-
abled to enabled,
the system will beep two times and the
indicator light will flash three times.
N00731701645
In normal conditions, use the system in the
AUTO mode and follow these procedures:
1. Set the blower speed selection dial to the
“AUTO” position.
NOTE
If a problem is detected in the air condition-
ing compressor, the air conditioning indica-
tor light (A) blinks. Press the air
conditioning switch once to turn it off, then
once more to turn it back on. If the air condi-
tioning indicator light does not blink there is
no problem. If it does blink, have it checked
at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
a repair facility of your choice.
Sometimes, for example after using a high-
pressure car wash, the condenser can get wet,
and the air conditioning indicator light (A)
blinks temporarily. Wait for a while, press
the air conditioning switch once to turn the
system off, then once more to turn it back on.
Once the water evaporates, the blinking will
stop.
Personalizing the air conditioning
switch (Changing the function set-
ting)
NOTE
The factory setting is “Enable automatic air
conditioning control”.
While the mode selection dial is set to the
“ ” position, the air conditioning will run
automatically, even if the system is set to
“Disable automatic air conditioning control”,
in order to prevent windows from fogging
up.
Operating the air conditioning
system (automatic mode)
NOTE
Automatic air conditioning-Type2 (if so equipped)
7-14 Comfort controls
7
2. Select the temperature control dial to the
desired temperature. The temperature can
be set within a range of around 18 to 32.
The temperature will increase as the dial
is turned to the right.
3. Set the mode selection dial to the
“AUTO” position.
The vents, recirculation/outside air, blower
speed, and ON/OFF of air conditioning will
be controlled automatically.
N00731800098
Blower speed and vent mode may be con-
trolled manually by setting the blower speed
selection dial and the mode selection dial to
the desired positions. To return to automatic
operation, set the dials to the “AUTO” posi-
tion.
N00732401665
To remove frost or mist from the windshield
and door windows, use the mode selection
dial (“ ” or “ ”).
Use this setting to keep the windshield and
door windows clear of mist, and to keep the
leg area heated (when driving in rain or
snow).
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ”
position.
2. Select your desired blower speed by turn-
ing the blower speed selection dial.
3. Select your desired temperature by turn-
ing the temperature control dial.
1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ”
position.
2. Set your blower to the maximum speed.
3. Set the temperature to the highest posi-
tion.
NOTE
Set the temperature at approximately 25
under normal conditions.
While the engine coolant temperature is low,
the temperature of the air from the heater
will be cool/cold until the engine warms up,
even if you have selected warm air with the
dial. To prevent the windshield and windows
from fogging up, the vent mode will be
changed to “ ” or “ ” and the blower
speed will be reduced.
Operating the air conditioning
system (manual mode)
Defrosting or defogging (wind-
shield, door windows)
CAUTION
For safety, make sure you have a clear view
through all the windows.
For ordinary defrosting
For quick defrosting
NOTE
While the mode selection dial is set to the
“ ” position, the air conditioning com-
pressor will run automatically. The outside
air position will also be selected automati-
cally.
Important air conditioning operating tips
Comfort controls 7-15
7
N00733701418
1. Park the vehicle in the shade whenever
possible. Parking in the hot sun makes the
vehicle interior extremely hot which then
requires more time to cool. If it is neces-
sary to park in the sun, open the windows
for the first few minutes of air condition-
ing to expel the hot air.
2. Afterwards, keep the windows closed
when the air conditioning is in use. The
entry of outside air through open windows
will reduce cooling efficiency.
3. When running the air conditioning, make
sure the air intake, which is located in
front of the windshield, is free of obstruc-
tions such as leaves. Leaves collected in
the air-intake chamber may reduce air
flow and plug the water drains.
If the air conditioning seems less effective
than usual, the cause might be a refrigerant
leak.
Have the system inspected by your authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
of your choice.
The air conditioning should be operated for at
least five minutes each week, even in cold
weather. This includes the quick defrosting
mode. Operating the air condition system
weekly maintains lubrication of the compres-
sor internal parts to keep the air conditioning
in the best operating condition.
N00733800151
The air conditioning system is equipped with
an air filter to remove pollen and dust.
While the “ ” position is selected, you
cannot turn the air conditioning off or select
the recirculation position. This prevents the
windows from fogging up.
To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the
side vents toward the door windows.
When defrosting, do not set the temperature
control dial to the maximum cool position.
This will blow cool air on the window glass
and fog it up.
Important air conditioning
operating tips
NOTE
Air conditioning system refrig-
erant and lubricant recommen-
dations
CAUTION
The air conditioning system in your vehicle
must be charged with the refrigerant HFO-
1234yf and the lubricant PAG46A.
Use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will
cause severe damage and may require replac-
ing your vehicle’s entire air conditioning
system.
The release of refrigerant into the atmo-
sphere is not recommended.
The new refrigerant HFO-1234yf in your
vehicle is designed not to harm the earth’s
ozone layer. However, it may contribute
slightly to global warming.
It is recommended that the old refrigerant be
saved and recycled for future use.
During a long period of disuse
Air purifier
General information about your radio
7-16 Comfort controls
7
The air filter’s ability to collect pollen and
dirt is reduced as it becomes dirty, so replace
it periodically. For the maintenance interval,
refer to the “WARRANTY AND MAINTE-
NANCE MANUAL”.
N00733901579
Your vehicle’s radio receives both AM and
FM stations.
The quality of your reception is affected by
distance, obstacles, and signal interference.
This radio complies with Part 15 of Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules
(for vehicles sold in U.S.A.). Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
The device may not cause harmful inter-
ference.
This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesirable operation.
FM signals do not follow the earth surface
nor are they reflected by the upper atmo-
sphere. For this reason, FM broadcasts cannot
be received over long distances. AM signals
follow the earth’s surface and are reflected by
the upper atmosphere. For this reason, AM
broadcasts can be received over longer dis-
tances.
Because of the limited range of FM signals
and the way FM waves transmit, you may
experience weak or fading FM reception.
When the broadcast is blocked by mountains
or similar obstructions, reception can be dis-
turbed.
The reason why one can hear FM but not AM
in parking garages, under bridges etc., is that
FM signals, unlike AM signals, are reflected
by solid objects such as buildings, etc.
Because FM signals are easily reflected by
buildings, this can also cause reception dis-
turbances.
NOTE
Operation in certain conditions such as driv-
ing on a dusty road and frequent use of the
air conditioning can lead to reduction of ser-
vice life of the filter. When you feel that the
air flow is lower than normal or when the
windshield or windows start to fog up easily,
replace the air filter.
Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice for assistance.
General information about
your radio
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party meeting the above
conditions could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
Signal transmission
Weak reception (fading)
Reflection
FM AM
25 to 40 mile radius
(40 to 64 km)
100 mile radius
(160 km)
General information about your radio
Comfort controls 7-17
7
The direct signal from the broadcast station
reaches the antenna slightly before the
reflected signal. This time difference may
cause some reception disturbance or flutter.
This problem occurs primarily in urban areas.
If one listens to a weak station and is in the
vicinity of another strong station, both sta-
tions might be received simultaneously.
Stereo reception requires a high quality
broadcast signal. This means that types of
disturbances mentioned previously become
more marked and the reception range is
somewhat diminished during stereo recep-
tion.
FM reception is affected by the electrical sys-
tems of vehicles in the vicinity, especially
those without an electronic noise suppression
device. The disturbance is even greater if the
station is weak or poorly tuned.
FM reception is not as sensitive to electrical
disturbances as AM. AM reception is sensi-
tive to electrical disturbances such as power
lines, lightning and other types of similar
electrical phenomena.
Cross modulation
FM stereo reception
Causes of disturbances
8
For emergencies
If the vehicle breaks down ...............................................................8-2
If the operation mode cannot be changed to OFF
(vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key) ...................................8-2
Jump-starting the engine ..................................................................8-2
Engine overheating ..........................................................................8-4
Jack and tools ...................................................................................8-5
How to change a tire ........................................................................8-6
Towing ...........................................................................................8-12
Operation under adverse driving conditions ..................................8-13
Fuel Pump Shut-off System ...........................................................8-14
If the vehicle breaks down
8-2 For emergencies
8
N00836300187
If your vehicle breaks down on the road,
move to the shoulder and turn on the hazard
warning flashers. If there is no shoulder, or
the shoulder is not safe, drive in the right lane
slowly, with the hazard lights flashing, until
you come to a safe stopping place. Keep the
flashers flashing.
If the engine stops, there will be no power
assist to the steering and brakes, making these
difficult to use.
The brake booster will not work, so the
brakes will not grip well. The brake pedal
will be harder to press than usual.
Since there is no power steering assist, the
steering wheel will be hard to turn.
Get help from your passengers, bystanders,
etc. to push the vehicle and move it to a safe
zone.
N00860700061
If the operation mode cannot be changed to
OFF, perform the following procedure.
1. Move the selector lever to the “P”
(PARK) position, and then change the
operation mode to OFF.
2. One of the other causes could be low bat-
tery voltage. If this occurs, the keyless
entry system and the F.A.S.T.-key opera-
tion will also not operate. Contact an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
N00836401853
If the engine cannot be started because the
battery is weak or dead, you can start it with
the battery from another vehicle using jumper
cables.
1. Take off any metal jewelry such as watch
bands or bracelets that might make an
accidental electrical contact.
2. Position the vehicles close enough
together so that the jumper cables can
reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t
touching each other.
3. You could be injured if the vehicles move.
Set the parking brake firmly on each vehi-
cle. Put an automatic transaxle or CVT in
“P” (PARK) or a manual transaxle in “N”
(Neutral).
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
position or put the operation mode in
OFF.
If the vehicle breaks down
If the engine stops/fails
When the engine fails at the
intersection
If the operation mode can-
not be changed to OFF
(vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key)
Jump-starting the engine
WARNING
When using jumper cables to start a vehi-
cle, follow the procedures and be very cau-
tious.
CAUTION
Do not try to start your vehicle by pushing or
towing. Vehicles with automatic transaxles
cannot be started this way. Also, there is
more risk of an accident when a vehicle is
being pushed or towed.
CAUTION
Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-
volt battery. If the other system isn’t 12-volt,
both systems can be damaged.
Jump-starting the engine
For emergencies 8-3
8
5. Make sure your battery electrolyte is at
the proper level.
(Refer to “Battery” on page 9-10.)
6. Connect one end of one jumper cable to
the positive (+) terminal of the discharged
battery (A), and the other end to the posi-
tive (+) terminal of the booster battery
(B).
7. Connect one end of the other jumper cable
to the negative (-) terminal of the booster
battery (B), and the other end to the
engine block of the vehicle with the low
battery (A) at the point farthest from the
battery.
8. Start the engine in the vehicle providing
the boost. Let the engine idle a few min-
utes, then start the engine in the vehicle
with the low battery.
9. After the engine is started, disconnect the
cables in the reverse order from the way
you connected them.
WARNING
Perform step 4 on both vehicles before-
hand. Make sure that the cables or your
clothes cannot be caught by the fan or
drive belt. Personal injury could result.
NOTE
Turn off all lights, heater, and other electrical
loads. This will avoid sparks and help save
both batteries.
WARNING
If the electrolyte fluid is not visible, or
looks frozen, DO NOT ATTEMPT JUMP
STARTING!!
The battery might split open or explode if
the temperature is below the freezing
point or if it is not filled to the proper
level.
NOTE
Open the terminal cover before connecting
the jumper cable to the positive terminal of
the battery.
(Refer to “Battery” on page 9-10.)
Use the proper cables suitable for the battery
size.
Otherwise heat damage to the cables could
result.
Check the jumper cables for damage and cor-
rosion before use.
WARNING
Be sure to follow the proper order when
connecting the batteries, of:
Make sure that the connection is made
to the engine properly. If the connection is
directly made to the negative terminal of
the battery, the flammable gases from
inside the battery might catch fire and
explode, causing personal injury.
When connecting the jumper cable, do not
connect the positive (+) cable to the nega-
tive (-) terminal. Otherwise sparks can
make the battery explode.
CAUTION
Make sure that the jumper cable will not be
caught in the cooling fan or other moving
parts in the engine compartment.
Engine overheating
8-4 For emergencies
8
If you drive your vehicle with a low battery
charge after the engine has been started by
using jumper cables, the engine may misfire.
This can cause the anti-lock braking system
warning light to blink on and off. This is only
due to the low battery voltage. It is not a
problem with the brake system. If this hap-
pens, fully charge the battery and ensure the
charging system is operating properly.
N00836500352
When the engine is overheating, the informa-
tion screen in the multi-information display
will be interrupted and the engine coolant
temperature warning display will appear.
Also “ ” blink. If this happens:
1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Turn on
the hazard warning flashers.
2. With the engine still running, carefully
raise the engine hood to vent the engine
compartment.
3. Check that the cooling fan is running. If
the fan is not turning, stop the engine
immediately and contact an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-
ity of your choice for assistance.
4. If you see steam or spray coming from
under the hood, turn off the engine.
5. If you do not see steam or spray coming
from under the hood, leave the engine on
until the bar graph for the engine coolant
temperature warning display on the multi-
information display goes down. When it
is in the middle of the normal zone, you
can start driving again. If the bar graph
stays in the red zone, turn off the engine.
6. When you do not see any more steam or
spray, open the hood. Look for obvious
leaks, such as a split radiator hose. Be
careful as components will be hot. Any
leak source must be repaired.
7. If there is no obvious leak source, check
the coolant level in the engine coolant
reserve tank. If there is none, or if it is too
low, slowly add coolant.
WARNING
Charging your battery while it is still in
your vehicle might cause the battery to
catch fire and explode. If you have to
charge it while in the vehicle, disconnect
the negative (-) terminal.
Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away
from the battery because the battery could
explode.
Keep your work area well vented when
charging or using the battery in an
enclosed space.
Remove all the caps before charging the
battery.
Electrolyte (battery acid) is made of corro-
sive diluted sulfuric acid. If electrolyte
comes in contact with your hands, eyes,
clothes, or the painted surface of your
vehicle, thoroughly flush with water. If
electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them
immediately and thoroughly with water,
and get prompt medical attention.
Always wear protective clothing and gog-
gles when working near the battery.
Keep the battery out of the reach of chil-
dren.
As your vehicle has anti-lock
brakes
Engine overheating
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, keep hands, hair,
jewelry and clothes away from the cooling
fan. The cooling fan can start at any time.
WARNING
Before raising the engine hood, check to
see if there is steam or spray coming from
under the hood. Steam or spray coming
from an overheated engine could seriously
scald you.
Do not open the hood until there is no
steam or spray.
Jack and tools
For emergencies 8-5
8
8. If the engine coolant reserve tank needs
coolant, you will probably also need to
add coolant to the radiator. Do not loosen
or remove the radiator cap until the engine
has cooled down.
9. Start the engine, and slowly add coolant,
up to the bottom of the filler neck. Use
plain water if you have to (and replace it
with the right coolant as soon as possible).
10. Replace the radiator cap and tighten it
fully. Check the engine coolant tempera-
ture display on the multi-information dis-
play. You can start driving again when
the bar graph for the engine coolant tem-
perature display returns to the normal
zone.
11. Have the system inspected by your autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
facility of your choice.
N00836601448
The tools and jack are stowed in the luggage
compartment.
Before removing the jack, lift up the luggage
floor board.
WARNING
Removing the radiator cap could scald
you with escaping hot water or steam.
When checking the radiator level, cover
the cap with a cloth before trying to
remove it. Turn it slowly counterclock-
wise, without pressing down, to the first
notch. The pressure in the system will then
be let out. When the pressure is COM-
PLETELY LET OUT, press down and
keep turning the cap counterclockwise
until it comes off.
Jack and tools
Storage
1- Tools
2- Jack
Tools
1- Bar
2- Wheel nut wrench
Jack
How to change a tire
8-6 For emergencies
8
N00836901920
Before changing a tire, first stop your vehicle
in a safe, flat location.
1. Park the vehicle on level and stable
ground.
2. Set the parking brake firmly.
3. Move the selector lever to the “P”
(PARK) position, and stop the engine.
4. Turn on the hazard flashers and set up a
warning triangle, flashing signal light,
etc., at an adequate distance from the
vehicle, and have all your passengers
leave the vehicle.
5. To prevent the vehicle from rolling when
it is raised on the jack, place chocks or
blocks (A) in front of and behind the tire
that is diagonally opposite from the tire
(B) you are changing.
6. Get the jack, bar and wheel nut wrench
ready.
(Refer to “Jack and tools” on page 8-5.)
N00849600331
The compact spare tire is stowed beneath the
luggage floor board of the luggage compart-
ment. It is designed to save space in the lug-
gage compartment. Its lighter weight makes it
easier to use if a flat tire occurs.
How to change a tire
WARNING
The jack should not be used for any pur-
pose other than to change a tire.
Never get under the vehicle or put any
portion of your body under the vehicle
while it is supported by the jack.
WARNING
Be sure to apply chocks or blocks to the
correct tire when jacking up the vehicle. If
the vehicle moves while jacked up, the
jack could slip out of position, leading to
an accident.
NOTE
The chocks shown in the illustration do not
come with your vehicle. It is recommended
that you purchase chocks or blocks and keep
them in the vehicle for use if needed.
If chocks or blocks are not available, use
stones or any other objects that are large
enough to hold the wheel in position.
Spare tire information
Compact spare tire
WARNING
Tires, including spare tire, degrade over
time with age even when they are not
being used. It is recommended that tires
over 6 years generally be replaced even if
damage is not obvious.
CAUTION
While the compact spare tire is stowed, the
inflation pressure should be checked at least
once a month to assure that it remains at the
recommended inflation pressure. See the tire
and loading information placard attached to
the driver’s door sill. Refer to “Tire and load-
ing information placard” on page 11-2.
How to change a tire
For emergencies 8-7
8
N00849701397
1. Lift up the luggage floor board.
2. To remove the spare tire, remove the spare
tire pad (A), and then remove the installa-
tion clamp (B) by turning it counterclock-
wise.
N00849801503
1. On vehicles with wheel covers, first
remove the covers (refer to “Wheel cov-
ers” on page 8-11). Then, loosen the
wheel nuts with the wheel nut wrench. Do
not remove the wheel nuts yet.
2. Place the jack under one of the jacking
points (A) shown in the illustration. Use
the jacking point closest to the tire you
wish to change.
Driving with an improperly inflated tire can
cause an accident. If you have no choice but
to drive with an under-inflated tire, keep
your speed down and avoid sudden steering
or braking, if possible. Inflate the tire to the
correct pressure as soon as possible. Refer to
“Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-17.
The compact spare tire should be used only
temporarily. While the compact spare tire is
being used, the tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem will not function properly. Have the tire
replaced or repaired at an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
of your choice as soon as possible.
Do not go over 50 mph (80 km/h) when driv-
ing with the compact spare tire.
Avoid sudden starting and braking when
driving with the compact spare tire.
Do not drive through automatic car washes
and over obstacles that could possibly dam-
age the underside of your vehicle. Because
the compact spare tire is smaller than the
original tire, there is less clearance between
the ground and your vehicle.
Because the compact spare tire is designed
only for your vehicle, do not use it on any
other vehicle.
Do not put the compact spare tire on a differ-
ent wheel, and do not put standard tires,
snow tires, wheel covers or trim rings on the
compact spare wheel. Otherwise, you could
damage these parts or other parts on your
vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not use tire chains with your compact
spare tire. Using a chain could cause damage
to your vehicle and loss of the chains.
To remove the spare tire
NOTE
The clamp cannot be used for a normal size
tire. Store a normal size tire under the lug-
gage floor board.
CAUTION
To change a tire
How to change a tire
8-8 For emergencies
8
3. Rotate the jack by hand until the flange
portion (B) fits in the groove (C) at the top
of the jack.
4. Make sure that the flange portion at the
jacking point fits in the groove at the top
of the jack. Insert the bar (D) into the
wheel nut wrench (E). Then put the end of
the bar into the shaft’s jack end, as shown
in the illustration.
Slowly rotate the wheel nut wrench until
the tire is raised slightly off the ground
surface.
WARNING
Set the jack only at the positions shown
here. If the jack is set at a wrong position,
it could dent your vehicle or the jack
might fall over and cause personal injury.
Do not use the jack on a tilted or soft sur-
face.
Otherwise, the jack might slip and cause
personal injury. Always use the jack on a
flat, hard surface. Before setting the jack,
make sure there are no sand or pebbles
under the jack base.
NOTE
Put the spare wheel under the vehicle body
near the jack. This makes it safer if the jack
slips out of position.
WARNING
Stop jacking up the vehicle as soon as the
tire is raised off the ground. It is danger-
ous to raise the vehicle any higher.
Do not get under your vehicle while using
the jack.
Do not bump the raised vehicle or leave it
sitting on the jack for a long time. Both
are very dangerous.
Do not use a jack except the one that came
with your vehicle.
The jack should not be used for any pur-
pose other than to change a tire.
No one should be in your vehicle when
using the jack.
Do not start or run the engine while your
vehicle is on the jack.
How to change a tire
For emergencies 8-9
8
5. Remove the wheel nuts with the wheel nut
wrench, then take the wheel off.
6. Clean out any mud, etc. on the hub sur-
face (F), hub bolts (G) or in the installa-
tion holes (H) in the wheel, and then
mount the spare tire.
7. [Vehicle with the tapered nuts]
Install the wheel nuts with their tapered
ends facing inward, then tighten by hand
until the wheel is no longer loose.
[Vehicle with the flange nuts]
• Aluminium wheel
Temporarily tighten the wheel nuts until
their flange section comes in contact
with the wheel and it is no longer loose.
• Steel wheel
Install the wheel nuts with their tapered
ends facing inward, then tighten by hand
until the wheel is no longer loose.
Do not turn the raised wheel. The tires
that are still on the ground could turn and
make your vehicle fall off the jack.
CAUTION
Handle the wheel carefully when changing
the tire, to avoid scratching the wheel sur-
face.
WARNING
WARNING
Mount the spare wheel with the valve stem
(I) facing outward. If you cannot see the
valve stem (I), you have installed the
wheel backwards.
Operating the vehicle with the spare wheel
installed backwards can cause vehicle
damage and result in an accident.
How to change a tire
8-10 For emergencies
8
8. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire
touches the ground, by rotating the wheel
nut wrench counterclockwise.
9. Tighten the nuts in the order shown in the
illustration until each nut has been tight-
ened to the torque listed here.
65 to 80 ft-lb (88 to 108 N•m)
10. Lower the jack all the way and remove it.
11. Check the tire inflation pressure. The rec-
ommended tire pressure for your vehicle
is listed on the tire and loading informa-
tion placard attached to the driver’s door
sill as shown in the illustration. Refer to
“Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-17.
CAUTION
Never apply oil to either the wheel bolts or
the nuts or they will tighten too much.
NOTE
Flange nuts can be temporarily used on the
compact spare or steel wheel, but return
them to the original wheel and tire as soon as
possible.
If all 4 wheels are changed to steel wheels,
use tapered nuts.
CAUTION
Never use your foot or a pipe extension to
apply added force to the wheel nut wrench
when tightening the wheel nuts. If you do so,
you can over-tighten the wheel nuts and
damage the wheel, wheel nuts and hub bolts.
CAUTION
Driving with an improperly inflated tire can
cause an accident. If you have no choice but
to drive with an under-inflated tire, keep
your speed down and avoid sudden steering
or braking, if possible. Inflate the tire to the
correct pressure as soon as possible. Refer to
“Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-17.
After changing the tire and driving the vehi-
cle about 620 miles (1,000 km), retighten the
wheel nuts to make sure that they have not
come loose.
How to change a tire
For emergencies 8-11
8
N00850000162
Reverse the removing procedure when stor-
ing the flat tire or spare tire, jack, bar and
wheel nut wrench.
Refer to “To remove the spare tire” on page
8-7 and “Jack and tools” on page 8-5.
N00849400195
Wrap the tip of the bar with a cloth, insert it
deeply into the notch provided in the wheel
cover, and pry the cover away from the
wheel.
Using the same procedure at the other wheel
cover notches, work the wheel cover away
from the wheel to remove it completely.
1. Align the tire air valve (C) and the wheel
cover notch (D).
If the steering wheel vibrates when driving
after changing the tire, have the tire checked
for balance at an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
choice.
Do not mix one type of tire with another or
use a different size from the one listed. This
would cause early wear and poor handling.
To store the flat tire or spare
tire, jack, bar and wheel nut
wrench
CAUTION
Wheel cover (if so equipped)
To remove
NOTE
The wheel cover is made of plastic. Be care-
ful when prying it off.
CAUTION
Trying to remove the wheel cover with only
your bare hands can seriously injure your
fingers.
To install
CAUTION
Before installing the wheel cover to the
wheel, make sure that the tabs (A) on the
back of the wheel cover correctly engage the
ring (B) to prevent the wheel cover from
coming off. Do not install a wheel cover that
has broken tabs.
Towing
8-12 For emergencies
8
2. Push the bottom (F) of the wheel cover
into the wheel.
3. Gently push in both sides (G) of the wheel
cover and hold them in place with both
knees.
4. Gently tap around the circumference of
the wheel cover at the top (H), then push
the wheel cover into place.
N00837002039
If towing is necessary, we recommend you to
have it done by a commercial tow truck ser-
vice.
When towing is required, transport the vehi-
cle using a tow truck.
Incorrect towing equipment could damage
your vehicle.
There may be local regulations concerning
towing in your area.
Obey the regulations of the area where you
are driving your vehicle.
NOTE
Full wheel covers have a symbol mark (E)
provided on the reverse side to show the air
valve location.
Before installing the wheel cover to the
wheel, make sure that the opening with the
symbol mark is correctly aligned with the air
valve.
Towing
If your vehicle needs to be
towed
CAUTION
Do not attempt to be towed by another vehi-
cle with a rope.
NOTE
Do not use the tie-down hooks for towing.
These hooks are provided only for the pur-
pose of transporting the vehicle itself.
Your vehicle cannot tow any other vehicle.
Do not tow all-wheel drive vehicles
with this style.
Operation under adverse driving conditions
For emergencies 8-13
8
Release the parking brake.
Set the selector lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL)
position.
N00837200675
If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand,
or mud, it can often be moved by a rocking
motion. Rock your vehicle back and forth to
free it.
Do not rev the engine or spin the wheels.
Constant efforts to free a stuck vehicle can
cause overheating and transaxle failure. Let
the engine idle for a few minutes to cool the
transaxle before trying again.
If your vehicle is still stuck after several rock-
ing attempts, call for help.
Towing the vehicle by a tow
truck
CAUTION
This vehicle must not be towed by a tow
truck using sling lift type equipment (Type
A) as illustrated. Using a sling lift will dam-
age the bumper and front end.
This vehicle must not be towed with the driv-
ing wheels on the ground (Type B) as illus-
trated. This could result in damage to the
driving system.
Do not tow all-wheel drive vehicles with the
rear wheels on the ground (Type C) as illus-
trated. This could result in the driving system
damage or vehicle may jump at the carriage.
If you tow all-wheel drive vehicles, use only
Type D or E equipment.
All-wheel-drive vehicles cannot be towed
with only the front or rear tires on the ground
even if it is in “2WD” drive mode.
[For front-wheel drive vehicle equipped with
the active stability control (ASC)]
If the vehicle is towed with the ignition
switch in the “ON” position or the operation
mode in ON and only the front wheels raised
off the ground (Type C), the ASC may oper-
ate, resulting in an accident. When towing
the vehicle with the front wheels raised, keep
the ignition switch or the operation mode as
follows.
[Except for vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key]
The ignition switch is in “OFF” or “ACC”
position.
[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]
The operation mode is in OFF or ACC.
Towing a front-wheel drive vehi-
cle with front wheels off the
ground (Type C)
CAUTION
Operation under adverse
driving conditions
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
sand, mud or snow
WARNING
When trying to rock your vehicle out of a
stuck position, make sure that there are no
people nearby. The rocking motion can
make your vehicle suddenly lurch forward
or backward, and injure any bystanders.
Fuel Pump Shut-off System
8-14 For emergencies
8
When driving on a road covered with
snow or ice, use snow tires. Tire chains
cannot be used on your vehicle. There
may be state or local regulations about
using snow tires. Always check the regu-
lations in your local area before using
them. Refer to “Snow tires” on page 9-21
and “Tire chains” on page 9-21.
Drive slowly. Do not make sudden starts
or stops, sharp turns, or slam on the
brakes.
Allow extra distance between your vehi-
cle and the vehicle in front of you, and
avoid sudden braking.
If a skid occurs when the accelerator
pedal is depressed, take your foot off the
pedal. Steer gently in the direction of the
skid.
Your vehicle is equipped with an anti-lock
braking system (ABS). Hold the brake
pedal down firmly and keep it depressed.
Do not pump the brake pedal which will
result in reduced braking performance.
After parking on snowy or icy road, it
may be difficult to move your vehicle due
to freeze-up of the brake. Depress the
accelerator pedal little by little to move
the vehicle after confirming safety of the
vehicle.
Drive as slow as possible when driving on
bumpy, rutted roads or over potholes.
N00860600028
On wet roads
CAUTION
Avoid flooded roads. Water is often deeper
than it looks, and you could be seriously hurt
by driving into flood water.
When driving in rain, on water-covered
roads, or through a car wash, water could get
into the brake discs and make them fail tem-
porarily. In such cases, lightly press the
brake pedal to see if they are working prop-
erly. If they are not, press the pedal lightly
several times while driving to dry the brake
pads or linings, then check them again.
When driving in rain, a layer of water may
form between the tires and the road surface
(hydroplaning). This loosens your tires’ grip
on the road, making it difficult to steer or
brake properly. When driving on a wet road:
• Drive your vehicle at a safe speed.
• Do not drive on worn tires.
• Always keep the tires at the correct infla-
tion pressures.
On snowy or icy roads
CAUTION
Do not depress the accelerator pedal rapidly.
The vehicle could start moving when it
breaks free from the ice, possibly resulting in
an accident.
On a bumpy or rutted road
CAUTION
Driving on bumpy, rutted roads or over pot-
holes can damage the tires and wheels.
Wheels with low-profiles tires or under-
inflated tires are especially at risk for dam-
age.
Fuel Pump Shut-off System
WARNING
Before attempting to restart the engine
after a collision, always inspect the ground
under the vehicle for leaking fuel.
If a fuel leak is found or a fuel odor is
detected, do not restart the engine.
Fuel Pump Shut-off System
For emergencies 8-15
8
In the event of a collision causing frontal air-
bag deployment, the fuel pump shut-off sys-
tem will activate to stop fuel supply to the
engine.
Mitsubishi Motors recommends that your
vehicle be inspected by an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer after any colli-
sion.
WARNING
9
Vehicle care and maintenance
Service precautions ..........................................................................9-2
Catalytic converter ...........................................................................9-2
Engine hood .....................................................................................9-3
View of the engine compartment .....................................................9-5
Engine oil and oil filter ....................................................................9-5
Engine coolant .................................................................................9-7
Air cleaner filter ...............................................................................9-8
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid ............................9-9
Transfer oil (All-wheel drive models) .............................................9-9
Rear axle oil (All-wheel drive models) ...........................................9-9
Washer fluid .....................................................................................9-9
Brake fluid ....................................................................................9-10
Battery ............................................................................................9-10
Tires ...............................................................................................9-13
Brake pedal free play .....................................................................9-21
Parking brake .................................................................................9-21
Wiper blades ..................................................................................9-22
Emission-control system maintenance ..........................................9-22
General maintenance .....................................................................9-23
For cold and snowy weather ..........................................................9-24
Fusible links ...................................................................................9-25
Fuses ..............................................................................................9-25
Replacement of light bulbs ............................................................9-29
Vehicle care precautions ................................................................9-35
Cleaning the inside of your vehicle ...............................................9-35
Cleaning the outside of your vehicle .............................................9-37
Service precautions
9-2 Vehicle care and maintenance
9
N00937301560
Taking regular care of your vehicle will pre-
serve its value and appearance as long as pos-
sible.
You can do some of the maintenance work
yourself, and the rest should only be per-
formed by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
If you discover a malfunction or other prob-
lem, have it corrected by an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
of your choice.
This section describes the maintenance
inspections that you can do yourself, if you so
desire. Follow the instructions and precau-
tions for each procedure.
Have you purchased the Mitsubishi Motors
Diamond Care Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties.
See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
for details.
N00937400447
The catalytic converter requires you to use
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the emission-control effectiveness of
the converter.
Normally, the catalytic converter does not
require maintenance. However, it is important
to keep the engine properly tuned for the con-
verter to continue to work properly.
Service precautions
WARNING
When checking or servicing the inside of
the engine compartment, be sure the
engine is stopped and has had a chance to
cool down.
If you need to work in the engine compart-
ment with the engine running, be espe-
cially careful that your clothing, hair, etc.
does not get caught in the fan, drive belts,
or other moving parts.
After performing the maintenance work,
make sure that no tools or cloths are left
behind in the engine compartment.
If they are left behind, a fire or damage to
the vehicle may occur.
The fan can turn on automatically even if
the engine is not running. Turn the igni-
tion switch to the “OFF” position or put
the operation mode in OFF to be safe
while you work in the engine compart-
ment.
Do not smoke or allow open flames around
fuel or the battery. The fumes are flamma-
ble.
Be extremely careful when working
around the battery. It contains poisonous
and corrosive sulfuric acid.
Do not get under your vehicle while it is on
a jack.
Always use properly rated automotive
jack stands.
Handling your vehicle’s parts and materi-
als in the wrong way can injure you. Ask
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
or a repair facility of your choice if you
have questions.
WARNING
Catalytic converter
Engine hood
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-3
9
To reduce the possibility of catalytic con-
verter damage:
Use UNLEADED GASOLINE ONLY of
the type of recommended in “Fuel selec-
tion”.
Do not drive with an extremely low fuel
level. Running out of gas could damage
the catalytic converter.
Do not try to start the engine by pushing
or towing the vehicle. If the battery is
weak or run down, use jumper cables to
properly start the engine.
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug
wires disconnected or removed, such as
when performing diagnostic tests.
Do not idle the engine for a long time if it
is idling roughly or otherwise obviously
malfunctioning.
To prevent the catalytic converter from
being damaged from unburned gas, do not
race the engine when stopping the engine.
Stop driving the vehicle if you think the
performance is noticeably low, or the
engine has a malfunction such as with the
ignition, etc. If you are not able to stop
driving immediately, slow down and drive
for only a short time. Have your vehicle
checked at an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
choice as soon as possible.
In unusual situations involving major
engine problems, a burning odor may
indicate severe and abnormal catalytic
converter overheating. If this occurs, stop
in a safe place, shut the engine off and let
the vehicle cool. Once the engine is cool,
immediately take your vehicle to a dealer
or a repair facility of your choice for ser-
vice.
N00937501706
Use the engine hood release lever (located
under the instrument panel near the driver’s
door) to unlock the engine hood.
Pull the lever toward you to release the
engine hood latch.
CAUTION
Damage to the catalytic converter can result
if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating
condition. If the engine malfunctions or mis-
fires, or if your vehicle performance suffers,
have it serviced promptly. Running your
vehicle when it is overheated may result in
damage to the converter and vehicle.
WARNING
Do not park or run your vehicle in areas
where combustible materials such as dry
grass or leaves can come in contact with a
hot exhaust, since a fire could occur.
Do not put undercoat paint on the cata-
lytic converter.
Engine hood
To open
WARNING
Never use the release lever to unlatch the
engine hood while the vehicle is in motion.
Do not drive your vehicle unless the
engine hood is locked.
Engine hood
9-4 Vehicle care and maintenance
9
Release the lever and lift the engine hood.
Support the engine hood with the hood prop.
Insert the hood prop securely in the opening
under the hood marked with an arrow.
Unlatch the prop from the engine hood and
put it back in its retainer.
Slowly lower the engine hood approximately
8 inches (20 cm), then let it drop from its own
weight.
NOTE
To prevent damage to the engine hood and
wipers, make sure the wipers are at resting
position when you open the engine hood.
CAUTION
Always insert the support prop into the hole
specially made for it. Propping the engine
hood at any other place could cause the prop
to slip out and lead to an accident.
The hood prop can fall out if the hood is
lifted by a strong wind.
To close
CAUTION
Be careful not to trap your hands or fingers
when closing the engine hood.
Make sure the engine hood is firmly closed
before driving.
If you drive without the engine hood com-
pletely closed, it could open up while driv-
ing.
NOTE
If this does not close the engine hood prop-
erly, drop it again from a slightly higher
position.
Do not push down strongly on the engine
hood. Depending on how strongly or where
you push down, you could create a dent in
the vehicle body.
If you drive with the engine hood left open,
warning display is displayed on the informa-
tion screen in the multi-information display.
CAUTION
View of the engine compartment
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-5
9
N00937601824
N00937702109
It is normal for an engine to use oil. You may
need to add oil between the recommended oil
change intervals. Before starting the engine,
check the engine oil level. Refill if necessary.
To check the oil level, remove the dipstick,
wipe it off, and gently reinsert it all the way.
Slowly pull the dipstick straight out and
check the oil level by checking the upper sur-
face of the dipstick. The oil level must not go
above the line on the dipstick.
If the level does not reach the line which
shows the smallest amount of oil required,
remove the oil filler cap on the engine valve
cover, and fill to within the “Good” range.
View of the engine compart-
ment
1- Engine oil level dipstick
2- Engine oil filler cap
3- Air cleaner filter
4- Brake fluid reservoir
5- Windshield and rear window washer
fluid reservoir
6- Engine coolant reserve tank
7- Radiator cap
8- Battery
Engine oil and oil filter
To check and refill engine oil
NOTE
If it is difficult to verify the oil level, wipe
off the dipstick and reinsert it. Wait a
moment and then recheck the oil level by
checking the upper surface of the dipstick.
CAUTION
Overfilling will cause oil aeration and loss of
oil pressure, which could damage the engine.
WARNING
Used engine oil is poisonous, and can dam-
age your skin. Prolonged and repeated
contact may cause serious skin disorders,
including dermatitis and cancer. Do not let
used oil touch your skin and wash thor-
oughly after working with it.
Keep used oil out of the reach of children.
NOTE
Engine oil consumption is greatly influenced
by payload, engine speed, etc.
Good
Engine oil and oil filter
9-6 Vehicle care and maintenance
9
Mitsubishi Motors recommends using only
engine oils with the ILSAC certification sym-
bol on the front of the container.
If you cannot find oils with the ILSAC certi-
fication symbol, use an API classification SN
or higher oil with the following label.
This mark appears on the top of the oil con-
tainer and tells you two important things
about the oil.
Use engine oil with the proper thickness for
the outdoor temperatures where you will be
driving.
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 0W-20 Synthetic
Engine Oil is recommended for optimum fuel
economy and cold weather starting.
If Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 0W-20 Syn-
thetic Engine Oil is not available, 5W-20
grade oils displaying the ILSAC certification
can be used. However, Mitsubishi Motors
Genuine 0W-20 Synthetic Engine Oil should
be used at the next oil change to maintain
optimum fuel economy and cold weather
starting.
The oil filter should be replaced at the time or
mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.
Only use high quality replacement filters on
this vehicle. The manufacturer’s specifica-
tions for Genuine Mitsubishi oil filters
The engine oil will deteriorate rapidly if the
vehicle is subjected to severe conditions (for
example, repeated operation on rough roads,
in mountainous regions, on roads with many
uphill and downhill gradients, or over short
distances). Consequently, the oil will require
earlier replacement in accordance with the
schedule in the “WARRANTY AND MAIN-
TENANCE MANUAL”.
Engine oil identification mark
NOTE
ILSAC certification symbol
1- The upper part indicates the quality of
the oil.
2- The center part indicates the SAE grade
of the oil viscosity.
Recommended engine oil vis-
cosity
API service symbol
To replace the oil filter
Engine coolant
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-7
9
require that the filter can withstand a pressure
of 256 psi (1.8 MPa). A Genuine Mitsubishi
oil filter is the best replacement filter.
Follow the installation instructions printed on
the filter.
N00937800584
The engine coolant reserve tank (A) lets you
quickly see when you need to add coolant.
When the engine is cold, the level of the cool-
ant in the reserve tank should be between the
FULL and LOW marks. The radiator usually
stays full so there is no reason to remove the
radiator cap (B) except when you check the
coolant freeze point or replace the antifreeze
coolant.
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Coolant provides
excellent protection against corrosion and
rust formation on all metals, including alumi-
num, and prevents clogs in some parts of the
engine.
If you need to add coolant often, or if the
level in the reserve tank does not drop when
the engine cools, the cooling system should
be pressure-tested for leaks. Take your vehi-
cle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
or a repair facility of your choice for testing.
The radiator cap must be tight sealed to pre-
vent losing coolant, which may result in
engine damage. Only use a Genuine
Mitsubishi Parts radiator cap, or an approved
equivalent.
Engine coolant
To check the coolant level
FULL
LOW
To add coolant
Use “Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long
Life Coolant Premium” or equivalent*.
*:similar high quality ethylene glycol based
non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and
non-borate coolant with long life hybrid
organic acid technology
CAUTION
Do not use alcohol or methanol antifreeze or
any engine coolants that contain them. Using
the wrong antifreeze can corrode aluminum
parts.
The required concentration of anti-freeze dif-
fers depending on the expected ambient tem-
perature.
Above -31 °F (-35 °C) : 50 % concentration
of anti-freeze
Below -31 °F (-35 °C) : 60 % concentration
of anti-freeze
You can check the concentration level with a
gauge from an automotive supply store, or
your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
service station can check it for you.
Do not use water to adjust the concentration
of coolant.
Do not top off the tank with plain water only.
Water by itself boils at a lower temperature
and does not stop rust or freezing. If the
water freezes, it will damage your cooling
system. Do not use tapwater. It can cause
corrosion and rust.
Radiator cap
CAUTION
Air cleaner filter
9-8 Vehicle care and maintenance
9
Do not overfill the reserve tank.
Your vehicle uses a special radiator cap
that stays sealed and lets the coolant flow
from the reserve tank back to the radiator
when the engine cools down. If you need
to change the cap, use the exact same
kind.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radi-
ator with the proper gauge, and only when
it is safe. If you add antifreeze, the con-
tents of the reserve tank must be protected
against freezing.
Keep the front of the radiator and con-
denser clean.
If the engine coolant temperature does not
rise after the engine is warmed-up, take
your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
choice to have the thermostat checked,
and replaced if necessary.
N00937901537
The air cleaner filter will get dirty and dusty
from use and not filter properly. Replace it
with a new filter using the schedule in the
“WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE
MANUAL”.
1. Remove the upper cover and duct. For
details, refer to “Removing and installing
the upper cover and duct” on page 9-11.
2. While holding down the tab (A), pull out
the connector (B).
3. Unclamp the cover. Open up the top of the
cover and take out the air cleaner filter.
4. Replacing the air cleaner filter and put the
cover back on in its original position.
WARNING
Wait for the engine to cool down before
opening the radiator cap. Otherwise hot
steam or boiling coolant could spray up
from the radiator and scald you.
Points to remember
Air cleaner filter
NOTE
Genuine Mitsubishi Motors Parts are recom-
mended when replacing the air cleaner filter.
Make sure that the connector is properly
reconnected.
Type 1
Type 2
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-9
9
5. Put the duct and upper cover back on in its
original position. For details, refer to
“Removing and installing the upper cover
and duct” on page 9-11.
N00938101174
The continuously variable transmission
(CVT) should be maintained and serviced by
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice to obtain the
best performance and longest life. It is impor-
tant that the transmission fluid is kept at the
correct level.
Use only “Mitsubishi Motors Genuine
CVTF-J4” transmission fluid to ensure opti-
mum transmission performance.
Do not use any fluid additives to the trans-
mission.
N00938401294
Whenever the transfer oil level is checked,
add oil as necessary to maintain the proper
level. Fill or change the oil according to the
table.
N00915201282
Whenever the oil level is checked, add oil as
necessary to maintain the proper level.
Fill or change oil according to the table.
N00938601414
The windshield and rear window washer fluid
reservoir is in the engine compartment.
After replacing the air cleaner filter, make
sure that the hinges at the bottom of cover
are firmly set.
CAUTION
Take care not to scratch the engine air flow
sensor when removing the air cleaner cover.
Continuously variable
transmission (CVT) fluid
NOTE
Fluid type
CAUTION
Using the improper transmission fluid may
damage the transaxle.
Special additives
Transfer oil (All-wheel drive
models)
Fluid type
Lubricant
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine
Super Hypoid Gear Oil API
GL-5
Viscosity
range
SAE 80
Rear axle oil (All-wheel
drive models)
Fluid type
Lubricant
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine
Super Hypoid Gear Oil API
GL-5
Viscosity
range
SAE 80
Washer fluid
Brake fluid
9-10 Vehicle care and maintenance
9
Check the washer fluid level at regular inter-
vals and add washer fluid to reservoir if nec-
essary.
Open the reservoir cap and check the fluid
level with the dipstick.
When freezing weather is anticipated, flush
out the water in the reservoir by operating the
pump. Fill the reservoir with windshield anti-
freeze (not radiator antifreeze), and operate
the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual water.
N00938701372
The fluid level must be between the “MAX”
and “MIN” marks on the reservoir.
The fluid level falls slightly with wear of the
brake pads, but this does not indicate any
abnormality.
The fluid in the master cylinder should be
checked when doing other work under the
engine hood. The brake system should also be
checked for leaks at the same time.
If the fluid level falls markedly in a short
length of time, it indicates leaks from the
brake system.
If this occurs, have the vehicle checked by an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice.
Use the brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or
DOT 4. The reservoir cap must be tightly
sealed to keep dirt and water out.
N00939101966
The condition of the battery is very important
for quick starting and to keep the vehicle’s
electrical system working properly. Check the
battery regularly.
Brake fluid
To check the fluid level
FULL
EMPTY
Fluid type
MAX
MIN
WARNING
Take care in handling brake fluid as it is
harmful to the eyes, may irritates your
skin and will damage painted surfaces.
Wipe up spills immediately.
If brake fluid gets on your hands or in
your eyes, flush immediately with clean
water. Follow up with a doctor as neces-
sary.
CAUTION
Do not let any petroleum-based fluid touch,
mix with, or get into the brake fluid. This
will damage the seals.
Be careful when handling brake fluid. It can
damage painted surfaces.
Use only the listed brake fluid. Different
brands of brake fluid have different addi-
tives, and these can cause a chemical reac-
tion. Do not mix brands of brake fluid.
Keep the reservoir tank cap closed to keep
the brake fluid from evaporating.
Battery
Battery
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-11
9
If battery performance is suspect, have the
battery and charging system tested by an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice.
The electrolyte level must be between the
limits shown on the outside of the battery. Fill
it with distilled water as needed. The inside of
the battery is divided into several compart-
ments. Take the cap off of each compartment
and fill to the mark.
Do not fill above the top line because a spill
during driving could cause damage.
N00901301077
To replenish with the distilled water, remove
the upper cover and duct.
1. Remove the clips (A), and then remove
the upper cover (B).
2. Remove the clips (C), and then remove
the air duct (D).
NOTE
After replacing the battery, the electronic
control system data for the automatic trans-
axle, etc., will be erased.
As a result, shifting may be rough.
Shifting will become smoother after several
changes in speed.
Checking battery electrolyte
level
Removing and installing the
upper cover and duct
WARNING
Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
position or put the operation mode in
OFF.
Make sure that your clothes cannot be
caught by the fan or drive belt. Personal
injury could result.
To remove
Battery
9-12 Vehicle care and maintenance
9
1. Install the air duct (A), and then tighten
the clips (B).
2. Install the upper cover (C), and then
install the clips (D).
N00901600031
The battery is weaker in cold temperatures.
This has to do with its chemical and physical
properties and is why a very cold battery,
especially one with a low charge, will have a
hard time starting your vehicle.
It is recommended that you have your battery
and charging system checked by an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
facility of your choice before the start of cold
weather. If necessary, have it charged. This
will guarantee more reliable starting, and lon-
ger battery life.
N00901701156
To disconnect the battery cable, stop the
engine. Disconnect the negative (-) terminal
first, then the positive (+) terminal. To recon-
nect the battery, first connect the positive (+)
terminal and then the negative (-) terminal,
before starting the vehicle.
To install
NOTE
When refitting the clip, first insert part (E) of
the clip into the hole and then press part (F)
into it.
During cold weather
Disconnection and connection
NOTE
Open the terminal cover (A) before discon-
necting or connecting the positive (+) termi-
nal of the battery.
Loosen the nut (B) and then disconnect the
battery cable from the positive (+) terminal.
WARNING
Never disconnect the battery while the
engine is running, or you could damage
the vehicle’s electrical parts.
Never short-circuit the battery. This could
cause it to overheat and be damaged.
Tires
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-13
9
N00939201680
It is important to familiarize yourself
with the following terms:
Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away
from the battery because the battery could
explode.
Electrolyte (battery acid) is made of corro-
sive diluted sulfuric acid. If it spills on
nearby parts, it can crack, stain, or dis-
color them. And if it gets on your skin or
in your eyes, it can cause burns or blind-
ness. Please observe the following han-
dling instructions:
• If electrolyte gets on plastic parts or
other nearby parts, wipe it off with a soft
cloth or chamois soaked in a solution of
water and neutral detergent then imme-
diately rinse the affected parts with
plenty of water.
• If electrolyte gets on your hands or
clothes, rinse thoroughly with water. If
electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them
with water immediately and get immedi-
ate medical attention.
Open doors and windows in any closed
space where you may be charging or
working with the battery.
Always wear protective clothing and gog-
gles when working with the battery, or
have a skilled automobile technician do it.
If you are quick-charging your battery,
first disconnect the battery cables.
In order to prevent a short-circuit, be sure
to disconnect the negative (-) terminal
first, and reconnect it last.
WARNING
If the electrolyte level is very low, have the
battery checked at an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-
ity of your choice.
Battery posts, terminals and related acces-
sories contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash hands after handling.
NOTE
Check each battery terminal for corrosion.
You can stop more corrosion by washing
with a solution of baking soda and water.
Grease the posts and clamps after cleaning or
tightening them.
Check to see that the battery is securely
installed and cannot be moved. Also check
each terminal for tightness.
If you will not be driving your vehicle for a
long period of time, remove the battery and
store it in a place where the battery fluid will
not freeze. The battery only should be stored
with a full charge.
Before cleaning the battery, tighten all the
filler port caps to keep dirt and moisture out.
WARNING
Tires
WARNING
Driving with tires that are
worn, damaged or improperly
inflated is dangerous.
These type tire conditions will
adversely affect vehicle perfor-
mance.
These type tire conditions can
also cause a tread separation
or blowout which may result
in an accident causing serious
injury or death.
Tires, including spare tire,
degrade over time with age
even when they are not being
used.
It is recommended that tires
over 6 years generally be
replaced even if damage is not
obvious.
Tires
9-14 Vehicle care and maintenance
9
Cold tire pressure:
• The measured pressure after the
vehicle has been parked for at
least three hours, or
• The measured pressure when the
vehicle is driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after having been
parked for three hours.
Maximum pressure: the maximum
permissible cold tire inflation
pressure for this tire.
Recommended inflation pressure:
the inflation pressure for optimum
tire performance.
Intended outboard sidewall:
• The sidewall that contains a
whitewall, bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand,
and/or model name molding that
is higher or deeper than the same
molding on the other sidewall of
the tire, or
• The outward facing sidewall of
an asymmetrical tire that has a
particular side that must always
face outward when mounted on a
vehicle.
Passenger car tire: a tire intended
for use on passenger cars, multi-
purpose passenger vehicles, and
trucks, that have a gross vehicle
weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000
pounds or less.
Light truck (LT) tire: a tire desig-
nated by its manufacturer as pri-
marily intended for use on
lightweight trucks or multipurpose
passenger vehicles.
Tread: portion of a tire that comes
into contact with the road.
Tread rib: a tread section running
circumferentially around a tire.
Tread separation: pulling away of
the tread from the tire carcass.
Carcass: the tire structure, except
tread and sidewall rubber which,
when inflated, bears the load.
Sidewall: portion of a tire between
the tread and bead.
Section width: the linear distance
between the exteriors of the side-
walls of an inflated tire, excluding
elevations due to labeling, decora-
tion, or protective bands.
Bead: the part of the tire that is
made of steel wires, wrapped or
reinforced by ply cords and that is
shaped to fit the rim.
Ply: a layer of rubber-coated par-
allel cords.
Cord: the strands forming the plies
in the tire.
Rim: a metal support for a tire or a
tire and tube assembly upon which
the tire beads are seated.
Rim diameter: nominal diameter
of the bead seat.
Groove: the space between two
adjacent tread ribs.
Tire Markings
Tires
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-15
9
EXAMPLE: P215/65R15
EXAMPLE: 95H
Size Designation
P
Passenger car tire size based
on U.S.A. design standards
215
Section width in millimeters
(mm)
65
Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to sec-
tion width of tire.
R
Construction code
•“R” means radial construc-
tion.
•“D” means diagonal or bias
construction.
15 Rim diameter in inches (in)
NOTE
European/Japanese metric tire
sizing is based on European/Jap-
anese design standards. Tires
designed to these standards have
the tire size molded into the
sidewall beginning with the sec-
tion width. The letter “P” is
absent from this tire size desig-
nation.
Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) -metric tire
sizing is based on U.S.A. design
standards. The size designation
for LT-metric tires is the same as
for P-metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into
the sidewall preceding the size
designation.
Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are high
pressure compact spares
designed for temporary emer-
gency use only. Tires designed
to this standard have the letter
“T” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
Service Description
95
Load index
A numerical code associated
with the maximum load a tire
can carry.
NOTE
Tires
9-16 Vehicle care and maintenance
9
Maximum load indicates the maxi-
mum load this tire is designed to
carry.
Maximum Pressure indicates the
maximum permissible cold tire infla-
tion pressure for this tire.
The TIN may be found on one or
both sides of the tire but the date
code may only be on one side. Look
for the TIN on the outboard side of
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the
TIN is not found on the outboard side
then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD
1504
H
Speed symbol
A symbol indicating the
range of speeds at which a
tire can carry a load corre-
sponding to its load index
under certain operating con-
ditions.
The maximum speed corre-
sponding to the speed symbol
should only be achieved
under specified operating
conditions. (i.e. tire pressure,
vehicle loading, road condi-
tions and posted speed limits)
Maximum Load
WARNING
Overloading of your tire is
dangerous. Overloading can
cause tire failure, affect vehi-
cle handling, and increase
your stopping distance. Use
tires of the recommended load
capacity for your vehicle.
Never overload them.
Maximum Pressure
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
DOT
Department of Transporta-
tion
This symbol certifies that the
tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Trans-
portation tire safety stan-
dards, and is approved for
highway use.
MA
Code representing the tire
manufacturing location.
(2 digits)
L9
ABC
D
Code representing the tire
size. (2 digits)
Code used by tire manufac-
turer. (1 to 4 digits)
15
Number representing the
week in which the tire was
manufactured. (2 digits)
04
Number representing the
year in which the tire was
manufactured. (2 digits)
Tires
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-17
9
The treadwear grade is a comparative
rating based on the wear rate of the
tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-
half (1
1
/
2
) times as well on the gov-
ernment course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on speci-
fied government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high tempera-
ture can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C cor-
responds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehi-
cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades
B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by
law.
N00939301955
Proper tire inflation pressure is
essential for the safe and satisfactory
operation of your vehicle. The wrong
tire pressure will cause problems in
three major areas:
Safety
Too little pressure increases flex-
ing in the tire and can cause tire
failure. Too much pressure can
cause a tire to lose its ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the
road and potholes could then
cause tire damage that may result
in tire failure.
Economy
The wrong tire pressure can cause
uneven wear patterns in the tire
tread. These abnormal wear pat-
terns will reduce the tread life, and
the tire will have to be replaced
sooner.
Too little pressure also makes it
harder for the tire to roll, and this
uses up more fuel.
Treadwear, Traction and Temper-
ature Grades
Treadwear
Traction
Temperature
Tire inflation pressures
Tires
9-18 Vehicle care and maintenance
9
Ride comfort and vehicle stability
The superior riding experience
built into your vehicle partly
depends on the correct tire pres-
sure. Too much pressure gives an
uncomfortable and jarring ride.
Too little pressure feels as if your
vehicle is slow to respond.
Unequal tire pressures can make
steering your vehicle uneven and
unpredictable.
The tire pressure for your vehicle
under normal driving conditions is
listed on the placard attached to the
driver’s door sill.
(Refer to “Tire and loading informa-
tion placard” on page 11-2.)
The recommended inflation pres-
sures under normal driving condi-
tions should be used for the tires
listed below.
Tire pressures should be checked,
and adjusted if necessary, at least
once a month.
Pressures should be checked more
often whenever weather temperatures
change severely, because tire pres-
sures change with outdoor tempera-
tures. The pressures listed are always
“cold inflation pressure”.
Cold inflation pressure is measured
after the vehicle has been parked for
at least three hours or is driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after having
been parked for three hours.
Cold inflation pressure must not go
above the maximum values molded
into the tire sidewall. After driving
several miles, your tire inflation pres-
sure may increase 2 to 6 psi (14 to 41
kPa) from the cold inflation pressure.
Do not let air out of the tires to get
back to the specified cold pressure,
or your tires will be too low.
Check your tires each time you
refuel. If one tire looks lower than
the others, check the pressure for all
of them.
You should also take the following
safety precautions:
Keep your tires inflated to the rec-
ommended pressures. (See the tire
and loading information placard
attached to the driver’s door sill.)
Stay within the recommended
load limits.
Make sure that the weight of any
load in your vehicle is evenly dis-
tributed.
Item Tire size Front Rear
Normal
tire
P215/
70R16
240
kPa,
35 psi
240
kPa,
35 psi
P225/
55R18
230
kPa,
33 psi
230
kPa,
33 psi
Compact
spare
wheel
T155/
90D16
420 kPa,
60 psi
Tires
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-19
9
Drive at safe speeds.
After filling your tires to the cor-
rect pressure, check them for dam-
age and air leaks. Be sure to
reinstall the caps on the valve
stems.
N00939600241
N00939700141
The following maintenance steps are
recommended:
Check tire pressures regularly.
Have regular maintenance done
on the wheel balance and front
and rear suspension alignment.
Rotate your tires regularly as
described in the “Tire rotation”
section on page 9-19.
N00939800184
Tread wear indicators are built into the origi-
nal equipment tires on your vehicle to help
you know when your tires should be replaced.
Many states have laws requiring that you
replace your tires at this point.
These indicators are molded into the bottom
of the tread grooves and will appear when the
tire tread is worn down to 1/16 inch (1.6
mm).
When the bands appear next to one another in
two or more places, replace your tires.
N00939901531
To even out the wear on your tires
and make them last longer,
Mitsubishi Motors Corporation rec-
ommends that you rotate your tires at
the mileage listed in the “WAR-
RANTY AND MAINTENANCE
MANUAL”.
However, the timing for tire rotation
may vary according to your vehicle
condition, road surface conditions,
Replacing tires and wheels
CAUTION
Avoid using different size tires from the one
listed and the combined use of different
types of tires, as this can affect driving
safety.
Refer to “Tires and wheels” on page 11-5.
On all-wheel drive vehicles, always use tires
of the same size, same type, and same brand,
and which have no wear differences. Using
tires that differ in size, type, brand or the
degree of wear, will increase the differential
oil temperature, resulting in possible damage
to the driving system. Further, the drive train
will be subjected to excessive loading, possi-
bly leading to oil leakage, component sei-
zure, or other serious problems.
Only Mitsubishi Motors Authorized wheels
should be used, because your vehicle is
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem.
Use of another type of wheel risks air leaks
and sensor damage, as it will not be possible
to install the tire pressure sensor properly.
Tire maintenance
Tread wear indicator
1- Location of the tread wear indicator
2- Tread wear indicator
NOTE
Tire wear indicators can have different marks
and locations depending on the tire manufac-
turer.
Tire rotation
Tires
9-20 Vehicle care and maintenance
9
and your own personal driving hab-
its. Any time you notice unusual
wear, rotate your tires as soon as pos-
sible.
When rotating tires, check for
uneven wear, damage, and wheel
alignment. Abnormal wear is usually
caused by a wrong tire pressure,
wheels that are not aligned properly,
wheels that are out-of-balance, or
severe braking.
Check with an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of
your choice to find out the reason for
uneven tread wear.
The first tire rotation is the most
important one. It will allow all your
tires to wear evenly.
CAUTION
A compact spare tire can be
installed temporarily in place of
a tire that has been removed dur-
ing the tire rotation. However, it
must not be included in the regu-
lar tire rotation sequence.
Tires that do not have arrows showing
rotation direction
Front
Tires that have arrows showing rotation
direction
Front
If the tires have arrows (A) indi-
cating the correct direction of
rotation, swap the front and rear
tires on the left-hand side of the
vehicle and the front and rear
tires on the right-hand side of
the vehicle separately. Keep
each tire on its original side of
the vehicle. When installing the
tires, make sure the arrows point
in the direction in which the
wheels will turn when the vehi-
cle moves forward. Any tire
whose arrow points in the wrong
direction will not perform to its
full potential.
CAUTION
Front
Brake pedal free play
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-21
9
N00940001473
In some areas of the country, snow tires are
required for winter driving. If snow tires are
required in your area, you must choose snow
tires of the same size and type as the original
tires provided with your vehicle. Snow tires
should also be installed on all four wheels.
Otherwise your safety and vehicle handling
can be reduced.
Even where laws may permit it, never exceed
the maximum speed rating of the tire.
N00940100116
N00940301346
To check the brake pedal free play (A), turn
off the engine and press the brake pedal sev-
eral times with your foot. Then press the
pedal down with your fingers until you first
feel resistance.
Brake pedal free play:
.1 to .3 inch (3 to 8 mm)
If the free play is not within these limits, take
your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
choice for adjustment.
N00940401291
Check the parking brake lever travel occa-
sionally. To check this, pull the lever up
slowly and count the number of clicks of the
ratchet. You should feel the parking brake
grab between 6 to 7 notches (clicks).
(Parking brake adjustment when pulled with
the force of 200 N)
Also check to see if the lever stays gripped by
the ratchet after pulling.
CAUTION
Avoid the combined use of dif-
ferent types of tires. Using dif-
ferent types of tires can affect
vehicle performance and safety.
Snow tires
CAUTION
Only Mitsubishi Motors Authorized wheels
should be used, because your vehicle is
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem.
Use of another type of wheel risks air leaks
and sensor damage, as it will not be possible
to install the tire pressure sensor properly.
Tire chains
CAUTION
Tire chains cannot be used on your vehicle.
The clearance between the chains and the
body is not sufficient to allow proper clear-
ance, and the vehicle body might be dam-
aged.
Brake pedal free play
Parking brake
Parking brake lever stroke
Wiper blades
9-22 Vehicle care and maintenance
9
N00940700138
Check the wiper blades occasionally. Clean
them regularly to remove deposits of salt and
road film. Use a sponge or cloth and a mild
detergent or non-abrasive cleaner to clean the
blades and glass areas.
Replace the blades if they continue to streak
or smear.
If the blades are frozen to the windshield or
rear window, do not operate the wipers until
the ice has melted and the blades are freed,
otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged.
N00940800328
Your vehicle is equipped with an emission-
control system that meets all the requirements
of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
and Environment Canada. The emission-con-
trol system is made of:
a positive crankcase ventilation system
an evaporative emission-control system
an exhaust emission-control system
To be sure the emission-control system works
properly, have your vehicle inspected and
maintained by an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
choice. This should be done at the time or
mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.
These, and all the other “general” mainte-
nance services listed in this manual, need to
be performed to keep your vehicle running
properly and reliably.
You should also have an inspection and ser-
vice any time you suspect a malfunction.
N00940900228
Spark plugs must fire properly for good
engine performance and emission-control.
Do not reuse them by cleaning or regapping.
Change them at the mileage listed in the
“WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE
MANUAL”.
WARNING
Continued operation of the vehicle with
the parking brake lever out of adjustment
may result in the vehicle moving when
unattended.
Wiper blades
NOTE
Do not run the wipers on dry glass for a long
time. This wears out the rubber and can
scratch the glass.
During cold weather
Emission-control system
maintenance
NOTE
To meet government regulations and pro-
mote cleaner air, your vehicle is equipped
with an onboard diagnostic system (OBD).
The engine electronic control module that
controls OBD functions stores various data
(especially about the exhaust emissions).
This data will be erased if the battery cable is
disconnected, which could make a rapid
diagnosis difficult. Do not disconnect the
battery cable when the engine malfunction
indicator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or
“Check engine light”) is ON.
Spark plugs
NOTE
Use the spark plugs listed under “Engine
specifications” on page 11-4 or plugs that are
exactly the same. Other plugs could cause
engine damage, performance problems or
radio noise.
General maintenance
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-23
9
N00941000040
Check the hose surfaces for any heat and
mechanical damage, hard and brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts and abrasions. Pay spe-
cial attention to the hoses closest to high heat
sources such as the exhaust manifold. Check
all the hose connections, such as clamps and
couplings, to make sure they are secure and
that there are no leaks. If you see any wear or
damage, replace the hoses immediately.
N00950100050
Have the valve clearance checked at an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer at the
mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.
If the engine sounds abnormally loud, have
adjustments made by an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
N00941300173
Check these regularly for damage or leaks in
the fuel lines and connections. Check the fuel
tank filler cap for damage or looseness. Pay
special attention to the fuel lines closest to
high heat sources such as the exhaust mani-
fold.
N00941400187
If the fuel-vapor vent line is clogged or dam-
aged, the fuel-vapor mixture will escape, pol-
luting the air.
Have the system checked at an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer at the mileage spec-
ified in the “WARRANTY AND MAINTE-
NANCE MANUAL”.
N00941500247
The next pages list the maintenance service
recommended by Mitsubishi Motors Corpo-
ration. In addition to the general maintenance
that needs to be performed at the times listed,
there are other parts which do not usually
need regular maintenance.
But, if any of these parts stops working prop-
erly, your vehicle performance could suffer.
Have these items checked if you notice a
problem with them.
See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
for assistance, if you have any questions.
N00941600059
Good brakes are essential for safe driving.
Check the brake pads for wear. For good
braking performance, replace the brake pads
with the same type pads as the originals.
N00941700076
Brake hoses and tubing should be checked
for:
Severe surface cracking, scuffing or worn
spots. If the fabric casing of the hose is
showing through any cracks or worn spots
in the rubber hose cover, the hose should
be replaced. The brakes can fail if the
hose wears through.
Improper installation may cause twisting,
or wheel, tire or chassis interference.
Fuel hoses
Intake valve clearance
Fuel system (tank, pipe line and
connection, and fuel tank filler
cap)
WARNING
If you see a fuel leak or if you smell fuel,
do not run the engine. Any spark (includ-
ing from the ignition), flame or smoking
material could cause an explosion or fire.
Call an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice
for assistance.
Evaporative emission control
system (except evaporative
emission canister)
General maintenance
Disc brake pads
Brake hoses
For cold and snowy weather
9-24 Vehicle care and maintenance
9
N00941800077
Check the following parts for damage and
grease leaks:
Ball joint boots of the front suspension
and steering linkage
Bellows on both ends of the drive shaft
N00942200094
The best way to keep carbon monoxide gas
from entering inside your vehicle is to have
the engine exhaust system properly serviced.
Have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and nearby body areas
for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispo-
sitioned parts if you notice any of the follow-
ing:
A change in the sound of the exhaust sys-
tem
The smell of exhaust fumes inside the
vehicle
The underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged
Also check the exhaust system each time the
vehicle is raised for lubrication, oil changes,
or required service. Any open seams or loose
connections could let dangerous exhaust
fumes seep into the luggage compartment and
passenger compartments.
Check for holes or exhaust gas leaks
caused by corrosion or damage.
Check the joints and connections for
looseness or exhaust gas leaks.
Check the rubber hangers and brackets for
damage.
N00942500101
The hood lock release mechanism and hood
safety catch should be checked, cleaned, and
oiled when needed for easy movement and to
stop rust and wear. Use Multipurpose Grease
NLGI Grade 2 sparingly for all sliding parts
of the hood latch and release lever. Work the
grease into the hood lock mechanism until all
the movable surfaces are covered.
Also, put a light coat of the same grease on
the safety catch wherever moving parts touch.
N00942600102
The ventilation slots in front of the wind-
shield should be brushed clear after a heavy
snowfall so that the operation of the heating
and ventilation systems will not be impaired.
To prevent freezing of the weatherstripping
on the doors, engine hood, etc., they should
be treated with silicone grease.
It is a good idea to carry a shovel or a short-
handled spade in the vehicle during the win-
ter so that you can clear away snow if you get
stranded. A small hand-brush for sweeping
snow off the vehicle and a plastic scraper for
Ball joint, steering linkage seals
and drive shaft boots
Exhaust system
WARNING
Carbon monoxide gas from your vehicle’s
exhaust is poisonous. Breathing these
fumes can cause unconsciousness or death.
Check for any of the following
conditions:
Hood lock release mechanism
and safety catch
For cold and snowy weather
Ventilation slots
Weatherstripping
Additional equipment (For
regions where snow is encoun-
tered)
Fusible links
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-25
9
the windshield, side and rear window are also
useful.
N00942700305
The fusible links will melt to prevent a fire if
a large current attempts to flow through cer-
tain electrical systems.
In case of a melted fusible link, see your
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice for inspection
and replacement.
For the fusible links, please refer to “Fuse
load capacities” on page 9-26.
N00942800856
To prevent damage to the electrical system
from short-circuiting or overloading, each
individual circuit is equipped with a fuse. The
fuse blocks are located in the passenger com-
partment and in the engine compartment.
The fuse blocks in the passenger compart-
ment are located behind the fuse lid.
1. Insert a screwdriver into the notch of the
fuse lid and pry gently to remove it.
2. To put back the fuse lid, line up the fuse
lid hook (A) with the clamp (B) on the
instrument panel and push the lid back in.
Fusible links
WARNING
Fusible links must not be replaced by any
other device. Failing to fit the correct fus-
ible link may result in fire in the vehicle,
property destruction and serious or fatal
injuries at any time.
Fuses
Fuse block location
Passenger compartment
A- Main fuse block
B- Sub fuse block
Main fuse block
Fuses
9-26 Vehicle care and maintenance
9
In the engine compartment, the fuse block is
located as shown in the illustration.
N00954801485
This fuse list shows the names of the electri-
cal systems and their fuse capacities.
There are spare fuses in the fuse block cover
in the engine compartment. Always replace a
blown fuse with one of the same capacity as
the original.
Engine compartment
1- Push the lock lever.
2- Remove the fuse block cover.
Fuse load capacities
Passenger compartment fuse loca-
tion table
No.
Sym-
bol
Electrical system
Capac-
ity
1 Heater 30 A*
2
Stop lights
(Brake lights)
15 A
3 Rear fog light 10 A
Passenger compartment fuse location
Main fuse block Sub fuse block
4 Windshield wiper 30 A
5 Optional 10 A
6 Door locks 20 A
7 Radio 15 A
8 Control unit relay 7.5 A
9
Interior lights
(Dome lights)
15 A
10
Hazard warning
flasher
15 A
11 Rear window wiper 15 A
12 Gauges 7.5 A
13
Cigarette lighter/
Accessory socket
15 A
14 Ignition switch 10 A
15 Sunroof 20 A
16
Outside rearview
mirrors
10 A
17
All-wheel drive sys-
tem
10 A
18 Back-up lights 7.5 A
19 Accessory socket 15 A
No.
Sym-
bol
Electrical system
Capac-
ity
Fuses
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-27
9
*: Fusible link
Some fuses may not be installed on your
vehicle, depending on the vehicle model
or specifications.
The table above shows the main equip-
ment corresponding to each fuse.
20
Power window con-
trol
30 A*
21 Defogger 30 A*
22 Heated door mirror 7.5 A
23
Passenger’s power
seat
25
(20) A
24 Driver’s power seat
25
(20) A
25 Heated seats 30 A
No.
Sym-
bol
Electrical system
Capac-
ity
Engine compartment fuse location
table
No.
Sym-
bol
Electrical system
Capac-
ity
1 Front fog lights 15 A
2 Engine 7.5 A
3 Automatic transaxle 20 A
4 Horn 10 A
Engine compartment fuse location
Behind the fuse block cover
5 Alternator 7.5 A
6 Headlight washer 20 A
7 Air conditioning 10 A
8
ETV/Oil cooler fan
(Twin Clutch SST)
15 A
9 Security horn 20 A
10
Heated steering
wheel
15 A
11 — — —
12 Power gate 30 A
13
Daytime running
lights
10 A
14
Headlight
(high beam) (left)
LED
Halogen
Discharge
10 A
15
Headlight
(high beam) (right)
LED
Halogen
Discharge
10 A
16
Headlight
(low beam) (left)
Discharge
20 A
No.
Sym-
bol
Electrical system
Capac-
ity
Fuses
9-28 Vehicle care and maintenance
9
*: Fusible link
Some fuses may not be installed on your
vehicle, depending on the vehicle model
or specifications.
The table above shows the main equip-
ment corresponding to each fuse.
There are no 7.5 A, 25 A or 30 A spare fuses.
If a fuse of one of these capacities blows,
replace it temporarily by borrowing one of
the fuses indicated below.
7.5 A: 10 A spare fuse
25 A: 20 A spare fuse
30 A: 30 A audio amplifier fuse
Replace the borrowed fuse with a fuse that
has the correct capacity as soon as possible.
N00954901170
1. Before replacing a fuse, always turn off
the electrical item concerned to the fuse
and turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
position or put the operation mode in
OFF.
2. There is a fuse remover (A) in the engine
compartment fuse block.
17
Headlight
(low beam) (right)
Discharge
20 A
18
Headlight
(low beam) (left)
LED
Halogen
10 A
19
Headlight
(low beam) (right)
LED
Halogen
10 A
20 ENG/POWER 10 A
21 Ignition coil 10 A
22
ENG/POWER 20 A
Fuel line heater 25 A
23 Fuel pump 15 A
24 Starter 30 A*
25 Valve lift control 40 A*
26
Anti-lock braking
system
40 A*
27
Anti-lock braking
system
30 A*
28
Air conditioning con-
denser fan motor
30 A*
No.
Sym-
bol
Electrical system
Capac-
ity
29 Radiator fan 40 A*
30 IOD IOD 30 A
31 Audio amplifier 30 A
32 Diesel 30 A
33 — Spare fuse 10 A
34 — Spare fuse 15 A
35 — Spare fuse 20 A
No.
Sym-
bol
Electrical system
Capac-
ity
Identification of fuse
Capacity Color
7.5 A Brown
10 A Red
15 A Blue
20 A Yellow
25 A Natural (white)
30 A
Green (fuse type) /Pink (fusible
link type)
40 A Green (fusible link type)
Fuse replacement
Replacement of light bulbs
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-29
9
3. Clamp it on the fuse you wish to remove,
and pull the fuse straight out from the fuse
block.
4. Use the fuse location diagrams and the
matching tables, to check the fuse that is
related to the problem. If the fuse is not
blown, something else must be causing
the problem. Have the system inspected
by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
5. Insert a new fuse of the same capacity
securely into the appropriate slot.
N00942901447
Before replacing the bulb, be sure the light is
off. Do not touch the glass part of the new
bulb with your bare fingers; the oil from your
skin will stay on the glass and dim or destroy
the bulb when it gets hot.
B- Fuse is OK
C- Blown fuse
CAUTION
Never use a fuse with a capacity greater than
the one listed or any substitute, such as wire,
foil etc. This would cause the circuit wiring
to heat up and could cause a fire.
If the replacement fuse blows again after a
short time, have the electrical system
checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice to
find and correct the cause.
Replacement of light bulbs
CAUTION
Bulbs are extremely hot immediately after
being turned off.
When replacing the bulb, wait for it to cool
sufficiently before touching it. You could
otherwise be burned.
Do not install commercially available LED-
type bulbs.
Commercially available LED-type bulbs
could adversely affect the operation of the
vehicle, such as by preventing the lights and
other vehicle equipment from operating
properly.
NOTE
If you are unsure of how to carry out the
work as required, it is recommended that
these procedures be carried out by an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
facility of your choice.
Be careful not to scratch the vehicle body
when removing a light and lens.
Replacement of light bulbs
9-30 Vehicle care and maintenance
9
N00943001227
N00950302199
*: If so equipped
When it rains, or when the vehicle has been
washed, the inside of the lens sometimes
becomes temporarily foggy. This is the same
phenomenon as when window glass mists up
on a humid day, and does not indicate a func-
tional problem.
When the light is switched on, the heat will
remove the fog. However, if water gathers
inside the light, please have it checked by an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice.
Bulb location and capacity
CAUTION
When replacing a bulb, be sure to use a new
bulb of the same type, wattage, and color.
If you install a different bulb, the bulb could
malfunction or fail to come on and could
lead to a vehicle fire.
NOTE
Outside
Description
Watt-
age
ANSI
Trade
No. or
Bulb
type
1
Daytime running
light/Parking light
— —
2 Headlight, high beam — —
3 Front turn signal light 21W PY21W
4 Front fog light* — —
5 Headlight, low beam — —
6
Front side-marker
light
— —
7
Side turn signal light
(on fender)*
5 W —
Front
8
Side turn signal light
(on outside rearview
mirror)*
— —
NOTE
It is not possible to repair or replace only the
bulb for the side turn signal light.
Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice
when the light needs to be repaired or
replaced.
The following lights use an LED.
Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice
when any of these lights needs to be repaired
or replaced.
• Daytime running light/Parking light
• Headlight
• Front fog light
• Front side-marker light
• Side turn signal light (on outside rearview
mirror)
Description
Watt-
age
ANSI
Trade
No. or
Bulb
type
Replacement of light bulbs
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-31
9
N00950401832
*: If so equipped
N00901801274
Item
Watt-
age
ANSI
trade
No. or
bulb
type
9
High-mounted stop
light
— —
10 License plate light 5 W W5W
11 Back-up light — —
12 Tail light — —
13 Rear turn signal light 21 W WY21W
14 Tail and stop light — —
15
Rear side-marker
light
— —
16 Stop light — —
Rear
NOTE
The following lights use an LED.
Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice
when any of these lights needs to be repaired
or replaced.
• High-mounted stop light
• Back-up light
• Tail light
• Tail and stop light
• Rear side-marker light
• Stop light
Compartment
Item Wattage
1 Dome light (rear)* 8 W
2 Vanity mirror lights* 2 W
3
Dome light (front)/Reading
light
8 W
4 Cargo room light 5 W
5 Center console down light -
6 Glove compartment light 1.4 W
NOTE
The center console down light uses an LED.
Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice
when the light needs to be repaired or
replaced.
Headlights
NOTE
The headlights use an LED.
Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice
when the light needs to be repaired or
replaced.
Item Wattage
Replacement of light bulbs
9-32 Vehicle care and maintenance
9
N00943200121
The alignment of the headlights should be
checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
N00900301230
N00917301795
N00943401511
1. While holding down the tab (A), pull out
the socket (B).
2. Turn the socket (C) counterclockwise to
remove it.
3. Remove the bulb from the socket by turn-
ing it counterclockwise while pressing in.
4. To install the bulb, perform the removal
steps in reverse.
N00943501150
Adjustment of headlight aim
Daytime running lights/parking
lights
NOTE
The daytime running lights/parking lights
use an LED.
Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice
when the light needs to be repaired or
replaced.
Front side-marker lights
NOTE
The front side-marker lights use an LED.
Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice
when the light needs to be repaired or
replaced.
Front turn signal lights
*- Front of the vehicle
*- Front of the vehicle
Side turn signal lights (on
fender) (if so equipped)
NOTE
It is not possible to repair or replace only the
bulb for the side turn signal light.
Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice
when the light needs to be repaired or
replaced.
Replacement of light bulbs
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-33
9
N00943501222
N00943602028
N00943701657
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver with a cloth
over its tip into the notch of the cover (A),
and then pry gently as shown to remove it.
3. Remove the screws (B) that hold the light
unit and remove the light unit.
4. Turn the socket and bulb assembly coun-
terclockwise to remove it.
5. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
Side turn signal lights (on out-
side rearview mirror) (if so
equipped)
NOTE
The side turn signal lights (on outside rear-
view mirror) use an LED.
Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice
when the light needs to be repaired or
replaced.
Front fog lights (if so equipped)
NOTE
The front fog lights use an LED.
Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice
when the light needs to be repaired or
replaced.
Rear combination lights
C- Rear side-marker light, stop light, and
tail and stop light (LED)
- cannot be replaced
D- Rear turn signal light
NOTE
The rear side-marker lights, stop lights, and
the tail and stop lights use an LED.
Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice
when the light needs to be repaired or
replaced.
Replacement of light bulbs
9-34 Vehicle care and maintenance
9
6. To install the bulb, perform the removal
steps in reverse.
N00956100023
N00929101107
N00944000386
1. When removing the light unit (A), push it
toward the left side of the vehicle body.
2. Remove the socket (B) and bulb assembly
by turning it counterclockwise.
NOTE
When mounting the light unit, align the
groove (E) on the light unit with the clip on
the body and the pin (F) on the unit with the
hole in the body.
Tail lights
NOTE
The tail lights use an LED.
Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice
when the light needs to be repaired or
replaced.
Back-up lights
NOTE
The back-up lights use an LED.
Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice
when the light needs to be repaired or
replaced.
License plate lights
Vehicle care precautions
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-35
9
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
4. To install the bulb, perform the removal
steps in reverse.
N00943901183
N00945100166
In order to maintain the value of your vehicle,
perform regular maintenance using the proper
materials and procedures. Be sure to use only
those materials and procedures that meet your
local environmental pollution control regula-
tions. Choose the materials you will use care-
fully, to be sure that they do not contain
corrosives. If you are not sure, contact an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for help
in choosing these materials.
These can all be dangerous, and they all can
damage your vehicle.
N00945200095
After washing the inside of your vehicle with
any cleaner, wipe it dry in a shady, well venti-
lated area.
NOTE
When mounting the light unit, insert tab (C)
first then align tab (D) with its hole.
High-mounted stop light
NOTE
The high-mounted stop light uses an LED.
Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice
when the light needs to be repaired or
replaced.
Vehicle care precautions
CAUTION
Cleaning products can be dangerous. Some
are poisonous and others are highly flamma-
ble. Some are dangerous if you breathe their
fumes in a closed space. When you use any-
thing in a container to clean your vehicle, be
sure to follow the instructions. Always open
your vehicle doors or windows when you’re
cleaning the inside. Never use the following
chemicals to clean your vehicle:
• Gasoline
• Carbon Tetrachloride
• Benzine
• Kerosene
• Naphtha
• Acetone
• Turpentine
• Paint Thinner
• Lacquer Thinner
• Nail Polish Remover
Cleaning the inside of your
vehicle
Cleaning the inside of your vehicle
9-36 Vehicle care and maintenance
9
N00945300142
1. Lightly wipe these off with a soft cloth
soaked in a 3% solution of gentle soap
and water.
2. To rinse, dip the cloth in fresh water,
wring it out well, and wipe off all the
soap.
N00945500128
1. To maintain the value of your new vehi-
cle, maintain the upholstery carefully and
keep the interior clean.
Use a vacuum cleaner and brush to clean
the seats. If stained, vinyl and synthetic
leather should be cleaned with an appro-
priate cleaner. Cloth fabrics can be
cleaned with either upholstery cleaner or a
3% solution of gentle soap in lukewarm
water.
2. Clean the carpeting with a vacuum
cleaner and remove any stains with carpet
cleaner. Oil and grease can be removed by
lightly dabbing with a clean white cloth
and spot remover.
N00945600187
1. To clean, lightly wipe the leather with a
soft cloth soaked in a 5% solution of gen-
tle soap and water.
2. To rinse, dip the cloth in fresh water,
wring it out well, and wipe off all the
soap.
3. To preserve and protect, use a leather pro-
tecting agent on the genuine leather sur-
face.
CAUTION
Do not use organic substances (solvents,
benzine, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline, etc.) or
alkaline or acidic solutions.
These chemicals can cause discoloring,
staining or cracking of the surface.
If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make
sure their ingredients do not include the sub-
stances mentioned above.
NOTE
Always read the instructions on the cleaner
label.
Plastic, vinyl leather, fabric and
flocked parts
NOTE
Do not use cleaners, conditioners, and pro-
tectants containing silicones or wax.
Such products, when applied to the instru-
ment panels or other parts, may cause reflec-
tions on the windshield and obscure vision.
Also, if such products get on the switches of
the electrical accessories, it may lead to fail-
ure of these accessories.
Upholstery
NOTE
If fuzzing is difficult to remove from the seat
upholstery, draw a suitable defuzzing brush
over the surface in one direction.
Genuine leather (if so equipped)
NOTE
If genuine leather is wet with water, wipe it
with a dry, soft cloth. If left damp, mildew
may grow.
The genuine leather surface can be damaged
if brushed with a nylon or synthetic fiber
brush.
Organic solvents such as benzine, kerosene,
alcohol, gasoline, or acid or alkaline solvents
can discolor the genuine leather surface and
should not be used.
Genuine leather can mildew if not kept
clean. Clean up any oil stains immediately.
Cleaning the outside of your vehicle
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-37
9
N00945700058
To protect your vehicle’s finish, wash it often
and thoroughly. If desired, you may wax your
vehicle using a nonabrasive automobile wax.
N00945800033
Industrial pollution, road tar, bird droppings,
tree sap, insect remains, sea water and other
foreign matters can damage the finish on your
vehicle.
Generally, the longer any foreign material
stays on the finish, the worse the damage.
Wash your vehicle as soon as possible when-
ever the finish gets soiled.
N00945901682
Chemicals contained in the dirt and dust
picked up from air, rain, snow, or road sur-
faces can damage the paint and body of your
vehicle if left on.
Frequent washing and waxing is the best way
to protect your vehicle from this damage.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
Park the vehicle in the shade and spray it with
water to remove dust. Next, using plenty of
clean water and a car washing mitt or sponge,
wash the vehicle from top to bottom.
Use a mild car washing soap if necessary.
Rinse thoroughly and wipe dry with a cham-
ois or soft cloth. After washing the vehicle,
carefully clean the joints and flanges of the
doors, hood, etc., where dirt is likely to
remain.
The genuine leather surface may harden and
shrink if it is exposed to the direct sunlight
for long hours. When your vehicle is parked,
place it in the shade as much as possible.
When the temperature of the vehicle interior
rises in summer, vinyl products left on the
genuine leather seat may deteriorate and
stick to the seat.
Cleaning the outside of your
vehicle
Foreign material
NOTE
Washing
CAUTION
When washing the underside of your vehicle
or the wheels, wear a pair of gloves to pro-
tect your hands.
If your vehicle has rain sensor wipers, place
the wiper switch lever in the “OFF” position
to deactivate the rain sensor before washing
the vehicle. Otherwise, the wipers will oper-
ate in the presence of water spray on the
windshield and may get damaged as a result.
Never spray or splash water on the electrical
parts in the engine compartment. This may
damage them. Be careful also when washing
the underbody to ensure that water does not
enter the engine compartment.
Avoid automatic car washers that use rotat-
ing brushes. These brushes may scratch the
paint surface and make it dull.
Scratches are more noticeable on darker col-
ored vehicles.
Some hot water washing equipment uses
high pressure and heat to clean your vehicle.
Because hot water can damage plastics parts
and seep inside your vehicle, make sure you
do the following when using such equip-
ment:
• Keep the washing nozzle at least 28 inches
(70 cm) away from the vehicle body.
• When washing around the door glass, hold
the nozzle at a distance of more than 28
inches (70 cm) and at a right angle to the
glass surface.
Make sure to do the following when using an
automatic car wash, with help from either
this manual or the car wash operator, to
avoid damaging your vehicle:
• Fold the outside rearview mirrors.
• Tape the wiper arm assembly.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a rear
spoiler or roof rails, check with the car
wash operator before using the car wash.
CAUTION
Cleaning the outside of your vehicle
9-38 Vehicle care and maintenance
9
Salt and other chemicals spread on winter
roads in some geographical areas can have a
detrimental effect on the vehicle underbody.
You should flush the underbody with a high
pressure hose every time you wash the out-
side of your vehicle.
Take special care to remove mud or other
debris which could trap and hold salt and
moisture.
After washing your vehicle, wipe off all
waterdrops from the rubber parts around the
doors to prevent the doors from freezing.
N00946000234
Wax your vehicle once or twice a year, or
when water does not bead up on the paint.
Use a soft cloth to put a small amount of wax
on the painted surfaces. After the wax has
dried, polish with a dry soft cloth.
Do not wax your vehicle in direct sunlight.
You should wax when the painted surfaces
are cool.
N00946100046
If painted surfaces have been severely dam-
aged and lost their original luster and color
tone, polish the surface lightly with a fine
polishing compound. Avoid limiting your
polishing to the damaged surface only; polish
a somewhat wider area, moving the polishing
cloth in one direction. After polishing, flush
the compound from the surface and apply a
coat of wax to regain a beautiful luster.
N00946200047
Small cracks and scratches in the paint coat
should be touched up as soon as possible with
touch-up paint to prevent corrosion.
Check body areas facing the road or the tires
carefully for damage to the paint caused by
flying stones, etc. The paint code number for
your vehicle can be found on the vehicle
information code plate in the engine compart-
ment.
N00946300194
Use a sponge or chamois to clean these parts.
If a vehicle wax sticks to a gray or black
rough surface of the bumper, molding or
lights, the surface may appear white in color.
• If your vehicle is equipped with the rain
sensor wipers, place the wiper switch lever
in the “OFF” position to deactivate the rain
sensor.
During cold weather
NOTE
When the door is frozen, opening it by force
may tear off or crack the rubber gasket
installed around the door. Pour warm water
to melt the ice. Be sure to thoroughly wipe
off the water after opening the door. To pre-
vent freezing of the weatherstripping on the
doors, hood, etc., treat with silicone lubri-
cant.
CAUTION
Waxing
CAUTION
Waxes containing high abrasive compounds
should not be used. These waxes remove rust
and stain effectively from the paintwork, but
are harmful to the finish of the paint, because
they also remove paint/clearcoat.
They are also harmful to other glossy sur-
faces such as the grille, trim, moldings, etc.
Do not use gasoline, benzine, kerosene or
paint thinners to remove road tar or other dirt
from the vehicle surface.
Do not put wax on the areas having black
matte coating because it can cause uneven
discoloration, patches, blurs, etc. If these get
wax on them, wipe the wax off right away
with a soft cloth and warm water.
Polishing
Damaged paint
Cleaning plastic parts
Cleaning the outside of your vehicle
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-39
9
In this case, wipe it off using lukewarm water
and a soft cloth or chamois.
N00946400052
To prevent spots and corrosion of chrome
parts, wash with water, dry thoroughly, and
apply a nonabrasive automotive wax. If the
chrome is severely damaged or pitted, use a
commercially available chrome polish.
N00946500183
1. Remove dirt using a wet sponge.
2. Use a mild detergent on any dirt that can-
not be removed easily with water.
Rinse off the detergent after washing the
wheel.
3. Dry the wheel thoroughly using a chamois
leather or a soft cloth.
N00946600054
The window glass can usually be cleaned
using only a sponge and water. Glass cleaner
can be used to remove wax, oil, grease, dead
insects, etc. After washing the glass, wipe it
dry with a clean, dry, soft cloth.
N00946700068
Use a soft cloth and glass cleaner to remove
grease, dead insects, etc., from the wiper
blades.
Replace the wiper blades when they no longer
clean the windshield and rear window prop-
erly.
N00947000071
Never spray or splash water on the electrical
accessories in the engine compartment. This
puts the engine at risk of being damaged.
Do not bring the circumferential parts, the
plastic parts and so on into contact with sulfu-
ric acid (battery electrolyte) which may
crack, stain or discolor them.
If they are in contact, wipe off with soft cloth,
chamois or the like and an aqueous solution
of neutral detergent then immediately rinse
the affected parts with plenty of water.
CAUTION
Do not use a scrubbing brush or other rough
scrubber as these may damage the plastic
surface.
Do not use wax containing compounds (pol-
ishing powder) which may damage the plas-
tic surface.
Do not let plastic parts get soiled with gaso-
line, oil, brake fluids, engine oils, greases,
paint thinner, and sulfuric acid (battery elec-
trolyte), as such substances will cause stains,
cracks, or discoloration.
If any of these get on a plastic part, wipe
them up with a soft cloth or chamois and a
mild solution of soap and water. Then rinse
them immediately with water.
Chrome parts
Aluminum wheels (if so equipped)
CAUTION
Do not use a brush or other hard implement
on the wheels.
Do not use any cleaner that contains an abra-
sive substance or is acidic or alkaline. Doing
so could cause the coating on the wheels to
peel or become discolored or stained.
Do not directly apply hot water using a steam
cleaner or by any other means.
Contact with seawater or road salt used for
de-icing can cause corrosion. Rinse off such
substances as soon as possible.
Window glass
Wiper blades
Engine compartment
10
Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects
Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) ....................10-2
Reporting Safety Defects ...............................................................10-2
Important facts to know in case of an accident ..............................10-4
Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.)
10-2 Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects
10
N01047100171
This information is provided in compliance
with the requirements of the National High-
way Traffic Safety Administration, Depart-
ment of Transportation. It provides the
purchasers and/or prospective purchasers
with information on reporting safety defects.
DOT quality grades - All passenger vehicle
tires must conform to Federal Safety Require-
ments in addition to these grades. The spe-
cific grade rating in each grade category is
shown on the side wall of the tires on your
vehicle.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-half
(1
1
/
2
) times as well on the government course
as a tire graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart signifi-
cantly from the norm due to variations in
driving habits, service practices and differ-
ences in road characteristics and climate.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent
the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead
to sudden tire failure. The grade C corre-
sponds to a level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Fed-
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.
N01047201661
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addi-
tion to notifying Mitsubishi Motors
Corporation.
Consumer information (For
vehicles sold in U.S.A.)
Uniform tire quality grading
Treadwear
Traction AA, A, B, C
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Temperature A, B, C
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire
failure.
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects
Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10-3
10
If NHTSA receives similar com-
plaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or
Mitsubishi Motors Corporation.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-
888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-
9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
You can also obtain other informa-
tion about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
To contact Mitsubishi Motors North
America, Inc. call 1-888-648-7820 or
write to:
If you live in Canada, and you
believe that your vehicle has a safety
defect, you should immediately
notify Transport Canada.
To contact Transport Canada’s
Defect Investigations and Recalls
Division, you may call the toll-free
number: 1-800-333-0510.
You may write to:
You can also obtain additional infor-
mation concerning motor vehicle
safety from
http://www.tc.gc.ca/recalls (English)
or
http://www.tc.gc.ca/rappels (French).
In addition to notifying Mitsubishi
Motor Sales of Canada, Inc.
To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of
Canada, Inc. call 1-888-576-4878 or
write to:
NHTSA Headquarters
1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE
West Building
Washington, DC 20590
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
Mitsubishi Motors North Amer-
ica, Inc.
Customer Relations Department
P.O. Box 689040
Franklin, TN 37068
For vehicles sold in Canada
Transport Canada-ASFAD
330 Sparks Street
Ottawa, ON
K1A 0N5
Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Can-
ada, Inc.
Customer Relations Department
P.O. Box 41009
4141 Dixie Road
Mississauga, ON L4W 5C9
Important facts to know in case of an accident
10-4 Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects
10
To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of
Caribbean, Inc.
call 1-787-251-8715 or write to:
To contact Triple J Enterprises Inc.
call (671)649-3673 or write to:
To contact Triple J Motors
call (670)234-7133 or write to:
To contact Pacific Marketing Inc.
call 684(699)9140 or write to:
N01047301268
We hope you will never be involved in an
accident, but there is always that potential
danger. So, please be sure to buckle up and
drive safely.
Remain calm.
Check for injuries. Report all injuries to
the police, and, if necessary, call for an
ambulance.
Record all the details of the accident. This
will provide you with accurate records of
the accident for discussions with your
insurance company and other persons
who may be acting on your behalf.
Understand your repair estimate before
approving repairs.
Choosing the repair shop and the brands
of parts that they use on your vehicle is
your decision.
Ask for genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts.
Many times, to save money, your insur-
ance company will recommend imitation
parts that do not meet the original specifi-
cations of fit, finish, corrosion resistance
or workmanship.
For vehicles sold in Puerto Rico
Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Carib-
bean, Inc.
Customer Service Department
P.O. Box 192216
SAN JUAN PR 00919-2216
For vehicles sold in Guam
Triple J Enterprises, Inc.
P.O. Box 6066
TAMUNING
GUAM 96931
For vehicles sold in Saipan
Triple J Motors
P.O. Box 500487
SAIPAN, MP96950-0487
For vehicles sold in American
Samoa
Pacific Marketing, Inc.
P.O. Box 698
PAGO PAGO,
AMERICAN SAMOA AS, 96799
Important facts to know in
case of an accident
In the event of an accident
Key information to discuss with
your insurance company
Important facts to know in case of an accident
Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10-5
10
The strength and integrity built into your
vehicle is the result of a specific design
referred to as “Energy Management”. Indi-
vidual body parts are designed to act as one
unit in the event of an accident. Shock waves
are absorbed by protective panels or are chan-
neled around the passenger compartment.
This important feature is possible because
high tensile steel is used in the panels and
structural parts, something that cannot be
guaranteed by the manufacturers of imitation
parts. All genuine body panels and support
brackets are designed and constructed as
important protection features in the event of
an accident. By replacing body parts with
imitations, your vehicle may no longer meet
original equipment specifications.
As a consumer requesting repair on your
vehicle, you have consumer rights. Across the
country, State Insurance Commissioners have
begun considering rules on the use of non-
OEM parts. This could mean that repair shops
will have to disclose to the consumer, when
they intend to use non-OEM parts. Since reg-
ulations are not consistent on this point,
remember you have a choice. So, if you want
genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts, you may
have to specifically request them. Make cer-
tain your insurance company understands
imitations are not to be used in the repair of
your vehicle. You deserve the best genuine
Mitsubishi Motors parts.
Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts are built
with the high quality and durability standards
you expect. Genuine Mitsubishi Motors
replacements parts are your guarantee that
your vehicle will have all the technological
advantages and maintain the style and protec-
tion of a brand new Mitsubishi Motors vehi-
cle. Remember to ask for genuine Mitsubishi
Motors parts.
Mitsubishi Motors built-in pro-
tection
Consumer rights (For vehicles
sold in U.S.A.)
Genuine Mitsubishi Motors
parts
11
Specifications
Vehicle labeling .............................................................................11-2
Vehicle dimensions ........................................................................11-3
Vehicle weights ..............................................................................11-3
Engine specifications .....................................................................11-4
Battery ............................................................................................11-5
Tires and wheels ............................................................................11-5
Capacity .........................................................................................11-5
Vehicle labeling
11-2 Specifications
11
N01147401941
Keep a record of the chassis number and
vehicle identification number. Such informa-
tion will assist police if your vehicle is stolen.
The vehicle emission control information
label is affixed on the underside of the engine
hood.
The vehicle identification number is stamped
on the plate riveted to the left front corner of
the vehicle body. It is visible from outside of
the vehicle through the windshield.
The air conditioning label is affixed on the
inside panel of the engine hood.
The vehicle information code plate is located
on the front passenger door sill.
The engine model and serial number are
stamped on the engine cylinder block as
shown in the illustration.
N01148100603
The tire and loading information
placard is located on the driver’s
door sill.
Vehicle labeling
1 - Vehicle emission control
information label
2 - Vehicle identification num-
ber plate
3 - Air conditioning label
4 - Vehicle information code
plate
Engine model/serial number
*- Front of the vehicle
Tire and loading information
placard
Vehicle dimensions
Specifications 11-3
11
N01148200167
The certification label is located on the
driver’s door sill.
N01147501694
N01147600858
Certification label
Vehicle dimensions
Overall length 171.9 in (4,365 mm)
Overall width 71.3 in (1,810 mm)
Overall height 64.8 in (1,645 mm)
Wheel base 105.1 in (2,670 mm)
Vehicle weights
Gross vehicle weight rating 4,343 lb (1,970 kg)
Gross axle weight rating
Front 2,271 lb (1,030 kg)
Rear 2,205 lb (1,000 kg)
Vehicle capacity weight 827 lb (375 kg)
Engine specifications
11-4 Specifications
11
GVWR: maximum total weight (load) limit specified for the vehicle
GAWR: maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle
Seating capacity: the maximum number of occupants
N01147701638
Maximum roof load 176 lb (80 kg)
Seating capacity 5 persons
NOTE
Roof load is important because it affects the vehicle capacity weight. Refer to “Loading cargo on the roof” on
page 6-11.
Engine specifications
Item 2.0 liter models 2.4 liter models
Engine model 4B11 4B12
Engine displacement 121.9 CID (1,998 cm³) 144.0 CID (2,360 cm³)
No. of cylinders and cylinder arrangement 4 in line
Bore 3.39 in (86.0 mm) 3.46 in (88.0 mm)
Stroke 3.39 in (86.0 mm) 3.82 in (97.0 mm)
Compression ratio 10.0 10.5
Thermostat valve opening temperature 189 °F (87 °C)
Spark plugs NGK DIFR6C11 DIFR5C11
Spark plug gap .040 to .043 in (1.0 to 1.1 mm)
Firing order 1-3-4-2
Battery
Specifications 11-5
11
N01147801336
Battery is a 12 volt type.
N01147901904
PCD: Pitch Circle Diameter (installa-
tion holes)
N01148002387
Battery
75D23L
Tires and wheels
Tire
P215/
70R16
99H
P225/
55R18
97H
Wheel
Size
16 x
6 1/2J
18 x 7J
PCD 4.5 in (114.3 mm)
Offset
(Inset)
1.81 in
(46 mm)
1.50 in
(38 mm)
NOTE
Contact an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer for
details on the combination used
on your vehicle.
These tires satisfy vehicle load-
ing conditions described in this
owner’s manual.
Capacity
Item Capacity Lubricants
Fuel
(approximate)
Front-wheel drive vehicles 16.6 gal (63 L)
Refer to “Fuel selection” on page 3-2.
All-wheel drive vehicles 15.8 gal (60 L)
Engine oil
Oil pan 4.5 qt (4.3 L) Engine oils displaying the ILSAC certification mark (“star-
burst” symbol) on the container.
If these oils are not available, API classification SN or higher
can be used.
Oil filter .32 qt (0.3 L)
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) 7.3 qt (6.9 L)
Refer to “Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid” on
page 9-9.
Capacity
11-6 Specifications
11
*: Similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and non-borate coolant with long life hybrid organic acid tech-
nology
Transfer oil .53 qt (0.5 L)
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Hypoid Gear Oil API GL-5
SAE 80
Differential Rear axle .42 qt (0.4 L)
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Hypoid Gear Oil API GL-5
SAE 80
Brake As required Conforming to Brake fluid DOT3 or DOT4
Hood lock release mechanism and safety catch As required Multipurpose type grease NLGI Grade 2
Engine coolant
{Includes .69 qt (0.65 L) in reserve tank}
7.9 qt (7.5 L)
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long Life Coolant Premium
or equivalent*
Washer fluid 4.5 qt (4.3 L) —
Refrigerant (air conditioning)
Refer to the “Air con-
ditioning label” on
page 11-2.
HFO-1234yf
Item Capacity Lubricants
Alphabetical index
12-1
12
Numerics
4-wheel drive operation ....................... 5-62
A
Accessory (installation) ......................... 3-6
Active stability control (ASC).............. 5-71
Air bag .............................................. 4-29
Air cleaner filter ................................... 9-8
Air conditioning
Automatic air conditioning ......... 7-4, 7-9
Important air conditioning operating tips..
7-15
Air purifier......................................... 7-15
Aluminum wheels............................... 9-39
Anti-lock braking system..................... 5-68
Arm rest............................................... 4-7
Assist grip........................................ 5-180
Automatic air conditioning ............. 7-4, 7-9
Automatic High Beam (AHB)............ 5-150
Automatic transaxle
Fluid.............................................. 11-5
B
Back-up light
Bulb location and capacity............... 9-30
Replacement .................................. 9-34
Ball joint, steering linkage seals and drive
shaft boots ....................................... 9-24
Battery .............................................. 9-10
Charging system warning light ....... 5-145
Disconnection and connection ......... 9-12
During cold weather ....................... 9-12
Specification.................................. 11-5
Blind Spot Warning (BSW)................. 5-86
Bottle holder ..................................... 5-179
Brake
Fluid ..................................... 9-10, 11-5
Brake assist system............................. 5-68
Braking ............................................... 6-5
Anti-lock braking system ................ 5-68
Hose ............................................. 9-23
Pad wear alarm .............................. 5-66
Parking brake................................. 5-44
Pedal............................................. 5-65
Pedal free play ............................... 9-21
Power brakes ................................. 5-66
Service brake ................................. 5-65
Warning lights .............................. 5-144
Break-in recommendations.................... 5-3
Bulb location and capacity .................. 9-30
C
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements..................................... 3-6
Capacity ............................................ 11-5
Cargo area cover............................... 5-179
Cargo loads ........................................ 6-10
Cargo room light
Bulb location and capacity............... 9-31
Catalytic converter................................ 9-2
Cautions on the handling of all-wheel drive
vehicles............................................ 5-65
Center console down light
Bulb location and capacity............... 9-31
Certification label ............................... 11-3
Charging system warning light........... 5-145
Child restraint systems ........................ 4-18
Child safety locks for rear door ............ 5-35
Cleaning
Inside of your vehicle...................... 9-35
Outside of your vehicle ................... 9-37
Coat hook......................................... 5-180
Consumer information......................... 10-2
Continuously variable transmission (CVT)...
5-53
Fluid....................................... 9-9, 11-5
Selector lever operation................... 5-53
Selector lever positions.................... 5-56
Sports mode ................................... 5-58
Coolant (engine) .......................... 9-7, 11-5
Cruise control..................................... 5-74
Cup holder ....................................... 5-178
Alphabetical index
12-2
12
D
Daytime running lights
Bulb location and capacity............... 9-30
Replacement .................................. 9-32
Defogger (rear window) .................... 5-162
Defrosting or defogging (windshield, door
windows).................................. 7-8, 7-14
Dimensions ........................................ 11-3
Dimmer (high/low beam change) ....... 5-150
Disc brake pads .................................. 9-23
Dome light
Bulb location and capacity............... 9-31
Doors
Lock.............................................. 5-32
Power door locks............................ 5-34
Driving during cold weather .................. 6-5
Driving precaution................................ 6-2
Driving, alcohol and drugs..................... 6-2
E
Electric rear window defogger switch . 5-162
Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting
system)..................................... 5-4, 5-25
Electronically controlled 4WD system.. 5-60
Emission-control system maintenance .. 9-22
Engine
Compartment................................... 9-5
Coolant ................................... 9-7, 11-5
Hood............................................... 9-3
Oil and oil filter ....................... 9-5, 11-5
Overheating..................................... 8-4
Serial number ................................. 11-2
Specification................................... 11-4
Engine coolant temperature display..... 5-113
Engine hood ........................................ 9-3
Engine switch ..................................... 5-18
Event data recorder (EDR) .................... 3-7
Exhaust system ................................... 9-24
F
Floor console box.............................. 5-178
Floor mat............................................. 6-3
Fluid
Brake fluid ..................................... 11-5
Continuously variable transmission (CVT)
fluid...................................... 9-9, 11-5
Engine coolant......................... 9-7, 11-5
Washer fluid............................ 9-9, 11-5
Fluid capacities and lubricants.............. 11-5
Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM).
5-78
Free-hand advanced security transmitter
(F.A.S.T.-key) .................................. 5-13
Front fog lights
Bulb location and capacity ............... 9-30
Indicators..................................... 5-143
Replacement .................................. 9-33
Switch ......................................... 5-157
Front seat adjustment ............................ 4-3
Front side-marker lights
Bulb location and capacity............... 9-30
Replacement .................................. 9-32
Front turn signal light
Bulb location and capacity............... 9-30
Replacement .................................. 9-32
Fuel
Filling the fuel tank........................... 3-3
Fuel economy................................... 6-2
Fuel hoses...................................... 9-23
Fuel selection ................................... 3-2
Tank capacity................................. 11-5
Fuses ................................................. 9-25
Fusible links....................................... 9-25
G
General maintenance
Maintenance................................... 9-23
General vehicle data............................ 11-3
Genuine parts ....................................... 3-6
Glove compartment........................... 5-177
Glove compartment light
Bulb location and capacity............... 9-31
Alphabetical index
12-3
12
H
Hazard warning flasher switch ........... 5-156
Hazard warning lights ....................... 5-143
Head restraints...................................... 4-7
Headlight leveling switch .................. 5-155
Headlights
Bulb location and capacity............... 9-30
Dimmer ....................................... 5-150
Headlight flasher .......................... 5-150
Replacement .................................. 9-31
Switch ......................................... 5-146
Heated steering wheel switch ............. 5-163
High beam indicator.......................... 5-143
High-mount stop light
Bulb location and capacity............... 9-30
Replacement .................................. 9-35
Hill start assist .................................... 5-66
HomeLink® Wireless Control System 5-167
Hood lock release mechanism and safety
catch................................................ 9-24
Horn switch...................................... 5-164
I
If the vehicle breaks down ..................... 8-2
Ignition switch.................................... 5-50
Important facts to know in case of an accident
10-4
Indicators ......................................... 5-143
Information screen display ................. 5-105
Inside rearview mirror......................... 5-45
Inspection and maintenance following rough
road operation .................................. 5-64
Instrument cluster.............................. 5-107
Interior lights .................................... 5-172
J
Jack
Storage............................................ 8-5
Jump-starting the engine ....................... 8-2
K
Key slot............................................. 5-24
Keyless entry system .................... 5-7, 5-27
Keys ................................................... 5-3
L
Labeling ............................................ 11-2
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) ......... 5-96
License plate light
Bulb location and capacity .............. 9-30
Replacement .................................. 9-34
Liftgate ............................................. 5-36
Inside liftgate release ...................... 5-37
Link System...................................... 5-164
Loading information.............................. 6-6
Lubricants .......................................... 11-5
Luggage hooks ................................. 5-181
M
Malfunction indicator light ................ 5-144
Modification of your vehicle.................. 3-5
Multi-information display.................. 5-105
O
Octane rating........................................ 3-2
Oil
Engine oil ............................... 9-5, 11-5
Rear axle oil ............................ 9-9, 11-5
Transfer oil ............................. 9-9, 11-5
Operation mode .................................. 5-19
Operation under adverse driving conditions..
8-13
Outside rearview mirrors ..................... 5-47
Overheating.......................................... 8-4
P
Parking ................................................ 6-6
Parking brake lever stroke ............... 9-21
Parking brake ..................................... 5-44
Parking lights
Bulb location and capacity............... 9-30
Alphabetical index
12-4
12
Replacement .................................. 9-32
Polishing............................................ 9-38
Power brakes...................................... 5-66
Power outlet..................................... 5-166
Power windows .................................. 5-40
Puncture (Tire changing) ....................... 8-6
R
Radio
General information about your radio 7-16
Reading lights
Bulb location and capacity............... 9-31
Rear axle oil................................ 9-9, 11-5
Rear combination lights
Bulb location and capacity............... 9-30
Replacement .................................. 9-33
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) ......... 5-92
Rear side-marker lights
Bulb location and capacity............... 9-30
Replacement .................................. 9-33
Rear turn signal light
Bulb location and capacity............... 9-30
Replacement .................................. 9-33
Rear-view camera............................. 5-103
Rearview mirror
Inside rearview mirror..................... 5-45
Outside rearview mirrors................. 5-47
Replacement of light bulbs .................. 9-29
Replacing tires and wheels ................... 9-19
Reporting Safety Defects ..................... 10-2
S
Safe driving techniques......................... 6-4
Seat belt ............................................. 4-11
Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor . 4-16
Child restraint systems..................... 4-18
Front passenger seat belt warning light.....
4-16
Maintenance and inspection ............. 4-28
Seat belt extender............................ 4-17
Seat belt force limiter ...................... 4-18
Seat belt pre-tensioners.................... 4-17
Seat belt use during pregnancy ......... 4-17
Seats ................................................... 4-2
Arm rest.......................................... 4-7
Front seats....................................... 4-3
Head restraints................................. 4-7
Heated seat...................................... 4-6
Seats and restraint systems................ 4-2
Service brake ...................................... 5-65
Service precautions .............................. 9-2
Side turn signal light
Bulb location and capacity ............... 9-30
Replacement.......................... 9-32, 9-33
Snow tires .......................................... 9-21
Spark plugs......................................... 9-22
Starting the engine............................... 5-51
Steering
Steering wheel height and reach adjustment
5-45
Stop lights
Bulb location and capacity............... 9-30
Replacement .................................. 9-33
Storage spaces.................................. 5-176
Sun visors ........................................ 5-165
Sunshade ........................................... 5-43
Supplemental Restraint System ............ 4-29
How the Supplemental Restraint System
works .......................................... 4-31
Maintenance service ....................... 4-43
T
Tail and stop light
Bulb location and capacity............... 9-30
Replacement .................................. 9-33
Tail light
Bulb location and capacity............... 9-30
Replacement .................................. 9-34
Tank capacity..................................... 11-5
Theft-alarm system ............................. 5-38
Ticket holder.................................... 5-166
Tire ................................................... 9-13
Inflation pressure............................ 9-17
Maintenance................................... 9-19
Quality grading .............................. 10-2
Replacing tires and wheels .............. 9-19
Alphabetical index
12-5
12
Rotation......................................... 9-19
Size (tire and wheel) ....................... 11-5
Snow tires ...................................... 9-21
To change a tire ................................ 8-6
Tread wear indicator ....................... 9-19
Tire pressure monitoring system........... 5-99
Tires
Tire and loading information placard 11-2
Tire chains ..................................... 9-21
Tools ................................................... 8-5
Storage ............................................ 8-5
Towing .............................................. 8-12
Trailer towing..................................... 6-12
Transfer oil ................................. 9-9, 11-5
Turn signal light
Indicators..................................... 5-143
Lever........................................... 5-156
U
USB input terminal ........................... 5-164
How to connect an iPod................. 5-165
USB input terminal device
How to connect a USB memory ..... 5-164
V
Vanity mirror ................................... 5-165
Vanity mirror lights
Bulb location and capacity............... 9-31
Vehicle care precautions ..................... 9-35
Vehicle dimensions ............................ 11-3
Vehicle labeling ................................. 11-2
Vehicle preparation before driving ......... 6-4
Vehicle weights.................................. 11-3
Vents .................................................. 7-2
W
Warning lights .................................. 5-144
Washer
Fluid ....................................... 9-9, 11-5
Rear window washer ..................... 5-161
Switch.......................................... 5-161
Washing ............................................ 9-37
Waxing ............................................. 9-38
Weights............................................. 11-3
Wheel
Covers........................................... 8-11
Specification.................................. 11-5
Wiper
Rear window wiper ....................... 5-161
Switch.......................................... 5-157
Wiper blades.................................. 9-22
How to calculate your gasoline mileage
NOTE
Name of Owner Date of Purchase
Address of Owner Model of Vehicle
Name and Address of Dealer Vehicle Identification Number
Maintenance record
Service Performed Date
Kilometers
Miles
Inspection and Maintenance Item
